Series

Patient Monitor

Ver. 07

* Before using the product,

please read this manual thoroughly.
* Store this manual where it can be
always referred to.
 This manual is for the DS-8400 System Version 07.

Emergo Europe
Westervoortsedijk 60, 6827 AT Arnhem, The Netherlands
UK Responsible Person
Fukuda Denshi UK Ltd.
Fukuda Denshi Co., Ltd.
Unit 6 Chambers Way Thorncliffe Park
3-39-4 Hongo, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo 113-8483 Japan
Estate, Chapeltown, Sheffield, S35 2PH

CAUTION
● Only physician or persons instructed by physicians are allowed to use the device.
● The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice due
to improvement in the device.

© 2017 Fukuda Denshi Co., Ltd.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form without the prior written
permission of Fukuda Denshi Co., Ltd.
If this manual has pages missing or out of order, contact Fukuda Denshi for replacement.
 Contents

Contents

Preface
Introduction..............................................................................................................................i
Important Notice ......................................................................................................................i
For Safe Operation of the Device.........................................................................................................i
Intended Use of this Device .................................................................................................................i
Copyright ............................................................................................................................................. ii
Maintenance, Repair, Replacement .................................................................................................... ii
Contact ................................................................................................................................................ ii
About This Manual ................................................................................................................ iii
Expression Used in This Manual........................................................................................................ iii
Composition of This Manual............................................................................................................... iv

Safety
About the Safety Precautions ..................................................................................................i
The Meaning of Each Safety Precaution..............................................................................................i
Warning Labels Attached to the Unit....................................................................................................i
Graphic Symbols .................................................................................................................................ii
Precautions for Safe Operation of Medical Device................................................................iv
Precautions about the Maintenance .......................................................................................v
Precautions about the Network System ................................................................................vi
Medical Telemetry .............................................................................................................................. vi
Precautions when Using with Other Device ......................................................................... vii
Pacemaker ........................................................................................................................................ vii
Non-Explosion Proof ......................................................................................................................... vii
Defibrillator ........................................................................................................................................ vii
Electrosurgical Instrument................................................................................................................ viii
MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging)................................................................................................ viii
Precautions about Connections to Peripheral Devices ...................................................................... ix
Precautions for Using the Device ..........................................................................................ix
This System........................................................................................................................................ ix
Wired Network (DS-LANII/ DS-LANIII) .............................................................................................. xx
Wireless Network System ................................................................................................................ xxi
RTC and Data Backup .................................................................................................................... xxii
Precautions about the Ventilator Monitoring....................................................................... xxii
Precautions about the SpO2 Sensor .................................................................................. xxii
Precautions about the Masimo Model ................................................................................ xxii
Precautions about the NIBP Cuff....................................................................................... xxiii
Precautions about Disposing of the Device, Accessories, or Components....................... xxiii
Precautions about Transportation ..................................................................................... xxiii
Monitoring after Power Failure .......................................................................................... xxiii
To Prepare for Emergency Use......................................................................................... xxiii
Electromagnetic Compatibility ........................................................................................... xxiv
Precautions for Safe Operation under Electromagnetic Influence ................................................. xxiv
EMC Guidance ................................................................................................................................ xxv

1
Contents

Chapter 1 General Description of the Device

Composition of the System................................................................................................. 1-1
Features ............................................................................................................................. 1-3
Menu Configurations........................................................................................................... 1-5

Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions

Names of Parts and Their Functions .................................................................................. 2-1
Main Unit: DSC-8400 series ............................................................................................................ 2-1
Display Unit: LC-8018TC/LC-8016TC ............................................................................................. 2-3
Super Unit: HS-8000 Series ............................................................................................................ 2-4
HS Adapter: HSA-80........................................................................................................................ 2-5
HS Adapter for DS-8400: HSA-81 ................................................................................................... 2-6
Transport Monitor: DS-8007 Series ................................................................................................. 2-6
Adapter for DS-8007: DSA-82 ......................................................................................................... 2-8
Multi Module: HM-800...................................................................................................................... 2-9
HM-801 Multi Module..................................................................................................................... 2-10
SpO2 Module (HG-810/HG-820).................................................................................................... 2-11
Multiport Module: HP-800 .............................................................................................................. 2-12
Recorder Unit: HR-800 .................................................................................................................. 2-13
Input Box: IB-8004 ......................................................................................................................... 2-14
CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-810 ................................................................................................................ 2-15
CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-820 ................................................................................................................ 2-16
Gas Unit I/F: HPD-810................................................................................................................... 2-17
Gas Unit I/F: HPD-820................................................................................................................... 2-18
BISx I/F Unit: HBX-800 .................................................................................................................. 2-19
Multigas Unit: MGU-800/810 Series ..............................................................................................2-20

Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen

Examples
Operation Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3-1
Fixed Keys ....................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Touch Key........................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Mouse .............................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Home Display ..................................................................................................................... 3-3
About the Home Display .................................................................................................................. 3-3
Displayed Items ............................................................................................................................... 3-5
Description of the Display .............................................................................................................. 3-16
Messages and Sound .................................................................................................................... 3-17
Window Display ................................................................................................................ 3-20
About the Window Display............................................................................................................. 3-20
Display ........................................................................................................................................... 3-20
Floating Window Screen Display ................................................................................................... 3-22
Minimize Window........................................................................................................................... 3-23

2
 Contents

Transfer Window ........................................................................................................................... 3-24

Operation Restriction..................................................................................................................... 3-25
Procedure to Return the Display ...................................................................................... 3-25
To Enter Characters ......................................................................................................... 3-26
For Easier Use.................................................................................................................. 3-27
User Key........................................................................................................................................ 3-27
Menu Screen ................................................................................................................................. 3-27
To Delete the Unnecessary Keys (Key Mask)............................................................................... 3-28
Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit ............................................ 3-28
External Monitor Display ............................................................................................................... 3-29
Extended Display 1 ....................................................................................................................... 3-29
Extended Display 2 ....................................................................................................................... 3-30

Chapter 4 Preparation
Daily Check ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
To Start Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 4-1
Check Discharge When Start Monitoring a New Patient................................................................. 4-2
Data Transfer Function Using the Super Unit ................................................................................. 4-3
Data Transfer Function Using the Transport Monitor (DS-8007) .................................................... 4-5
To Stop Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 4-11
Clock Setup ...................................................................................................................... 4-12
Installing the Recording Paper ......................................................................................... 4-13

Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge
To Display the "Admit/Discharge" Screen .......................................................................... 5-1
Admit .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Entering the Patient Information...................................................................................................... 5-1
Entering Patient Information from the Magnetic Card ..................................................................... 5-4
Entering Patient Information from the Patient Data Server (When DS-LANIII is used)................... 5-4
Discharge ........................................................................................................................... 5-7
Discharging Procedure.................................................................................................................... 5-7
User Mode .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
To Select the User Mode................................................................................................................. 5-8
Suspend Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 5-9
To Suspend Monitoring ................................................................................................................... 5-9
To Resume Monitoring ..................................................................................................... 5-11

3
Contents

Chapter 6 Alarm Function

Alarm .................................................................................................................................. 6-1
To Set the Arrhythmia Alarm ........................................................................................................... 6-1
SpO2 Second Alarm Setup .............................................................................................................. 6-3
ST Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
List of Alarm Settings....................................................................................................................... 6-5
Detail Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 6-6
Alarm Limit Setup ............................................................................................................... 6-7
To Set the System Alarm (ON or Suspend)..................................................................................... 6-7
To Silence or Suspend the System Alarm Sound............................................................................ 6-8
Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter .......................................................................................... 6-10
About the Alarm Threshold Limit ................................................................................................... 6-11
Alarm Assist Screen ......................................................................................................... 6-13

Chapter 7 Monitoring
To Display the Parameter Setup Screen ............................................................................ 7-1
ECG .................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Before Attaching the Electrodes ...................................................................................................... 7-2
Electrode Placement........................................................................................................................ 7-3
Type of Electrodes and Lead Cable ................................................................................................ 7-5
Connection to the Patient Monitor ................................................................................................... 7-5
ECG Parameter Setup..................................................................................................................... 7-6
Respiration ....................................................................................................................... 7-16
Respiration Monitoring (Impedance Method)................................................................................. 7-16
RESP Parameter Setup................................................................................................................. 7-17
BP ..................................................................................................................................... 7-20
BP Monitoring ................................................................................................................................ 7-21
Zero Balance of All Pressure Lines (User Key) ............................................................................. 7-26
Zero Balance of All Pressure Lines ([BP Zero] Key)...................................................................... 7-27
Zero Balance for Each Pressure Line............................................................................................7-27
BP Parameter Setup...................................................................................................................... 7-28
Non-Invasive Blood Pressure ........................................................................................... 7-35
Lineup of Cuffs............................................................................................................................... 7-35
NIBP Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 7-35
Inflation Mode Setup...................................................................................................................... 7-39
NIBP Auto Mode Setup.................................................................................................................. 7-39
Oscillation Graph Display .............................................................................................................. 7-42
Dyna Alert Function Status ............................................................................................................ 7-43
NIBP Parameter Setup .................................................................................................................. 7-45
Pulse Oximetry ................................................................................................................. 7-50
SpO2 Monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 7-50
SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC Measurement (Masimo)................................................................... 7-58
Precautions about the Masimo Sensors and Cables..................................................................... 7-58
SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)............................................................................................... 7-59
RR_SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic) ...................................................................................... 7-62
SpO2 Parameter Setup (Masimo).................................................................................................. 7-63
Temperature ..................................................................................................................... 7-67

4
 Contents

TEMP Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 7-67

TEMP Parameter Setup ................................................................................................................ 7-69
Cardiac Output and Blood Temperature........................................................................... 7-71
Connecting the Super Unit ............................................................................................................ 7-71
Cardiac Output Measurement Algorithm ....................................................................................... 7-72
Blood Temperature Alarm Setup................................................................................................... 7-73
CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method) ........................................................................ 7-74
Patient Application and Display..................................................................................................... 7-74
CO2 Parameter Setup ................................................................................................................... 7-77
CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)......................................................................... 7-81
Patient Application and Display..................................................................................................... 7-82
CO2 Parameter Setup ................................................................................................................... 7-84
Multigas Unit/SPIRO......................................................................................................... 7-86
Connecting to the Respiration Circuit............................................................................................ 7-88
CO2 Measurement Unit Setup....................................................................................................... 7-90
GAS Display during Undetected Breath ........................................................................................ 7-91
Multigas Unit Data Setup (Multigas Concentration/Spirometry) .................................................... 7-92
BIS Data (BISx) ................................................................................................................ 7-98
Preparation for Monitoring............................................................................................................. 7-99
BIS Setup .................................................................................................................................... 7-100
BIS Data (A-2000/A-3000).............................................................................................. 7-102
Ventilator ........................................................................................................................ 7-102
AWP/AWF/AWV Scale Setup...................................................................................................... 7-103
P-V/F-V Loop Display.................................................................................................................. 7-104
FLOW-i Data................................................................................................................... 7-105
CO2 Measurement Unit Setup..................................................................................................... 7-105
FLOW-i Setup.............................................................................................................................. 7-106
SvO2/CCO Data ............................................................................................................. 7-111
STAT Mode / Index Display......................................................................................................... 7-111
INVOS Data.................................................................................................................... 7-112
Channel Number Setup for INVOS Data..................................................................................... 7-112
Stopwatch....................................................................................................................... 7-113
Label Setup ................................................................................................................................. 7-113
Start/Stop .................................................................................................................................... 7-113
Multiparameter Connector Setup for BP, TEMP, CO Measurement .............................. 7-114
Multiparameter Connector Setup.................................................................................... 7-116

Chapter 8 Review Function

Common Operation ............................................................................................................ 8-1
Arrhythmia Analysis............................................................................................................ 8-2
Arrhythmia Definition ....................................................................................................................... 8-2
Arrhythmia Alarm Setup .................................................................................................................. 8-4
Arrhythmia Learn............................................................................................................................. 8-5
Graphic Trend .................................................................................................................... 8-6
Graphic Trend Setup ....................................................................................................................... 8-6
Description for Each Parameter ...................................................................................................... 8-9
Short Trend ...................................................................................................................... 8-10

5
Contents

Tabular Trend ................................................................................................................... 8-13

To Display/Print the Tabular Trend................................................................................................ 8-13
The Description of the Display....................................................................................................... 8-14
Parameter Setup for Tabular Trend............................................................................................... 8-15
Recall................................................................................................................................ 8-16
To Display the Recall Waveform ................................................................................................... 8-16
To Display/Print the Enlarged Recall Waveform............................................................................ 8-18
Recall Setup .................................................................................................................................. 8-19
OCRG ............................................................................................................................... 8-20
Alarm History .................................................................................................................... 8-22
Alarm History Setup....................................................................................................................... 8-22
Description for Each Item .............................................................................................................. 8-23
Zoom Wave ...................................................................................................................... 8-24
ST Measurement .............................................................................................................. 8-25
To Display/Print the ST Measurement........................................................................................... 8-25
Reference Waveform Setup .......................................................................................................... 8-26
ST Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................................. 8-27
12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)............................................................................... 8-28
12-Lead ECG Display .................................................................................................................... 8-29
12-Lead Analysis Setup................................................................................................................. 8-30
12-Lead ECG Analysis .................................................................................................................. 8-31
12-Lead Analyzed Result Output Example.................................................................................... 8-33
Full Disclosure Waveform (Optional Function) ................................................................. 8-36
To Format the CF Card.................................................................................................................. 8-36
Waveform Setup ............................................................................................................................ 8-36
Description of the Full Disclosure Waveform Display .................................................................... 8-37
To Search by Time ........................................................................................................................ 8-38
Hemodynamics ................................................................................................................. 8-38
Calculation Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-38
To Display/Print the Hemodynamics Data ..................................................................................... 8-39
New Input of Hemodynamics Calculation ...................................................................................... 8-40
To Edit the Hemodynamics Input Data .......................................................................................... 8-41
Lung Function ................................................................................................................... 8-42
Calculation Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-42
To Display/Print the Lung Function Data ....................................................................................... 8-42
New Input of Lung Function Calculation ........................................................................................ 8-43
To Edit the Lung Function Input Data ............................................................................................ 8-44
Cardiac Output (CO)......................................................................................................... 8-45
To Display the CO Measurement Screen ...................................................................................... 8-45
Cardiac Output Setup .................................................................................................................... 8-46
CO Measurement .......................................................................................................................... 8-48
To Edit the CO Measurement Result............................................................................................. 8-50
Drug Calculation ............................................................................................................... 8-51
Other Bed Display............................................................................................................. 8-54
Other Bed Display/Alarm ............................................................................................................... 8-54

Chapter 9 Printing
Printing Setup ..................................................................................................................... 9-1

6
 Contents

Manual Printing (Basic) ................................................................................................................... 9-1

Manual Printing (12-Lead)............................................................................................................... 9-4
Manual Printing (Other Setup)......................................................................................................... 9-6
Automatic Printing (Alarm Printing) ................................................................................................. 9-7
Automatic Printing (Periodic Printing).............................................................................................. 9-8
Common Setup for Printing ............................................................................................................. 9-9
Freeze Printing .............................................................................................................................. 9-10
12-lead Waveform Printing............................................................................................................ 9-11

Chapter 10 System Configuration

Display Configuration ....................................................................................................... 10-1
Numeric Data Selection................................................................................................................. 10-2
To Configure the Display............................................................................................................... 10-4
Waveform Selection .................................................................................................................... 10-14
User Key Selection...................................................................................................................... 10-15
Changing the Display Layout from the Home Display................................................................. 10-18
Tone/Volume .................................................................................................................. 10-19
Color ............................................................................................................................... 10-20
Brightness ...................................................................................................................... 10-22
Night Mode ..................................................................................................................... 10-22
Night Mode .................................................................................................................................. 10-23

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Message List .................................................................................................................... 11-1
Vital Alarm Message ..................................................................................................................... 11-1
Vital Alarm Message (DS-LAN Standard Setup)........................................................................... 11-4
Device Status Alarm Message ...................................................................................................... 11-7
Numeric Data Box Message........................................................................................................ 11-13
Ventilator Alarm Message ........................................................................................................... 11-19
Ventilator Alarm Factor................................................................................................................ 11-19
Cardiac Output Message............................................................................................................. 11-20
Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................. 11-21
ECG............................................................................................................................................. 11-21
Respiration .................................................................................................................................. 11-26
Invasive Blood Pressure.............................................................................................................. 11-27
SpO2 Measurement (HS-8312N, DS-8007N, HG-820) ............................................................... 11-29
SpO2 Measurement (HS-8312M, DS-8007M, HG-810) .............................................................. 11-32
Non-Invasive Blood Pressure...................................................................................................... 11-35
Temperature................................................................................................................................ 11-40
Cardiac Output (CO) ................................................................................................................... 11-41
CO2 Measurement (HCP-810/HCP-820) ................................................................................... 11-44
CO2 Measurement (HPD-810/HPD-820) ................................................................................... 11-45
Recorder Unit (HR-800) .............................................................................................................. 11-46
Network Printer............................................................................................................................ 11-47
Wired Network (DS-LANII/ DS-LANIII) ........................................................................................ 11-48

7
Contents

Telemeter (HLX-801) ................................................................................................................... 11-50

Remote Control............................................................................................................................ 11-51
General ........................................................................................................................................ 11-51
Super Unit.................................................................................................................................... 11-55
Data Transfer Function ................................................................................................................ 11-56
IB-8004 Input Box ........................................................................................................................ 11-58
Expansion Module ....................................................................................................................... 11-60
Extended Display Unit ................................................................................................................. 11-61
Ventilator...................................................................................................................................... 11-62
Multigas Unit ................................................................................................................................ 11-63
SvO2/CCO Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 11-65
BIS Monitor (A-2000/A-3000) ...................................................................................................... 11-67
BIS (When HBX-800 is used) ...................................................................................................... 11-67
AEP Monitor................................................................................................................................. 11-71
INVOS.......................................................................................................................................... 11-72
FLOW-i ........................................................................................................................................ 11-72
Anesthesia Delivery System (GE) ............................................................................................... 11-72
Anesthesia Delivery System (Draeger)........................................................................................ 11-73
PC Communication...................................................................................................................... 11-74
TCM4/TCM5 FLEX ...................................................................................................................... 11-74
Magnetic Card Reader/Barcode Reader ..................................................................................... 11-75
External Media............................................................................................................................. 11-75

Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value

Patient Admit / Discharge ................................................................................................. 12-1
Alarm ................................................................................................................................ 12-1
Parameter ......................................................................................................................... 12-6
Data Review ................................................................................................................... 12-13
Basic Setup .................................................................................................................... 12-18

Chapter 13 System Components

Medical Device ................................................................................................................. 13-1
Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 13-1
Accessory ...................................................................................................................................... 13-1
ECG Accessory ............................................................................................................................. 13-4
Blood Pressure Accessory............................................................................................................. 13-5
Temperature Accessory................................................................................................................. 13-5
CO Accessory................................................................................................................................ 13-5
NIBP Accessory............................................................................................................................. 13-5
The Other Medical Devices .............................................................................................. 13-6
DS-8007 System............................................................................................................................ 13-6
Central Monitor / Central Telemetry Receiver ............................................................................... 13-6
ECG Sensors................................................................................................................................. 13-7
NIBP Cuffs ..................................................................................................................................... 13-7
SpO2 Sensors for Nellcor Manufacturer: Medtronic ..................................................................... 13-8

8
 Contents

SpO2 Sensors for Masimo Manufacturer: Masimo Corporation ................................................... 13-8

CO2 Sensors for HCP-810 HCP-820 Manufacturer: Medtronic ................................................. 13-10
CO2 Sensors for HPD-810 HPD-820 Manufacturer: Philips Respironics................................... 13-10
BIS Sensors for HBX-800 Manufacturer: Medtronic.................................................................... 13-11
AG Sensors for MGU-800/MGU-810 Manufacturer: Mindray.................................................... 13-11
The Other Products ........................................................................................................ 13-12

Chapter 14 Specification
Specification ..................................................................................................................... 14-1
Main Unit: DSC-8400 Series ......................................................................................................... 14-1
Transport Monitor: DS-8007 and DSA-82 ..................................................................................... 14-2
Display Unit: LC-8018TC/LC-8016TC ........................................................................................... 14-3
Super Unit: HS-8312N/8312M and HSA-80/HSA-81 .................................................................... 14-4
Expansion Unit: MGU-800/810 Series and HR-800 ...................................................................... 14-5
Expansion Module: HM-800/801, HP-800, HG-810/820 ............................................................... 14-6
Gas Unit I/F: HPD-810 and CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-810.................................................................... 14-7
Gas Unit I/F: HPD-820 and CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-820.................................................................... 14-8
Input Box: IB-8004......................................................................................................................... 14-9
BISx I/F Unit: HBX-800................................................................................................................ 14-10
Performance ................................................................................................................... 14-11
Measurement Unit for Each Parameter .......................................................................... 14-21
Alarm Limit Range for Each Parameter.......................................................................... 14-25
About the SpO2 Clinical Test.......................................................................................... 14-27

9
Contents

10
Preface Introduction

Preface
Introduction

Thank you for purchasing this product. Read the "Safety Precautions" thoroughly before use to ensure correct and
safe use of the product.

Before using or installing this product, read this manual thoroughly.

Important Notice

For Safe Operation of the Device

(1) Before using this device, read this operation manual.

(2) Fukuda Denshi cannot predict all the dangers which may be caused by misusage of this product or
environmental condition.

(3) For using this device, there are many items that "should be performed", "should not be performed", and "cannot
be performed". It is not possible to cover all these items in this manual or warning labels. Therefore, it is
necessary to also follow the general safety precaution other than the items described in this manual.

(4) To prevent accidents, usage other than intended, or usage, cleaning, and maintenance not described in this
manual should not be performed.

(5) When using this device, follow the respective regulation to minimize the probability of accidents.

Intended Use of this Device

This device is designed for the following Intended Use.

Intended Use
This device intends to measure the vital signs to monitor patient condition by displaying and printing the
measurement data on this device or central monitor and to generate alarm when necessary.
The vital signs are electrocardiogram, heart rate, respiration rate, body temperature, arterial oxygen saturation
(SpO2), pulse rate, invasive blood pressure, non-invasive blood pressure, CO2 concentration, O2 concentration,
cardiac output (CO), blood temperature and anesthetic gas concentration (including N2O, halothane, isoflurane,
enflurane, sevoflurane and desflurane).

REFERENCE
 For specification of this device, refer to "Chapter 14 Specification" of this manual.

WARNING
 This device is intended to be used by healthcare professionals. Users should have a
thorough knowledge of the function and operation before using this device. The
maintenance of this device should be performed by skilled personnel who received a training
of possible hazards and measures to avoid those hazards. Also, your local regulation must

i
Preface Important Notice

be followed. If this device is used for the purpose other than intended, or if the user does not
follow the safety instructions, the following hazard may result.
*Hazard to the Life and Health of the Patient or the User
*Damage to the device
*A Problem Related to Medical Practice

Copyright

(1) The copyright of this manual is owned by Fukuda Denshi. No part of this document may be copied or transmitted
in any form without the prior written permission of Fukuda Denshi Co., Ltd.

(2) This manual includes the description for the optional devices that can be connected.

(3) The illustration in this manual may differ with the actual device.

(4) If you lose or damage this manual, contact your nearest sales representative. Using the device without this
manual may cause accidents.

(5) When handing over this device, make sure to also pass this manual to the next owner.

Maintenance, Repair, Replacement

Fukuda Denshi is liable for the safety, reliability, and performance of its device only if;
 Maintenance, modifications, and repairs are carried out by authorized personnel or organization.
 Components are used in accordance with Fukuda Denshi operating instructions.
A full technical description of the DS-8400 System is available from your local Fukuda Denshi sales representative.

Contact

If you need more detailed information, please contact following.

(1) Fukuda Denshi Co., Ltd., Head Office

3-39-4 Hongo, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo 113-8483 Japan
Tel: +81-3-5684-1455 Fax: +81-3-3814-1222
E-mail: info@fukuda.co.jp
Website: https://fukuda.com/

(2) Sales Representative

 If a serious incident has occurred in relation to this device, please report it to the manufacturer and to the
competent authority of the country where the user and/or the patient is established.
 In case you need the contact information for your national competent authority, please ask the manufacturer or
the distributor from whom you purchased the device.

ii
Preface About This Manual

About This Manual

Expression Used in This Manual

Meaning of the Symbols

Type of Precaution Description

DANGER Failure to follow this message may cause immediate threat of death or serious injury.

WARNING Failure to follow this message may result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION Failure to follow this message may cause injury or failure to the device.

NOTE "Note" is used to emphasize important information.

REFERENCE "Reference" is used to provide useful information.

 Indicates the reference page for the procedure and precaution.

* Used in a table which indicates that there is detailed explanation outside the table.

Indications for the Screens and Keys

The keys displayed on the monitor screen are indicated by [ ].
(Ex.: [Display Config.], [Manual Printing], etc.)

The expressions displayed on the monitor screen are indicated by " " .
(Ex.: "Volume", "Admit/Discharge", etc.)

The messages displayed on the screen are indicated by < >.

(Ex: <Searching>, <Alarm Suspend>, etc.)

iii
Preface About This Manual

Composition of This Manual

The operation manual is composed of the following chapters.

Chapter Title Description

Preface Outline and purpose of this manual

(Important Notice, About This Manual)

Safety Warning, Precautions for Safety

1.General Description of the Composition, features, menu configuration of this device

Device

2.Names of Parts and Their Name and function of each part, external appearance
Functions
3.Operation Procedure and Screen Operation procedure, home display, window, procedure to return to the previous display,
Examples user key setup

4.Preparation Installing the recording paper, power ON/OFF, time/date, daily checks
5.Admit/Discharge Entering patient information (name, age, etc.) at admittance, discharging the patient, user
mode selection, suspend monitoring

6.Alarm Function General description of alarm function, alarm-related setups

7.Monitoring Measurement condition setup of the monitoring parameters, size/scale setup, etc.
Setup of the stop watch, connector

8.Review Function Arrhythmia analysis, 12-lead analysis, trend, recall, NIBP list, ST measurement,
hemodynamics, lung function, alarm history, other bed display, full disclosure waveform

9. Printing Recorder output function

10. System Configuration Setup of the display configuration, tone/volume, color, etc.
11. Troubleshooting Message list, maintenance and troubleshooting of this device

12. Setup Item/Default Value Setup details and default value

13. System Components List of system components of this device

14. Specification Specification and performance of this device

The maintenance manual is composed of the following chapters.

Chapter Title Description

Preface Outline and purpose of this manual

(Important Notice, About This Manual)

Safety Warning, Precautions for Safety

1.Installation of the Unit Precautions about the operating environment, system construction, mouse connection

2.Network System Construction Network connection and setup

3.Using the External Media Procedure to use the external media

4.Connection to the External External device connection/setup, magnetic card reader usage
Devices

5.Initial Settings Initial setup, administrator setup, alarm/measurement setup, user I/F, user mode
registration

6.Setup Item/Default Value Default and backup of setup items

7.Replacement Parts Precautions about the periodic replacement parts, consumable parts

8.Cleaning/Disinfecting/Storing Procedure to handle, clean, store this device

9. Maintenance Check Daily and periodic checks, self-diagnosis function, software version
software install

iv
Safety About the Safety Precautions

Safety
About the Safety Precautions

The Meaning of Each Safety Precaution

Read this manual thoroughly before use to ensure correct and safe use of the product.
Be sure to follow the precautions indicated below, as these are important messages related to safety.
Type of Precaution Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
DANGER or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
WARNING or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor
CAUTION or moderate injury.

Warning Labels Attached to the Unit

Make sure to read the warning label attached to the device and comply with the requirements while operating the
device.

CAUTION
 Do not damage or erase the warning label attached to the device.
This warning label contains important descriptions for handling and operating the device
properly and safely. A damaged label may compromise safe operation.

DS-8400 System Main Unit

Warning Label Attached to the device

i
Safety About the Safety Precautions

Contents of the Label

Super Unit: HS-8000 Series

Warning Label Attached to the device (HS-8312)

Contents of the Label

Graphic Symbols

Refer to the following for the meaning of the symbol indicated on the device.
Symbol Description

Follow operating instructions (Warning); indicated in blue. Failure to follow operating instructions could
place the patient or operator at risk.

Follow operating instructions (Information);

Indicates the need to refer to the related accompanying documents before operation.

General precaution

Caution, refer to accompanying documents

Indicates the need to refer to the related accompanying documents before operation.

Potential Equalization Terminal

Indicates the terminal to equalize the potential difference when interconnecting the devices.

Protective Earth
Indicates the protective earth inside the device.

Alternating Current
(Main Power Input Indicator)

Indicates that the device is in normal operation.

ii
Safety About the Safety Precautions

Symbol Description

Indicates that the device is in standby mode.

Electrostatic Sensitive Part

Directly touching this connector part with hands should be avoided.

Type CF Applied Part with Defibrillation-Proof

Indicates the degree of protection against electric shock is Type CF Applied Part with defibrillation-
proof.

Type BF Applied Part with Defibrillation-Proof

Indicates the degree of protection against electric shock is Type BF Applied Part with defibrillation-
proof.

Signal Output

GAS Input Part

GAS Output Part

Signal Input Part

TCP/IP Network Connector

Connects to TCP/IP network.

RS-232C Connector
Connects the related device.

Eject
Indicates the switch to pull out the paper tray.
Indicates prohibited actions. Refer to the instruction.

Indicates mandatory or instructed actions. Refer to the instruction.

Battery

Name and Address of Manufacturer / Date of Manufacture

Indicates the name and address of manufacturer, and date of manufacture.

WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronics device)

Indicates a separate collection for electrical and electronic device.

IP32 Dustproof (IP3X): Protection against tips of tools.

Waterproof (IPX2): Protection against water drops falling vertically over 15 degrees range.

IPX1 Waterproof (IPX1): Protection against water drops.

Alarm Silence

NIBP Start/Stop

NIBP Periodic Measurement

Lock

Unlock

Indicates the item is a medical device.

iii
Safety Precautions for Safe Operation of Medical Device

Precautions for Safe Operation of Medical Device

CAUTION
 Users should have a thorough knowledge of the operation before using this device.

 Do not use the device in an environment where protective earth and wiring is questionable.

Precautions about the Location of Installation and Storage of the device

 Set the monitor to the user's intended position where the user can easily recognize the visual and audible
monitoring conditions. Normally it is recommended to set at a distance of one (1) m from the user.
 Install or store in a place where the device will not be exposed to splashing water.
 Install or store in an area where environmental conditions such as atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity,
ventilation, sunlight, dust, sodium, and sulfur will not adversely affect the system.
 Place the device on a stable surface where there is no inclination, vibration, or shock (including during
transportation).
 Do not install or store in an area where chemicals are stored or gases are evolved.
 Verify the power frequency, voltage and allowable current (or power consumption).
 Ensure the grounding is proper by connecting the accompanying power cable to the hospital grade outlet.
 Make sure to secure the device during usage.
 Do not place this device or accessories in any position that might cause it to fall on the patient.
 Do not place this device where the controls can be changed by the patient.
 Do not place this device on electrical device that may affect the device.
 To minimize wireless interference, other electrical device that emits radio waves should not be in close
proximity to this device.

Precautions Before Using the device

 Verify the power voltage. Charge the battery pack fully before operating the system with the battery pack.
 Check the cable connection and polarity to ensure proper operation of the device.
 Make sure the power system has adequate earth ground.
 Ensure that all cables are firmly and safely connected.
 Pay special attention when the device is used in conjunction with other devices as it may cause erroneous
judgment and dangerous situation.

Precautions During Using the device

 Always observe the device and patient to ensure safe operation.
 If any abnormality is found on the device or with the patient, take appropriate measures under the safe
conditions, such as ceasing operation of the device.
 Do not allow the patient to come in contact with the device.
 On start-up of the system, verify that the start-up tone generates and alarm indicator lights.
 For the connectors which are not Type BF, CF applied part, do not touch them and the patient at the same time.

iv
Safety Precautions about the Maintenance

Precautions After Using the device

 Unplug all the cables from the patient before turning off the power.
 When unplugging the cables, make sure to pull from the connector part of the cable and avoid applying
excessive force.
 Clean the accessories and cables, and keep them together in one place.
 Keep the device clean to ensure proper operation for the next use.
 Before cleaning, be sure to turn off the power and unplug from all the power cables.

Precaution when device Failure Occurs

 If the device is damaged and in need of repair, the user should not attempt service. Label the unit "OUT OF
ORDER" and contact your nearest service representative.

Precaution about Disassembling/Remodeling the device

 Do not disassemble or remodel the device.
 If water or other liquids enter the device, cease using the device and contact your nearest service representative.

Precautions about Maintenance Check

 Make sure to periodically check the device, accessories, and cables.
 Before reusing the device that has been left unused for a while, make sure that the device operates normally
and safely.

Precautions when Using with Other device

 To prevent patient from burn injury, verify proper attachment of patient ground plate, ECG electrode type when
using the electrosurgical knife, and verify paste volume, output energy when using the defibrillator. Also,
verify that each device is properly grounded.

Precautions about the Maintenance

WARNING
 Never open the housing while the device is in operation or connected to hospital grade outlet as it may result
in electric shock.
CAUTION Precautions about Safety Check
 For safe operation of the device, regular inspection and maintenance are required. Once a year, check all cables,
devices, and accessories for damage, earth impedance, earth and leakage currents, and all alarm functions.
Also, ensure that all safety labels are legible. Maintain a record of these safety inspections.
 Immediate maintenance has to be carried out for the following case.
 When the device was subjected to extreme mechanical stress, e.g. after a heavy fall.
 When the device was subjected to liquid spill.
 When the monitoring function is interrupted or disturbed.
 When parts of the device enclosure are cracked, removed, or lost.
 When any connector or cable shows signs of deterioration.

v
Safety Precautions about the Network System

Precautions about the Network System

Medical Telemetry

CAUTION Precautions about the Installation

 The medical institution (hereinafter referred as "Institution" ) must decide the telemetry installation plan for
the medical institution in order to prevent interference between transmitters (telemetry based on destination
country's radio law). When telemetry has already been installed and been used, radio format, frequency, and
antenna power are required to be examined to prevent interference.
 When using telemetry which requires zone location, the institution is to set up the zones as an operation unit
for each transmitter to prevent electronic interference between telemetry throughout the Institution.
 When using telemetry which requires zone location, display and identify each prepared zone in the device.
 When laying receiver antenna for each transmitter, the Institution has to examine the installation so that
electronic interference does not occur.
 Based on the above examination result, the Institution should place each receiver antenna as required.

CAUTION Precautions about the Management

 The institution appoints a person to manage the wireless channels for the whole medical institution. And when
using telemetry which requires zone location, the Institution should nominate a person to manage the wireless
channels in each zone (a "Coordinator" ). However, when using such telemetry in a local medical institution,
one person can perform both functions.
 Select a telemetry coordinator who understands the characteristics and functionality of telemetry systems, and
is skilled in operating telemetry.
 When installing telemetry, the Coordinators have to understand the precautions for use of the telemetry in
advance.
 The Coordinator takes responsibility of wireless channel management and transmitter storage for the whole
Institution by giving proper instruction.
 The Coordinator should create a management log (hereinafter referred to as the "log" ), which contains a list
of the management status of the wireless channels for the whole Institution. When changing a wireless channel,
register it in the log and give proper instructions to the user.
 The Coordinator assumes responsibility for managing the wireless channels, storing, and managing telemetry.
 The Coordinator assigns the transmitter to the user, and provides enough education for use inside the zone.
 The telemetry user verifies operation of the transmitter/receiver before use.
 The telemetry user, if using the telemetry in a zone location, follows the instructions of the Coordinator for the
zone and gives instructions to the patient if required.
 When interference or breakdown occurs in telemetry communication, the user is required to inform the
Coordinators of the problems. The Coordinators are to deal with the problem properly and/or contact their
nearest Fukuda Denshi representative for service.

vi
Safety Precautions when Using with Other Device

Precautions when Using with Other Device

Pacemaker

WARNING
 Minute ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemakers can occasionally interact with certain cardiac
monitoring and diagnostic equipment, causing the pacemakers to pace at their maximum programmed rate. The
cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment may possibly send wrong information. If such event occurs,
please disconnect the cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment, or follow the procedures described in the
operation manual of the pacemaker. For more details, contact FUKUDA DENSHI personnel, your institution's
professionals, or your pacemaker distributors.
 Rate meters may continue to count the pacemaker rate during occurrences of cardiac arrest or some
arrhythmias. Do not rely entirely upon rate meter alarms. Keep pacemaker patients under close surveillance.
Reference
"Minute Ventilation Rate-Adaptive Pacemakers"
FDA alerts health professionals that minute ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemakers can
occasionally interact with certain cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment, causing pacemakers to pace
at their maximum programmed rate.
[Based on a safety bulletin issued by FDA Center for Devices and Radiological Health on October 14, 1998]

Non-Explosion Proof

DANGER
 Never operate the device in the presence of flammable anesthetics, high concentration of oxygen, or inside
hyperbaric chamber. Also, do not operate the device in an environment in which there is a risk of explosion.
Explosion or fire may result.

Defibrillator

WARNING
 When defibrillating, keep away from the electrodes or medicament applied to the patient chest. If this is not
possible, remove the electrodes or medicament before defibrillating.
If the defibrillator paddles are directly in contact with the electrodes or medicament, an electrical shock may
result by the discharged energy.
 When defibrillating, make sure that the electrodes, sensor cables, or relay cables are firmly connected to the
device.
Contacting the metal part of the disconnected cable may result in electrical shock from the discharged energy.
 When defibrillating, do not touch the patient and the metal part of the device or cables.
Electric shock may result from the discharged energy.
 This device will return to standard operating mode within 10 seconds after defibrillating. However, when in
diagnosis mode, it may require 10 seconds or more after defibrillation to display the normal ECG waveform as
the time constant setting is large.
The stored data will not be affected. The measurement accuracy will temporarily decrease during defibrillation,
but it will not compromise the safety of patient and the device.
 The QRS synchronized signal is not intended to be used as synchronized signal for defibrillator.

vii
Safety Precautions when Using with Other Device

Electrosurgical Instrument

WARNING
 The monitoring system contains protection against interference generated by electrosurgical instruments.
However, depending on the operating conditions, surgery site with respect to the location of ECG electrodes,
ground plate attachment condition, or the type of instrument used, it may cause burn injury at the electrode site
or noise on the ECG. The noise is generated at the tip of the electrosurgical knife and is difficult to completely
eliminate because of the frequency components of the ECG. To reduce electrosurgical interference, take the
following precautions:
Location:
Locate the electrosurgical unit as far as possible from this device and the patient cable. This will help reduce
interference on the ECG through the monitor or cables.
Power Supply:
Connect the electrosurgical unit to a power supply that is different from that of this device. This will help
prevent interference through the power cable.
Electrode Placement
The amount of noise interference is considerably different depending on the electrode position and surgery
site. Place the ECG electrodes as far away as possible from the surgery site and the ground plate. Do not
place electrodes in the path between the surgery site and the ground plate. If the electrodes are placed in
this path, the amount of interference will be quite large. Position (+) and (–) electrodes as close as possible
to each other.
Ground Plate
When using electrosurgical instruments, make sure the contact between the patient and the ground plate is
secure. If the connection is incomplete, the patient may suffer from burn at the electrode site.
 The stored data will not be affected. The measurement accuracy will temporarily decrease during
electrosurgery, but it will not compromise the safety of patient and the device.
 When using the electrosurgery-proof type ECG relay cable, the impedance respiration cannot be measured, and
its numeric data and waveform will not be displayed. When measuring in an environment where electrosurgery
is not performed, make sure to use the standard ECG relay cable.
 As this device utilizes capacitive touch panel, the energy from the electrosurgical knife may pass through the
cable to the touch panel causing unintentional touch panel control. Locate the cables as far away as possible
from the touch panel.

MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging)

WARNING

MR Unsafe-Keep away from magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) device.

 Do not use this device in magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) environments.

 When conducting MRI test, remove the electrodes and sensors connected to the patient (test subject).
This device may be pulled towards the MRI device. Also, the local heating caused by the induced electromotive
force may cause burn injury to the patient or performance degradation, failure, damage of this device.
For details, refer to the operation manual for the MRI testing device.

viii
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

Precautions about Connections to Peripheral Devices

To use the device safely and to ensure maximum performance of the device, connection of other manufacturer's
device to this device is not authorized, unless the connection is explicitly approved by Fukuda Denshi. It is the user's
responsibility to contact Fukuda Denshi to determine the compatibility and warranty status of any connection made
to another manufacturer's device.

WARNING
 When multiple devices are connected to the patient, it may be necessary to take measures for connection (use
of separation device), power supply (use of isolation power), grounding (additional protective earth). If these
measures are not properly taken, a leakage current may flow between the devices, or the total amount of leakage
current may exceed the limit specified on EN 60601-1-1 or EN 60601-1.
 Only the peripheral devices specified by Fukuda Denshi should be connected with the given procedure. Use of
an unspecified device may cause electric shock to the patient and/or operator due to excessive leakage current.

CAUTION
 Although the peripheral device connectors on the DS-8400 System are, with some exceptions, isolated from
the power supply, the connecting peripheral devices should comply with EN 60601-1. It is the user's
responsibility to verify that the overall system complies with EN 60601-1-1 or EN 60601-1.
 To prevent danger of electric shock, always position the peripheral devices away from the patient.
 Network device including printer and hub should be located outside the "Patient Environment". If located
inside the "Patient Environment", it may result in electric shock to the patient or the operator.
 Combinations of medical device with non-medical device must comply with EN 60601-1-1 or EN 60601-1 or
EN 60601-1. Never use a multiple portable socket-outlet or extension cable when connecting the devices unless
it is supplied specifically for use with that device.

Precautions for Using the Device

This System

DANGER
 When connecting to other devices, contact your nearest representative.
Danger such as electric shock may result to the patient and operator.
WARNING Warnings about the System
 Do not connect any device or cable not authorized by Fukuda Denshi to any I/O connector. Also, do not connect
any damaged device or cable. The device cannot deliver its maximum performance, the device may be
damaged and safety cannot be ensured.
 If the device is used under an environment not fulfilling the specified condition, not only that the device cannot
deliver its maximum performance, the device may be damaged and safety cannot be ensured. If using the
device under condition other than specified, contact your nearest representative.
 Use only the supplied 3-way AC power cable. Use of other cables may result in electric shock to the patient
and the operator.
 The power cable must be connected to a hospital grade outlet.
 When using multiple ME device simultaneously, perform equipotential grounding to prevent potential
difference between the devices. Even a small potential difference may result in electric shock to the patient and
the operator.

ix
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

 Carefully route the cables to avoid patient entanglement and strangulation.

 When lifting this device, hold the bottom part of the main unit and not the display unit.
 Damage to the LCD may cause leakage of liquid crystal. In such case, do not touch the leaked liquid crystal
with bare hands, or put it into your mouth as it may cause intoxication. If the liquid crystal accidentally enters
the eyes or mouth, wash off immediately with water and consult a physician.
 When attaching the display unit to the main unit, slowly insert the rail on the rear side of the display unit to the
guides on both sides of the main unit. Then, secure it with the specified screws.
 To ensure safety, avoid stacking multiple devices or placing anything on the device during operation.
 To prevent injury, follow the directions below:
 Avoid placing the device on liquid on surface with visible liquid spills.
 Do not soak or immerse the device in liquids.
 Do not sterilize the device.
 Use cleaning solutions only as instructed in this operation manual.
 Do not disinfect the device while monitoring patient.
WARNING Warnings about the monitoring
 The patient classification selection influences the precision of the QRS detection and NIBP measurement.
Make sure the proper selection is made.
 The pacemaker usage setting influences the precision of the QRS detection and arrhythmia analysis. Make sure
the correct selection is made.
 If the QRS pace mask function is set to [OFF], [10ms] / [20 ms], the pace pulse may be erroneously be detected
as a QRS complex and HR alarm or asystole alarm may not generate due to incorrect HR (counting pace pulse
as QRS complex). Set this function to [OFF]/[10ms]/[20ms] only if you are sure that pacing failure will not
occur, or when the patient can be constantly monitored.
 Before bathing the patient, make sure to remove the sensor and device from the patient.
 When measuring the SpO2 of patient with high fever or peripheral circulatory insufficiency, check the sensor
attachment periodically and change the attachment site. The temperature of the attachment site will rise due to
the sensor heat which may result in burn injury.
 For the following case, accurate measurement of SpO2 may not be possible.
 Patient with excessive abnormal hemoglobin (COHb, MetHb)
 Patient with the pigment injected to the blood
 Patient receiving CPR treatment
 When a sensor is applied to a limb with NIBP cuff, arterial catheter, or intracatheter
 When measuring at site with venous pulse
 Patient with body motion
 Patient with small pulse
 When a patient is receiving a photodynamic therapy, measuring SpO2 on a same site for a long duration may
cause blisters from the irradiation light of the SpO2 sensor. Make sure to periodically change the sensor
attachment site.
 Before the measurement, make sure the patient classification (Adult/Child/Neonate) is properly selected.
Otherwise, correct measurement cannot be performed, and congestion or other injury may result.
 When the system alarm is suspended, all the alarm will be suspended even if the parameter alarm is set to [ON].
Also, the alarms will not be stored as recall events.
 If the upper/lower alarm limit of the parameter is set to [OFF], or if , arrhythmia alarm is set to [OFF], alarm
will not function even if the system alarm is enabled. Pay attention when setting them [OFF].
 Objective and constant arrhythmia detection is possible through the fixed algorithm incorporated in this unit.

x
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

However, excessive waveform morphology change, motion artifact, or the inability to determine the waveform
pattern may cause an error, or fail to make adequate detection. Therefore, physicians should make final
decisions using printing and recall waveform for evaluation.
 The RR/APNEA alarm will not be generated unless the numeric data box corresponded to the selected RR/
APNEA alarm source is displayed. Make sure to display the numeric data box for the RR/APNEA alarm
source.
 The SpO2 respiration measurement is not intended for use as an APNEA monitor.
 When selecting [0] for "Volume" or [Timer] for "Display" for the Night Mode, pay attention not to miss any
important alarm by simultaneously monitoring the patient on central monitor or other monitors.
 When the alarm sound is suspended, the alarm sound will not generate for the fixed amount of time. Pay
attention not to miss any important alarm by simultaneously monitoring the patient on central monitor or other
monitors.
 If the safety of the patient cannot be ensured, do not suspend the alarm or decrease the alarm volume.
 The oxygenator mode is intended to prevent alarms during cardiopulmonary bypass surgery. Pay special
attention when using this mode as the alarm generation will not be the same as to the standard monitoring mode.
 If the "Alarm Setting" under the Oxygenator Mode Setup is set to [All OFF], all vital alarm will not generate
regardless of the alarm setting of each parameter. Also, if [Sel. Parameter] is set, vital alarm for unselected
parameter will not generate. Pay attention to not miss any significant change of the patient's vital signs.
 Once the cardiopulmonary bypass is finished, make sure to cancel the Oxygenator Mode and return to the
standard monitoring mode.
WARNING Warnings about the CO2 Monitoring (HCP-810/HCP-820, HPD-810/HPD-820)
 Only one of either HCP-810/HCP-820/HPD-810/HPD-820 can be connected.
 When using a sampling line for intubated patients with a closed suction system, do not place the airway adapter
between the suction catheter and endotracheal tube. This is to ensure that the airway adapter does not interfere
with the functioning of the suction catheter.
 To prevent cross-infection, do not allow the sampling gas to return to the breathing system.
 To protect the hospital staffs from unnecessary anesthetic agent when using the HCP-810/HCP-820, it is
strongly recommended to connect the exhaust hole to the gas exhaust system in the hospital.
 Loose or damaged connections of the sampling line may compromise ventilation or cause an inaccurate
measurement of respiratory gases. Securely connect all components and check connections for leaks according
to standard clinical procedures.
 Do not cut or remove any part of the sampling line. It could lead to erroneous readings.
 If too much moisture enters the sampling line (i.e., from ambient humidity or breathing of unusually humid air)
when using the HCP-810/HCP-820, <Check Sample Line> will be displayed in the message area. Replace the
sampling line once this message is displayed.
 Carefully route the sampling line to reduce the possibility of patient entanglement or strangulation.
 Do not lift the HCP-810/HCP-820 by the sampling line, as the sampling line could disconnect from the device,
causing the device to fall on the patient.
 CO2 readings and respiratory rate can be affected by sensor application errors, certain ambient environmental
conditions, and certain patient conditions.
WARNING Warnings about the Gas Monitoring (MGU-800/810)
 Make sure to use only the specified Mindray Medical Sweden AB product.

( "AG Sensors for MGU-800/MGU-810 Manufacturer: Mindray" P13-11)
 Be careful not to damage the water trap during operation as bacteria and/or mucus may contaminate the MGU-
800/810 series.
 The airway adapter, sampling line, flow sensor are disposable products that are intended for single patient use
only. Do not reuse them on other patients as it may cause cross-infection.

xi
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

 To prevent cross-infection, do not allow the sampling gas to return to the breathing system.
 When using a sampling line for intubated patients with a closed suction system, do not place the airway adapter
between the suction catheter and endotracheal tube. This is to ensure that the airway adapter does not interfere
with the functioning of the suction catheter.
 Do not use the MGU-800/810 series with the flammable anesthetic agents.
 To protect the hospital staffs from unnecessary anesthetic agent, it is strongly recommended to connect the
exhaust hole to the gas exhaust system in the hospital.
 The sampling line may get clogged by internal condensation.
 The contents of the water trap should be handled as a potential infection hazard.
 Do not use adult/pediatric type water traps and/or sampling lines with neonates to avoid high sampling flow.
 Connect only DRYLINE gas sampling lines to the water trap. Note that there may be other compatible tubing
present, e.g. IV-lines.
 Do not use DRYLINE neonatal sampling lines (blue luer lock nuts) with DRYLINE adult water traps as this
could result in incorrect measurement data.
 Do not use DRYLINE adult sampling lines (colorless luer lock nuts) with DRYLINE neonatal water traps as
this could result in incorrect measurement data.
 Only combine the SPIRIT Flow Sensors and DRYLINE Water Traps as specified. Other combinations might
lead to incorrect measurements.

( "Connecting to the Respiration Circuit" P7-88)
 Use the adult flow sensor for a patient whose tidal volume is above 150 mL.
 Use the pediatric flow sensor for a patient whose tidal volume is below 300 mL.
 Make sure to use the correct flow sensor depending on the patient conditions, adult or pediatric and the tidal
volume.
 Do not confuse the gas sampling line with other compatible tubing, e.g. IV-lines.
WARNING Warnings about the 12-Lead ECG Analysis Function
 The 12-Lead ECG analysis function is designed to acquire and interpret ECG data from a resting, supine
patient. If ECG signals from moving or shaking patients are acquired, erroneous 12-lead interpretation result
may occur. Always ensure that the patient is kept motionless during 12-lead ECG signal acquisition and
analysis.
 The 12-lead ECG analysis function is intended for use with adult and pediatric patients.
 All computerized ECG analysis results should be reviewed by a physician before making decision for the
patient treatment.
WARNING Warnings about the BIS Monitoring
 Clinical judgment should always be used when interpreting BIS in conjunction with other available clinical
signs. Reliance on BIS alone for intra-operative anesthetic management is not recommended.
 BIS values should also be interpreted cautiously with certain anesthetic combinations, such as those relying
primarily on either ketamine or nitrous oxide/narcotics to produce unconsciousness.
 As with any monitored parameter, artifacts and poor signal quality may lead to inappropriate BIS values.
Potential artifacts may be caused by poor skin contact (high impedance), muscle activity or rigidity, head and
body motion, sustained eye movements, improper sensor placement and unusual or excessive electrical
interference.
CAUTION Precautions about the System
 Do not assess the patient's condition only with the information from this device. A clinical judgment based on
the information from the device should be made by a doctor who fully understands functions of the device, in
a comprehensive manner combined with clinical findings and other test results.
 Do not assess the patient's condition only by the alarm generated on this device. When the alarm is set to OFF
or if the alarm priority is low, a sudden change of the patient may not be noticed.

xii
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

 If an alarm generates, check the patient's condition first and ensure the safety. Depending on the alarm, take
appropriate measures to remove the problem. If the problem lies with the alarm setting, set the alarm properly.
 When measuring for a long period of time, make sure not to compress the patient with the lead cables and the
electrodes. Compressing the same site for a long duration may inhibit the blood flow and generate compression
necrosis and burn injury.
 Use only the products specified for this device. If unspecified products are used, proper function cannot be
executed.
 Do not attach film to the touch panel. This may result in malfunction or failure.
 For quality improvement purposes, specifications may be subjected to change without prior notice.
 This device utilizes LED for the backlight. Since this LED deteriorates by the life cycle, the display may
become dark, scintillate, or may not light by the long term use. In such case, contact your nearest service
representative.
 This device is intended to be used for only one patient.
 The installation of this device should be performed by our service representative or a person who is well
acquainted with this device.
 If not using the device for a long period, disconnect the power cable and lithium-ion battery.
Although the LCD utilizes highly accurate picture elements, occasionally, there may be a few pixels which do
not light or constantly light. Please note that this is not an device failure, and will not affect monitoring
operation.
 Exposing LCD panel to intense light may deteriorate display property. Do not expose the panel to direct
sunlight or strong ultra violet (UV) light.
 The lithium-ion battery can only be charged in the specified operating temperatures of the device. Refer to the
operation manual of the lithium-ion battery (BTO-005) for details.
CAUTION Precautions about the ECG Monitoring
 If any electrodes get detached from the patient after being connected to the lead cable and patient monitor, pay
attention that the metal part of the electrode does not get in touch with any metal parts of the bed or any
conductive parts. Also, the operator should not touch any conductive parts with bare hands. Otherwise, it may
cause electric shock to the patient and/or operator due to excessive leakage current.
 The indication for continuous use of the electrode is about one day.
 Replace the electrode if the skin contact gets loosen due to perspiration, etc.
 When an electrode is attached to the same location for a long period, some patients may develop skin irritation.
Check the patient's skin condition periodically and change the electrode site as required.
 For stable arrhythmia detection and ECG monitoring, verify proper electrode placement, lead, waveform size,
and filter mode selection. If not properly selected, it may cause erroneous detection.
 The threshold level for arrhythmia detection changes with ECG waveform size. Set a proper waveform size for
monitoring.
 When the ECG waveform size is x1/4, x1/2, or x1, the arrhythmia detection level is 250 μV.
 When the ECG waveform size is x2 or x4, the arrhythmia detection level is 150 μV.
 The leads for arrhythmia detection, central monitor display, printing are fixed as ECG1 and ECG2. Set the most
appropriate leads with high QRS for ECG1 and ECG2, especially for arrhythmia detection. If the QRS
amplitude for the set lead is low, it may cause erroneous arrhythmia detection.
 In ESIS Mode, artifacts such as electrosurgical noise or EMG can be largely reduced, but QRS amplitude
attenuation, waveform distortion, or ST segment change may occur compared with other filter modes.
 The ESIS mode cannot completely reduce the electrical noise, and may erroneously detect the pacemaker
spike. This mode should be selected only when a high frequency noise largely affects the HR measurement.
 There are some cases when the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected depending on the pacemaker type, pulse
voltage, pulse width, electrode lead type (unipolar, bipolar), or electrode placement which causes the

xiii
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

pacemaker pulse amplitude to decrease, and disables the pacemaker pulse detection.
 If signals similar to a pacemaker pulse are present, such as electric blanket noise or excessive AC frequency
noise, these may be erroneously detected and displayed as a pacemaker pulse.
 When a spontaneous QRS and pacemaker pulse overlap (ex. fusion beat, etc.), QRS detection cannot be
performed properly. In this case, the heart rate is degraded.
 If a pacemaker pulse is continuously detected due to AC frequency interference, QRS detection will be
suspended and the heart rate will be reduced. Arrhythmia will not be detected either.
CAUTION Precautions about the ST Measurement
 The ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST segment data. The significance of the ST segment
changes need to be determined by a clinician.
 For the lead which the electrode is detached, the reference waveform setup cannot be performed. Check if the
electrode is appropriately attached, and perform the setup again.
CAUTION Precautions about the 12-Lead Analysis
 Interpretation and Minnesota codes given by this device do not instruct the physician as to the kind and degree
of cardiac disease. Accordingly, four value judgments are given for ECG waveform and although "abnormal"
indicates a large possibility of organic cardiac disease, there are cases where no cardiac disease exists despite
an abnormal ECG (that is, an abnormal ECG may be caused by something other than heart).
On the other hand, care should be taken in the event any preclinical coronary arteriosclerosis could be present
despite a normal ECG interpretation.
Therefore, for a proper diagnosis, the ECG should be integrated with other interpretations.
 ECG Recording by the Mason-Likar System
The 12-lead ECG recorded with the torso placement of the limb leads (Mason-Likar 12-lead system) may differ
from the standard 12-lead ECG. Moreover, waveforms may differ somewhat also in a supine position and a
standing position (sitting position).
Fukuda Denshi recommends to carry out the recording of the ECG by taking into consideration the waveform
differences according to electrode positions or postures.
 For the model installed with ECG analysis program
The ECG analysis program is intended to analyze the standard 12-lead ECG waveforms. Therefore, the
analyzed result for waveforms recorded with the torso placement of the limb leads (Mason-Likar 12-lead
system) may differ from that of the standard 12-lead ECG waveforms.
 Select "Used" for the pacemaker setting on the patient admit/discharge menu if a patient has a pacemaker.
 The threshold values for classification of 12-lead ECG interpretation and Minnesota code are set by age and
sex as follows:
1. Male and Female of ages 19 years old and above
2. Male of age 12 through 18 years old
3. Female of age 12 through 18 years old
4. Male and Female of ages 3 through 11 years old
5. Male and Female of ages below 2 years old
 If no patient information (i.e. Default : "Class." [Adult], "Sex": undetermined, and "Age" [0]) has been entered,
the system algorithm will handle the patient as a "35 years old male".
 Before the analysis, make sure the patient classification ([Adult] / [Child]) is properly selected. If [Neonate] is
selected, the 12-lead ECG analysis will not function.
 Enter the age of patient if known. If no age information (i.e. Default: [0]) has been entered, the system
algorithm will handle the patient as "35 years old".
 Enter the sex of patient if known. If no sex information (i.e. Default: undetermined) has been entered, the
system algorithm will handle the patient as "Male".
 If the patient classification is set as [Child] and no age (i.e. Default: [0] ) has been entered, the system algorithm
will handle the patient as "less than 2 years old""

xiv
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

CAUTION Precautions about the SpO2 Monitoring

 Use only the sensor/relay cable specified by Fukuda Denshi. Otherwise, it may cause measurement error.If
the sensor is damaged, stop using it.
 If the nail is rough, dirty, or manicured, accurate measurement will not be possible. Change the finger or clean
the nail before attaching the sensor.
 If irritation such as skin reddening appears with the sensor use, change the attachment site or stop using the
sensor.
 Do not apply the sensor too tight. At the same time, check the blood flow constantly so that congestion is not
generated at the peripheral site.
 Do not use tape to attach the sensor.
 Even attachment for a short duration may inhibit the blood flow and generate compression necrosis or burn
injury. Also, blood flow inhibition may prevent correct measurements.
 Check the sensor attachment site constantly in every 4 hours when probes or reusable sensor are used, and at
least every 8 hours when single patient use sensors are used. Be especially careful of a patient with bad
perfusion. If the sensor attachment position is not changed constantly, skin irritation or skin necrosis due to
compression may be developed. For the patient with bad perfusion, check the sensor attachment position at
least every 2 hours.
 As skin for neonate, premature infant is immature, change the sensor attachment site more frequently
depending on the condition.
 Direct sunlight to the sensor area can cause a measurement error.Place a black or dark cloth over the sensor if
using in direct sunlight.
 When not measuring, unplug the relay cable and sensor from the SpO2 connector. Otherwise, the outside light
may affect to falsely display measurements.
 The pulse wave is normalized for SpO2 measurement, and does not indicate perfused blood volume. Check
proper probe attachment by observing the pulse wave.
 Precautions for Reusable Sensors
The light-emitting part of the sensor should be over the root of the fingernail or as instructed per the related
sensor instruction manual. Do not insert the finger too far into the sensor as it may hurt the patient. For details,
refer to the SpO2 sensor instruction manual.
 Precautions for Single-Patient-Use Type Sensors
The sensor can be reused on the same patient as long as the adhesive tape attaches without slippage. But do not
reuse on other patients to avoid cross contamination. It is intended for single patient use only. For details, refer
to the SpO2 sensor instruction manual.
 If "---" is displayed for the SpO2 numeric data, make sure that the sensor is properly attached.
 Measuring on a limb with NIBP cuff, arterial catheter, or intracatheter may result in incorrect measurement.
 Venous congestion may cause under reading of actual oxygen saturation. Therefore, assure proper venous
outflow from monitored site. Sensor should not be below heart level (e.g. sensor on hand of a patient in a bed
with arm dangling to the floor).
CAUTION Precautions about the NIBP Monitoring
 Do not apply the NIBP cuff to site of injury. An injury may be worsened by the measurement.
 Do not apply the NIBP cuff to the arm on side treated axillary lymph nodes dissection. It may lead to lymphatic
edema by the cuff pressure.
 Measuring on a limb with SpO2 sensor, arterial catheter, or intracatheter may result in incorrect measurement.
 An operator must not get away from a patient during the NIBP measurement. However, when getting away
from the patient is necessary, do not activate the Alarm Suspend and Silence functions in order not to miss any
sudden changes in the patient's condition.
 Pay attention when measuring the NIBP of patient with bleeding disorders or hyper coagulation. The cuff

xv
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

inflation may cause petechia or circulatory failure by the blood clot.

 For the following situation, measurements will be terminated.
 When the measurement time has exceeded 160 seconds for adult and child, 80 seconds for neonate.
 When the inflation value has exceeded 300mmHg for adult, 210mmHg for child, and 150mmHg for neonate.
 If used with the incorrect patient classification, it will not only cause erroneous measurement, but the inflating
level for the adult may be applied to child or neonate causing dangerous situation to the patient.
 The continuous measurement and 1-minute interval measurement will automatically stop after 12 minutes
(maximum 15 minutes).
 If the mean MAP display is set to OFF, the MAP alarm will not be generated. Also the MAP data will not be
displayed for the tabular trend or the NIBP list.
CAUTION Precautions about the BP Monitoring
 Do not reuse / re-sterilize the disposable type transducers.
 If using a reusable blood pressure transducer, disinfect it according to the manufacturer's guidelines.
 The long-term use of the blood pressure transducer, tube and catheter may increase the risk of infection.
Perform periodic replacement with new one. The guidelines of the CDC (Disease Control and Prevention)
recommend replacing within 96 hours.
 If the ambient temperature of the blood pressure transducer has changed greatly, the zero balance may cause
the drift. Perform the zero balance again.
 An operator must not get away from a patient during the BP measurement. However, when getting away from
the patient is necessary, do not activate the Alarm Suspend and Silence functions in order not to miss any
sudden changes in the patient's condition.
 Be sure to perform Daily Check. Use of faulty device might harm the patient or operator.
 If the Device Status Alarm occurs or if you feel the unusual operation of the device, perform the inspections to
confirm the safety or contact our service representative.
 If the transducer get disconnected, pay attention that the metal part of the transducer does not get in touch with
any metal parts of the bed or any conductive parts. Also, the operator should not touch the conductive parts
with bare hands. Otherwise, it may result in electric shock to the patient and/or operator.
 When the power is turned ON, the BP value will not be displayed until zero balance is performed. Make sure
to perform the zero balance. Once the zero balance is performed, the zero balance information will be
maintained, and the BP value will be displayed.
 Each time the blood pressure transducer or tubing is replaced, the zero balance procedure is required to ensure
accurate measurements.
 The zero balance procedure is required for the following case.
 When starting the measurement.
 When the position of the heart has changed due to body movement.
 When the position of the transducer has changed.
 When measuring for a long period of time and there is a possibility of measurement error due to change in
ambient temperature, etc.
 When a connector is connected/disconnected, or a transducer is replaced.
 Note that Systolic Pressure (SYS) = Peak Systolic Pressure (PSP) for the graphic trend, data base, and alarm
setup.
 When ECG is not measured, Peak Diastolic Pressure (PDP) cannot be calculated.
 The undisplayed BP data (SYS/DIA/Mean) will not generate a BP alarm or be displayed in the tabular trend.
Select the appropriate display type according to the monitoring purpose.
CAUTION Precautions about the CO2 Monitoring (HCP-810/HCP-820)
 Conduct CO2 calibration for the following case.

xvi
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

If the CO2 gas calibration is not performed at a specified interval, CO2 measurement accuracy may be affected
and also subsequent gas calibration may not be possible.
 When the accumulated measurement time exceeds 1,200 hours from the first use.
However, if the first calibration was performed before the accumulated measurement time reaches 720 hours,
another calibration is required when the accumulated measurement time exceeds 1,200 hours from the first
calibration.
 When 12 months has elapsed or the accumulated measurement time has exceeded 4,000 hours from the
previous calibration.
 When EtCO2 measurement is not stable or accuracy is degraded compared with other measuring device.
 When the patient monitor was not used for a while, or when EtCO2 was not measured for a while.
 Perform the calibration 5 minutes after turning ON the power on the HCP-810/HCP-820.
 Do not disconnect the sampling tube during calibration. If the sampling tube is disconnected, calibration will
cease.
 Dispose of calibration gas according to the regulation of each medical institution.
The Microstream™ EtCO2 sampling lines are designed for single patient use, and are not to be reused. Do not
attempt to clean, disinfect, sterilize or flush any part of the sampling line as this can cause damage to the
monitor. It may cause crass-infection.
 Dispose of sampling lines according to standard operating procedures or local regulations for the disposal of
contaminated medical waste.
 Before use, carefully read the Directions for Use for the Microstream™ EtCO2 sampling line.
 Use only the Microstream™ EtCO2 sampling line to ensure proper function of the monitor.
CAUTION Precautions about the CO2Monitoring (HPD-810/HPD-820 Gas Unit I/F)
 The disposable airway adapter should be opened just before use.
 Do not reuse the disposable airway adapter. If sterilized, it will become unusable.
 The airway adapter should be attached with the thicker side facing to the patient. If attached oppositely, it may
damage the CO2 sensor or airway adapter.
 Dispose of calibration gas according to the regulation of each medical institution.
CAUTION Precautions about the BIS Monitoring (HBX-800 BISx I/F Unit)
 The conductive parts of sensors and connectors should not contact other conductive parts, including earth.
 To reduce the hazard of burns in the high-frequency surgical neutral electrode connection, the BIS sensor
should not be located between the surgical site and the electrosurgical unit return electrode.
 The BIS sensor must not be located between defibrillator pads when a defibrillator is used on a patient
connected to the patient monitor.
 Continuous impedance checking may need to be disabled if the 1 nA, 128 Hz impedance check signal interferes
with other device (e.g., evoked potential monitors).
 Considerations when using Electro-Convulsive Therapy (ECT) device during BIS monitoring: Place ECT
electrodes as far as possible from the BIS sensor to minimize the effect of interference. Certain ECT device
may interfere with the proper function of the BIS monitoring system.
CAUTION Precautions about the Alarm
 Alarm messages will be displayed according to the priority. (Level S > Level H > Level M > Level L> Level N)
 For the same alarm level, the alarm message for the newer alarm will be displayed.
 The arrhythmia alarm message other than Tachy, Brady, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady will continue to be displayed
for 30 seconds after the alarm is resolved.
 When "LEAD OFF", "Check Electrodes" is displayed, HR alarm or arrhythmia alarm will not function. If this
condition is left unresolved, a sudden change of the patient may not be noticed. Take prompt action when the
lead-off condition is detected.

xvii
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

 When CO2 is measured on the HPD-810/HPD-820 Gas Unit I/F and HCP-810/HCP-820 CO2Gas Unit , the
upper EtCO2alarm will not generate if the upper limit is set to 100 mmHg/13.4 kPa and above as the
measurement range is 0 to 99 mmHg / 0 to 13.3 kPa.
 Whether to use the SpO2 second alarm function and its threshold selection should be based on the patient's
clinical indication/portent and medical evaluation.
If the SpO2 alarm andsecond alarm setup is set to [OFF], the second alarm integral value will be set to 0.
 Pay attention not to set the alarm volume too low to avoid missing any important alarms.
 On a wired network, the alarm generated on the bedside monitor will be output to the network with a maximum
delay of 1 second, and to the central monitor with a maximum delay of 2.5 seconds.
 If the NIBP alarm is turned OFF under the Oxygenator Mode, NIBP auto mode measurement and NIBP
measurement at alarm occurrence will not be performed.
 If the same or similar devices with different alarm settings are used in the same facility or same department,
pay attention not to misjudge the alarms.
 To ensure that the alarm setup is appropriate for the patient being monitored, check the setup each time this
device is used.
CAUTION Precautions about the System Setup
 When the waveform and numeric data display for each parameter is set to OFF, the alarm and trend input will
be also suspended.
 If the HR/PR source is set to [BP], and if BP waveform/numeric data is set to [Disp. OFF], the PR value will
not be displayed.
 If the HR/PR source is set to [SpO2], and if SpO2 waveform/numeric data is set to [Disp. OFF], the PR value
will not be displayed.
 If the RR source is set to [CO2/GAS], and if CO2 waveform/numeric data is set to [Disp. OFF], the RR value
will not be displayed.
 If the RR source is set to [CO2/GAS], and if GAS waveform/numeric data is set to [Disp. OFF], the RR value
will not be displayed.
 Do not set the same remote control ID to multiple monitors in the same floor. Otherwise, the remote control
operation may control multiple monitors at the same time.
 After the remote control setup, check that the remote control unit is properly operating.
 If the time/date is not correctly set, or changed during monitoring, malfunction may occur with NIBP
measurement, periodic printing, trend, NIBP list data, and age calculation from the birth date.
 If the time/date is changed, the time/date for all the saved patient data (trend, list, recall, etc.) will also change.
The printed time/date before changing and the displayed time/date after changing will differ.Also, the data
transmitted to the central monitor before the time/date is changed will be displayed on the central monitor with
the previous time/date.
CAUTION Precautions about the Multigas Unit Data Monitoring
(MGU-800/MGU-810 Series)
 When the multigas unit (MGU-800/MGU-810 series) and HPD-810/HPD-820, HCP-810/HCP-820 are
simultaneously used, the CO2 concentration measurement will be performed by the device selected for the
"CO2 Source Priority" under ( [Menu] > "Parameter" [CO2]) .
 The MGU-800/MGU-810 series require warm up of about 10 minutes to correctly measure the data.
 If the power supply is interrupted due to power failure, etc., MGU-800/810 series multigas unit will initialize
and enter into warm-up mode even if the power interruption is within 30 seconds.
 About the Gas Calibration
The gas calibration will automatically start when the MGU-800/810 series multigas unit is connected.
After the warm-up completes, gas calibration will be performed every 4 hours during stable operation.
During warm-up, gas calibration interval will become shorter than during normal operation.
During gas calibration, measurement data will not be updated.

xviii
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

Calibration gas is not required during gas calibration.

 Dispose of calibration gas according to the regulation of each medical institution.
 Make sure the sampling line and flow sensor is securely connected to prevent any leakage.
 The gas leakage inside or outside the device will cause measurement error. Make sure to check for leakage
before usage.
 An environment with alcoholic vapor may adversely affect the measurement readings.
 CO2, N2O or anesthetic agent in the atmosphere around the MGU-800/810 series may adversely affect the
measurement readings.
 SPIRO and ventilator cannot be used simultaneously.
 During the warming up process, the date of the last measurement accuracy check cannot be updated. Perform
the measurement accuracy check after the warming up process is completed.
 If the accuracy check is performed using a low pressure gas, the accuracy of gas measurement will be reduced.
Make sure to perform the accuracy check using the specified calibration gas before its expiration date.
 If the error persists, refer to your nearest service representative.
 About the MGU-810 Series
 The adult flow sensor dead space is 6.9 mL and the flow resistance is 1.8 cmH2O at 60 L/min.
The pediatric flow sensor dead space is 0.75 mL and the flow resistance is 0.9 cmH2O at 10 L/min.
Adjust ventilation accordingly.
 To prevent condensation, the patient breathing circuit, flow sensor and pressure tubing should not be directly
exposed to cooling device such as fans or cooling blankets.
 Leakage of gas from the patient breathing system may occur if the pressure or gas sampling lines are not
connected to the MGU-810.
 The pressure tube and gas sampling lines of the flow sensor should always be routed from the patient circuit
to the MGU-810 such a way as to avoid kinking.
 Flow sensors that have suffered damage to sensor head, tubing or tubing connector must not be used.
 If liquid has entered the pressure tubes, it can be removed by gently tapping or shaking the flow sensor.
CAUTION Precautions about the Patient Admit/Discharge
 If monitoring of a new patient is started without discharging the previous patient, data of the new patient will
be added to the data of the previous patient which will result in inaccuracy.
 The user mode setting (alarm/display configuration) will remain effective even when the power is turned OFF
or when the patient is discharged. Before monitoring, make sure the current user mode is suitable for the
patient's condition.
 Resuming monitoring will also resume the alarm in suspension.
CAUTION Precautions about the External Media
 Use only the specified external media.
 Use only the external media formatted on this device.
 Make sure to power cycle the system after the setup data is read from the CF card.
By power cycling the system, the read data will become effective.
 Reading the patient data from the CF card will erase all previous patient data stored in the patient monitor.
CAUTION Precautions about the Maintenance
 When cleaning the touch panel, never use strong-acidic cleaning solution.
 To clean the touch panel, use an optional cleaning cloth, eyeglass cleaning cloth, soft cotton cloth, or non-
woven cloth (pulp, rayon, polyethylene, etc.).
 Clean the device frequently so stains can be removed easily.
 To prevent injury, it is recommended to wear gloves when cleaning the device.

xix
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

 Pay attention not to allow chemical solution to enter the device or connectors.
 Do not use organic solvents, thinner, toluene or benzene to avoid damaging the resin case.
 Do not polish the device with abrasive or chemical cleaner.
 When disinfecting the entire room using a spray solution, pay close attention not to get any solution into the
device or connectors.
 Use only neutral detergent to clean the device. The surface resin coating may damage, resulting in
discoloration, scratches, and malfunction.
Example:
chemical cloth, scrub brush, abrasive, polishing powder, hot water, volatile solvent and chemicals (cleanser,
thinner, benzine, benzol, and synthetic detergent for house and furniture), or sharp-edged tools
 Do not open the housing.
 Do not allow alcohol or other liquids to enter the device.
 Replace the periodic replacement parts periodically as specified.

Wired Network (DS-LANII/ DS-LANIII)

WARNING
 Do not connect unspecified device to the wired network.
 Do not mix devices with DS-LANII and DS-LANIII setting in the same wired network. The network may cease
and proper monitoring may not be possible.
CAUTION
 If performing wired network transmission, configure the display so that the numeric data corresponded to the
waveform is displayed. If not, the displayed waveform or numeric data may not be transmitted.
 The default setting of bed ID is "000". If connected to a wired network with the bed ID unchanged, monitoring
on the central monitor will not be possible.
 When connecting to a wired network, make sure that there are no other bedside monitors with the same ID. If
there is more than one bedside monitor with the same bed ID, the duplicated bedside monitors cannot be
monitored on the central monitor.
 When connected to the DS-LAN II network, set the bed ID in the range from "001" to "048" .
 When connected to the DS-LAN III network, set the bed ID in the range from "001" to "100" .
 The alarms that can be notified to the central monitor depend on the model type and software version of the
central monitor. For details, refer to the operation manual of the central monitor.
 There are following restrictions when connecting the DS-8400 System to the wired network.
 The BP measurement unit setting should be the same for all central monitors and bedside monitors. If the
setting is different among the monitors, data such as BP waveform, BP numeric data, NIBP numeric data,
NIBP list will not be transmitted. It will be treated as not measured data, and will not be displayed on the
central monitor. The alarm limit setup from the central monitor cannot be performed either.
 On the DS-LAN II network, the following arrhythmia alarms will not be transmitted.
TACHY, BRADY, COUPLET, PAUSE, TRIGEMINY, TRIPLET, EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY, R on T,
MULTIFORM, VENT RHYTHM, SVT, IRREGULAR RR, PROLONGED RR, S FREQUENT, S
COUPLET, VPC, SVPC, PACER NOT CAPTURE, PACE NOT PACING
 On the DS-LAN II network, arrhythmia alarm of "SLOW VT" will be transmitted as "VT" .
 On the DS-LAN II network, waveform, numeric data, and alarm of BP7, BP8, TEMP3 to 8 will not be
transmitted. (These can be transmitted on the DS-LAN III network). Also, the displayable waveform,
numeric data, and alarm will differ depending on the central monitor model type. Refer also to the operation
manual for the respective central monitor.
 The PR_IBP alarm will not be transmitted to the central monitor.

xx
Safety Precautions for Using the Device

 If the "RR/APNEA alarm source" is other than [Impedance] (or, if [Auto] selects a setting other than
[Impedance]), the RESP waveform will not be transmitted on a wired network.
 If the "RR/APNEA alarm source" is other than [CO2/GAS] (Or, if [Auto] selects a setting other than [CO2/
GAS]), the CO2 waveform will not be transmitted on a wired network.
 For the numeric data displayed as "xxx", maximum or minimum value of measurable range will be
transmitted.
 The numeric data displayed as "--- " will be treated as not measured data.
 If the measurement unit of CO2 concentration is mmHg and [99mmHg] is selected for "Upper Limit of CO2
(mmHg) Transmission" ([Initial Settings]>[System]>[DS-LAN]), the CO2 value of 100 mmHg or above
will be transmitted as 99 mmHg.
 As the DS-8400 System donot have the arrhythmia template display and 12-lead ST display function,
waveforms and other data will not be displayed for these displays on the central monitor connected to the DS-
LAN network.
 When connected to the wired network, the time/date will synchronize with the central monitor. Even if the
time/date is changed on the DS-8400 System, it will be corrected to the time/date of the central monitor.
 The ST display will be distorted on the central monitor if the ECG lead (ECG1 or ECG 2) is changed on the
DS-8400 System. Redrawing the ST display will return the display to normal.
 On the central monitor, the respiration waveform and RR value based on the RR/APNEA alarm source selected
on the DS-8400 System will be displayed. The monitored RR and APNEA will be the same for the central
monitor and the DS-8400 System.

Wireless Network System

DANGER
 When monitoring a patient using wireless telemetry, make sure the patient data is properly received at the
central monitor. Pay special attention when the channel ID at the bedside monitor is changed.
WARNING
 A password can be set to access the channel ID setup menu to allow only the telemetry channel administrator
to change the channel ID.
 Some type of wireless combinations may generate interference with other telemetry.
 Before selecting a channel, verify it will not interfere with other channels.
 Inform the supervisor of the use of telemetry channels to avoid interference with other telemetry.
 If transmitters are used in a neighboring medical facility, your facility and the neighboring facility must make
agreements on the setting of the telemetry channels to prevent telemetry interference.

CAUTION Precautions about the Telemetry

 When performing telemetry transmission, configure the display so that the numeric data corresponded to the
waveform is displayed. If not, the displayed waveform or numeric data may not be transmitted.
 The setup of channel ID and group ID should be performed only by the telemetry channel administrator or our
service representative. Users should not perform this procedure as malfunction may occur.
 When the measurement unit of BP is "kPa", corresponding waveform and numeric data will not be transmitted.
When using a wireless network, use "mmHg" for the BP measurement unit.
 If the "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" setting is other than [Impedance] (or, if [Auto] selects a setting other than
[Impedance]), the RESP waveform will not be transmitted on a wireless network.
 If the "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" setting is other than [CO2] (Or, if [Auto] selects a setting other than [CO2]),
the CO2 waveform will not be transmitted on a wireless network.
 BP waveform with a scale above the set scale can not be properly transmitted. When transmitting the BP
waveform, pay attention to the displayed BP scale.

xxi
Safety Precautions about the Ventilator Monitoring

 If the measurement unit of CO2 concentration is mmHg and [99mmHg] is selected for "CO2 (mmHg) Upper
Limit of Transmission" ([Initial Settings]>[System]>[Telemeter]), the CO2 value of 100mmHg or above will
be transmitted as 99mmHg.

RTC and Data Backup

CAUTION
 This device is equipped with a built-in clock. When the power of this device is turned OFF, this clock is backed
up by a lithium primary battery. If incorrect time is displayed when turning ON the power, a low battery may
be the cause. In such case, contact Fukuda Denshi service representative for replacing the battery.
 To protect the data during voltage dip, short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines
or during short duration of power turned OFF, this device performs 5-minute (approx.) data backup using the
secondary battery. The data may not be protected if the power is turned OFF within 30 minutes from power ON.

Precautions about the Ventilator Monitoring

WARNING

 The ventilator alarm sound is set to OFF (factory default).

The alarm sound can be turned ON on the Tone/Volume setup screen.
 If the DS-8400 System does not generate an alarm even though the ventilator is generating an alarm, or if any
other malfunction occurs, immediately check the ventilator, this device, cable, and replace the cable if
necessary. If the malfunction persists, stop using the device.
 The alarm generation on the DS-8400 System is not guaranteed if the alarm other than the specified one
generates at the ventilator.

( Maintenance Manual "Ventilator Measurement and Alarm Input" P4-1)

CAUTION

 The ventilator operation should be performed by well-trained and authorized personnel.

 When connecting this device and a ventilator, use only the specified connection cable.
 Verify that this device and the ventilator are properly connected.
 When connecting the cable, verify that the main power of this device and the ventilator are OFF.

Precautions about the SpO2 Sensor

DANGER Danger of Burn Injury Caused by the SpO2 Sensor

 When monitoring SpO2, make sure to use only the specified sensor/relay cable. If any other sensor/relay cable
is used, a high temperature rise of the sensor may place the patient in danger of burns.
If there are any questions regarding the sensor/relay cable use for SpO2 measurements of this device, please
contact Fukuda Denshi service representative.

Precautions about the Masimo Model

CAUTION

xxii
Safety Precautions about the NIBP Cuff

 The purchase or possession of this product does not explicitly or implicitly permit the use of this product with
replacement parts. Whether the device is used alone or in combination with other parts, it is protected by the
patent rights of the related devices.

Precautions about the NIBP Cuff

CAUTION
 Some of the NIBP cuffs used for this device contain natural rubber latex which may cause allergic reactions.
(FDA: Medical Alert on Latex Products, "Allergic Reactions to Latex-Containing Medical Devices", Food &
Drug Administration, 10903 New Hampshire Avenue, Silver Spring, MD 20993, 1991.)

Precautions about Disposing of the Device, Accessories, or Components

CAUTION
 When disposing of this device, accessories, or components, use an industrial waste distributor. Do not dispose
of as ordinary waste.
 When disposing of the battery, separate it from other wastes and contact your nearest service representative.

Precautions about Transportation

CAUTION
 When transporting this device, pack it with specified packing materials.
Also, transport it under appropriate environment condition.

( Operation Manual "Specification" P14-1)

Monitoring after Power Failure

When the power failure is less than 30 seconds, monitoring will resume with the display mode and patient
information unchanged. When the power failure is 30 seconds or more, monitoring will resume with the default
display mode set by the user, or the display mode which was last set.
However, this is only if the device was operated for 30 minutes or more before the power failure.
MGU-800/810, HCP-810/820, HPD-810/820 will start up from the warm-up mode. The warm-up time differs for
each unit.

To Prepare for Emergency Use

Accessories/Optional Accessories
 The ECG electrodes are consumable products. Always prepare extra supplies of electrodes.
 Verify that there is no wire break on the patient cable once a week.
Battery Pack
 Even if the battery pack is not in use, the remaining capacity decreases due to self-discharge.Make sure to
verify once a week that the battery pack is fully charged.
 To fully charge the empty battery pack, it takes 5.0 hours during operation, and 2.5 hours when the power is
OFF and AC cable is connected.
 The performance of the battery deteriorates with repeated use. To ensure performance of the battery, it is
recommended to replace it once a year.

xxiii
Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility

Electromagnetic Compatibility

This equipment complies with EN 60601-1-2: 2015, safety standard regarding the electromagnetic disturbances of
medical electrical equipment. To ensure maximum performance against the electromagnetic disturbances, make sure
to follow the precautions for installation and usage described in this manual.

 This equipment is intended for use in the medical facility (except in the vicinity of MRI device), and satisfies
the immunity level for professional healthcare facility environment stipulated in EN 60601-1-2: 2015.
 When using this equipment, interference with other medical electrical equipments or non-medical electrical
equipments may occur. Make sure that no interference is present before usage.
 This equipment is a ME equipment which intentionally receives RF energy of specific reception frequency. RF
electromagnetic radiation from other equipment for the intended specific reception frequency band may cause
radio interference. Make sure that the reception is properly made in the used environment.
 To ensure basic safety and essential performance related to electromagnetic disturbances during the expected
service life of this equipment, "Daily Check" and "Periodic Check" must be performed.
(Refer to "Chapter 10 Maintenance Check" of the Maintenance Manual.)

Precautions for Safe Operation under Electromagnetic Influence

If any sorts of electromagnetic wave, magnetic field, or static electricity exist around the device, noise interference
or malfunction of the device may occur. If any unintended malfunction or noise occurs during monitoring, check the
magnetic influence and take appropriate countermeasures.
The following are examples of the common cause and countermeasures.

DANGER Static Electricity

In a dry environment (room), static electricity is likely to occur. Take the following countermeasures.
 Both operator and patient should remove any static electricity before entering the room.
 Humidify the room.
WARNING Cellular Phone
 The radio wave may cause malfunction to the equipment.
Cellular phones and radio sets should be turned off in the room (building) where medical device is located.
WARNING Lightning
A lightning nearby may induce excessive voltage to the equipment. If any danger is suspected;
 Use the uninterruptible power supply system.
CAUTION High frequency noise interference from other device through the power outlet
 Check where the noise is originated and remove it using filtering device, etc.
 Stop using the device that is originating the noise.
 Use other power outlet.
WARNING
 If this equipment is installed close to, or stacked with other equipment, malfunction may occur. Make sure to
verify that the equipment operates properly in a used location.
 Use of accessories, probes, or cables other than specified may cause increase in electromagnetic emission or
decrease in electromagnetic immunity resulting in malfunction of the equipment.
 The portable RF communications equipment (including antenna cable and peripheral equipment such as

xxiv
Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility

external antenna) with the specified cable should be used in a location at least 30 cm apart from any part of this
equipment. Otherwise, it may result in performance degradation of this equipment.

EMC Guidance

This equipment complies with EN 60601-1-2: 2015. However, if portable transmitter or wireless LAN equipment is
used extremely nearby, the electromagnetic influence may largely exceed the compliance level and may cause
unexpected phenomenon such as noise interference on the waveform, etc.
Also, if this equipment is installed close to, or stacked with other equipment, malfunction may occur. Make sure to
verify that the equipment operates properly in a used location.
This equipment should be used in a location specified by each medical institution.
If any unexpected noise interference on the waveform or failure to the peripheral device occurs, stop using the
equipment and follow the instruction of the technical engineer.

The following is the information relating to EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility).

(When using this equipment, verify that it is used within the environment specified below.)

This equipment complies with EN 60601-1-2: 2015 for the following system configuration.
 Main Unit: DSC-8410
 Display Unit: LC-8018TC
 Patient Monitor: DS-8007
 Multi Module: HM-801
 Multi Module: HM-800 x 2
 Recorder Unit: HR-800
 Telemetry Transmitter Module: HLX-801
 Gas Unit I/F: HPD-820
 Input Box: IB-8004
 Multiport Module HP-800
 Multigas Unit: MGU-810
 BISx I/F Unit: HBX-800
 BISx Module: BISx
 Lithium-Ion Battery: BTO-005

xxv
Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility

Compliance to the Electromagnetic Emissions

The DS-8400 System is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of the DS-8400 System should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emission Test Compliance

Mains Terminal Disturbance Voltage

Group 1 Class A
EN 55011
Electromagnetic Radiation Disturbance
Group 1 Class A
EN 55011

Harmonic Emissions
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2

Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker Emissions

Complies
IEC 61000-3-3

CAUTION
 The emission performance of this equipment is suitable for use in industrial environment and
hospital environment (EN 55011 Group 1 Class A). Do not use in home environment
(generally, EN 55011 Group 1 Class B is required).

Compliance to the Electromagnetic Immunity

The DS-8400 System is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of the DS-8400 System should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Basic EMC Standard or Test Method Immunity Test Levels

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ±8 kV contact
IEC 61000-4-2 ±2 kV, ±4 kV, ±8 kV, ±15 kV air
Radiated RF EM Fields 3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz
2 kHz 80%AM
Proximity fields from RF wireless communications equipment Refer to the following table.
IEC 61000-4-3
Electrical fast transient/burst ±2 kV AC Mains
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV Signal and Interconnecting Cables
Repetition rate: 100 kHz
Surge ±0.5 kV, ±1 kV Normal mode
IEC 61000-4-5 (Phase 0°, 90°, 270°)
±0.5 kV, ±1 kV, ±2 kV Common mode
(Phase 0°, 90°, 270°)
Conducted disturbances induced by RF fields 3V
IEC 61000-4-6 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
2 kHz 80%AM
6V
0.15 MHz to 80 MHz (ISM bands)
2 kHz 80%AM
Rated power frequency magnetic fields 30 A/m
IEC 61000-4-8 50 Hz
Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on power 0% UT; 0.5 cycles
IEC 61000-4-11 (Phase 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, 180°, 225°, 270°, 315°)
0% UT; 1 cycle, 70% UT; 25 cycles
(Phase 0°)
0% UT; 250 cycles

xxvi
Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility

Immunity test specifications for RF wireless communications equipment

Test Frequency (MHz) Modulation Maximum Power (W) Distance (m) Immunity Test Level (V/m)

385 PM, 18 Hz 1.8 0.3 27

450 FM, ±5kHz 2 0.3 28

deviation
1kHz sine

710, 745, 780 PM, 217 Hz 0.2 0.3 9

810, 870, 930 PM, 18 Hz 2 0.3 28

1720, 1845, 1970 PM, 217 Hz 2 0.3 28

2450 PM, 217 Hz 2 0.3 28

5240, 5500, 5785 PM, 217 Hz 0.2 0.3 9

CAUTION
 The assumed service TETRA 400 of the test frequency of 385 MHz is a public wireless
device, and this product, which is intended for use in a professional healthcare facility
environment, has not been tested as it will not be radiated in close proximity.

 The assumed service GMRS 460, FRS 460 of the test frequency of 450 MHz is a US
standard wireless device, and this product, which is intended for use in Europe, has not been
tested as it will not be radiated in close proximity.

Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communications

Equipment and the DS-8400 System
The customer or the user of the DS-8400 System can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a
minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the DS-8400
System as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.

Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communications Equipment

and the DS-8400 System

Rated Maximum Output Separation Distance according to Frequency of Transmitter (m)

Power of Transmitter (W)
150kHz to 80MHz 80MHz to 800MHz 800MHz to 2.5GHz
d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3

0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23

0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73

1 1.2 1.2 2.3

10 3.8 3.8 7.3

100 12 12 23

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be determined using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.

Note 1: At 80MHz and 800MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations.
Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

xxvii
Safety Electromagnetic Compatibility

xxviii
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Composition of the System

Chapter 1 General Description of the

Device
Composition of the System

The DS-8400 system is composed of Display Unit (LC-8016TC/LC-8018TC), Main Unit (DSC-8410), Super Unit
(HS-8000 series/DS-8007 series), Multigas Unit (MGU-800 series/MGU-810 series), Recorder Unit (HR-800),
expansion modules and Input Box (IB-8004).

Lineup of Main Unit

Model Type External Monitor Output Extended Display Unit
LAN (TCP/IP)
Output

DSC-8410 Yes No No
DSC-8410 (with CC-84) Yes 2ch 1ch

Lineup of Display Unit

Model Type Display Size
LC-8016TC 15.6 inch

LC-8018TC 18.5 inch

Lineup of Super Unit

Multiparameter CO2 Measurement
Model Type Fixed Parameter SpO2 Unit
Measuring Items (Optional)

ECG (Max.12 leads),

HS-8312N RESPx1, NIBPx1 Nellcor Yes
SpO2x1 3 ports
ECG (Max.12 leads), Temperature x6 (maximum)
RESPx1, NIBPx1, SpO2x1, BP x6 (maximum)
HS-8312M SpCO x1*, Masimo CO Measurement x1 (maximum) Yes
SpMet x1*, SpHb x1*, PVI
x1*

1-1
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Composition of the System

Lineup of Super Unit

Multiparameter CO2 Measurement
Model Type Fixed Parameter SpO2 Unit
Measuring Items (Optional)
ECG (Max.12 leads),
DS-8007N RESPx1, NIBPx1, SpO2 x1, Nellcor Yes
RR_SpO2x1*, TEMPx2 2 ports
TEMP x4+2 phone plugs
ECG (Max.12 leads), (maximum)
RESPx1, NIBPx1, SpO2x1, BP x4 (maximum)
DS-8007M TEMPx2, PI, SpMet x1*, Masimo CO Measurement x1 (maximum) Yes
SpCO x1*, SpHb x1*, SpOC
x1*, PVI x1*

*: RR_SpO2, SpMet, SpCO, SpHb, SpOC, and PVI measurements are optional functions.

Lineup of Adapter
Model Type Remarks

HSA-80 Adapter for HS-8000 series (Connects to the patient monitor with module connection cable.)

Adapter for HS-8000 series (Connects to the patient monitor by sliding on the rail at the rear side
HSA-81
of the patient monitor.)

DSA-82 Adapter for DS-8007 series (Connects to the patient monitor with module connection cable.)

Lineup of Multigas Unit

CO2/N2O Anesthetic Agent Spirometry Function
Model Type O2 Measurement
Measurement Measurement Assessment
Yes
MGU-801P Yes Yes No
Paramagnetic

Yes
MGU-811P Yes Yes Yes
Paramagnetic

Lineup of Recorder
Model Type Remarks
HR-800 50 mm Roll Paper, 3 waveforms printing

Lineup of Input Box

Model Type Number of Slots

IB-8004 4

Lineup of Expansion Module

Model Module Parameter

HM-800 Multi Module (IBP, TEMP, CO) x 2

(IBP, TEMP, CO) x 1
HM-801 Multi Module
AUX Connector x1

HP-800 Multiport Module Serial Communication 2ch, Analog Communication 1ch

SpO2 Module M
HG-810 SpO2, SpCO*, SpMet*, SpHb*, PVI *, PR
(Masimo)

SpO2 Module N
HG-820 SpO2, PR
(Nellcor)

*: SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, PVI measurements are optional functions.

1-2
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Features

Lineup of Gas Module

Model Module Parameter

HPD-810 CO2 measurement by Mainstream method with a

Gas Unit I/F
HPD-820 connection to Philips Capnostat 5

HCP-810 Incorporates Microstream technology developed by

CO2 Unit Covidien
HCP-820
Sidestream Method

Lineup of EEG Module

Model Module Parameter

HBX-800 BISx I/F Unit BIS, SQI, EMG, SR, EEG, SEF, TOTPOW

Features

 Various displays such as enlarged numeric data, trend, or ventilator can be selected according to monitoring
conditions.
The operation can be performed with the touch panel. Also, frequently used keys can be programmed as user
key.
 It is possible to connect two types of display units in addition to the main display unit to extend the display.
 An optional mouse can be connected allowing mouse operation. (However, some operations are not possible.)
 The alarm indicator notifies the alarm with different flashing patterns corresponding to the alarm level so that
the users can easily identify the alarm level of the generating alarm.
 Remote control is possible using the optional remote control unit.
Using the CF-820 IR Remote Control Unit allows to remotely control the patient monitor.
 By using the multiparameter amplifier, the HS-8000 series Super Unit is capable of monitoring parameters in
combination of BP (maximum 6 channels), temperature (maximum 6 channels), and CO (maximum 1channel).
In addition to ECG, respiration, SpO2 (pulse wave), BP, NIBP, temperature and CO, it is also possible to
measure CO2 and BIS as optional function.
 By using the multiparameter amplifier, the DS-8007 is capable of monitoring basic parameters of BP (max. 4
ch.), temperature (max. 6ch.), CO (max. 1ch.), and optional parameters of CO2 and BIS.
 27 types of arrhythmia can be analyzed.
 By using the optional SpO2 Module (HG-810/HG-820), arterial oxygen saturation can be also measured. By
using the system with the Super Unit, arterial oxygen saturation measured at 2 different sites can be monitored
as additional parameter.
 This system uses pulse oximetry to measure and display functional oxygen saturation in the blood. There are
two model types with different built-in SpO2 modules, which are Covidien/Nellcor and Masimo.
 SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, PVI measurement are optional function available when using the HS-8312M/DS-8007M
and HG-810 with built-in Masimo SpO2 module.
SpOC measurement is optional function available when using the DS-8007M.
 RR_SpO2 is optional parameter which can be measured on the DS-8007N with the built-in Covidien SpO2
module.
 By using the optional HP-800 Multiport Module, or connecting the ventilator to Status II port on the main unit,
airway flow, airway pressure waveform, minute ventilation, airway resistance, etc. can be monitored. Also,
ventilator alarm can be notified to the central monitor via wireless and wired network. The following
ventilators can be connected.
 SV-300/300A

1-3
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Features

 SERVO-i, SERVO-s, SERVO-U/n/air

 PURITAN-BENNETT Ventilator 740/760, 840
 Evita 4/Evita XL/Evita 2 dura
 Velia, Ultra, Astral
 Wired network (DS-LANII/DS-LANIII) is possible via the Ethernet LAN cable.
DS-LAN II is a network based on 10BASE-T with transmission speed of 10 Mbps and maximum transmission
distance of 100 m. DS-LANIII is a network based on 100BASE-TX with transmission speed of 100 Mbps and
maximum transmission distance of 100 m.
 Wireless network construction is possible using the optional telemetry transmitter module (HLX-801).
 By attaching the module to the built-in slot, monitoring parameters can be added without the Input Box.
 By using the optional Multi Module (HM-800/HM-801), the monitoring parameters can be added. To use more
than one expansion module, optional Input Box (IB-8004) is required.
 By using the optional Recorder Unit (HR-800), the measurement data can be printed.
 By connecting the optional Multigas Unit (MGU-800/810 series), CO2 concentration, anesthetic gas
concentration, O2 measurement, N2O concentration can be measured. The following anesthetic agents can be
measured.
 Halothane
 Isoflurane
 Sevoflurane
 Enflurane
 Desflurane
 By connecting the Gas Unit I/F (HPD-810/HPD-820) or CO2 Gas Unit (HCP-810/HCP-820), CO2
concentration can be measured.
 By using the HP-800 Multiport Module, or by connecting the FLOW-i, GE, Draeger anesthesia delivery system
to Status II port or to COM1 to COM4 port on the main unit, CO2 concentration, anesthetic gas concentration
(ISO, SEV, DES), O2 concentration, N2O concentration, airway flow, airway pressure waveform, minute
ventilation, airway resistance, etc. can be monitored.
 By using the HP-800 Multiport Module, or connecting the Oximeter to Status II port or to COM 1 to 4 port on
the main unit, SvO2, CO, etc. can be monitored. The following Oximeter/CCO measurement device can be
connected.
 Vigilance
 Vigilance CEDV
 Vigilance II
 Vigileo
 HemoSphere
 PiCCO2
 EV1000
 PulsioFlex (connects to COM1 to COM4 port)
 By using the HP-800 Multiport Module, or by connecting the A-2000 BIS Monitor/A-3000 BIS Vista
(Covidien) to Status II port or to COM 1 to 4 port on the main unit, the patient's wakeful state can be monitored.
 By using the HP-800 Multiport Module, or connecting the AEP Monitor aepEX PLUS (Medical Device
Management) to Status II port or to COM1 to 4 port on the main unit, AEP index can be monitored.
 By using the HP-800 Multiport Module, or by connecting the INVOS 5100C Cerebral Oximeter (Covidien) to
Status II port or to COM1 to 4 port on the main unit, regional cerebral oxygen saturation data can be monitored.
 By connecting the following transcutaneous blood gas monitors to COM1 to COM4 ports, transcutaneous
blood gas partial pressure can be monitored.
 TCM4
 TCM5 FLEX

1-4
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Menu Configurations

Menu Configurations

The menu configuration of this device is as follows.

Menu Screen
The menu screen is a group of shortcut keys to jump to each menu.
The menu is composed of the following 10 groups and can be accessed from the menu screen.
Function Groups Displayed Menu

Admit/Discharge Admit/Discharge

Basic Setup Maximum of 9 functions are displayed.

Alarm Maximum of 9 functions are displayed.

Parameter Maximum of 18 functions are displayed.

Data Review Maximum of 9 functions are displayed.

Waveform Review Maximum of 9 functions are displayed.

Calculation Maximum of 5 functions are displayed.

Other Bed Other bedside monitors connected to the DS-LAN will be displayed.

Initial Settings Initial settings menu will be displayed.

Maintenance Maintenance menu will be displayed.

REFERENCE
 Other than the "Initial Settings", the items to be displayed on the menu screen can be
customized by groups.
(

Maintenance Manual "Menu Setup" P5-21)

Admit/Discharge
Admit/Discharge Mode Selection

ID, Name, Classification, Sex, Team, Birth Date, Age, Height, Weight, BSA,
Blood Type (ABO, Rh), Pacemaker, Impedance Meas., Admit Date/Time

Monitor Suspend

Discharge

Basic Setup
Display Configuration Layout, Background, Palette, Detail Setup, Meas., Wave (Sweep Speed), Short Trend,
User Key

Manual Printing Basic (Printer, Waveform, Print Duration, Delay Time), 12-Lead (12-Lead Waveform/
Analysis Format, Position, Wave Format, Print Calibration, Printer Auto Scale, Lead
Boundary), Other Setup (Graphic Printing, Recall Printing), Common (QRS Classific.,
Speed, Calibration: Print Calibration, Print NIBP Data)

Auto Printing Alarm Printing (Print, Printer, Waveform, Print Duration), Periodic Printing (Print, Printer,
Periodic Interval, Waveform, Print Duration), Common (QRS Classific, Speed, Print
Calibration, Print NIBP Data)

Tone/Volume Vital Alarm Sound, Ventilator Alarm Sound, Status Alarm Sound, Tone Source, Key
Sound, Other Bed Alarm Sound, Boot/Shutdown, Other

Time/Date Time, Date

Color Waveform/Numeric Data, Background, Palette, User Key

Brightness Brightness

Night Mode Night Mode, Detail Setup (Volume, Display, Alarm Indicator)

1-5
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Menu Configurations

Alarm
Basic The parameters to be displayed are selectable.

Alarm Suspend, Mode Select, Print, All Auto

Circulatory Alarms for HR, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady, PR, SpO2, Ext SpO2, NIBP, BP,TEMP can be set.

Alarm Suspend, Mode Select, Print, All Auto

Respiratory/Gas Alarm for RR, APNEA and gas can be set.

Alarm Suspend, Mode Select, Print, All Auto

Arrhythmia Arrhythmia Alarm, Detail Setup

ST ST Alarm, Waveform Review (ST), Update Ref. Wave

List List of alarm ON/OFF setting and lower/upper limits, Meas. List/All List, Print Setup, Recall
Setup

Detail Setup Alarm Suspend Time, Alarm Silence Time, Alarm Silence, Alarm Sound Suspend, Status
Alarm Control, Alarm Limit Display

Parameter
ECG Arrhy., Arrhy. Alarm Setup, ST Setup, HR

Size, Lead, Optimize Size, Alarm Assist, Disp. ON/OFF

Detail Setup
Filter, Synchronized Mark/Tone, Pacemaker, Pacemaker Pulse, Pace Pulse Mask Time,
HR Average, HR Delay, ECG Drift Filter, AC Filter, Auto Lead, 3Lead Override, ST/VPC/
Arrhy. Alarm Display, ECG Analog Output, ECG waveform display during Lead-OFF,
Noise Detection

RESP Size, Common Setup (RR Synchronized Mark, RR/Apnea Alarm Source), RR, Apnea,
Alarm Assist, Display ON/OFF

Impedance Setup
CVA Detection, Impedance Measurement, Impedance Detection Lead, Impedance
Detection Level

NIBP NIBP Auto Mode, NIBP S, M, D, Alarm Assist, Cancel Error

Detail Setup
Patient Classification, Dyna Alert, Oscillograph, PR Display, NIBP Erase Time, Measure
at Alarm, Quick Measurement, Sight Inflation, MAP, End Tone, User Interval, Auto Mode
with Start/Stop key, Time Display, Periodic Measurement Starting Time, Oscill. Print,
Target Inflation Value

BP BP Zero (BP1 to BP8), Scale Selection, Label, Alarm Assist, Display ON/OFF

Detail Setup
Synchronized Mark/Tone, Display Type, Wave Filter, Mean Wave, Respiration Filter, IBP
Analog Output, Alarm during NIBP, ART Catheter Check Message

SpO2 Size, Label, Alarm Assist, Disp. ON/OFF

HS-83xxN/HG-820 Detail Setup

/DS-8007N Alarm during NIBP, Synchronized Mark/Tone, Second Alarm

HS-83xxM/HG-810 Detail Setup

/DS-8007M Alarm during NIBP, Synchronized Mark/Tone, SpO2 Averaging, Pulse Sensitivity, FAST
SAT, PI Display, Signal IQ Wave

Sp* SpCO, SpMet, SpHb Setup

Sp* RR_SpO2 Common Setup

RR Synchronized Mark, RR/Apnea Alarm Source), Display ON/OFF, Alarm Assist, RR,
Apnea

TEMP Label, ∆T Setting, Alarm Assist, T1 to T8 Disp. ON/OFF

GAS Scale, Gas Calibration, Detail Setup (Flow Rate, Wave Clip, CO2 Source Priority)

CO2 Scale, Airway Adapter Calibration, Alarm Assist, Disp. ON/OFF

1-6
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Menu Configurations

Detail Setup
EtCO2 Peak Duration, N2O Compensation, Atmospheric Pressure, O2 Compensation,
Anesthetic Compensation, CO2 Source Priority
BIS Scale, Alarm Assist, TREND-E

Common Setup
Short Trend 2nd Parameter, Smoothing Rate, Continuous Impedance Check, EEG Filter

External SvO2/CCO, VENT, INVOS

Device

Data Review
Graphic Trend Latest Data, Alarm Review, Trend Group, Alarm Disp. Sel., Print

Tabular Trend Latest Data, Alarm Review, List Group, Setup, Print, Print (All)

Recall Latest Data, Display Selection, Setup, Delete Sel.

OCRG Latest Data, Alarm Review, Setup, Alarm Display, Print

Alarm History Latest Data, Display Selection, Print

Waveform Review
Zoom Wave Latest Data, Alarm Review, Meas., Print, Delete
ST ST Waveform, Reference Waveform, Setup, Slide Show, Size, Latest Data, Print

12-lead Latest Data, Review, Start Analyze, Setup, Print

Full Disclosure Waveform Latest Data, Alarm Review, Slide Show, Time Search, Size/Scale, Setup, Alarm Display,
Print

Calculation
Hemodynamics Input Data, Edit, calculation results list, New Regist., Index Display, Print

Lung Function Input Data, Edit, calculation results list, New Regist., Index Display, Print

CO Meas., Edit, Setup, Hemodynamics, Average CO Input, Delete Sel.

Drug Calculation Drug Name, Drug Amount, Diluent Amount, Dosing Rate, Flow Rate, Weight

Other Bed
Other Bed Display Area Selection (Area 1 to 5), Other Bed Alarm Sound, Alarm Display, Area Setup (Area 1
to 5), Bed List

Other Bed Display Area Selection (Area 1 to 5), Other Bed Alarm Silence, ON/OFF of menu title display,
Waveform Selection

Initial Settings
Alarm - Alarm System, Basic Alarm Parameter, Asystole, VF, VT Alarm,
Oxygenator Mode Setup, Buzzer Tone at Speaker Failure, Suspend Arrhy.
Analysis during Noise Interference, Lower Limit for Alarm Volume, Alarm
Indicator, Alarm Level, HR/PR Lower Limit during Alarm Auto Setting,
Alarm Threshold Limit, Auto Alarm Setup

Measurement User Label BP User Label, TEMP User Label

Unit CO2, BP, CVP, TEMP, ST, Height/Weight

Other NIBP Start 5min. early, MAP Calc.(ART, NIBP), Arrhythmia Analysis Filter,
Synchronized Mark/Tone Priority, HR/PR Source Priority, Gas Display
during Undetected Breath, Catheter Manufacturer for CC Input

1-7
Chapter 1 General Description of the Device Menu Configurations

User I/F Display/Print Date Format, BP Alarm Increment, Trend Clip, BP Printing Scale, Night
Mode Cancel, ST Display Lead Setup, VENT Display Parameters, Hemo/
etc Display Parameters, Auto Display Configuration, Dim All Data Other
than Numeric, All Window Opaque, Printer Message Display, Message
Icon, Operation Guide Display, Notification when Changing Device
Configuration, Sync wave size/scale of extended display with main unit,
12-lead Analysis Filter Display, Waveform Size Display, Shift Time (Day
Shift, Twilight Shift, Night Shift), Key Group Setup, Event Label Setup, RR
Alarm Increment, Patient Name on the Information Display Area, External
Device Numeric Data Box Operation, Drug Calculation, Monitor Suspend
Label, Monitor Suspend Timer

Power ON/ Discharge Check Discharge at Power ON, Discharge Mode, NIBP Resume Auto
Mode with Manual Measurement., Backup Setting at Power ON/Discharge

Menu Items to be displayed on the menu screen can be selected.

Key Mask Items not to be displayed on the menu screen can be selected.
Remote Control Remote Control Key Function, Room ID, Bed ID

Operation Mouse, Auto Hide Window, Auto Minimize

External Device Main Unit Port COM, Status II, U-LINK, Numbering of HP-800
HP-800 Ventilator (SV-300, SERVO-i/s, SERVO-U/n/air, PB, Evita) , SvO2/CCO
(Vigilance, PiCCO, PulsioFlex), GAS/SPIRO (MGU-800, MGU-810), Other
(PC Comm., HLX, Barcode, Magnetic Card, BIS, aepEX, INVOS, FLOW-
i, TCM4/TCM5, PC Comm. (DS-5000), Anes.GE, Anes.Draeger, Apollo
Draeger), Trend Data Setup

Magnetic Card Reader Data digits for each patient information, Auto Reference to Central Monitor
when Reading Patient ID

Network Main Unit (IP Address, Sub-Network Mask, Default Gateway),

Printer (network printer, IP address, MAC address, printer specification,
paper size)

Status Output Alarm Output

Analog Output Analog Output Setup, Sync. Signal Output

System DS-LAN DS-LAN Setup, Room ID, Bed ID, DS-LAN Pat. ID Tx Transmission Start
Position, Synchronize Hemodynamic Data with the Central Monitor,
CO2(mmHg) Upper Limit of Transmission
Telemeter Tele. ON/OFF, Channel/Group ID, Telemetry Wave, CO2(mmHg) Upper
Limit of Transmission

Unit Module Multiparameter connector setup of HS-8000/DS-8007, HM-800/HM-801,

channel setup of SpO2

Other AC filter, Search Patient ID, Data Transfer, Data Selection for Transfer,
Numeric Data External Output, HLX, HR-800, Extended Display Unit

User Mode - Registering/Changing/Initializing the User Mode, Link with Patient

Registration Classification

Administrator Setup Key Lock Key lock for each function can be set.

Password Setup Password for each administrator level can be registered/changed.

Maintenance
Maintenance Program Version, External Media, GAS Accuracy Check, Parts Usage Time, Install,
Module Install, Test Menu

1-8
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their

Functions
Names of Parts and Their Functions

WARNING
 Do not connect any device or cable not authorized by Fukuda Denshi to any I/O connector.
If unspecified device or cable is connected, not only that this device cannot deliver its
maximum performance, the device may be damaged and safety cannot be ensured.

Main Unit: DSC-8400 series

Front Side
1 Display Unit Attaching Position
Attaches the display unit (LC-8018TC/LC-8016TC).
1
2 Display Unit Connector
Connects the display unit.

Rear Side
1 HLX Fixing Position
Fixes the Telemetry Transmitter Module (HLX-801). 1

2 Potential Equalization Terminal

Used for equipotential connection.

3 Power Supply Connector

Connects the power cable. 4
2
4 Battery 3
Attaches the battery (BTO-005).

2-1
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Left Side
1 Super Unit Connector
Connects the specified device.
2
2 Module Connector
Connects the specified device.
1
3 Super Unit Release Lever
Releases the Super Unit from the main unit.
3

Right Side
The illustration shown on right is when the optional CC-84 and HR-800 are installed.
No. 11 to No. 14 described below can be used only when the
CC-84 is installed.
1 Card Slot (CF, CFast)
A slot to insert the specified external media 15
1
2 Card Access Indicator (CF, CFast) 2

Indicates the external media access status. 11 3

12 4
3 DS-LAN Connector 5
Connects to the wired network using the Branch Cable (CJ- 13 6
522). 7
14 8
4 I/O Connector
Connects the specified device.

5 External Monitor Connector

Connects the external monitor. 9 10
6 AUX Connector
For future function enhancement.

7 Serial Connector (COM1 to 4)

Connects the specified device.

8 Status II Input/Output Connector

Connects the specified device.

9 U-LINK Connector
Connects the Recorder Unit (HR-800) and Multigas Unit (MGU-800/MGU-810 series).

10 module-LAN Connector
Connects the HS Adapter (HSA-80), DS-8007 Adapter (DSA-82), or the Input Box (IB-8004).

11 LAN (TCP/IP) Connector

Connects the specified device.

12 I/O Connector (Alarm)

Connects the specified device.

13 Serial Connector (COM A, B)

Connects the specified device.

2-2
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

14 Extended Display Unit Connector

Connects the specified device.

15 Recorder Unit Slot

A slot to insert the HR-800.

Display Unit: LC-8018TC/LC-8016TC

This section explains about the LC-8018TC (18.5 inch), LC-8016TC (15.6 inch).

Front Side
1 Remote Control Sensor 5 5

Receives the infrared remote control signal.

2 Battery Charging LED

Indicates the battery-charging status. During 6
battery operation, the LED will not light.
Orange: Charging is in process 1
Green: Charging is complete 2
Light Off: During battery operation, or when 3
battery is not installed, or when battery charging is 4
ceased (due to temperature, etc.)
Flash: Battery charging error

3 Power Supply LED

Indicates the power supply status.
Lights when the AC power is supplied to the main unit and links with the standby switch.
 Orange: Standby Mode
 Green: In normal operation
The light will be OFF when the AC power is not supplied to the main unit or during battery operation.

4 Standby Switch
Sets ON/OFF the standby condition.

5 Alarm Indicator
Lights/blinks when the alarm generates.
Red: Level H (Urgent Alarm, Alarm Priority/High)
Yellow: Level M (Cautionary Alarm, Alarm Priority/Medium)
Blue: Level L (Status Alarm, Alarm Priority/Low)

6 Fixed Keys
(
"Fixed Keys" P3-1)
NOTE
 If the battery charging LED flashes, battery charging error is occurring. Remove the battery
and install it again. If the error persists, contact your nearest service representative.

2-3
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Rear Side
1 Display Unit Attaching Position
Attaches to the main unit.
1
2 Mouse/Keyboard Connector
Connects the optional mouse.

3 Main Unit Connector 3

Connects the main unit. 2

CAUTION
 The display unit utilizes LED for the backlight. Since this LED deteriorates by the life cycle,
the display may become dark, scintillate or may not light by the long term use. In such case,
contact your nearest service representative.

Super Unit: HS-8000 Series

Front Side
1 NIBP Start/Stop Key
Starts/stops the NIBP measurement.The indicator 1
lights during the NIBP measurement. 2
7
3
2 BP Zero Balance Indicator 4
Performs BP zero balance.The indicator lights during
the BP zero balancing. 5 8

3 Alarm Silence Key

9
Silences the Alarm.The indicator lights during the alarm
silence condition.
6
4 Power Supply LED
Indicates the power supply status.

5 ECG Connector
Connects the ECG cable.

6 AUX Connector
Connects the Gas Unit I/F (HPD-810), CO2 Gas Unit (HCP-810), or BISx I/F Unit (HBX-800).

7 Multiparameter Connector
Connects the input cables for BP, TEMP or CO.

8 NIBP Connector
Connects the NIBP air hose.

9 SpO2 Connector
Connects the SpO2 sensor, or relay cable (patient cable).

2-4
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Rear Side
1 HS Adapter Connector
Connects the HSA-80 HS Adapter.

2 Analog Output Connector

Outputs the ECG and BP waveforms.

HS Adapter: HSA-80

Front Side
1 Super Unit Connector
1
Connects the HS-8000 series.

2 Release Lever
Releases the HS-8000 series from the HS
Adapter.

Rear Side
1 module-LAN Connector
Connects the Main Unit or IB-8004.

2-5
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

HS Adapter for DS-8400: HSA-81

Front Side
1 Super Unit Connector 1
Connects the HS-8000 series.

2 Release Lever
Releases the HS-8000 series from the
HSA-81.
2

Rear Side
1 DS I/F Connector
Connects the HSA-81 to the DSC-8410.

Transport Monitor: DS-8007 Series

NOTE
 When the DS-8007 is connected to this device via DSA-82, the DS-8007 fixed keys (MENU,
PRINT START/STOP, NIBP START/STOP) and alarm silence key are enabled on the host
monitor.
 When this device is connected, the standby switch, HOME key, alarm indicator and alarm
sound suspend key on the DS-8007 will not function.
 For the operation procedure when DS-8007 is used without connection to other system,
refer to the DS-8007 system Operation Manual.

Front Side
1 Standby Switch
Sets ON/OFF the standby condition.
4
2 Power Supply LED 1 5
Indicates the power supply status. Light will be off 2
when the AC power is not supplied to the monitor. 3
Orange: Standby Mode
Green: In normal operation
Light Off: During battery operation (AC power cable is
not connected.)

3 Battery Charging LED

Indicates the battery-charging status. During battery
operation, the LED will not light.
Orange: Charging is in process
Green: Charging is complete
Light Off: During battery operation, or when battery is not installed, or when battery charging is ceased (due to
temperature, etc.)
Flash: Battery charging error

2-6
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

NOTE
 If the battery charging LED flashes, battery charging error is occurring. Remove the
battery and install it again. If the error persists, contact your nearest service
representative.

4 Fixed Key
HOME Key
MENU Key
PRINT START/STOP Key
NIBP START/STOP Key

5 Alarm Indicator, Alarm Silence Key/Alarm Sound Suspend Key

Lights/blinks when the alarm generates.
Red: Level H (Urgent Alarm, Alarm Priority/High)
Yellow: Level M (Cautionary Alarm, Alarm Priority/Medium)
Blue: Level L (Status Alarm, Alarm Priority/Low)
By pressing this key during alarm generation, the alarm will temporarily silence.
When "Alarm Sound Suspend" setting is ON, the alarm sound can be suspended by holding down this key.
(
 "Detail Setup" P6-6)

Rear Side
1 CO2 I/F Connector
Attaches the Gas Unit I/F (HPD-820) or CO2 Gas Unit
(HCP-820).
1

Right Side
1 USB Memory Slot
Insert a USB memory.

2 Battery Cover
Stores the specified lithium-ion battery.
2
3 DS I/F Connector
Connects to the DSA-81 AC Unit, DSA-82 DS-8007 Adapter, 1
or DSC-8410.

2-7
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Left Side
1 Analog Output Connector
Outputs the ECG, BP, synchronized signal.

2 ECG Connector
Connects the specified ECG relay cable. 1
5
3 NIBP Connector 6
Connects the NIBP air hose. 2
4 AUX Connector
7
Connects the Gas Unit I/F (HPD-810), CO2 Gas Unit (HCP-
810), BISx I/F Unit (HBX-800).
3
5 Temperature Connector
Connects the TEMP sensor cable. 4
6 Multiparameter Connector
Connects the input cables for BP, TEMP or CO.

7 SpO2 Connector
Connects the SpO2 sensor, or relay cable (patient cable).

NOTE
 When operating as an input module by connecting to the rear side of the host monitor (DS-
8400 system), standby switch, fixed key, alarm indicator will not function..

Bottom Side
The illustration shown on right is when the cover is removed.
1 SD Card Indicator
Lights when the SD card is accessed.

2 SD Card Slot
Card slot for the specified SD card 1
2

Adapter for DS-8007: DSA-82

1 DS I/F Connector
Connects the DSA-82 to the DS-8007. 1
2 DS-8007/HS-8000 Switch
This is a switch to change between DS-8007 and HS-
8000.The selected unit and the host monitor will
communicate.The LED for the selected unit will light in 2
green.Switching to the left will communicate with the DS-
8007.Switching to the right will communicate with the
HS-8000. 3
3 Lock Lever
Lever to release the DS-8007 series from the DSA-82

2-8
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

4 Host Monitor Connector

Connects the host monitor.

5 HS-8000 Connector
Connects the HS-8000 via HSA-80.

4 5

NOTE
 When the DS-8007 is connected via DSA-82, the NIBP auto mode setting of the DS-8007
will be displayed on the DS-8007, but the actual measurement will be performed according
to the NIBP auto mode setting of the DS-8400.

Multi Module: HM-800

Front Side
1 Power Supply LED
Indicates the power ON/OFF status. 1
2
2 BP Zero Balance LED 3
Lights during BP zero balancing.

3 BP Zero Balance Key

Starts BP zero balance. 4

4 Multiparameter Connector
Connects the input cables for BP, TEMP or CO.

5 Release Lock Button

Press to lock the release lever.
5
6 Release Lever
Press here to remove the expansion modules from the input 6
box.

Rear Side
1 Power Input Connector
Supplies power while connecting to the input box .
1
2 Infrared Communication Port
Communicates with the input box via IrDA.

2-9
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

HM-801 Multi Module

Front Side
1 Power Supply LED
1
Indicates the power ON/OFF status. 2
3
2 BP Zero Balance Indicator
Lights during BP zero balancing.

3 BP Zero Balance Key

4
Starts BP zero balance.

4 Multiparameter Connector
5
Connects the input cables for BP, TEMP or CO.

5 AUX Connector 6
Connects the Gas Unit I/F (HPD-810), CO2 Gas Unit (HCP-
810), BISx I/F Unit (HBX-800). 7

6 Release Lock Button

Press to lock the release lever.

7 Release Lever
Press here to remove the expansion modules from the input box.

Rear Side
1 Power Input Connector
Supplies power while connecting to the input box.
1
2 Infrared Communication Port
Communicates with the input box via IrDA.

2-10
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

SpO2 Module (HG-810/HG-820)

HG-810 (Masimo model) and HG-820 (Nellcor ) can be used for the SpO2 modules. The following shows the
example of HG-810.

Front Side
1
1 Power Supply LED
Indicates the power ON/OFF status.

2 SpO2 Connector
Connects the SpO2 sensor, or relay cable (patient cable).
2
3 Release Lock Button
Press to lock the release lever.

4 Release Lever
Press here to remove the expansion modules from the input
box.
3

4
Rear Side
1 Power Input Connector
Supplies power while connecting to the input box . 1

2 Infrared Communication Port

Communicates with the input box via IrDA.

2-11
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Multiport Module: HP-800

Front Side
1 Power Supply LED 1

Indicates the power ON/OFF status.

2 Status Input/Output Connector 2

Performs serial communication with the external device, and inputs
alarm status of the external device.

3 Analog Input Connector

Inputs analog signal of the external device. 3

4 Release Lock Button

Press to lock the release lever. 4
5 Release Lever
Press here to remove the expansion modules from the input box. 5

Rear Side
1 Power Input Connector
Supplies power while connecting to the input box .
1
2 Infrared Communication Port
Communicates with the input box via IrDA.

2-12
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Recorder Unit: HR-800

Front Side
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Power Supply Indicator
Indicates the power status.

2 Printing Indicator
Lights during printing.

3 Print Key
Starts/stops the printing.

4 Paper Feed Indicator

Lights during paper feeding.

5 Paper Feed Key

Feeds the paper.

6 Open/Close Lever
Press to open the paper holder.

Rear Side
1 U-LINK Connector
Connects to the MGU-800/810 series Multigas Unit or Main
Unit.

2-13
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Input Box: IB-8004

Front Side
1 LAN-ID Setting Indicator 1
Indicates the assigned LAN-ID. 2
3
2 Power Output Connector
Supplies power to the expansion module.

3 Infrared Communication Port

4
Communicates with the expansion module
via IrDA.

4 Expansion Module Connection Slot

Connects maximum of 4 expansion modules
to slot 1 to 4.

Rear Side
1 LAN ID Setting Dial
Sets the LAN ID to 1.

2 module-LAN Connector x3
Connects the Main Unit, IB-8004, or HSA-80 1
HS Adapter.
2

REFERENCE
 For the connection procedure, refer to the operation manual of the IB-8004.

2-14
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-810

Front Side 3
1 Power Supply LED
Indicates the power ON/OFF status. It will light in green 1
while the power is ON.

2 Sampling Tube Connector

Connects the sampling tube manufactured by Covidien.
2
3 Clip
Attaches to the bedside rail or headboard for bedside use.

Rear Side
1 AUX Connector
Connects to the AUX connector of HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-
801 with AUX connection cable.

2 Exhaust Hole 2

Connects the gas exhaust system and exhausts sampling

gas.
1

NOTE
 The usable AUX connection cable differs depending on the connecting device. For the
combination of the AUX connection cable and the connecting device, refer to the section on
"Optional Accessories".

CAUTION
 Do not block the exhaust hole as it may cause damage to the device.

2-15
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-820

Front Side
1 Sampling Tube Connector
Connects the sampling tube manufactured by Covidien.

Rear Side
1 Gas Unit Connector
Connects to the CO2 I/F connector of the DS-8007. 1

2 Exhaust Hole
Connects the gas exhaust system and exhausts
sampling gas.
2

CAUTION
 Do not block the exhaust hole as it may cause damage to the equipment.

2-16
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Gas Unit I/F: HPD-810

Front Side 3
1 Power Supply LED
Indicates the power ON/OFF status. It will light in green 1
while the power is ON.

2 CO2 Connector
Connects to the Capnostat 5 (Philips).

3 Clip 2
Attaches to the bedside rail or headboard for bedside use.

Rear Side
1 AUX Connector
Connects to the AUX connector of HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-
801 with AUX connection cable.

NOTE
 The usable AUX connection cable differs depending on the connecting device. For the
combination of the AUX connection cable and the connecting device, refer to the section on
"Optional Accessories".

2-17
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Gas Unit I/F: HPD-820

Front Side
1 CO2 Connector
Connects to the Capnostat 5 (Philips).

Rear Side
1 Gas Unit Connector
Connects to the CO2 I/F connector on the DS-8007. 1

2-18
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

BISx I/F Unit: HBX-800

Front Side
1 BISx Module Connector
Connects the BISx (Covidien).
1
2 Power Supply LED
Indicates the power ON/OFF status.
Lights in orange when the power is ON, and BISx is not
connected.Lights in green when the BISx is connected.
2

Rear Side
1 AUX Connector
Connects to the AUX connector of HS-8000/DS-8007
with AUX connection cable.

NOTE
 The usable AUX connection cable differs depending on the connecting device. For the
combination of the AUX connection cable and the connecting device, refer to the section on
"Optional Accessories".

2-19
Chapter 2 Names of Parts and Their Functions Names of Parts and Their Functions

Multigas Unit: MGU-800/810 Series

Front Side (MGU-801P/MGU-811P)

1 Power Supply LED 1

Indicates the power ON/OFF status.

2 Inhale Port 2
5
Connects the sampling tube to inhale sampling 3
gas. 4
3 Water Trap with Reservoir
Removes the water from the sampling tube
connected to the patient. When the reservoir is
more than half full with water, empty the water.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Water Trap
(Multigas Unit)" P8-5)

4 Exhaust Hole
Connects gas exhaust system and exhausts sampling gas.

WARNING
 To protect the hospital staffs from unnecessary anesthetic agent, it is strongly
recommended to connect the exhaust hole to the gas exhaust system in the hospital.

CAUTION
 Do not block the exhaust hole as it may cause damage to the device.

5 Flow Sensor Connector (For MGU-810 series only)

Connects the flow sensor cable.

Rear Side
1 External Device Connector 1
Connects the main unit.

2 External Device Connector 2

Connects the Recorder Unit (HR-800). 2

2-20
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Operation Procedure

Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and

Screen Examples
Operation Procedure

All operation of this device is performed using the fixed keys, touch keys, and mouse (optional). The device can also
be operated remotely using the optional remote control.

Fixed Keys

1 Alarm Silence Key

Silences the alarm.
The key LED will light during the alarm silence
condition.

2 NIBP Start/Stop Key 1

2
Starts/stops the NIBP measurement.
3
If pressed during the measurement, the
measurement will cease.
The key LED will light during the NIBP measurement.
4
3 NIBP Auto Mode Key
The NIBP Auto Mode setup window will be displayed.
The key LED will light when the NIBP Auto Mode is
set.

4 Standby Switch
Enters into standby mode or cancels the standby mode.

Touch Key

General Key Control

3
1

1 Pressing the [Menu] key will switch the display with a pip sound.

2 The touch key will respond by pressing any part of the key.

3 Pressing the [Home] key at any time will return the display to the home display.

3-1
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Operation Procedure

REFERENCE
 The above is an example of the screen. The user keys can be customized and can be placed
to any position.
(
 "To Configure the Display" P10-4)

Key Control for Each Parameter

1 Press the numeric data box area.

The touch key will respond by pressing any part of the numeric data box.

2 Pressing the [Home] key at any time will return the display to the home display.

REFERENCE
 Frequently used touch keys can be programmed as user key. The user keys can be
positioned to the user key display area and also to the numeric data area.
(
 "For Easier Use" P3-27)

Mouse

An optional mouse can be connected allowing touch key control using the mouse.
By moving the pointer on the displayed keys, and left-clicking the mouse, the operation can be performed just the
same as by directly touching the displayed keys.

The pointer will be hidden if the mouse is not used for 5 minutes.(default operation)
The hidden mouse pointer will be displayed again by moving the mouse.
NOTE
 It is necessary to set the mouse function (ON/OFF, pointer shape, moving speed) in
advance. (
 Maintenance Manual "Operation Related Setup" P5-26)
 Some mouse operation such as dragging operation is not possible on this equipment.

3-2
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Home Display

About the Home Display

The display can be configured according to the monitoring purpose.

The display layout can be selected from the following combinations of display location and size of numeric data box.
Display Location of Numeric Data Numeric Data Box Size Features

Right/Left By selecting 2 columns, more numeric data can be

Right/Left: 1 column/ 2 columns
monitored. Also, 12-lead ECG can be displayed on the
Right/Left+Bottom Bottom: 1 row/2 rows
waveform display area.

Bottom 2 rows to 6 rows The waveform display area or numeric data can be
enlarged.

By connecting maximum of 2 extended display units, maximum of 2 displays independent from the main display can
be used. (extended display function)
Also, the user key location can be selected from left, right, or bottom. By selecting the layout of 2 columns on left/
right, more user keys can be displayed.
REFERENCE
 The display layout can be configured/registered according to the monitoring waveform and
numeric data as necessary.
(
 "To Configure the Display" P10-4)

Display Example

Standard (Box Layout: Right) 12-Lead (Box Layout: Right)

Standard (Box Layout: Bottom 5 rows)

On this system, 9 main modes and 6 sub modes can be preprogrammed according to the monitoring purpose.
By registering the configuration to each mode, the display configuration setups at admittance of patient can be
simplified by just selecting one of the modes.

3-3
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display


( "To Select the User Mode" P5-8)
It is recommended to program the display mode in rough classification such as patient’s condition, monitoring
purpose (ICU or surgery), and if necessary, perform unique setup for each patient.

Oxygenator Mode
WARNING
 The oxygenator mode is intended to prevent alarms during cardiopulmonary bypass
surgery. Pay special attention when using this mode as the alarm generation will not be the
same as to the standard monitoring mode.
 If the "Alarm Setting" under the Oxygenator Mode Setup is set to [All OFF], all vital alarm will
not generate regardless of the alarm setting of each parameter. Also, if [Sel. Parameter] is
set, vital alarm for unselected parameter will not generate. Pay attention to not miss any
significant change of the patient's vital sign as the alarms will not be generated during the
Oxygenator Mode.
 Once the cardiopulmonary bypass is finished, make sure to cancel the Oxygenator Mode
and return to the standard monitoring mode.

CAUTION
 If the NIBP alarm is turned OFF under the Oxygenator Mode, NIBP auto mode measurement
and NIBP measurement at alarm occurrence will not be performed.

Oxygenator mode can be used to prevent frequent alarm generation when oxygenator is used for extracorporeal
circulation during cardiac surgery.
During oxygenator mode, "Oxygenator Mode" will be displayed on the screen, alarm generation will be stopped, and
low priority parameter will be displayed with decreased brightness.

The main difference of standard monitoring mode and oxygenator mode is as follows.
Standard Monitoring Mode Oxygenator Mode
Vital Alarm will be generated. will not be generated,
or only the alarm for specified parameter will be
generated.*
Device Status Alarm will be generated. will be generated for specified parameter.

NIBP Periodic will be performed. If [NIBP] is not selected on Oxygenator Mode Setup,
Measurement periodic measurement will not be performed.
It will not be performed even if NIBP measurement is
requested from the central monitor.

Night Mode Night mode can be used. Night mode cannot be used.

*It is also possible to set the same alarm function with the standard monitoring mode.

REFERENCE
 The oxygenator mode setup can be performed under [Menu>Initial
Settings>Alarm>Oxygenator Mode Setup].
(
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)

1 Press the [Oxygenator] key on the user key.

The confirmation window will be displayed.

3-4
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

2 Press the [OK] key to change the monitoring mode to oxygenator mode.

3 Press the [Standard Mode] inside the message window to return to the standard monitoring mode.

REFERENCE
 The message window can be dragged to any position within the waveform area.
 The message window will not be displayed by selecting [OFF] for "Oxygenator Mode
Message" (Menu>Initial Settings>Oxygenator Mode Setup).

Displayed Items

Other than waveforms and numeric data, patient name, alarm message, status message, etc. will be displayed on the
screen.

Numeric Data, Waveform, Patient Name, etc.

1

1 Information Display Area

Room/Bed ID, Patient Name, 4 3
Patient Class., current time,
messages, etc., will be displayed.

2 Numeric Data Area

3 User Key Area

2
4 Waveform Area

3-5
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Information Display Area

2 3 4 5 6 8 9 12 10 11 13 7
1

1 Telemetry Channel (When HLX-801 is connected.)

Displays the telemetry channel ID.

2 Room/Bed ID
Displays the 3-digit Room ID and 3-digit (000–999) Bed ID.

3 Nurse Team Color

Displays the color of the nurse team set on the "Admit/Discharge" menu.

4 Patient Name
The patient name set on the "Admit/Discharge" menu will be displayed.
The patient name can be hidden from the display area by selecting [OFF] for "Patient Name on the Information
Display Area" (Initial Settings>User I/F>Display/Print).

5 Pacemaker Usage
When [Used] is set for "Pacemaker" on the "Admit/Discharge" menu, <Pacemaker> will be displayed.

6 Patient Classification
The patient classification (Adult, Child, Neonate) set on the "Admit/Discharge" menu will be displayed.

7 Date/Time
Displays the current date (month, day) and time (hour, minute).

8 Set Mode
The currently selected user mode will be displayed. Sub mode
will be also displayed if selected.
When using the data transfer function with the Super Unit,
alarm settings and parameter settings can be also transferred.
When the settings are changed by the data transfer function,
the mode name will be highlighted to notify that the setting has
been changed. Pressing the highlighted mode name will
display the confirmation message window (shown on right).
Pressing the [OK] key will clear the highlight.
When the alarm settings are changed, the alarm settings list will be displayed.

9 Ventilator Connection Status

Displays the connection status of the ventilator.
<Vent. Comm.>: Communication with the ventilator is in progress.
<Vent. Offline>: Communication with the ventilator is interrupted.
<Vent. Disable>: Communication with the ventilator is disabled.
No display: Ventilator is not set for "External Device" setting.

10 Drift Filter
When drift filter is set to ON, "Drift-F ON" will be displayed.

11 Message Area
When an alarm generates, a message will be displayed.
By pressing the message display area, the alarm message history can be verified.

12 Other Bed Status

Displayed when connected to central monitor.
Pressing the [Other Bed] key will display the Other Bed display.

3-6
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

13 Power Supply/Battery
The power supply status and battery charging status (when battery is installed) will be displayed.

Waveform Area
1 ECG

2 ECG Lead

3 ECG Size 1
The waveform size display of ECG, RESP, SpO2 can be 2
3
selected from [Numeric]/[Bar]/[Bar (10 mm)].
[Initial Settings > User I/F > Display/Print > Waveform Size
4
Display] (
13)
 Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-
5

6
4 SpO2 Waveform 7
8
5 SpO2 Size

6 BP Label
9
7 BP Scale 10

8 BP Waveform

9 Respiration Waveform
11
10 RESP Size

11 AWF, AWP, AWV Waveform and Scale

12 CO2 Scale
12
13 CO2 Waveform 13

14 EEG Waveform 14
15
15 EEG Scale

16 ECG Filter, Filter Mode Display 16

AC: AC Filter ON,
DF: Drift Filter ON,
M: Monitor Mode, E: ESIS Mode,
D: Diagnosis Mode

Enlarged Waveform
By selecting [ON] for "Zoom" under
[Menu>Basic Setup>Display Config.], the
waveform display can be enlarged. The
waveform display can be enlarged for ECG,
pulse wave, and respiration waveforms.
<200%> will be displayed for the enlarged
waveform. Also, the sweep speed will be
doubled.

3-7
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Graphic/Tabular Trend Display

By selecting "Extended Function" for [Graphic/
Tabular Trend] under [Menu>Basic
Setup>Display Config.>Detail Setup], graphic/
tabular trend can be displayed below the
waveform display area. It cannot be displayed if
"Bottom" is set for the display layout.

( "Review Function" P8-1)

Numeric Data Box Display (for all

parameters) 1
1 Message Icon
When the numeric data box size is too small to display the message 2
inside, a message icon will be displayed instead to indicate that
message is present.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)

2 Alarm OFF Mark

Indicates that the alarm is set to OFF.

3 Alarm Silence Mark

Indicates that the alarm is silenced.
3
4 Out of Measurement Range (XXX)
Indicates that the measurement is out of range.
4
5 Invalid (---)
Indicates that the NIBP measurement ended erroneously, or NIBP 5
erase time has elapsed.

Numeric Data Box Display (for each parameter)

REFERENCE
 The following numeric data box is displayed when the corresponding parameter is selected
on the "Numeric Data Selection" window under "Display Config.". (
Selection" P10-2)

"Numeric Data

HR, HR/PR 1
1 HR/PR Synchronization Mark
When HR or PR according to the setting of "Synchronized Mark/
Tone" is detected, HR/PR synchronized mark will be displayed 3 2
inside the corresponding numeric data box.

2 HR/PR Value
The HR/PR value will be displayed. When the value exceeds the
measurable range, "xxx" will be displayed.

3 HR Average (Instant/Average, or no display)

Displays the averaging method of HR. ("HR Average" setting on ECG setup.)
When the patient classification is [Adult] or [Child], and ”"HR Delay" is set to [ON], "Inst." or" Av" will not be
displayed.

3-8
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

PR, HR/PR 3
1
1 Pulse Rate (BP)

2 Pulse Rate (SpO2)

2
3 PR_IBP Source

SpO2 3
2
1 SpO2 Value 4
The arterial oxygen saturation will be displayed.

2 SpO2 Label 1 5 6
The label set for SpO2 will be displayed.

3 Second Alarm Indicator (Medtronic Only)

When the second alarm is set, the second alarm indicator is displayed.

4 Pulse Rate
The pulse rate is displayed. When the value exceeds the measurable range, "xxx" will be displayed.

5 PI Value (Masimo only)

The perfusion index will be displayed.

6 PVI Value (Masimo only, optional)

The pleth variability index will be displayed.

7 SpOC Value (DS-8007M/ HS-8412M only, optional)

The arterial oxygen content will be displayed. 7

[SpCO/SpMet/SpHb] (Masimo only, optional)

1 SpCO Value: The carboxyhemoglobin concentration will be displayed. 1

2 SpMet Value: The methemoglobin concentration will be displayed. 2

3 SpHb Value: The total hemoglobin concentration will be displayed. 3

VPC
1 VPC (1 min)
1
The VPC rate for the last 1 minute will be displayed. <---> will be 2
displayed during arrhythmia learning.

2 Pace Beats (1 minute) / Total Beats (1 minute)

Pace beats and total beats for the last 1 minute will be displayed. <---> will be displayed during arrhythmia
learning.

ST
ST Level
The ST value for 4 leads can be displayed in the ST data box.
3 groups (A, B, C) of lead combination can be programmed.
For the following case, "---" will be displayed.
 Learn
During lead-off condition

3-9
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

When "N" or "S" is not detected for QRS within 30 seconds.

When reference waveform is not set for ST measurement.

REFERENCE
 The leads displayed inside the ST level box can be changed.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)

RR Value (Impedance Respiration) 1

1 Impedance Detection Lead 3
2
The set detection lead (I/II) will be displayed.

2 RR Synchronized Mark
When the respiration of the set RR source is detected, a synchronized mark will be displayed inside the
corresponding numeric data box.

3 Respiration Rate
The impedance RR, CO2 RR, and ventilator RR will be displayed. When the value exceeds the measurable
range, "xxx" will be displayed.
When the impedance measurement is set to OFF, impedance RR will not be displayed.

NOTE
 To display the respiration rate for each respiration source (impedance/CO2/ventilator/
SpO2), set the corresponding numeric data box on the display configuration setup menu.

NIBP
3 4 5
1 NIBP Value/Cuff Pressure
The NIBP measurement value (SYS / DIA / MAP) will be displayed.
The mean NIBP display can be set to ON or OFF on the NIBP setup 1
menu. The value will be displayed as "---" when the preprogrammed
NIBP erase time has elapsed.
2
During measurement, a cuff pressure will be displayed.

2 Dyna Alert Message

This message will be displayed when the Dyna Alert is effective.

3 NIBP Measurement Interval

The NIBP measurement interval will be displayed.

4 Elapsed Time/Measured Time

The elapsed time or measured time will be displayed.
The display can be selected under [Menu>Parameter>NIBP>Detail Setup>Time Display].

5 Oscillation Graph
The horizontal axis in the graph shows the cuff pressure, and vertical axis shows the pulse amplitude with
reference to maximum pulse amplitude.

6 NIBP List
The NIBP list of the latest 3/6/9/12/18 data and measured date/ 6
time will be displayed. The number of displaying data depends on
the size of numeric data box.

3-10
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Blood Pressure
1 BP Label
The label set for the blood pressure will be displayed.

2 <MEAN_WAVE>
<MEAN_WAVE> is displayed when [ON] is set for "Mean Wave" under [Menu>Parameter>BP>Detail Setup].

3 Blood Pressure
The BP measurement value (SYS/DIA/MEAN) will be displayed. On the BP setup menu, the display type (S/
D/M, S/D, M) can be selected. When the value exceeds the measurable range, "xxx" will be displayed. If BP
zero balance is not performed, "---" will be displayed, and if transducer is not connected, nothing will be
displayed.

PAP/ IAP/ ICP

1 PCWP Value, PCWP Measured Time
When the BP label is PAP, PCWP (Pulmonary Capillary Wedge
Pressure) and measured time can be displayed.

2 PDP Value
When the BP label is IAP, PDP (Peak Diastolic Pressure) of IABP can
be measured. Note that Systolic Pressure (SYS) = Peak Systolic
Pressure (PSP).

3 CPP Value
When the BP label is ICP, labeling the artery pressure as ART will allow measuring the CPP (Cerebral
Perfusion Pressure). CPP = Mean Arterial Pressure – Mean Intracranial Pressure If the CPP value is negative
value, or zero balance has not been performed for ICP or ART, "---" will be displayed, and if ICP or ART has
not been measured, nothing will be displayed. Also, alarm cannot be set for CPP.

Temperature
1 TEMP Label
The label set for the temperature will be displayed.

2 TEMP Value
The temperature will be displayed. 400 series temperature sensor can be used. When the value exceeds the
measurable range, "xxx" will be displayed. When 700 is used, "---" will be displayed.

Blood Temperature
By using the thermodilution catheter for the CO measurement, blood
temperature can be displayed. When the value exceeds the measurable
range, "xxx" will be displayed.

EtCO2/ InspCO2
InspCO2 Value/EtCO2 Value
The end-tidal CO2 concentration and inspiratory CO2 concentration
measurement value will be displayed.
The measurement unit can be selected from mmHg / kPa / % under the
"Initial Settings" menu.

Ventilator
Ventilator Data
When a ventilator is connected, ventilator measurement data will be
displayed.

3-11
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

P-V, F-V
P-V, F-V Loop
By connecting the ventilator, multigas unit (MGU-810 with SPIRO unit), or
anesthesia delivery system (FLOW-i, GE, Draeger), P-V loop (airway
pressure / ventilation) and F-V loop (airway flow/ventilation) can be
monitored on the ventilator display.

SvO2/CCO Measurement Device

SvO2, CO SvO2, CO, CI CO, SV, SVV

SvO2/CCO Data
When SvO2/CCO Measurement Device (Vigilance/Vigilance CEDV/VigilanceII/Vigileo/HemoSphere/ PiCCO2/
EV-1000/PulsioFlex) is connected, the measurement data (SvO2, CO, etc.) acquired from these devices will
be displayed. The displayed data will differ depending on the used SvO2/CCO Measurement Device and
measurement mode.

Oximeter/CCO Measurement Device Displayed Data

Vigilance SvO2 (ScvO2)

CCO EDV BT
(CCO mode/ STAT OFF/Index OFF)

Vigilance SvO2 (ScvO2)

CCO STAT EDV STAT BT
(CCO mode/ STAT ON/Index OFF)
Vigilance SvO2 (ScvO2)
CCI EDVI BT
(CCO mode/ STAT ON/Index OFF)

Vigilance SvO2 (ScvO2)

CCI STAT EDVI STAT BT
(CCO mode/ STAT ON/Index ON)

Vigilance (ICO mode) SvO2 (ScvO2) CO AVG CI AVG -

PiCCO2/PulsioFlex ScvO2 CCO CCI BT

NOTE
 When measuring StO2 by connecting HemoSphere, the measurement data will be displayed
as rSO2. rSO2 will be displayed on the INVOS numeric data box.

Hemodynamic Data
Hemodynamic Data (Vigilance)
Based on the CCO data measured by the Vigilance (or Vigilance CEDV/
Vigilance/Vigileo), the following hemodynamic data are calculated and
displayed every second based on the following condition. However the
following condition should be met.
 It is measured on Vigilance with CCO mode. (It will not be displayed
during ICO mode.)
 SvO2 parameter key (oximeter numeric data box) is displayed.
 BP label is set as ART, PAP, CVP.
(If the unit is "kPa", the data is converted to "mmHg" for calculation.)
Data Description Formula

SV Stroke Volume (mL/beat) CCO x 1000

HR
SVR Systemic Vascular Resistance (dynes*sec*cm-5) (MAP - CVP) x 79.90
CCO

3-12
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Data Description Formula

RVW Right Ventricular Work (kg*m) CCOx(MPAP-CVP)x0.0136

RVSW Right Ventricular Stroke Work (g*m) SVx(MPAP-CVP)x0.0136

2)
SVI Stroke Volume Index (mL/beat/m SV
BSA
SVRI Systemic Vascular Resistance Index SVRxBSA
(dynes*sec*cm-5•m2)
RVWI Right Ventricular Work Index (kgm/m2) RVW
BSA
RVSWI Right Ventricular Stroke Work Index (g*m/m2) RVSW
BSA

NOTE
 The hemodynamic data based on Vigilance data will not be stored in the list. For the
Vigilance list, the data directly acquired from the Vigilance will be stored.

Multigas Unit Data

Multigas Unit Data
When multigas unit or mainstream module is connected, the numeric data
measured by the connected multigas unit or mainstream module (CO2 /
anesthetic gas/O2 /N2O concentration) will be displayed.

TIMER
Stopwatch Key
Functions as stopwatch.

BIS
BIS Value
By connecting the BISx module through the HBX-800, or by connecting the
BIS monitor, BIS data (BIS, SQI, EMG, SR) will be displayed.
If SQI value is below 50%, the BIS value will be displayed in gray.
If SQI value is below 15%, the BIS value and SR value will disappear.
EMG and SQI will be displayed in bar graph.

Bar Graph SQI (0 to 100) [%] EMG (30 to 55) [dB]

1 1 to 20 30 to 38

2 21 to 40 39 to 47

3 41 to 60 48 to 55

4 61 to 80 55 and above

5 81 to 100 -

The alarm bar will be displayed only when measurement is performed on BISx using the HBX-800.
AEP
AEP Monitor Data (AEP Index)
When connected to AEP Monitor, aepEX PLUS, the AEP index will be
displayed.
A circle graph is displayed until the measurement data is obtained.
INVOS
INVOS 5100C Measurement Data
When connected to INVOS 5100C, regional cerebral oxygen saturation value
will be displayed.
Lt- indicates left brain, and Rt- indicates right brain.

3-13
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

NOTE
 Regional cerebral oxygen saturation value will also be displayed when HemoSphere is
connected.

User Selectable Numeric Data (Ventilator, Hemodynamics, Transcutaneous Blood Gas)

For the following numeric data, the data to be displayed in the numeric data
box are selectable by the users.
 Ventilator Data
 Hemodynamics Data
 Transcutaneous Blood Gas Partial Pressure Data
The number of displaying data depends on the size of numeric data
box.Small: 2Medium: 4Large: 6Two types of user selectable numeric data
(A, B) can be set
REFERENCE
 The parameters to be displayed can be set under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Display Print] for
[VENT Display Parameters] or [Hemo/etc Display Parameters].

Extended Function (Recall List)

The recall data will be displayed in a list format.
By selecting a data from the list, an enlarged waveform of the corresponding
data will be displayed.

Alarm Limit Display

1
2
1
3
2
SYS

DIA

MEAN

The alarm limit can be displayed beside each numeric data.The display type can be selected from [Graph]/
[Numeric]/[OFF] for "Alarm Limit Display" under [Menu>Alarm>Detail Setup].
If ON is selected for the individual alarm, the alarm limit will be displayed.
The upper and lower limit will be displayed at upper and lower row respectively.
For BP and NIBP, each alarm limit of systolic BP (SYS), diastolic BP (DIA), mean BP (MEAN/MAP) will be
displayed from the top.
ON/OFF of alarm limit display can be selected. (
"List of Alarm Settings" P6-5)
1 Upper Alarm Limit

2 Lower Alarm Limit

3 Current Measurement Value

3-14
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

NOTE
 If the alarm limit display for BP is [Graph], systolic value will be displayed.
 Depending on the numeric data box type, alarm limit may not be displayed.
 If the SpO2 lower alarm limit is set to 85%SpO2 or below, the alarm limit value will be
displayed regardless of the "Alarm Limit Display" setting.

Short Trend Display 1 2

1 Short Trend Display
On the waveform display area, short trend can be displayed.
The parameters to be displayed for short trend can be set
under [Menu>Basic Setup>Display Config.].
The short trend width can be enlarged/reduced to the pressed
position on the waveform area.The short trend width can be
selected from 7 levels.
The graph displayed in red indicates the alarm occurrence
point. Pressing the short trend of an alarm generated
parameter will display the recall screen.

2 Trend Scale
The short trend scale will be displayed between the short trend and numeric data. The displayed scale will be
in accordance with the scale set on the "Trend" screen.
For the following parameters, the short trend scale can be synchronized with the corresponding waveform
scale by selecting [Waveform] for "Short Trend Scale" under [Menu>Display Config.>Detail Setup].
BP, PEAK, VT, CO2, O2, Agent
For operation procedure on the short trend display, refer to
"Short Trend" P8-10.
Displayed number of waveform and numeric data
Layout Maximum Displayed Display Duration (25 mm/s) Maximum Displayed
Waveforms Boxes

Right/Left, 1 column 27 (22) 13 (11) 11

Right/Left, 1 column+bottom 20 13 (11) 15

Right/Left, 2 columns 27 (22) 10 (8) 22

Right/Left, 2 columns+bottom 20 10 (8) 25

Bottom, 2 rows to 6 rows 18 to 10 16 (3) 10 to 30

*: ( ) indicates when LC-8016TC is connected.

3-15
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Description of the Display

The following symbols are used for this device.

Symbol Description

Alarm OFF
Indicates the alarm is OFF.

Alarm Silence
Indicates the alarm is silenced when the alarm system is IEC mode.

HR Synchronized Mark
This mark flashes synchronizing to the heartbeat.

RR Synchronized Mark
This mark flashes synchronizing to the inspiration.

Message Icon
Indicates that an alarm message is present for that parameter. Whether or not to display this icon can
be selected under "Initial Settings".
Key Lock Mark
Indicates that the item requires a password to change the setting.

Key Unlocked Mark

Indicates that the key is unlocked

Indicates that the device is connected to AC power source.

Indicates the remaining battery level.

This icon (full green) indicates that the battery is fully charged.
*While charging, the corresponding battery level icon flashes.

This icon (2/3 green) indicates that the battery is less than full, but still usable.
This icon (1/3 yellow) indicates that the battery level is low and needs to be charged.

This icon (1/3 red) indicates that the battery level is very low and flashes to alert the low battery status.
Immediate battery charge is required.
Technical alarm will generate.

This icon (red frame) indicates that the battery is almost depleted and it flashes to alert that charging is
necessary. Make sure to charge the battery immediately.
This icon (black frame with a slash) indicates that the battery is not installed. Pay attention as power
will not be supplied if AC power cable is disconnected during this state.

3-16
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Messages and Sound

This section explains about the message displayed on the home display.
There are vital alarm message and device status alarm message which will be displayed at the top of the home
display.
The alarms are classified to Level S (top priority), Level H (high priority, urgent), Level M (medium priority,
caution), Level L (low priority, status), and Notification, and the message will be displayed according to the priority
of Level S > Level H > Level M > Level L > Notification.
The displayed messages will flash in red and white for Level S, red for Level H, yellow for Level M, blue for Level
L, and white for Notification.
Alarm Priority, Level Description Tone/Volume Displayed Color

Top Priority S Top Priority Alarm Continuous Red/White

High Priority H Life Threatening Alarm Continuous Red

Medium Priority M Cautionary Alarm 5 seconds interval Yellow

Low Priority L Status Alarm 15 seconds interval Blue

Notification N Notification Alarm Display Only White

CAUTION
 When more than one alarms of the same priority are generated, the newer alarm message
will be displayed.

Vital Alarm Message

The vital alarm message is generated when a measurement exceeds the alarm limit,or when arrhythmia is detected.
1

1 Numeric Data Alarm Message

2 Arrhythmia Alarm Message

There are 2 types of vital alarm messages; numeric data alarm and arrhythmia alarm. If both alarms occur at the same
time, the numeric alarm message and arrhythmia alarm message will be displayed alternately in 2-seconds intervals.
The alarm messages will be displayed according to the priority. If the priority level is the same, the newer alarm
message will be prioritized.

CAUTION
 The arrhythmia alarm message other than Tachy, Brady, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady will continue
to be displayed for 30 seconds after the alarm is resolved.

3-17
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Device Status Alarm Message

The device status alarm message will be displayed when proper monitoring cannot be performed.
The alarm messages will be displayed according to the priority. If the priority level is the same, the newer alarm
message will be prioritized.

Numeric Data Box Message

The measurement status of each parameter will be displayed inside the corresponding numeric data box.

Lead-Off Message
If the ECG electrodes used for HR measurement orarrhythmia analysis are detached, the status will be notified.

WARNING
 When <Lead Off> is displayed, HR alarm or arrhythmia alarm will not generate. If this
condition is left unresolved, a sudden change of the patient may not be noticed. Take prompt
action when the lead-off condition is detected.

Ventilator Alarm Message

When a ventilator is connected to this device, ventilator alarm and connection status alarm will be displayed on the
device status alarm message area.
The alarm message with the higher alarm level will be displayed.

WARNING
 The ventilator alarm sound is set to OFF (factory default).
 The alarm sound can be turned ON under [Menu>Tone/Volume].
(
 "Tone/Volume" P10-19)

3-18
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Home Display

Ventilator Alarm Factor Message

For SV-300, SERVO-i/s, SERVO-U/n/air, ventilator alarm factor if specified will be notified and displayed on the
central monitor.

CAUTION
 For the SV-900, VELIA, ASTRAL, VS ULTRA, ventilator alarm factor will not be notified to
the central monitor.
 Depending on the central monitor type and software version, ventilator alarm factor may not
be displayed. For details of the central monitor type and software version, refer to your
nearest service representative.
 The ventilator alarm factors are displayed only on the central monitor. These will not be
displayed on the bedside monitor.

Ventilator Disconnected Confirmation Window

A confirmation window will be displayed when a ventilator cable is
disconnected from the DS-8400, or when the power of the ventilator is
turned OFF.
[ON] will continue communication with the ventilator during ventilator
alarm condition. Check the ventilator power and cable connection.
[Alarm Silence] will silence the ventilator alarm for 2 minutes.
If the ventilator alarm condition remains after 2 minutes, the alarm will
generate again.
[OFF] will disable the ventilator alarm until the ventilator connection
status recovers.

CAUTION
 Check occasionally the communication status of this device and the ventilator.
 Verify that a ventilator alarm is not generated, and that the <Vent. Comm.> message is
displayed.
This confirmation window will be displayed until the displayed key is pressed or proper
communication with the ventilator is resumed. When the communication is resumed, the
window will automatically close.
When disconnecting the ventilator and this device, make sure to select [OFF] on the
confirmation window which will be displayed when the power of the ventilator is turned OFF,
or when the cable is disconnected.

3-19
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Window Display

Window Display

About the Window Display

The screens that are displayed when operating this system are referred to as windows. (The windows that appear by
pressing the numeric data area are called floating windows, as they can be moved to any desired position.)
The target window can be displayed by using various method, such as selecting the menu items, pressing a parameter
key or using a short cut key such as user key.

Display

The common items on the window are explained below.

1 Hierarchical Level Display

1 2
The hierarchical level of the current window is 3
9
displayed. The level is expressed using the 4
">" symbol.
5
This area also functions as keys, making it
possible to return from the lowermost to
topmost window in a one-touch operation. 6
2 Previous Display
7
Pressing this key will return the display to the
previous window. 8
3 Upper Level Key
Returns to the upper level display.

4 Minimize Key
Pressing this key will minimize the currently displayed window and will be stored to the user key.
To restore the minimized window, press the Restore key in the user key and select the window to restore.

5 Key Lock Icon

Key lock icon will be displayed for the setup item that is locked.
To unlock the setup item, enter the password.
It will return to locked condition after 30 seconds if no key operation is performed.
 : Locked
 : Unlocked

NOTE
 The color of each key lock icon indicates its administrative level, and a higher level
password must be entered to unlock it.

3-20
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Window Display

6 Setup Item
Most of the setups can be performed by selecting from the dropdown list.
The dropdown list will close when a selection has been made.
Pressing the item again or selecting a different item will also close the dropdown
list.
Some menu may display a subwindow to perform the setup.
To close the subwindow, press either the key, [Home] or [Prev. Disp.] key.
Pressing the key with the " " icon will display another window.To return to
the original display, press the key.
 Example of an item which displays another screen

7 Dropdown List
Select one from the displayed selection list.

8 Page Switch Key

This key will appear when the setup items or display data are on multiple pages.
The currently displayed page is indicated by "●".

9 Tab Display Area

These are the tabs to display the screens under the same menu level. The screens under the same menu level
can be switched by one-touch operation of these tabs without returning to the main menu.
For example, to change the blood pressure scale after changing the ECG waveform size, it is not necessary
to return to the main menu.
For the review screens, the date/time of each review data are linked which allows to switch the display of the
tabular trend, graphic trend, waveform of the same date/time in one-touch operation.

3-21
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Window Display

Floating Window Screen Display

The descriptions of the floating window which is displayed by pressing the numeric data area are as follows.
The displayed items on the floating window depends on the parameter, but there are some common items as follows.
1 Window Title 1
The windows can be moved to any desired position by dragging the 2 3
window title.
4
2 Alarm Assist Key
The alarm assist screen will be displayed. On the alarm assist
screen, maximum of 24 hours of trend data for the corresponding
parameter will be displayed, and alarm threshold can be adjusted by
checking the trend data.

( "Alarm Assist Screen" P6-13)

3 Close Key
Press the key to close the window.

4 Detail Key
On the floating window, minimum items are displayed. Press the key to display more detailed items.

3-22
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Window Display

Minimize Window

To temporarily display the home display during the setup, press the (Minimize) key. The current window will
be minimized. By pressing the [Restore Window] key, the window will be redisplayed.
NOTE
 To use the restore window function, the [Restore Window] key needs to be preprogrammed
as user key.

1 Press .

The window will be minimized.

2 Press the minimized window.

The original window will be displayed again.

NOTE
 Maximum of 8 windows can be minimized. If exceeded, the oldest window will be deleted.
 To delete all minimized window, press the [Delete All] key which will be displayed when
is pressed for more than 1 second.
 The window which has been automatically erased after fixed amount of time can be
remained minimized by selecting [ON] for "Auto Minimize" under [Initial Settings>User I/F
>Operation].

3-23
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Window Display

Transfer Window

The floating window displayed by pressing the numeric data area can be moved by dragging the window title. This
operation is possible on the touch panel.

1 Press the window title.

2 Place the finger on the window title and drag to the desired position.

NOTE
 The floating window cannot be overlapped to the numeric data area or information display
area.
 The window which is displayed from "Menu" cannot be moved.
 The displayed position of the floating window will be stored until the power is turned OFF.

3-24
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Procedure to Return the Display

Operation Restriction

To restrict the operator to change the setup items, key lock

function can be used.

( Maintenance Manual "Key Lock" P5-2)
For the items that are key locked, the settings cannot be
changed unless the password is entered.
The unlocked condition will return to locked condition if
operation has not been performed for about 30 seconds.
For the key locked item, icon will be displayed.
(shown on right)
When the password is entered and key is unlocked, the
icon will change to .
NOTE
 There are 3 key lock levels.
 The level is distinguished by the color of which are "Red (Manager) > "Yellow
(Administrator)" > "Green (User)", and the upper level password can unlock the lower level
key lock.

Procedure to Return the Display

To Return to Home Display

Press the [Home] key to return to the home display.

To Return to the Previous Display

Press the key of each setup window to return to the previous display.

3-25
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples To Enter Characters

To Enter Characters

Alphanumeric characters and symbols can be entered using the displayed keyboard.
The procedure to enter characters is explained below using the example of patient admit menu.

Entering Alphanumeric Characters

Enter alphabets, numerics, or symbols.

1 Press [ABC] or [QWERTY] to switch the displayed keyboard.

Enter the alphanumeric characters.

Entering Numerics
For age, telemetry channel ID, etc., only numbers can be
entered.
In such case, only numeric keys will be displayed.
Enter the numbers.

3-26
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples For Easier Use

For Easier Use

The user keys and menu can be customized according to the monitoring purpose.
REFERENCE
 From the preprogrammed user mode, the display configuration and alarm settings can be
selected according to the monitoring purpose.
(
 Maintenance Manual "User Mode Registration" P5-30)

User Key

The user keys can be customized according to the monitoring purpose.


( "To Configure the Display" P10-4)

By assigning the [ ] to the user key area, 2 pages of user keys can be registered, and pressing the [ ] allows to
switch the pages.The user key can be enlarged by using 2 display areas.
The user key can be also assigned to the numeric data area. It is useful if the key related to numeric data is assigned
near the numeric data.

Menu Screen

The key position can be changed and unnecessary keys can be deleted on the "Menu" screen.

( Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)

3-27
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit

To Delete the Unnecessary Keys (Key Mask)

Unused keys, items, tabs can be masked.


( Maintenance Manual "Key Mask" P5-22)

Example on "Admit/Discharge" Screen

Example on Tab Display

Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit

For the DS-8400 system, in addition to the main display, another display unit can be used for extended display.
REFERENCE
 Use only the specified 19-inch display unit. For details, refer to our service representative..

Displayable Screen
Model
External Monitor Display Extended Display 1 Extended Display 2

DSC-8410 Yes No No

DSC-8410 (with optional CC-84) Yes Yes Yes

3-28
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit

External Monitor Display

The same monitoring display can be displayed on other display unit. However, only the messages related to
arrhythmia alarm will be displayed.
Other messages, menu, and setup screens are not displayed. Also, operation is not possible on the external monitor.

Display on the Main Display Display on the External Monitor

Extended Display 1

On the extended display 1, the independent display from the main display can be displayed.

Display on the Main Display Display on the Extended Display 1

On the extended display 1, the following operations are possible on the touch panel.
*Selection of Preprogrammed Display Layout (3 types) *NIBP Start/Stop

*Graphic Trend Display *NIBP Auto Mode Interval Selection

*Tabular Trend Display *Print Start/Stop

*ON/OFF of Short Trend Display *BP Zero Balance

:*ON/OFF of Enlarged Numeric Data Display *Lead Selection

3-29
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit

*Display Configuration Setup for Extended Display 1, 2 *ON/OFF of Oxygenator Mode

*Waveform Size Selection *Alarm Setup

*Alarm Silence *Parameter Setup

*Alarm Suspend

*Parameter Selection for HR/PR Numeric Data Box

CAUTION
 As a speaker is not equipped for the extended display unit, key sound and alarm sound will
not be generated. Alarm sound will be generated from the main display.
 The same setup window cannot be opened simultaneously on the main display and the
extended display. If the same setup window is opened, the previously opened window will
close.

REFERENCE
 The waveform size for the main display and the extended display is independent.
On the "Initial Settings" menu, whether or not to synchronize the waveform size/scale of
extended display with the main unit can be selected.
(
Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)
 The waveform size for the extended display 1 and 2 is common.
 By setting the [Scale (Extended Display)] key as user key, the waveform scale on the
extended display can be changed on the main unit.
(
"User Key Selection" P10-15)
 The display configuration for the extended display 1 can be also changed on the main
display.
(Menu > Initial Settings > User Mode Regist. > Select mode for "Extended Display 1" >
Change the setting)
The key mask function, key lock function, auto hide function cannot be used.

Extended Display 2

On the extended display 2, the independent display from the main display can be displayed.

Display on the Main Display Display on the Extended Display 2

On the extended display 2, the following operations are possible on the touch panel.
 Selection of Preprogrammed Display Layout (3 types)
 ON/OFF of Short Trend Display

3-30
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit

 ON/OFF of Enlarged Numeric Data Display

 Waveform Size Selection
 Alarm Silence
 Alarm Suspend
 NIBP Start/Stop
 Print Start/Stop
 Parameter Selection for HR/PR Numeric Data Box
 BP Zero Balance

CAUTION
 As a speaker is not equipped for the extended display unit, key sound and alarm sound will
not be generated. Alarm sound will be generated from the main display.

REFERENCE
 On the extended display unit 2, operation such as alarm setup is not possible.
 The waveform size for the main display and the extended display is independent.
On the "Initial Settings" menu, whether or not to synchronize the waveform size/scale of
extended display with the main unit can be selected.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)
 The waveform size for the extended display 1 and 2 is common.
 By setting the [Scale (Extended Display)] key as user key, the waveform scale on the
extended display can be changed on the main unit.
(
 "User Key Selection" P10-15)
 The display configuration for the extended display 2 can be changed on the main display.
(Menu > Initial Settings > User Mode Regist. > Select mode for "Extended Display 2" >
Change the setting)

3-31
Chapter 3 Operation Procedure and Screen Examples Display on the External Monitor and Extended Display Unit

3-32
Chapter 4 Preparation Daily Check

Chapter 4 Preparation
Daily Check

Before using the device, perform the daily check.

Take necessary measures for the items with the "NG" judgment, and use the device only if the judgments for all the
items are "OK".

To Start Monitoring

This section explains about the procedure to turn the power ON and start monitoring.

CAUTION
 If not using the device for a long period, disconnect the power cable and lithium-ion battery.
 During transportation, firmly grasp the handle and make sure that the device does not fall.
Otherwise, it may cause injury to the operator or damage to the device.

1 If operating with AC power supply, verify that the power

supply cable is properly connected to the main unit.
If operating with battery, verify that the lithium-ion battery
(BTO-005) is properly installed in the main unit.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Power Connection of the Main
Unit" P1-18)
(
 Maintenance Manual "Installing the Battery Pack (BTO-
005)" P1-21)

When connected to the AC power source with battery

installed, charging will automatically start.
1 Rapid Charge (when the device is not in operation): 2.5
hours
2 Normal Charge (when the device is operating): 5 hours

WARNING
 Do not connect a battery other than the lithium-ion battery (BTO-005).

2 Turn ON the standby switch on the main unit.

The system will turn ON and monitoring will start.

The power supply LED on the front side of the main unit
will light.
1 Power Supply LED
Green: Power ON
Orange: Standby Mode
Light Off: During battery operation
2 Battery Charging LED
Green: Charging is complete
Orange: Charging is in process
Light Off: During battery operation, or when battery is not
installed, or when battery charging is ceased (due to temperature, etc.)

4-1
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

Flash: Battery Charging Error

NOTE
 The operation after the power is turned ON will be according to the setting made on [Initial
Settings] > [User I/F] > [Power ON/Discharge]. However, if the power was turned OFF for
less than 30 seconds, the setting before the power was turned OFF will remain.
 If the battery charging LED flashes, battery charging error is occurring. Remove the battery
and install it again. If the error persists, contact your nearest service representative.

REFERENCE
 The power ON/OFF operation of the main unit, Super Unit, expansion unit, expansion
module, and input box synchronizes with the standby switch operation (ON/OFF) on the
display unit.

Check Discharge When Start Monitoring a New Patient

Graphic trend, tabular trend, recall, ST measurement, OCRG data will be

stored for 5 minutes even after the monitoring is ceased by pressing the
standby switch. If the previous data is remained when the monitoring is
started by pressing the standby switch, a discharge confirmation window
will be displayed.

Check Discharge
1 Select from [Discharge] / [Continue].

[Discharge]: The previous data will be deleted.

[Continue]: The monitoring will start with the previous data retained.

NOTE
 If the standby switch was turned OFF for less than 30 seconds, the discharge confirmation
screen will not be displayed. To perform the discharge procedure, press the [Discharge] key
on the "Admit/Discharge" screen.
(
 "Discharge" P5-7)
 To start monitoring a new patient, select [Discharge] and enter the new patient information
on the "Admit/Discharge" screen.

REFERENCE
 Whether or not to display the discharge confirmation window can be selected.
(
Maintenance Manual "Power ON/Discharge" P5-18)

4-2
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

Periodic Replacement Message

When the periodic replacement period approaches for each part, a message will be displayed to notify the user.

REFERENCE
 The parts which the replacement period will be notified are the NIBP unit in the Super Unit
and the CO2 unit in the HCP-810/HCP-820.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Periodic Replacement" P7-1)
 Even if it is set not to display the discharge confirmation screen, the confirmation message
for parts replacement will be displayed when the replacement period approaches.

Data Transfer Function Using the Super Unit

The patient data and settings are stored in the HS-8000 Series Super Unit.
When transferring the patient to another bed, the same monitoring condition such as patient data and settings can be
used on new bed by transferring the HS-8000 along with the patient.

CAUTION
 This function can be used when the HS-8000 series Super Unit is connected. When the DS-
8007 is connected, refer to
 "Data Transfer Function Using the Transport Monitor (DS-
8007)" P4-5, as the operation will differ.

1 Turn OFF the power of the DS-8400 system.

2 Connect the HS-8000 to the DS-8400 system of the new bed, and turn ON the power of the DS-8400 system.

The "Patient Selection" window will be displayed.

1 [Continue monitoring data of ***]: The patient 1
data will be transferred and monitoring will 2
resume. 3
4
2 This will be displayed when the data is damaged
5
and cannot be transferred.
3 The data that can be transferred will be 6
displayed. To change the transferring data, press
the [Change Data] and change the setting.
4 [Change Data] : The data to be transferred can be changed.
5 [Discharge]: The data will not be transferred and monitoring of new patient will start.
6 [Cancel]: The patient data and settings stored on the main unit will be used.

4-3
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

CAUTION
 After the data transfer process, make sure that the setting and patient data are correct.

NOTE
 During the data update process, the patient name on the home display will flash.
 When [Continue monitoring] is selected, the stored data on the main unit will be overwritten
with that of the HS-8000.
If a central monitor is connected, the data on the central monitor will be also deleted.
The alarm settings and parameter settings can be also transferred. When the settings are
changed by the data transfer function, the mode name will be highlighted to notify that the
setting has been changed. Pressing the highlighted mode name will display the confirmation
message window, and pressing the [OK] key will clear the highlight. When the alarm settings
are changed, the alarm settings list will be displayed.
 When [Discharge] is selected, both data on the main unit and the HS-8000 will be deleted/
initialized.
 When [Cancel] is selected, the stored data on the HS-8000 will be overwritten with that of
the main unit.
 The data on the HS-8000 will be updated if any of the [Continue monitoring]/[Discharge]/
[Cancel] is selected. Do not disconnect the HS-8000 during the update process. If
disconnected, the data consistency may be lost.
 The BP zero balance value on the HS-8000 will not be cleared. After transferring the data,
make sure to verify the BP zero balance value.
 The recall event generated during the data update process will not be stored.
 If the time setting is different between the data transferring monitors, the time of the recall
data and trend data may not be correctly displayed on the monitor which the data was
transferred.
 Do not disconnect the HS-8000 while setting up the extended display.

REFERENCE
 ON/OFF of data transfer function and the data selection to be transferred can be performed
on the "Initial Settings" menu.
(
 Maintenance Manual "System Setup" P5-28)

4-4
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

Data Transfer Function Using the Transport Monitor (DS-8007)

The DS-8007 system can be used as a transport monitor by using the stored patient data and settings.
For the monitoring system using the DS-8007, DS-8400, DS-8500, DS-8900, the data during transport (when not
connected to the central monitor) can be transferred between the monitors using the transport monitor (DS-8007).

CAUTION
 This function can be used only when the monitoring system is constructed with the DS-8007,
DS-8400, DS-8500, DS-8900. To use this function, refer also to the DS-8900 Operation
Manual.

<General Description of Data Transfer Function>

1 2 3 4

1 While Monitoring on the Bedside Monitor

Remove the DS-8007 from the DS-8400/DS-8500.
When the confirmation window is displayed, select [Monitor Suspend] or [Discharge].

2 While Leaving the Bed

During transfer or examination, monitoring on the DS-8007 will continue. The monitoring data will be saved on
the DS-8007.

3 Resume Monitoring on the Bedside Monitor

When the patient returns to bed, attach the DS-8007 to the DS-8400/DS-8500.
By selecting [Monitor Patient of the Transport Monitor] on the patient selection window, the saved data on the
DS-8007 while in transfer will be uploaded to the DS-8400/DS-8500.

4 Uploading to the Central Monitor

The data will be automatically uploaded to the central monitor.

Condition to Use the Data Transfer Function

To use the data transfer function, the following conditions need to be satisfied.
 On the DS-8007, full disclosure waveform recording on the SD card is required.
 The software version of the DS-8007 should be V03-01 and newer.
 On the DS-8400/DS-8500, the data transfer function needs to be enabled.
Select [Transport] for "Data Transfer" under [Menu > Initial Settings > System > Other].
 To transfer the DS-8007 data (full disclosure waveform, trend, recall) to the DS-8400/DS-8500, full disclosure
waveform recording on the CFast card is required.
 To transfer the setup data (alarm, parameter), the data transfer function needs to be enabled and the setup data
to be transferred needs to be selected on the DS-8400/DS-8500.
Select [ON] for "Alarm Setup" and "Parameters" under [Menu > Initial Settings > System > Other > Data
Selection for Transfer].
For uploading to the central monitor, the following additional conditions needs to be satisfied.
 The central monitor needs to be compatible with the data transfer function.
 The bed is registered on the central monitor.

4-5
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

When the DS-8007 is disconnected from the DS-8400

1 When the DS-8007 is disconnected from the DS-8400, a
confirmation window will be automatically displayed.

[Monitor Suspend]: The confirmation window will close,

and monitoring will be suspended.
This is to be selected when returning to the same bed
after transferring.

[Discharge]: The patient will be discharged on the DS-

8400, DS-8900. The monitoring condition after
discharge will be according to the "Discharge Mode" setting. (
Discharge" P5-18)
 Maintenance Manual "Power ON/

This is to be selected when returning to the other bed after transferring.

[Close]: A confirmation window will close.

When the DS-8007 is connected to the DS-8400

The operation will differ depending on the patient information (patient name, patient ID, patient identification code)
saved separately on the DS-8400 and DS-8007.
NOTE
 The patient identification code will be updated when the patient is discharged.If the patient
information such as patient name, ID is changed without performing the discharge process,
the patient identification code will not be updated, and the patient will be treated as the same
patient.
 When the EMR link function is used, the patient selection window shown below will not be
displayed.

1 When the patient information matches between the DS-8400 and DS-8007

When the patient information matches between the DS-8400 and DS-8007, the patient selection window will
not be displayed, and monitoring will continue.

2 When the patient information does not match between the

DS-8400 and DS-8007

The patient selection window will be automatically

displayed. Select the monitoring patient.

[Monitor Patient of the Transport Monitor]

Starts monitoring the patient of the DS-8007 by
discharging the patient of the DS-8400.
All data on the DS-8400 will be deleted. If a central
monitor is connected, the data on the central monitor will
be also deleted.Part of the patient information, review
data will be overwritten with the data of the DS-8007.

[Monitor Patient of This Equipment]

Starts monitoring the patient of the DS-8400 by discharging the patient of the DS-8007.
All data on the DS-8007 will be deleted.Only the patient information will be overwritten with the data of the
DS-8400.

[Monitor New Patient]: Starts monitoring a new patient by discharging the patients for both DS-8400 and DS-
8007.
Both data on the DS-8400 and DS-8007 will be deleted/initialized.

During data transfer, <Uploading> will be displayed.

4-6
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

CAUTION
 After the data transfer process, make sure that the patient information is correct.

REFERENCE
 To transfer the alarm settings and parameter settings when [Monitor Patient of the Transport
Monitor] or [Monitor Patient of This Equipment] is selected, it is necessary to set [Transport]
for "Data Transfer" under [Menu > Initial Settings > System > Other], and set [ON] for "Alarm
Setup" and "Parameters" under [Menu > Initial Settings > System > Other > Data Selection
for Transfer].
 To transfer the patient review data, refer to
"Transferring the Patient Review Data" P4-9.
When EMR Link Function is Used
When the EMR link function is used on the central monitor, the patient admit/discharge process will be performed
through the EMR.

1 When Starting the DS-8007 Transfer

As the discharge process is performed through the

EMR, monitor suspend confirmation window will be
displayed when starting the DS-8007 transfer.

To start the DS-8007 transfer, press the [Yes] key.

2 When Ending the DS-8007 Transfer

When the transport monitor (DS-8007) with the patient

unadmitted is connected to the host monitor (DS-8400)
which is connected to the central monitor with the EMR
link function, a confirmation window to upload to the
central monitor will be displayed.

When a patient is admitted to the transport monitor,

uploading to the DS-8900 will automatically start.

4-7
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

Data Transfer of Patient Data, Alarm Settings, Parameter Settings

By selecting [Transport] for "Data Transfer" (Menu > Initial Settings > System > Other), alarm settings, parameter
settings, patient review data can be transferred.
Also, the patient data while in transfer can be transmitted to the DS-8900.
While the data is transmitted from the DS-8007, <Uploading > will be displayed on the central monitor and DS-8400.

CAUTION
 Do not disconnect the DS-8007 while <Uploading> is displayed. Otherwise, upload process
cannot be completed.

1 Transferring the Alarm Setting, Parameter Setting

1 For the following case, a confirmation window to transfer the

settings will be displayed.
 When the patient information matches between the DS-8400
and DS-8007
 When [Monitor Patient of the Transport Monitor] is selected
on the confirmation window
2 [Yes]: Alarm settings, parameter settings will be transmitted according to the settings made on "Data
Selection for Transfer" screen ([Menu > Initial Settings > System > Other]).
[No]: Alarm settings, parameter settings will not be transmitted.
When [No] is selected, alarm settings, parameter settings will not be transmitted until the DS-8007 is
disconnected and reconnected to the DS-8400.
[Change Setting]: "Data Selection for Transfer" screen will be displayed to change the settings.

CAUTION
 If [OFF] is set for alarm setting and parameter setting on the "Data Selection for
Transfer" screen, a confirmation window to transfer the settings will not be displayed,
and the settings will not be transferred.
 When the alarm settings and parameter settings are transferred, make sure the
settings are properly transferred to the DS-8400.

NOTE
 When the alarm settings of the transport monitor is transferred:
Even if the alarm threshold of the transport monitor exceeds the alarm threshold limit
of the DS-8400, the exceeded alarm threshold will be applied to the DS-8400. Make
sure to check the alarm setting on the DS-8400 as the alarm threshold limit status will
be changed to "Limit Deactivating Mode".

4-8
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

2 Transferring the Patient Review Data

1 For the following case, the review data of the DS-8007 will be saved to the DS-8400.
 When the patient information matches between the DS-8400 and DS-8007
Trend, recall, full disclosure waveform, numeric data of the latest transferring data
 When [Monitor Patient of the Transport Monitor] is selected on the confirmation window
Trend, recall, full disclosure waveform, numeric data for the selected patient from admittance
 When the bed is transferred using the EMR link function
Trend, recall, full disclosure waveform, numeric data while the patient has been transferred
 When the EMR link function is used, and the DS-8007 is temporarily disconnected
Trend, recall, full disclosure waveform, numeric data of the latest transferring data
2 The saved waveform data will be displayed on the full disclosure waveform screen as shown below. On the
explanation area on the review screen, the starting and ending time of transfer will be displayed.

 (Orange): Indicates the starting time ( ) and ending time ( ) of transfer. For starting point and
ending point, one (1) second blank display is shown.
 (Purple): Indicates the starting time ( ) and ending time ( ) of data while the patient was
monitored on another bed.

NOTE
 To transfer the patient review data, it is necessary to use the CFast card to save the full
disclosure waveform data. If the CFast card is not used, the patient review data will not be
transferred.

Precautions when Starting the Data Transfer

 The data transfer process will not start for approximately 10 seconds after the DS-8007 is connected to the DS-
8400. Do not disconnect the DS-8007 or turn OFF the power of the DS-8400 during this time.
 When the DS-8007 in standby mode is connected to the DS-8400, the data transfer process will not start for
approximately one (1) minute after the DS-8007 is started. Do not disconnect the DS-8007 or turn OFF the
power of the DS-8400 during this time.
 When a patient is discharged while DS-8400 and DS-8007 are connected, it will take approximately 10 seconds
to synchronize the discharge information between the DS-8400 and DS-8007. Do not disconnect the DS-8007
or turn OFF the power of the DS-8400 for 10 seconds after the discharge process.
 When a patient is admitted/discharged on the DS-8400 while the DS-8007 is transferred, patient selection
window will be displayed when the DS-8007 is connected.
When [Monitor Patient of the Transport Monitor] is selected, the patient on the DS-8400 will be discharged
which will delete all data.
When [Monitor Patient of This Equipment] is selected, the patient on the DS-8007 will be discharged which
will delete all data.
When [Monitor New Patient] is selected, both patients on the DS-8007 and DS-8400 will be discharged which
will delete all data.

4-9
Chapter 4 Preparation To Start Monitoring

Cancellation of Uploading
The uploading will be canceled under the following condition.Once canceled, the uploading will not resume.
To upload, disconnect and reconnect the DS-8007 to the DS-8400, and manually upload the data by selecting the
corresponding data on the central monitor. For procedure, refer to the operation manual of the central monitor.
<Cancellation of Uploading to the Central Monitor>
 The DS-8007 was disconnected from DS-8400 during uploading.
 The patient of the DS-8400 was discharged during uploading.
 On the central monitor, discharge process or bed transfer was performed, or bed registration was canceled for
the uploading bed.
 The power of the DS-8400 or central monitor was turned OFF.
 DS-LAN cable was disconnected.
<Cancellation of Uploading to the Host Monitor (DS-8400)>
 The DS-8007 was disconnected from DS-8400 during uploading.
 The patient of the DS-8400 was discharged during uploading.
 The power of the DS-8400 was turned OFF.
 Uploading to the central monitor was canceled.

About the Uploading Process

 The uploading will be performed in the order of central monitor and DS-8400. During the process,
<Uploading> will be displayed on the central monitor and DS-8400.
 The uploading process is performed one at a time within one DS-LAN network. If the DS-8007 is connected
while uploading for other bed is in process, <Upload Standby> will be displayed until the uploading can be
started. When the uploading completes for the other bed, uploading for the connected bed starts, and the
displayed message will change to <Uploading>. If the DS-8007 is disconnected, or a patient is discharged on
the DS-8400, or bed transfer/exchange is performed on the central monitor during the standby condition,
uploading will not be performed.
 If the MPDR function of the DS-8007 is used, and uploading data to the central monitor is selected, the data
will be uploaded in the following order.
 Selected data on the MPDR data list (Upload 1) (Upload to the central monitor)
 Selected data on the MPDR data list (Upload 2) (Upload to the central monitor)
 Transferring data (Upload to the central monitor)
 Transferring data (Upload to the bedside monitor)
 Other bed data (Upload to the bedside monitor)

REFERENCE
 For details of the MPDR function of the DS-8007, refer to the DS-8007 System Operation
Manual.

4-10
Chapter 4 Preparation To Stop Monitoring

To Stop Monitoring

This section explains about the procedure to stop monitoring.

1 Turn OFF the standby switch on the display unit.

A standby confirmation message will appear.

2 Press [OK] to enter into standby mode.

A 10-seconds progress bar will be displayed.

Press the [Cancel] key to stop entering into standby mode. Only the
[Cancel] key will be effective while the progress bar is displayed.

3 When 10 seconds has elapsed without pressing the [Cancel] key, the
display will turn OFF and monitoring will stop.

The operation of the Super Unit and the Input Box will also stop.
Using the standby switch to stop monitoring will allow to easily resume monitoring by turning ON the standby
switch again.

CAUTION
 If the remaining battery capacity becomes extremely low during battery operation,
monitoring will automatically stop.
 If not using the device for a long period, disconnect the power cable and lithium-ion
battery.

NOTE
 When the power is turned OFF, graphic/tabular trend data (Vigilance, ventilator), recall,
ST measurement, OCRG data will be erased after 5 minutes.

4-11
Chapter 4 Preparation Clock Setup

Clock Setup

This section explains about the time/date setup procedure.

CAUTION
 If the time/date is not correctly set, or changed during monitoring, malfunction may occur
with the NIBP measurement, periodic printing, graphic/tabular trend data, and age
calculation from the birth date.
 The time/date can not be set while connected to a wired network system. The time/date will
synchronize with the central monitor.
 If the time/date is changed, the time/date for all the saved patient data (trend, list, recall, etc.)
will also change.
The printed time/date before changing and the displayed time/date after changing will differ.
Also, the data transmitted to the central monitor before the time/date is changed will be
displayed on the central monitor with the previous time/date.

1 Press the [Menu], [Time/Date] ("Basic Setup") keys.

Or, press the time/date on the information display area at the upper part of the screen.

The Time/Date setup window will be displayed.

2 Press on the area to perform the setup.

A blue frame will be displayed on the selected area.

When the screen is first displayed, the blue frame will be positioned on "hour".

3 Use the numeric keys to enter the numerics.

The blue frame will automatically move to the next item.

4 Enter the current date/time and press the [Set] key.

The entered date/time will be set.(The number of seconds will be set to "00".)
Press [Cancel] to cancel the time/date setup.

4-12
Chapter 4 Preparation Installing the Recording Paper

Installing the Recording Paper

CAUTION
 About the Recording Paper
 Use only "OP050-02TDR" for the recording paper.
If the surface treatment and thickness of the recording paper are different, it may result
in poor print quality.
 Storing the Recording Paper
Since the recording paper is thermal type, inappropriate storage may change the quality of
the printed content, and make it illegible.
When storing the recording paper, follow the precautions below.
 Store in a place where light is shut off and avoid direct sunlight.
 Do not leave the paper in a high temperature (50 °C/122 °F and above).
 Do not store the paper in a polyvinyl chloride bag.
 Do not superpose the papers until the diazo copy is completely dried.
 Do not expose the paper to alcohol, hydrochloric acid, or ester ketone.
 Avoid using adhesive agents other than water based glue.
 Installing the Recording Paper
 When installing the recording paper, pay attention not to touch the thermal head or
sensor. The temperature of those parts rises immediately after printing and may cause
burn injury. Also, it may cause failure to the thermal head and sensor.
 Do not operate the device with wet hand. Doing so may short the thermal head.

Install the recording paper with the following procedure.

1 Press the Open/Close Lever.

The paper holder will open.

4-13
Chapter 4 Preparation Installing the Recording Paper

2 Set the Paper.

The outside surface of the paper is heat-sensitive. Make sure to place the outside surface of the paper facing
up.

NOTE
 Place the paper so that the "FUKUDA DENSHI" logo is outside and facing up.

3 Close the paper holder.

NOTE
 Push until it locks into place with a click sound.

4-14
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge To Display the "Admit/Discharge" Screen

Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge
This menu allows setup of admitting, discharging, suspend monitoring of a patient, and selection of the user mode
(display configuration) according to the monitoring purpose.

CAUTION
 If monitoring of new patient is started without performing a discharge procedure of the
previous patient, new data will be added to the previous data which will result in inaccuracy.

To Display the "Admit/Discharge" Screen

1 Press the [Menu], "Admit/Discharge" icon.

The "Admit/Discharge" screen will be displayed.

Admit

This section explains the admit procedure.

This menu allows entering of patient’s name, ID, age, and selection of patient classification (adult, child, neonate)
and pacemaker usage (used, not used) which affects the monitoring accuracy.

Entering the Patient Information

2 3
1 4
6 5

1 Enter the patient name.

Up to 16 characters of alphabets, numbers, or symbols can be used. The entered name will be displayed on
the home display. (
"To Enter Characters" P3-26)
5-1
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Admit

2 Enter the patient ID.

Up to 20 characters of alphabets, numbers, or symbols can be used. After entering the ID, press the [Set] key.
If the [Set] key is not pressed, the entered ID will not be finalized. (
"To Enter Characters" P3-26)
NOTE
 On a wired network (DS-LANII/III), up to 10 digits of ID can be transmitted.
(
 Maintenance Manual "DS-LAN Setup" P2-2)

3 Select the patient classification from [Adult] / [Child] / [Neonate].

The selected patient classification and icon will be displayed on the home display.

For adult:

For child:

For neonate:

 The patient classification affects the accuracy of NIBP measurement, HR measurement, and RR
measurement. It also affects the delay time to generate the measurement data alarm.
 The alarm delay time is the function to prevent frequent generation of the measurement data alarm by holding
the alarm generation for the duration of each delay time.
The alarm delay functions for HR/PR, BP, RR, SpO2, TEMP, EtCO2/InspCO2, Tachy, Brady, Ext Tachy,
Ext Brady.
Adult Child Neonate
30 mmHg to 280 30 mmHg to 180 30 mmHg to 130
SYS
mmHg mmHg mmHg
15 mmHg to 235 15 mmHg to 160 15 mmHg to 100
NIBP Measurement Range MAP
mmHg mmHg mmHg
10 mmHg to 200 10 mmHg to 150 10 mmHg to 90
DIA
mmHg mmHg mmHg
0 bpm, 30 bpm to
HR 0 bpm, 12 bpm to 300 bpm
300 bpm
Monitor 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz 1.6 Hz to 40 Hz
ESIS 1.6 Hz to 15 Hz 1.6 Hz to 15 Hz
Filter Mode
3 electrodes: 0.05 Hz to 100 Hz
Diagnosis
4, 5, 10 electrodes: 0.05 Hz to 150 Hz
Impedance Respiration 1.5 Hz 2.5 Hz
Alarm delay time 5 sec. 0 sec.

WARNING
 The patient classification selection influences the precision of the QRS detection and
NIBP measurement. Make sure the correct selection is made.
 The NIBP air hose corresponded to the set patient classification must be used to perform
NIBP measurement. (However, if the patient classification is child, NIBP air hose for adult
can be used.)

5-2
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Admit

CAUTION
 When "Link with Patient Class." is set to [ON], and patient classification is changed, the
main mode will change to the selected mode on the "Link Settings". (
Manual "To Program the User Mode" P5-31)
 Maintenance

4 Select the sex from [Male]/[Female].

5 Select the color of the nurse team.

6 Enter the patient's age.

There are two ways to enter the patient’s age. One is to enter the birth date which will automatically calculate
the age, and the other is to directly enter the age using the numeric keypad. If [Neonate] is selected for patient
classification, age will be displayed in days.

When Pacemaker is Used

WARNING
 The pacemaker usage setting influences the precision of the QRS detection and arrhythmia
analysis.Make sure the correct selection is made.

If [Used] is selected for "Pacemaker", the monitor will detect

the pacing pulse (pacemaker pulse) to perform the following
process.
 The artificial pacemaker pulse will be displayed.
 When pacing waveform does not appear (pacing failure),
erroneously detecting the pacemaker pulse as QRS will be
prevented.
The arrhythmia analysis will detect pacing beat as P
(Pacemaker Beat) or F (Fusion Beat) to prevent erroneous
judgment of VPC.

1 Press the key for "Pacemaker", and select from [Used]/[Not

Used].

When [Used] is selected, <Pacemaker> will be displayed at the upper part of the home display.

5-3
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Admit

Entering Patient Information from the Magnetic Card

By using the magnetic card reader, patient information can be entered from the magnetic card. The admittance
process will speed up compared to manually entering each information.
NOTE
 To automatically enter the patient information from the magnetic card or barcode, it is
necessary to perform the setup in advance. (
Card Reader" P4-25)
 Maintenance Manual "Using the Magnetic

1 Read the data from the magnetic card or barcode.

The acquired data will be displayed.

2 Press the [Change only patient info.]/[Cancel] key.

[Change only patient info.] : Replaces the current patient information with the newly acquired information.
[Cancel] : Cancels the acquired data.

NOTE
 Make sure the patient is discharged before replacing the patient information.
 The item which the information was not acquired from the magnetic card or barcode will
be left blank. For the blank item, manually enter the information.

Entering Patient Information from the Patient Data Server (When DS-LANIII is used)

When the central monitor is connected to the patient data server, and the DS-LANIII network is used, patient
information can be automatically entered by searching on the patient data server.
NOTE
 When a DS-LAN II network is used, patient information cannot be entered from the patient
data server.

CAUTION
 When "Link with Patient Class." is set to [ON], and patient classification is changed by
acquiring patient information from the patient data server, the Main Mode will change to the
selected mode on the "Link Settings". (
Mode" P5-31)
 Maintenance Manual "To Program the User

5-4
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Admit

When Using the Patient Data Server and Magnetic Card Reader (or Barcode Reader)
NOTE
 Select [ON] for "Auto Reference to Central Monitor when Reading Patient ID" under [Initial
Settings>Magnetic Card Reader] in advance.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Magnetic Card Reader Setup" P4-25)

1 Read the data from the magnetic card or barcode.

2 The acquired patient information from the patient data server will be displayed in the "New Information" area.

If there is no applicable patient information, current patient information will be displayed in the "New
Information" area.

3 Select whether or not to enter the searched patient information.

Select from [Change only patient info.] / [Discharge and admit as new patient.] / [Cancel].
[Change only patient info.] will replace the current patient information to the newly acquired information.
[Discharge and admit as new patient.] will initialize the current patient data/monitoring condition and admit the
searched patient as new patient.
[ Cancel ] will invalidate the acquired data.

NOTE
 The item not acquired from the patient data server will be left blank.
 For the blank item, manually enter the information.

5-5
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Admit

When Magnetic Card Reader (or Barcode Reader) is not Used

1 Press the [Menu], "Admit/Discharge" icon, [ID].

"ID" window will be displayed.

2 Enter the patient ID.

3 Press the [Search ID] key and start searching on the patient
data server.

1 Use the touch keys to enter the ID.

2 Based on the entered patient ID, patient information will be searched on the patient data server through the
DS-LANIII network.
The searched patient information will be displayed under "New Information" .

4 Select whether or not to enter the searched patient information.

Select from [Change only patient info.] / [Discharge and admit as new patient.] / [Cancel]. [Change only
patient info.] will replace the current patient information to the newly acquired information. [Discharge and
admit as new patient.] will initialize the current patient data/monitoring condition and admit the searched patient
as new patient. [ Cancel ] will invalidate the acquired data.
The item not acquired from the patient data server will be left blank. For the blank item, manually enter the
information.

NOTE
 The item not acquired from the patient data server will be left blank.
 For the blank item, manually enter the information.

5-6
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Discharge

Discharge

This section explains about the discharge process.

This procedure will erase the patient name, ID, age, and past measurement data such as tabular / graphic trend, and
recall.
By pressing the [Rapid Discharge] key preprogrammed as user key, a discharge process can be performed.

Discharging Procedure

CAUTION
 If monitoring of new patient is started without discharging the previous patient, the
measurement data of the previous and new patient will become mixed up on the recall and
trend data.
 When the discharge process is performed, patient data such as recall and trend will be
initialized. The parameter and alarm settings will be reset according to the settings made
under [Menu>Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge).
When the discharge process is performed on the central monitor, alarm will be reset
according to the setting on "Admit Setup" of the central monitor.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Power ON/Discharge" P5-18)
 If the power is turned OFF or if the system enters into standby mode soon after the discharge
procedure, the patient may not be discharged on the central monitor.
If it is necessary to turn OFF the power or enter into standby mode after the discharge
procedure, select [Standby] for "Discharge Mode" under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

NOTE
 Depending on the setting made for "At Discharge" under ([Initial Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge], some items may not be initialized.
(
Maintenance Manual "Power ON/Discharge" P5-18)
 If the discharge procedure is performed during stopwatch operation, the counting will stop
and will be reset to "00:00:00" .
 The monitoring condition after discharge can be set on "Discharge Mode" under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge].

1 Press the [Discharge] key on the "Admit/Discharge" screen.

The discharge confirmation window will be displayed. (shown on right)

To cancel the discharge process, press the [No] key or close the
discharge confirmation window.

2 Press the [Yes] key.

The patient data, patient information will be initialized.

Data Description

Patient Data Trend, Tabular Trend, Recall, ST, OCRG, CO, Hemodynamics, Lung Function,
P-V/F-V control data will be erased.
The settings for recall, tabular trend, graphic trend, vigilance list will remain.

5-7
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge User Mode

Data Description

Patient Information Erases the data of patient name, ID, sex, age.
The patient classification will not be initialized.

Measurement Condition The learned arrhythmia waveform data will be deleted.

The BP zero-balance condition will be initialized.
The NIBP target inflation value will be initialized to the default value of each patient classification.

If [Standby] is selected for "Discharge Mode" under [Initial Settings>User

I/F>Power ON/Discharge], standby progress window will be displayed.
Pressing the [Cancel] key will cancel the process to enter into standby
mode.
After 10 seconds, discharge procedure will be performed and the system
will enter into standby mode.

REFERENCE
 For details, refer to [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge].
(
 Maintenance Manual "Power ON/Discharge" P5-18)

User Mode

This section explains about the user mode selection.

From the preprogrammed user mode, an appropriate user mode can be selected according to the monitoring purpose.

CAUTION
 The selected user mode will be stored even after the power is turned OFF or discharge
process is performed.
Before monitoring, make sure the current user mode is suitable for the patient's condition.
(
 Maintenance Manual "User Mode Registration" P5-30)

REFERENCE
 For the user mode, up to 9 main modes of display configuration and alarm settings can be
registered according to the patient's age and monitoring purpose.
Also, for temporarily changing the display configuration (ex. when checking the 12-lead
ECG), 6 sub modes of display configuration can be registered.
For the extended display, 3 modes for each extended display (1, 2) can be registered.
(
 Maintenance Manual "User Mode Registration" P5-30)

To Select the User Mode

1 Press the [Menu], "Admit/Discharge" icon, "Mode Select"

key. Or, press the mode key on the information display
area at the upper part of the screen.

The "Mode Select" window will be displayed. (shown on

right)

2 Select the main mode or sub mode appropriate for the

patient.

3 When the extended display is used, select the mode for the
extended display.

5-8
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Suspend Monitoring

WARNING
 After changing the mode, make sure that the monitoring setting is appropriate.
When the mode is changed, patient classification, alarm settings, etc. will be changed.

REFERENCE
 The selected user mode will be stored even after the power is turned OFF. If a new patient
is admitted without changing the user mode, the monitoring will start with the previous user
mode.
 The mode setting after the discharge operation can be set under [Initial Settings>User I/
F>Power ON/Discharge].
 To change from the sub mode to the main mode, press [Return to Main Mode].
 Refer to "Setup Item/Default Value" for the default setting of each mode.
(
 Maintenance Manual "User Mode Registration" P5-30)

Suspend Monitoring

This section explains about the monitoring suspend/resume function.

Monitoring suspend function can be used when a patient temporarily leaves the bed. If the monitoring is ceased by
turning the power OFF, recall and ST data will be erased.
By using the monitoring suspend function, measurement, alarm, printing will be suspended but data and settings will
remain, which allows to resume monitoring smoothly.
By using the monitor suspend label function, different labels in different colors according to the patient's destination
can be displayed during the monitoring suspended condition.
To remind the user to resume monitoring, alarm will generate after the preprogrammed duration (15 min./30 min./1
hr/1.5 hr/2 hr) for "Monitor Suspend Timer".
REFERENCE
 The monitor suspend label can be set on the Initial Settings menu.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Monitor Suspend Setup" P5-17)

To Suspend Monitoring

When "Monitor Suspend Label" is not set:

1 Press the [Menu], "Admit/Discharge" icon, [Monitor Suspend] keys.

The monitor suspend confirmation window will be displayed.

If [Cancel] is pressed, monitoring will not be suspended and the
confirmation window will close.

2 Press the [OK] key.

The screen will automatically return to the home display with

"Monitoring is suspended" message and [Resume] key.

On the home display, numeric data and waveform display will be
suspended.

REFERENCE
 When the monitoring is suspended, telemetry transmission will cease. Note that the

5-9
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge Suspend Monitoring

square wave will be displayed on the central monitor indicating the too far condition of the
telemetry.
 The stopwatch counting will continue even when the monitoring is suspended.
 The setting can be changed even when the monitoring is suspended.

When Both "Monitor Suspend Label" and "Monitor Suspend Timer" are set

1 Press the [Menu], "Admit/Discharge" icon, [Monitor Suspend] keys.

The "Monitor Suspend" screen will be displayed.

2 Select the label to be displayed during the monitoring

suspended condition. 2
The monitoring suspend duration selection will be
displayed after selecting the monitoring suspend label.
3

3 Select the monitoring suspend duration from [15Min.]/

[30Min.]/[1Hr.]/[1.5Hr.]/[2Hr.]/[Continuous].
[Continuous] will start to suspend monitoring without setting the duration.

Confirmation window to suspend monitoring will be displayed. (shown on

right)

Pressing the [Suspend] key will suspend the monitoring.

4 Verify that the monitoring is suspended on the home display.

The selected label with the set color will be displayed on the home display.

On the home display, the time will start counting for the set duration.
When the set duration completes, alarm sound will generate (5 sec.
interval), and alarm indicator will light.

REFERENCE
 To extend the monitoring suspended duration, press [Extend] to display the timer
selection.

When "Monitor Suspend Label" is set, but "Monitor Suspend Timer" is not set:
1 Press the [Menu], "Admit/Discharge" icon, [Monitor Suspend] keys.

The "Suspend" screen will be displayed.

2 Select the label to be displayed during the monitoring 2

suspended condition.

A confirmation message will be displayed.

Pressing the [Suspend] key will suspend the monitoring.
The selected monitor suspend label with the set color will
be displayed on the home display.

5-10
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge To Resume Monitoring

To Resume Monitoring

CAUTION
 Resuming monitoring will also resume the suspended alarm.

1 Press the [Resume] key.

The "Monitoring is suspended" message will disappear and monitoring will resume.

5-11
Chapter 5 Admit/Discharge To Resume Monitoring

5-12
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm

Chapter 6 Alarm Function

Alarm

To Set the Arrhythmia Alarm

The arrhythmia alarm can be turned ON or OFF, and arrhythmia detection level can be set.

WARNING
 Set the appropriate upper and lower alarm limit for each parameter according to the
monitoring condition.
 When the system alarm is suspended, all the alarms will be suspended even if the
parameter alarm is set to ON. Also, the alarms will not be stored as recall events.
 If the upper/lower alarm limit of the parameter is set to OFF, or if arrhythmia alarm is set to
OFF, alarm will not function even if the system alarm is enabled. Pay attention when setting
them OFF.

1 Press the [Menu], [Arrhy.] ("Alarm") key.

The arrhythmia alarm setup screen will be displayed.

2 Set ON/OFF of each arrhythmia.

[ON]: Arrhythmia alarm will generate.

[OFF]: Alarm will not generate.

NOTE
<Arrhythmia alarm OFF> will be displayed when the Asystole, VF, VT, Slow_VT, Tachy,
Brady, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady, or HR alarm is OFF.
 If [Always ON] is selected for "Asystole, VF, VT Alarm" under "Initial Settings", the
Asystole, VF, VT alarm cannot be set to OFF.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 If [Check when OFF] is selected for "Asystole, VF, VT Alarm" under "Initial Settings", a
confirmation window will be displayed when the Asystole, VF, VT alarm is set to OFF.


6-1
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm

REFERENCE
 The arrhythmia detection level for tachycardia (Tachy), bradycardia (Brady), extreme
tachycardia (Ext Tachy), extreme bradycardia (Brady) alarms link with the upper and
lower alarm limit for HR/PR.
 The tachycardia (Tachy) alarm generates when the value exceeds the HR/PR upper
alarm limit. When the upper alarm limit is OFF, alarm will not generate.
 For the Ext Tachy alarm, the alarm threshold level cannot be set below that of Tachy
alarm.
 The bradycardia (Brady) alarm generates when the value exceeds the HR/PR lower
alarm limit. When the lower alarm limit is OFF, alarm will not generate.
 For the Ext Brady alarm, the alarm threshold level cannot be set above that of Brady
alarm.

3 Select the level to detect each arrhythmia.

Item Description Item Description

Asystole 3 sec. to 10 sec. R on T 200 ms to 600 ms

Run 2 beats to 8 beats SVT 2 beats to 10 beats

Pause 1.5 sec. to 5 sec. Irregular RR 10, 15, 20%

Frequent 1 bpm to 50 bpm/ min. S Frequent 1 bpm to 50 bpm

Ext Tachy 22 bpm to 300 bpm Pacer Not Capture 80 ms to 480 ms

Ext Brady 20 bpm to 295 bpm Pacer Not Pacing 20 bpm to 200 bpm

4 Press the [Detail Setup] key, and set HR Lower Limit for VT, HR Lower Limit
for RUN and HR Lower Limit for SVT.

1 "HR Lower Limit for VT"

Select the lower limit of HR value from 120 bpm / 140 bpm to
generate VT.

If the HR is below the selected value, Slow_VT will generate.

2 "HR Lower Limit for RUN"
If the HR is same or above the selected value, RUN will generate.
3 "HR Lower Limit for SVT"
If the HR is same or above the set value, SVT alarm will generate.

6-2
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm

SpO2 Second Alarm Setup

The SpO2 second alarm function is available when the Super Unit HS-8312N, HS-8412N, DS-8007N, HG-820 is
connected.
When the SpO2 value is unstable around the lower alarm limit, the frequently generated alarm may be bothersome.
The second alarm function controls these frequent alarms.
This function generates the alarm only when the integral value (the accumulation of difference between the alarm
limit and SpO2 value at every second) reaches the preprogrammed second alarm threshold value.
NOTE
 The SpO2 SEC alarm function utilizes SatSeconds TM technology of Medtronic.
SatSecondsTM is a trademark of Medtronic.

The integral value of the second alarm is calculated as follows.

3

1 Integral Value

2 Alarm Generation

3 SpO2 Value

4 Alarm Limit

On this graph, the second alarm threshold value is set as 100.

The SpO2 value begins to fall below the alarm limit from approximately 10 seconds. At the same time, the integral
value begins to increase. (Alarm limit) – (SpO2 value) is accumulated each second.
At approximately 25 seconds, the integral value reaches 100 and the alarm is generated.
The SpO2 value begins to fall below the alarm limit at approximately 36 seconds. At the same time, the integral value
begins to decrease. [(Alarm limit) – (SpO2 value)]x 2 is subtracted each second.
Also, there is a safety net when setting the second alarm function. This safety net is for the case when the SpO2 value
frequently falls below the alarm limit but does not last long enough to reach the second alarm threshold.
If the SpO2 value falls below the limit 3 times or more during the last 60 seconds, an alarm will be generated even
if the second alarm threshold is not reached.

CAUTION
 Whether to use the second alarm function and its threshold selection should be based on
the patient's clinical indication portent and medical evaluation.
If the SpO2 alarm and SEC alarm setup is set to [OFF], the second alarm integral value will
be set to 0.

6-3
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm

1 Press the [Menu], [SpO2] ("Parameter") keys to display the "SpO2" setup screen.

2 Set the "Second Alarm".

 [10]/ [25]/ [50]/ [100]: A circular second alarm indicator will be displayed
inside the numeric data box.
As the integral value increases, the indicator will begin to fill, and when it
is completely filled, an alarm will be generated.

[OFF]: Second alarm indicator will not be displayed.

ST Alarm Setup

Set the ST upper limit and lower limit for the reference waveform.
The alarm limit should be set for each measurement unit (mm/mV). The upper and lower limit can be set in 1 mm/
0.1 mV increments.

1 Press the [Menu], [ST] ("Alarm") key.

The ST alarm setup screen will be displayed.

2
3
5
4

2 Select [ON]/[OFF] for "ST All Alarm" .

[OFF]: Alarms will not generate even if the alarm for each lead is set to ON.

3 Select the lead to set the alarm limit.

The selected lead will be displayed large at the right.

4 Select [ON]/[OFF] of ST alarm for each lead.

6-4
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm

5 Slide the / and set the upper, lower limit (±20 mm / ±2.0 mV) .

Alarm will be set to OFF if the value -20 mm / +2.0 mV or lower is selected.
Alarm will be set to OFF if the value +20 mm / +2.0 mV or above is selected.

List of Alarm Settings

The alarm settings can be verified in list format. The alarm settings for each parameter can be changed on this list.

1 Press the [Menu], [List] ("Alarm") key.

The alarm settings list will be displayed.

3
2 Select from [All List] / [Meas. List].

[All List]: The settings for all the parameters will be displayed.
[Meas. List]: The settings for only the measured parameters will be displayed.

3 Change the alarm threshold.

1 Select a parameter.
The alarm setup window will be displayed.

2 Press / to set the threshold level.

6-5
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm

Detail Setup

The alarm-related setup such as alarm suspend time and alarm silence time can be performed.

1 Press the [Menu], [Detail Setup] ("Alarm") keys.

The alarm detail setup screen will be displayed.

2
3
4
5
6
7
2 Select [1 min.] / [2 min.] for "Suspend Time".

3 Select [1 min.] / [2 min.] for "Silence Time".

4 Set the "Alarm Sound Suspend" function.

[ON]: The alarm sound suspend function will turn ON.

[OFF]: The alarm sound suspend function will turn OFF.

5 Select the "Alarm Sound Suspend Time" from 1 min., 2min., 5 min., 10min., 30 min., 60 min. ,90 min., 120 min.,
240 min., 360 min.

6 Set the "Status Alarm Control".

REFERENCE
 The alarm silence time for the level L device status alarm ("Check electrodes", "NIBP
Check patient type, air hose", etc.) can be set.
(
"Device Status Alarm Message" P11-7)

[Link to Alarm Silence Time]: When the [Alarm Silence] key is pressed at occurrence of device status alarm,
alarm will be silenced for fixed amount of time set for "Silence Time".
If the alarm factor still remains at completion of silence time, the alarm sound will generate again.
If the same alarm occurs during the alarm silence time, the alarm sound will not generate.
If a new alarm occurs during the alarm silence time, the alarm sound for the new alarm will generate.

[Link to each new occurrence]: When the [Alarm Silence] key is pressed at occurrence of device status
alarm, the alarm will be silenced as long as the alarm factor remains regardless of the "Silence Time" setting.
While the same device status alarm is generated, the alarm will remain silenced.
If the alarm factor is resolved during the alarm silence time, the alarm will be canceled.
If the same alarm generates again during the alarm silence time, the alarm sound will generate.

6-6
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Limit Setup

7 Select [Graph]/[Numeric]/[OFF] for "Alarm Limit Display".

The upper and lower alarm limit will be displayed on the home display.

Graph Numeric OFF

NOTE
 The alarm limit for the parameter with the alarm turned OFF will not be displayed
regardless of this setup.
 If the alarm limit display for BP is [Graph], systolic value will be displayed.
 Depending on the numeric data box type, alarm limit may not be displayed.
 If the SpO2 lower alarm limit is set to 85%SpO2 or below, the alarm limit value will be
displayed regardless of the "Alarm Limit Display" setting.

Alarm Limit Setup

This section explains the procedure to enable/suspend the system alarm, and to set the upper/lower alarm limit for
each parameter.
On this system,9 modes can be preprogrammed according to the monitoring purpose. By preprogramming the alarm
setting to each mode, the alarm setups at admittance of patient can be simplified by just selecting a mode. It is
recommended to program the mode in rough classification such as patient’s age, monitoring purpose (ICU or
surgery), and if necessary, perform unique setup for each patient.

To Set the System Alarm (ON or Suspend)

The system alarm can be enabled or suspended.

The system alarm enabled condition is when the alarm suspended condition is canceled, and alarm limit and alarm
ON/OFF setting for each parameter are effective. The system alarm cannot be disabled.

WARNING
 When the system alarm is suspended, all the alarms will be suspended even if the
parameter alarm is set to ON. Also, the alarms will not be stored as recall events.
 If the upper/lower alarm limit of the parameter is set to OFF, or if arrhythmia alarm is set to
OFF, alarm will not function even if the system alarm is enabled. Pay attention when setting
them OFF.

6-7
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Limit Setup

1 Press the [Menu], [Basic] or [Circ.] or [Resp./Gas] ("Alarm") keys.

The alarm setup screen will be displayed.

2 Select whether to enable or suspend the alarm.

To Suspend the Alarm

1 Press the [Alarm Suspend] key.
The key will change to blue.
The alarm will suspend temporarily.
<Alarm Suspend (xxx sec.) > will be displayed.

<xxx s> indicates the remaining time. The system alarm will be enabled when the suspended time
completes.

To Enable the System Alarm

1 Press the [Alarm Suspend] key while in alarm suspended condition.
The key will change to gray.
The alarm limits and ON/OFF settings for each parameter will become effective.
The alarm suspended condition will be canceled.

To Silence or Suspend the System Alarm Sound

The alarm sound can be suspended for fixed amount of time. There are two ways to suspend the alarm sound, which
are "Alarm Silence" and "Alarm Sound Suspend".
The "Alarm Silence" function suspends the alarm sound for fixed amount of time (1 min. / 2 min.).
The "Alarm Sound Suspend" function suspends the alarm generation in advance such as during surgery when the
alarm generation is expected. Alarm monitoring will continue even while the alarm sound is suspended. The alarm
sound suspend duration can be selected from 1 min., 2min., 5 min., 10min., 30 min., 60 min. ,90 min., 120 min., 240
min., 360 min.

1 To silence the alarm, press the [Alarm Silence] key (fixed key).

The alarm sound will be silenced for fixed amount of time.

If the alarm factor still remains at completion of silence time, the alarm sound will generate again.
The [Alarm Silence] can also be operated on user keys or remote control.

6-8
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Limit Setup

2 To suspend the alarm sound, press the Alarm Silence key (fixed key) for more than 3 seconds.

The alarm sound will be suspended for fixed amount of time.

During the alarm sound suspended duration, the alarm sound will not generate.

NOTE
 If the [Alarm Silence] key is pressed while the alarm sound is generated, it will bring the
system to "Alarm Silence" condition and not the "Alarm Sound Suspend" condition.
 During the "Alarm Sound Suspend" duration, other bed alarm sound will not generate.

Precautions about Silencing the Alarm

The alarm silence function is effective for each parameter. Once the alarm cause is resolved, the alarm silence
condition for that parameter will be canceled.
When [Fukuda Tone] is set for "Alarm System" under [Menu>Setup>Initial Settings], and if another alarm with the
lower priority occurs during the alarm silence duration, alarm sound will not generate. The recall and alarm printing
will function.
When [Fukuda Tone] is set for the "Alarm System" and device status alarm is silenced, the alarm sound for the lower
priority numeric and arrhythmia alarm will generate.
When [Melodic Tone] or [Standard Tone] is set for the "Alarm System" and if another alarm with lower priority
occurs, the alarm sound will generate.
If the [Alarm Silence] key is pressed for the alarm of another parameter which occurred during the alarm silence
condition, the alarm silence duration for the first alarm will not be extended.
The alarm silence condition for all parameters will be canceled for the following case.
 When the power is turned ON.
 When the system alarm status (enable/suspend) is changed.
 When the monitoring is suspended on the "Admit/Discharge" screen.
 When the user mode is changed.
 When the patient is discharged.
 When [Resume All Al. Sound] key on the alarm setup screen is pressed.
The alarm silence condition for each parameter will be canceled for the following case.
 When the alarm cause is resolved for that parameter.
 When the alarm silence time for the parameter is completed.
 When automatic alarm is set for the parameter.
 When the alarm is turned OFF for the parameter.
If [Link to each new occurrence] is set for "Status Alarm Control" (Menu>Alarm>Detail Setup), the alarm sound
will not generate until the alarm condition changes even the set alarm silence duration completes.

Precautions about Suspending the Alarm Sound

During the alarm sound suspended duration, recall and alarm printing will function.
The alarm sound suspended condition will cease in the event of any of the following.
 Discharge
 When OFF is set for "Alarm Sound Suspend".
 When the ventilator alarm is generated.
 When resumed from monitor suspend condition.
 When the [Alarm Silence] key is pressed.

6-9
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Limit Setup

Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter

The alarm for each parameter can be turned ON or OFF, and upper and lower alarm limit can be set.

WARNING
 Set the appropriate upper and lower alarm limit for each parameter according to the
monitoring condition.
 When the system alarm is suspended, all the alarms will be suspended even if the
parameter alarm is set to ON. Also, the alarms will not be stored as recall events.
 If the upper/lower alarm limit of the parameter is set to OFF, or if arrhythmia alarm is set to
OFF, alarm will not function even if the system alarm is enabled. Pay attention when setting
them OFF.
 When the numeric data acquired from an anesthesia delivery system is displayed, the
following alarms cannot be set. Also, alarm will not generate.
InspCO2/EtCO2, InspO2/ExpO2, InspN2O/ExpN2O, InspAgent/ExpAgent, MAC, ExpMV,
PEAK, PEEP

1 Press the [Menu], and then the key for "Alarm".

The alarm setup menu will be displayed.

2
3

2 Select the parameter group from the tab.

REFERENCE
 The standard parameters will be displayed on the Menu screen. The parameters to be
displayed here are selectable.
(

Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)

3 Select ON/ OFF for the individual alarm.

[ON]: Alarm of the corresponding parameter will generate.

[OFF]: Alarm of the corresponding parameter will not generate.

4 Set the upper/ lower limit.

1 Slide the / keys on the right side of the bar.

 : Adjusts the upper limit.

 : Adjusts the lower limit.

6-10
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Limit Setup

By releasing the finger from the key, fine-tune keys will appear for a fixed period of time.

REFERENCE
 indicates the current measurement value.

5 Adjust the limit or use [Auto] for automatic setup.

 : Sets the upper and lower alarm limit automatically.

REFERENCE
 [Auto] key will be displayed only when [Enable] is set for "Auto Alarm Setup" under "Initial
Settings".
 To maintain the alarm setting even after the power is turned OFF or after the discharge
procedure, store the setting to one of the alarm modes, or select "Backup" for "Alarm"
on the "Backup at Discharge" menu (Monitor Setup).
(
 Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13.)

About the Alarm Threshold Limit

By setting the alarm threshold limit ("Initial Settings") in advance, the alarm threshold can be limited within the
preprogrammed range. When the alarm threshold limit function is enabled, threshold limit will be displayed beside
the alarm bar.

( Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)

Above is an example of alarm threshold limit setting where HR is set to [Enable], and upper and lower limits are set
to 180 bpm and 40 bpm respectively.
NOTE
 The alarm threshold limit can be set for each parameter. When enabling this function, make
sure the upper and lower limits are set appropriately.
 When the alarm threshold limit function is enabled, pressing the [Auto] key for alarm settings
will set the alarm threshold within the limit range.

6-11
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Limit Setup

Limit Deactivating Mode

Even when the alarm threshold limit function is enabled, the alarm threshold outside the limit can be temporarily set.
This is called the "Limit Deactivating Mode."
By pressing the up arrow key for 2 seconds at the upper threshold limit, the limit can be deactivated. The arrow
keys will turn to blue indicating that the upper threshold limit can be exceeded.
In the same way, by pressing the down arrow key for 2 seconds at the lower threshold limit, the limit can be
deactivated. The arrow keys will turn to blue indicating that the lower threshold limit can be exceeded.
When the alarm threshold is set within the limit range, the limit deactivating mode will end.

Above is an example of HR upper threshold limit being deactivated. The upper limit keys are turned to blue
indicating that the upper limit 180 bpm can be exceeded.
NOTE
 If the alarm threshold set on the central monitor exceeds the threshold limit set on the DS-
8400, the alarm threshold set on the central monitor will be applied. Make sure to check the
alarm setting on the DS-8400 as the alarm threshold limit status will be changed to "Limit
Deactivating Mode".
 If the alarm threshold of the transport monitor exceeds the alarm threshold limit of the DS-
8400, the exceeded alarm threshold will be applied to the DS-8400. Make sure to check the
alarm setting on the DS-8400 as the alarm threshold limit status will be changed to "Limit
Deactivating Mode".
 If the alarm threshold of "Setup at Discharge" exceeds the alarm threshold limit, the
exceeded alarm threshold will be applied. Make sure to check the alarm setting at
admittance as the alarm threshold limit status will be changed to "Limit Deactivating Mode.
 f the monitor mode is changed, and the alarm threshold of the current monitor mode exceeds
the threshold limit, this alarm setting will be applied. Make sure to check the alarm setting
on the DS-8400 as the alarm threshold limit status will be changed to "Limit Deactivating
Mode".

6-12
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Assist Screen

Alarm Assist Screen

On the alarm assist screen, maximum of 24 hours of trend data for the corresponding parameter will be displayed.
Alarm limit can be set by using the past trend data as reference.

1 To display the alarm assist screen, press [Menu], select a parameter, and press on the corresponding
parameter setup screen.
Or, press the numeric data box on the home display, and press on the corresponding parameter setup
screen.

The alarm assist screen will be displayed.

2 4
3

2 Select the time range on the time bar.

Dragging the slider to the right will display newer data, and dragging it to the left will display older data.
Pressing [24h] will switch the display by 24 hours.

3 Select the trend display type from , , , etc.

4 Set the upper and lower alarm limit.

1 Press / on the right of the bar.

Alarm zone will be displayed on the trend.

The displayed alarm zone will slide by sliding the or .

The displayed alarm zone will also slide by pressing the / .

2 Set the alarm limit by using the alarm trend as reference.

6-13
Chapter 6 Alarm Function Alarm Assist Screen

6-14
Chapter 7 Monitoring To Display the Parameter Setup Screen

Chapter 7 Monitoring
To Display the Parameter Setup Screen

This section explains how to display the "Parameter Setup" of monitoring parameters.

1 Press the [Menu], and then select the parameter to perform the setup.
Or, press the numeric data box on the home display, and press on the corresponding parameter setup
screen.

The "Parameter Setup" screen will be displayed.

When the numeric data box on the home display is pressed, a floating window
for the basic setup such as size/scale will be displayed.
To display the "Parameter Setup" screen for detailed setup, press .

7-1
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

ECG

This section explains the procedure for ECG measurement preparation and monitoring condition setup.

Before Attaching the Electrodes

CAUTION
 Do not use different types (materials) of electrodes at the same time.
The difference between the polarization potential from each electrode may interfere
monitoring.
 ECG measurement part is Type CF applied part, but it is not intended to directly apply on
patient's heart.

1 If necessary, shave the electrode sites to remove excessive hair.

2 Clean the electrode sites with alcohol wipes or other skin preparation.

REFERENCE
 Use the recommended skin cleaner.

3 After opening the package, peel off the backing of electrode, and attach to the patient.

NOTE
 After opening the package, pay attention not to touch the electrode gel.

7-2
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

Electrode Placement

Depending on the lead cable type, 3-electrode/4-electrode/5-electrode/10-electrode placements are available. Using
the 4-electrode, 5-electrode or 10-electrode application allows simultaneous monitoring of 2 ECG waveforms, and
high accuracy of arrhythmia analysis can be attained. (1 to 12 waveforms can be displayed depending on the number
of electrodes.)
Also, the displayed lead type can be changed.

For 3-electrode lead cable (1 waveform monitoring)

Lead Type: [I]/[II]/[III]

Symbol Color Electrode Site

R Red On the right infraclavicular fossa

L Yellow On the left infraclavicular fossa

F Green On the left midclavicular line, near the

supracrestal line.

For 4-electrode lead cable (Maximum 6 waveforms monitoring)

Lead Type: [I]/[II]/[III]/[aVR]/[aVL]/[aVF]

Symbol Color Electrode Site

R Red On the right infraclavicular fossa

L Yellow On the left infraclavicular fossa

F Green On the left midclavicular line, near the

supracrestal line.

N Black On the right midclavicular line at the

same height as F.

For 5-electrode lead cable (Maximum 7 waveforms monitoring)

Lead Type: [I]/[II]/[III]/[aVR]/[aVL]/[aVF]/[V]

Symbol Color Electrode Site

R Red On the right infraclavicular fossa

L Yellow On the left infraclavicular fossa

F Green On the left midclavicular line, near the

supracrestal line.

N Black On the right midclavicular line at the

same height as F.

C White Chest electrodes (C1 to C6)

7-3
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

For 10-electrode lead cable (Maximum 12 waveforms monitoring)

Lead Type: [I]/[II]/[III]/[aVR]/[aVL]/[aVF]/[V1]/[V2]/[V3]/[V4]/[V5]/[V6]
Symbol Color Electrode Site

R Red On the right infraclavicular fossa

L Yellow On the left infraclavicular fossa

F Green On the left midclavicular line, near the

supracrestal line.

N Black On the right midclavicular line at the

same height as F.

C White The fourth intercostal space at the

right sternal border.

C2 Yellow/White The fourth intercostal space at the left

sternal border.

C3 Green/White On the midway between C2 and C4.

C4 Brown/White The fifth intercostal space on the left
midclavicular line.

C5 Black/White On the left anterior axillary line at the

same horizontal level as C4.

C6 Violet/White On the left midaxillary line at the same

horizontal level as C4.

NOTE
 Electrode Placement for 12-Lead ECG Analysis
When acquiring 12-lead ECG signals, Fukuda Denshi recommends placing the limb
electrodes anywhere along the arms and legs as shown below.
However if it is difficult, use the Mason-Likar 12-lead system.
To reduce the waveform differences from the standard 12-lead, Fukuda Denshi
recommends that the torso placement of the R and L electrodes be near as possible to each
arm, in the infraclavicular fossae, within the area unaffected by myoelectricity. )

Symbol Color Electrode Site

R Red On the right arm

L Yellow On the left arm

F Green On the left leg.

N Black On the right leg.

C White The fourth intercostal space at the

right sternal border.

C2 Yellow/White The fourth intercostal space at the left

sternal border.
C3 Green/White On the midway between C2 and C4.

C4 Brown/White The fifth intercostal space on the left

midclavicular line.
C5 Black/White On the left anterior axillary line at the
same horizontal level as C4.

C6 Violet/White On the left midaxillary line at the same

horizontal level as C4.

7-4
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

Type of Electrodes and Lead Cable

There are various types of disposable electrodes for ECG measurement depending on the connection method with
the lead cable and materials which the electrodes are made of. Make sure to use the appropriate electrodes which will
make full use of the characteristics.
Do not reuse/resterilize the disposable electrodes.
For details of usable lead cables, refer to
 "ECG Accessory" P13-4

Connection to the Patient Monitor

CAUTION
 The indication for continuous use of the electrode is about one day.
 Replace the electrode if the skin contact gets loosen due to perspiration, etc.
 When an electrode is attached to the same location for a long period, some patients may
develop skin irritation. Check the patient's skin condition periodically and change the
electrode site as required.
 When using the electrosurgery-proof type ECG relay cable, the impedance respiration
cannot be measured, and its numeric data and waveform will not be displayed. When
measuring in an environment where electrosurgery is not performed, make sure to use the
standard ECG relay cable.

NOTE
 Use only the specified relay cables, lead cables, and electrodes.
 The conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for applied parts, including
the neutral electrode, should not contact other conductive parts including earth.

1 Clip on the lead cable end to the electrode convex part.

2 Turn right and left to verify that it is securely connected.

3 Connect the lead cable to the relay cable.

7-5
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

4 Plug in the relay cable to the ECG input connector (green) of the HS-8000.

ECG waveform and HR data will be displayed on the monitor.

5 Adjust the waveform size and position, and change the monitoring lead as necessary.
(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
ECG Parameter Setup

Press the [Menu], [ECG] keys to display the "ECG" setup screen.

7-6
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

Adjustment of Waveform Size and Baseline Position

Adjust the waveform size and baseline position.

CAUTION
 The threshold level for arrhythmia detection changes with ECG waveform size. Set a proper
waveform size for monitoring. When the ECG waveform size is x1/4, x1/2, or x1, the
arrhythmia detection level is 250 μV. When the ECG waveform size is x2 or x4, the
arrhythmia detection level is 150 μV.
 Automatic size/position of the ECG is effective only at the time the [Auto] key is pressed.
This does not continuously adjust the size and position.
 The waveform size and position cannot be set if the waveform is not displayed. Refer to "To
Configure the Display" P10-4, and change the display configuration as necessary.
 The threshold level for HR detection changes with ECG waveform size. Set a proper
waveform size for monitoring.

REFERENCE
 By setting the [ECG Size (All Leads)] key as user key, ECG size for all leads can be changed
at once.
(
 "User Key Setup" P10-10)

1 Press the key for "ECG1" to "ECG12", and display the "Size" selection
window.

When the display layout is "12-Lead", the waveform size can be set
differently for limb leads and chest leads.

2 Select the waveform size for displaying/printing.

[Auto]: ECG amplitude will be automatically adjusted to 10 mm. The

automatic adjustment is effective only when the [Auto] key is pressed.

Waveform Size x1/4 x1/2 x1 x2 x4

Voltage (10 mm) 4mV 2mV 1mV 500μV 250μV

3 If the waveform is difficult to see due to ECG amplitude, press / and set the baseline position to 0 mV.
The baseline position for the waveform display and printing will be adjusted.

7-7
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

Lead Selection
Set the monitoring lead.

CAUTION
 The leads for arrhythmia detection, central monitor display, printing are fixed as ECG1 and
ECG2. Set the most appropriate leads with high QRS for ECG1 and ECG2, especially for
arrhythmia detection.
 The alarms for HR, Tachy, Brady will not be generated when the electrode for ECG1 or
ECG2 lead is detached, and for 30 seconds after the electrode is reattached.

1 Press the key for "ECG1" to "ECG12", and display the "Lead" selection
window.

When the display layout is "12-Lead", select the lead for ECG1 and ECG2
on the lead selection window.

2 Select the ECG monitoring lead.

HR Alarm Setup

Set the HR alarm.

( "Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 22 bpm to 300 bpm. The upper limit alarm will become
OFF if the value exceeds 300 bpm.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 20 bpm to 295 bpm.If a value below 20 bpm is set, the
lower alarm will turn OFF.
 Ext Tachy alarm threshold cannot be set below HR upper alarm limit, and Ext Brady alarm
threshold cannot be set above HR lower alarm limit.

REFERENCE
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +40 bpm and -40
bpm to the current value respectively. The lower limit will be clipped to the setting made for
"HR/PR Lower Limit during Alarm Auto Setting" (Menu>Initial Settings>Alarm).
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting is
used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.
However if "HR/PR Lower Limit during Alarm Auto Setting" is also set, HR lower alarm limit
will be clipped to the larger value.
 Ext Tachy will be set to HR upper limit+10 bpm, Ext Brady will be set to HR lower limit-10
bpm. When the set value exceeds 300 bpm for the upper limit and 20 bpm for the lower limit,
the setting will be clipped to 300 bpm and 20 bpm respectively
 When [Auto] is set for Ext Tachy, Ext Brady, the same setting, HR upper limit+10 bpm, HR
lower limit-10 bpm, will be set respectively.

7-8
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

Arrhythmia Alarm Setup

Set the arrhythmia alarm.

( "To Set the Arrhythmia Alarm" P6-1)

Detail Setup

1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8

9 11 13 15
10 12 14
1 Set the filter mode.

Select from [Monitor]/[ESIS]/[Diag.] according to the monitoring purpose.

Each mode has different frequency characteristic.
The selected filter mode will be printed along with other data.
On the waveform area, "M" (Monitor), "E" (ESIS), or "D" (Diagnosis) will be displayed.

CAUTION
 The ESIS mode cannot completely reduce the electrical noise, and may erroneously
detect the pacemaker spike.
 The ESIS mode should be selected only when a high frequency noise largely affects the
HR measurement.
 In ESIS Mode, artifacts such as electrosurgical noise or EMG can be largely reduced, but
QRS amplitude attenuation, waveform distortion, or ST segment change may occur
compared with other filter modes.

Monitor Mode This is the standard mode for ECG monitoring.

(Frequency Characteristic: Adult/Child 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz, Neonate The highest frequency is set to 40 Hz to reduce the
1.6 Hz to 40 Hz) artifact caused by EMG, etc.

ESIS Mode By selecting this mode during electrosurgery, noise

(Frequency Characteristic: Adult/Child/Neonate 1.6 Hz to 15 Hz) can be largely reduced.

Diagnosis Mode Select this mode if ST measurement or high

(Frequency Characteristic: 3-electrode Adult/Child/Neonate 0.05 frequency ECG monitoring is performed.
Hz to 100 Hz As the lowest frequency is set to 0.05 Hz, ST level
4, 5,10-electrode Adult/Child/Neonate 0.05 Hz to 150 Hz) can be accurately measured.

7-9
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

NOTE
 When the filter mode is changed, a notch will appear on the ECG waveform due to the
change in frequency characteristic as shown below.

2 Select [Used]/[Not Used] for "Pacemaker".

[Used]: Pacemaker pulse will be detected and pace pulse mask function will be performed for set duration.
[Not Used]: Pacemaker pulse will not be detected.

3 Set the "Synchronized Mark/Tone".

[OFF]: Synchronized mark will not be displayed.

[Auto]: The priority will be according to the setting of "Synchronized Mark/Tone Priority" [Menu>Initial
Settings>Meas.>Other]. (
 Maintenance Manual "Other Setup" P5-11)
[ECG]: The priority of synchronized mark/tone will be set in the order of ECG>SpO2-1>SpO2-2>BP.
[SpO2]: The priority of synchronized mark/tone will be set in the order of SpO2-1>SpO2-2>ECG>BP.

[ECG]: HR synchronized mark will be displayed. The synchronized tone will turn ON.
[SpO2-1]/[SpO2-2]: SpO2 synchronized mark will be displayed.
The synchronized tone will turn ON.

[BP]: BP synchronized mark will be displayed. The synchronized tone will turn ON.

4 Set the "Pacemaker Pulse".

CAUTION
 Precautions about Pacemaker Pulse Detection
 There are some cases when the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected depending on
the pacemaker type, pulse voltage, pulse width, electrode lead type (unipolar, bipolar),
or electrode placement which causes the pacemaker pulse amplitude to decrease,
and disables the pacemaker pulse detection.
 If signals similar to a pacemaker pulse are present, such as electric blanket noise or
excessive AC frequency noise, these may be erroneously detected and displayed as
a pacemaker pulse.
 When a spontaneous QRS and pacemaker pulse overlap (ex. fusion beat, etc.), QRS
detection cannot be performed properly. In this case, the heart rate is degraded.
 If a pacemaker pulse is continuously detected due to AC frequency interference, QRS
detection will be suspended and the heart rate will be reduced. Arrhythmia will not be
detected either.

7-10
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

REFERENCE
 Pacemaker Pulse Detection Algorithm 3

1 ECG Signal Input

ECG signal will be input.
2 Pacemaker Pulse Detection and Suspension of QRS
Detection
Detects the high frequency and large amplitude signal as 1
pacemaker pulse.
When pacemaker pulse is detected, QRS detection will be
suspended for fixed amount of time to avoid erroneous
detection of pacemaker pulse as QRS.
2
3 Canceling of Arrhythmia Detection
Arrhythmia detection of the waveform following the pacemaker pulse will be canceled.

Select from [ON] or [OFF].

[ON]: The pacemaker artificial pulse will be displayed on to the ECG waveform with a different color.
"Pacemaker Pulse" will be automatically set to [ON] when [Used] is selected for "Pacemaker" on the "Admit/
Discharge" screen.
[OFF]: The pacemaker artificial pulse will not be displayed.

5 Set the "Pace Pulse Mask Time".

WARNING
 If the QRS pace mask function is set to [OFF]/[10ms]/[20ms]/[40ms], the pace pulse may
be erroneously be detected as a QRS complex and HR alarm or asystole alarm may not
generate due to incorrect HR (counting pace pulse as QRS complex). Select [OFF]/
[10ms]/[20ms]/[40ms] only if you are sure that pacing failure will not occur, or when the
patient can be constantly monitored.

REFERENCE
 For the patients using pacemakers, there are cases when the pacing waveform may not
occur in spite of the pacing stimulus. This condition is called "pacing failure".To avoid
detecting pacemaker pulses as a QRS complex, this monitor has a function to suspend
QRS detection for a fixed amount of time starting from the detection of the pacing
stimulus. This function is called "pace pulse mask".
But if the pacemaker does not detect the patient's spontaneous heartbeat (sensing
failure), and the pacing stimulus is applied at the same timing as QRS, this pace mask
function may erroneously mask the QRS and cause the heart rate measurement to
decrease.
To avoid this, QRS pace pulse mask function can be set to [OFF]/[10ms]/[20ms] for
correct measurement of the heart rate. (Default: Auto)

7-11
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

Normal Pacing Pacing Failure Sensing Failure

1 2 3 4

1 Pacemaker Pulse
2 Pacing waveform caused by pacemaker pulse
3 No waveform in spite of pacing stimulus
4 Pacemaker pulse and spontaneous heartbeat occurring at the same time

1 Press the key for "Pace Pulse Mask Time".

2 Select the mask time depending on the pace spike amplitude or presence of
fusion beat.
[Auto]: Pace pulse mask time will be automatically set according to the pace
pulse amplitude.

[OFF]: Pace pulse mask time will be set to 0 ms.

6 Set the Drift Filter.

[ON]: Only the amplitude with frequency component under 1 Hz will be attenuated to prevent the ECG
baseline drift.
The patient signal display will delay about 0.5 seconds.
On the home display, "Drift-F ON" will be displayed in the information area, and "DF" will be displayed in the
waveform area.

[OFF]: ECG drift filter will not be set.

7 Set the "HR Average".

[Instant]: HR measured from RR interval of each heartbeat will be displayed.

[Average]: HR measured from 6 seconds of heartbeat for adult and child, and 3 seconds of heartbeat for
neonate will be displayed.

8 Set the "HR Delay”.

[OFF]: HR will be calculated based on the "HR Average" setting.

[ON]: HR will be calculated based on the arrhythmia analysis. 5 seconds delay will occur compared to when
[OFF] is selected. It may improve the HR detection when T wave or noise is interfering.
When two ECG waveforms (ECG1 and ECG2) are measured, HR will be calculated by merging ECG1 and

7-12
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

ECG2.
If artifact is present on one of the waveforms, HR will be calculated using only the stable ECG waveform.
If artifact is present on both of the waveforms, HR value will be displayed as "---".
When ECG electrodes are detached, arrhythmia analysis cannot be performed, and <Lead OFF> message
will be displayed. Alarm sound will also generate.

NOTE
 When the patient classification is set to [Neonate], "HR Delay" will be set to [OFF].
 When the patient classification is set to [Adult] or [Child], and "HR Delay" is set to [ON],
"Inst." or "Av." will not be displayed inside the HR or HR/PR numeric data box.

9 Set the "AC Filter".

If the ECG waveform is interfered with AC noise, the AC filter cuts off the frequency component (50 Hz/60 Hz).

[ON]: AC filter which attenuates the AC noise of 50 Hz to 60 Hz will be set. "AC" will be displayed in the
waveform area.

[OFF]: AC filter will not be set.

10 Set the "Auto Lead". The automatic lead switching will be performed for ECG 1 and ECG 2.
During Lead OFF

Detached Auto Lead Selected

Lead Cable Type
Electrode ECG1 ECG2

R III III
4-electrode
L II II

R/R+C III III

5-electrode L/L+C II II
C II aVR

R/R+C III III

10-electrode L/L+C II II
C,C2 to C6 II aVR

[ON]: When lead-off condition occurs, the lead will automatically switch.
Also, <Check Electrodes> will be displayed.

[OFF]: The lead will not automatically switch even when lead-off condition occurs.

11 Set the "ST/VPC/Arrhy. Alarm Display".

[ON]: If 2 or more boxes are used for ECG numeric data display, ST level, VPC, arrhythmia alarm factor will
be displayed inside the ECG numeric data box.

[OFF]: ST level, VPC, arrhythmia alarm factor will not be displayed inside the ECG numeric data box.

12 Set the "3lead Override".

NOTE
 When a relay cable for 5-lead or 10-lead is used with a 3-lead cable, it will be judged as
lead-off condition and <LEAD OFF> message will be displayed.
If a 3-lead cable is intentionally used, select [ON] for "3lead Override" to avoid displaying
the <LEAD OFF> message.
 If [ON] is selected for "3-lead Override" even though 4-lead, 5-lead, or 10-lead relay
cable is used with all the lead cables and electrodes connected, it will be acknowledged
as only 3 electrodes are used and only one waveform will be displayed.
Also, artifact may interfere to the waveform or lead-off information may become incorrect.

7-13
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

When using the "3lead Override" function, use only 3 electrodes of L, R and F.

Select from [ON] or [OFF].

13 Select the lead for ECG analog output.

[Disp. Lead]: The lead of the displayed waveform will be output.

[Selected Lead]: The lead selected on "Output Lead Sel." window will be output.

14 Set the "ECG Waveform Display during Lead-OFF".

When the lead-OFF condition is detected, whether or not to display the waveform for detached lead can be
selected.

[ON]: The input waveform will be displayed even during lead-off condition.
[OFF]: Baseline will be displayed during lead-off condition.

15 Set the "Chest Lead-OFF".

Whether or not to detect the chest lead OFF condition can be selected. If set to [Enable], chest lead OFF
condition will be notified by an alarm generation.

[Enable]: Chest lead OFF condition will be notified by an alarm generation.

[Disable]: Chest lead OFF condition will not be notified by an alarm generation.

NOTE
 If chest lead is set for ECG1/ECG2, chest lead OFF condition will be notified by an alarm
generation even if [Disable] is set for "Chest Lead-OFF".

16 Set the "Noise Detection".

When a noise generating from electrosurgery, body motion, etc. is detected, whether or not to retain the HR
data before the noise detection and to switch the synchronizing source to SpO2/BP can be selected.

[ON]: HR data before the noise detection will be retained, and synchronizing source will switch to SpO2, BP.
[OFF]: HR data before the noise detection will not be retained, and synchronizing source will not switch to
SpO2, BP.

NOTE
 Even if the synchronizing source is switched to SpO2, the ECG tone will remain and not
change.

7-14
Chapter 7 Monitoring ECG

ON/OFF of Parameter Display

Select ON/OFF for parameter display.

CAUTION
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and
tabular trend input will also cease.

1 Press the [Disp. ON] key.

The "Display ON/OFF" confirmation window will be displayed.

2 Select from [Display ON] or [Display OFF].

[Display ON]: Waveform and numeric data will be displayed.

[Display OFF]: Waveform and numeric data will not be displayed.
A message will be displayed inside the numeric data display
area.

When ECG electrodes are attached to the patient with the ECG display set to OFF, the ECG waveform and
numeric data will be automatically displayed after 10 seconds.

7-15
Chapter 7 Monitoring Respiration

Respiration

This section explains about the respiration measurement by the impedance, CO2, ventilator, or SpO2 method and the
measurement condition settings.

WARNING
 The SpO2 respiration measurement is not intended for use as an APNEA monitor.

CAUTION
 When a defibrillator is used during respiration monitoring, a large offset voltage will be
placed on the ECG electrodes, which may cause interruption of monitoring for a few
seconds.
 When using the electrosurgery-proof type ECG relay cable, the impedance respiration
cannot be measured, and its numeric data and waveform will not be displayed. When
measuring in an environment where electrosurgery is not performed, make sure to use the
standard ECG relay cable.

Respiration Monitoring (Impedance Method)

1 Check that the displayed ECG waveform is stable.

The respiration waveform is detected from ECG II or ECG I lead explained in the previous section. Therefore,
a stable ECG waveform is necessary to acquire respiration waveform.

2 Verify that the respiration waveform and respiration rate is displayed on the home display.

NOTE
 Adjust the detection lead, waveform size, baseline position, and sweep speed for
optimum waveform display.
(
 "To Configure the Display" P10-4)
 To change the lead, press the lead name on the waveform area, and display the lead
selection window.

7-16
Chapter 7 Monitoring Respiration

RESP Parameter Setup

Press the [Menu], [RESP] keys to display the "RESP" setup screen.
The example when the HS-8312 is used is shown below.
1 2
4 3
5
6
7
9
8
1 Press the key for "Size" to adjust the waveform size and baseline position.

Select from [x1/4] / [x1/2] / [x1] / [x2] / [x4].

If the waveform is difficult to see due to impedance waveform amplitude,
set the baseline position to 0 Ω. The baseline position for printing will not
change. Use the / keys to adjust the baseline position.

2 Set the RR alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 The same RR alarm setting will be applied for impedance, CO2, ventilator, gas unit, and
SpO2 measurement.
 For RR measured from CO2 waveform, alarm will not generate unless 2 or more
respiration is detected within 30 seconds after the power is turned ON, monitoring is
resumed, CO2 unit is connected, or a patient is discharged.
 Set the upper limit within the following range for each patient classification.
Adult: 10 Bpm to 150 Bpm
Child/ Neonate: 4 Bpm to 150 Bpm
The upper limit alarm will turn OFF if the value above 150 Bpm is set.
 Set the lower limit within the following range for each patient classification.
Adult: 5 Bpm to 145 Bpm
Child/ Neonate: 2 Bpm to 148 Bpm
If a value below 5 Bpm / 2 Bpm is set, the lower alarm will turn OFF.
 For the impedance respiration, RR alarm will not generate when the electrode of
detection lead is detached and for 30 seconds after the electrode is reattached.
 When Capnostat 5 is used, RR alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is
detected after completion of the airway adapter calibration.

REFERENCE
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +20 Bpm and -
20 Bpm to the current value respectively.
 The adjustable increment for upper and lower limit depends on the patient classification

7-17
Chapter 7 Monitoring Respiration

and "RR Alarm Increment" setting under "Initial Settings" > "User I/F".

Alarm Increment (Initial Settings > User I/F)

Normal Small

Adult 5 Bpm increment 1 Bpm increment

Child/Neonate 2 Bpm increment 1 Bpm increment

 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

3 Set the APNEA alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 The same APNEA alarm setting will be applied for impedance, CO2, SpO2 module, and
ventilator measurement.
 If the alarm is based on the apnea time measured from CO2 waveform, apnea alarm will
not generate unless 2 or more respiration is detected within 30 seconds after the power
is turned ON, monitoring is resumed, CO2 unit is connected, or a patient is discharged.
 Set the upper limit in the range numeric of 10 to 60 sec. The upper limit alarm will turn
OFF if a value above 60 seconds is set.
 For the impedance respiration, apnea alarm will not generate when the electrode of
detection lead is detached and for 30 seconds after the electrode is reattached.
 When Capnostat 5 is used, apnea alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is
detected after completion of the airway adapter calibration.

REFERENCE
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Auto] is set, the apnea alarm setting registered for the currently selected mode will
be applied.
 The upper limit can be set in 1 second increment. There is no lower limit.
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

4 Set the "RR Synchronized Mark".

[ON]: The mark synchronized to impedance respiration or CO2

waveform will be displayed.

[OFF]: Synchronized mark will not be displayed.

5 Set the "RR/APNEA Alarm Source".

The parameter to display the RR synchronized mark and to generate the RR/APNEA alarm can be selected
from impedance, CO2/multigas unit , ventilator, and SpO2.

WARNING
 The RR/APNEA alarm will not be generated unless the numeric data box corresponded
to the selected RR/APNEA alarm source is displayed. Make sure to display the numeric
data box for the parameter set as the RR/APNEA alarm source.
 The SpO2 respiration measurement is not intended for use as an APNEA monitor.

7-18
Chapter 7 Monitoring Respiration

CAUTION
 If the "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" setting is other than [Impedance] (or, if [Auto] selects a
setting other than [Impedance]), the RESP waveform will not be transmitted on a wired
network.
 RR_SpO2 is a parameter which can be measured on the DS-8007N.

[Impedance]: RR alarm will be generated based on the impedance respiration curve. The RR synchronized
mark based on impedance respiration will be displayed.

[CO 2/ GAS]: When multigas unit/anesthesia delivery system is used, RR alarm will be generated based on
the RR measured by the multigas unit/ anesthesia delivery system.
If multigas unit is not used, RR alarm will be generated based on the RR measured by the HPD-810/HPD-
820 (Capnostat 5) or HCP-810/HCP-820. The RR synchronized mark based on CO2 waveform will be
displayed.

[Ventilator]: RR alarm will be generated based on the RR measured by the ventilator. The RR synchronized
mark based on ventilator measurement will be displayed.

[SpO2]: RR alarm will be generated based on the RR measured by the SpO2 module. The RR synchronized
mark will not be displayed.

[Auto]: The measurable parameter will be selected in the priority of CO2/GAS>ventilator>impedance>SpO2,

and generates the alarm if the corresponded numeric data box is displayed on the home display.

6 Set the "CVA Detect".

REFERENCE
 When the amplitude of the respiration waveform decreases due to causes such as
respiratory pause, the ECG waveform may be superimposed on to the respiration
waveform, making the RR equal to the HR. This condition is called CVA (Cardio-Vascular
Artifact), and is detected using the CVA detection function.
 This function will be effective only when [Impedance] is set as the "RR/APNEA Alarm
Source" or, when [Auto] selects impedance respiration.
 If the ECG waveform is superimposed on to the respiration waveform with HR (RR) of 30
Bpm or above for 20 seconds (10 seconds for neonates) or more and if the "CVA Detect"
is set to [ON], the <CVA detected> message will be displayed, and an alarm sound will
be generated.

[ON]: When CVA is detected, alarm will generate and message will be displayed.
[OFF]: CVA detection will not be performed.

7 Set the "Impedance Measurement".

WARNING
 If a patient is using an adaptive (minute ventilation) pacemaker, "Impedance
Measurement" should be set to OFF.
The respiration measurement using the impedance method conducts high-frequency and
weak current between the ECG electrodes attached to the patient, and measures the
potential difference between the electrodes caused by thoracic movement using the
synchronous rectification system. For the patient using the adaptive (minute ventilation)
pacemaker, the pacemaker measurement signal and the high-frequency current of this
device interferes with each other which causes incorrect respiration measurement.

[ON]: Standard impedance respiration measurement will be performed.

[OFF]: Impedance respiration measurement will not be performed and impedance respiration waveform and

7-19
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

RR data will not be displayed. A high-frequency current which is a measurement signal will not be
conducted.

8 Set the "Impedance Detection Lead".

Select the respiration detection lead from [I ] or [II].

9 Select ON/OFF for parameter display.

(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
BP

This section explains about the procedure of BP1 to BP 8 measurement preparation and measurement condition
setup.

CAUTION
 Do not reuse / re-sterilize the disposable type transducers.
 If using a reusable blood pressure transducer, disinfect it according to the manufacturer's
guidelines.
 The long-term use of the blood pressure transducer, tube and catheter may increase the risk
of infection. Perform periodic replacement with new one. The guidelines of the CDC
(Disease Control and Prevention) recommend replacing within 96 hours.
 If the ambient temperature of the blood pressure transducer has changed greatly, the zero
balance may cause the drift. Perform the zero balance again.
 An operator must not get away from a patient during the BP measurement. However, when
getting away from the patient is necessary, do not activate the Alarm Suspend and Silence
functions in order not to miss any sudden changes in the patient's condition.
(
 "To Set the System Alarm (ON or Suspend)" P6-7)
(
 "To Silence or Suspend the System Alarm Sound" P6-8)
 Be sure to perform Daily Check. Use of faulty device might harm the patient or operator.
(
 "Daily Check" P4-1)
 If the Device Status Alarm occurs or if you feel the unusual operation of the device, perform
the inspections to confirm the safety or contact our service representative.
(
 "Device Status Alarm Message" P11-7)
 The BP value will not be displayed until zero balance is performed after the power is turned
ON. Make sure to perform the zero balance.
Once the zero balance is performed, the zero balance information will be maintained, and
the BP value will be displayed.

7-20
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

BP Monitoring

The HS -8000 utilizes multiparameter amplifier input method which allows monitoring of 2 channels of BP through
the 2ch BP conversion cable, CJO-P01B-DJ0.5. The BP relay cable can be directly connected to the multiparameter
connector.
The measurement is also possible using the HM-800/HM-801 Multi Module

( "Multiparameter Connector Setup for BP, TEMP, CO Measurement" P7-114)

1 Connect the 2ch BP interface cable to the HS-8000.

For Connection via 2ch BP Conversion Cable (CJO-P01B-DJ0.5):

1 Connect the interface cable to the multiparameter connector via 2ch BP conversion cable (CJO-P01B-
DJ0.5).

1 Multiparameter Connector
2 2ch BP Conversion Cable CJO-P01B-
DJ0.5 1

3 1ch BP Relay Cable CJO-P01B-S**

3
2

For Direct Connection:

1 Connect the BP relay cable directly to the multiparameter connector.
1ch BP Relay Cable CJO-P01B-S**
2ch BP Relay Cable CJO-P01B-D**

7-21
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

2 Assemble the BP measurement device.

REFERENCE
 The following procedure explains the case when a BP transducer (LS575 series) is used.
If using other transducers, refer to the operation manual for the corresponding
transducer.

1 Inspect transducer packaging for damage prior to opening.

2 Verify that each connector is securely connected.

3 Connect the BP relay cable to the transducer.

4 Align the bracket to patient’s heart position (about 1/2 of the chest depth).

5 Inject 1000 units of heparin into the saline bag, mix thoroughly and puncture the infusion line through the
same hole.

6 Set the saline bag to pressure bag, and hang from the infusion device. Fill saline to about 1/3 of the drip.

7-22
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

7 After loosening the zero-port plug, push the flash button to perform priming to remove air bubbles.

8 Verify that all air bubbles are removed, and tighten the zero-port plug. Turn on the zero-port plug side of
the open-air three-way valve.

9 Inflate the pressure bag to 300 mmHg.

10 Set the BP device and wait for about 5 minutes.

3 Perform zero balance.

1 Loosen the zero-port plug on open-air three-way valve one-half turn.

7-23
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

2 Press the BP numeric data box (parameter key) on the home display.

The BP floating window will be displayed.

3 Press the [Zero] key on the BP floating window or BP parameter setup screen.

Zero balance will start.

When the BP zero balance is complete, the completed date/time will be displayed inside the [Zero] key.
4 Turn off the zero-port plug side of the open-air three-way valve.

7-24
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

5 Connect the catheter to the end of monitoring line.

The measurement preparation is completed, and BP measurement will start.

4 Press the [Home] key on the user key.

5 Verify that the BP waveform and numeric data is displayed on the home display.

CAUTION
 The zero balance procedure is required for the following case.
 When starting the measurement.
 When the position of the heart has changed due to body movement.
 When the position of the transducer has changed.
 When measuring for a long period of time and there is a possibility of measurement
error due to change in ambient temperature, etc.
 When a connector is connected/disconnected, or a transducer is replaced.

7-25
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

Zero Balance of All Pressure Lines (User Key)

The zero balance for all the displayed BP can be performed using the user key.
If any of the BP is in progress of measurement, perform the zero balance on each BP parameter setup screen.

1 Open the three-way valve of all the pressure transducers to air.

<READY> will be displayed inside the user key.

2 Press the [BP Zero] key on the user key.

3 Verify the BP waveform is positioned at zero, and "0" is displayed for the BP value.

<COMPLETE> will be displayed when the procedure is complete.

<FAILED> will be displayed when the process fails.
<DRIFT> will be displayed when the BP relay cable is not connected.

NOTE
 If <FAILED> is displayed, the three-way valve may not be opened to air, artifact is
present, or the transducer may be defective. Check the cause and try the zero balance
procedure again.
 If <DRIFT> is displayed, verify that all the connections are secure.

4 Close the three-way valve when the zero balance is complete.

CAUTION
 When the transducer or tubing is replaced, make sure to perform the zero balance.
Otherwise, accurate measurement will not be performed.
 <READY> will not be displayed unless the three-way valves of all pressure transducers
are opened to air. If the status is not displayed, or if <MEASURE> is displayed, check if
the three-way valve of pressure transducers are opened to air.

7-26
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

BP zero status displayed inside the user key

No display : Open transducer to air

MEASURE : Open transducer to air

READY : Ready to perform zero balance.

BP ZERO : BP zero in progress

FAILED : Zero failed

COMPLETE : Zero complete

DRIFT : Zero drift

Zero Balance of All Pressure Lines ([BP Zero] Key)

By using the [BP Zero] key on the HS-8000 or Multi Module, zero balance can be performed for all the BP even if
not displayed.
 When the BP zero balance properly completes, a beep sound will generate for 1 second and LED will light
in blue.
 When the BP zero balance fails, a beep sound will generate for 3 seconds and LED will flash in blue.

NOTE
 Using the [BP Zero] key will allow to perform zero balance for all the BP even if not displayed
on the home display.
For the BP channel with the transducer in progress of measurement, zero balance will not
be performed.

Zero Balance for Each Pressure Line

1 Open the three-way valve of the pressure transducer to air.

2 Verify that "Zero ready" is displayed on the BP parameter setup screen for BP1 to BP8, and press the [Zero]
key.

3 Verify the BP waveform is positioned at zero, and "0" is displayed for the BP value.

A message, "Zero complete" will be displayed when the procedure is complete.

When the BP zero balance is complete, the completed date/time will be displayed at the lower part of the
[Zero] key.

A message, "Zero failed" will be displayed when the process fails.

A message, "Zero drift" will be displayed when the BP relay cable is not connected.

NOTE
 If a message, "Zero failed" is displayed, the three-way valve may not be opened to air,
artifact is present, or the transducer may be defective. Check the cause and try the
zero balance procedure again.
 If a message, "Zero drift" is displayed, verify that all the connections are secure.

4 Close the three-way valve when the zero balance is complete.

7-27
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

BP Parameter Setup

Channel Settings of BP, TEMP

The default settings of BP and TEMP channels are as follows.

For HS-8000 For DS-8007

%3 7(03 %3
  

%3 %3
 

When the DS-8007 is used, the temperature measured on temperature jack is fixed as T1, T2.
NOTE
 The channel settings can be changed on the "Multi-amplifier" screen ([Initial Settings >
System > Unit Module]).
(

Maintenance Manual "Unit Module Setup" P4-19)

Label Setup

1 Press key for "Label", and display the "Label" window.

2 Select from [BPx]/[ART]/[PAP]/[CVP]/[ICP]/[IAP]/[LVP]/[USx].

REFERENCE
 Description of Each Label:
ART (Arterial Pressure)
PAP (Pulmonary Artery Pressure)
CVP (Central Venous Pressure)
ICP (Intra-cranial Pressure)
IAP (Intra-aortic Balloon Pumping Pressure)
LVP (Left Ventricular Pressure)
US1 to US5: User labels (3 characters) which can be set on the "Initial Settings".
(
 Maintenance Manual "User Label Setup" P5-9)

NOTE
 US3 to US5 cannot be selected for the device connected to DS-LANII.

7-28
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

When the BP Label is ART

By selecting [ON] for "ART Catheter Check Message" [Menu>Parameter>BP1 (ART)>Detail Setup], an alarm will
be generated when the catheter is disconnected.

( "Set the "ART Catheter Check Message".." P7-34)

CAUTION
 The default setting of “ART Catheter Check Message” is [OFF].
 When “ART Catheter Check Message” is set to [ON], alarm will generate when the
transducers are opened to air.

When the BP Label is IAP

PDP (Peak Diastolic Pressure) of IABP can be displayed in addition to systolic, diastolic, and mean pressure. Note
that Systolic Pressure (SYS) = Peak Systolic Pressure (PSP).

CAUTION
 Note that Systolic Pressure (SYS)=Peak Systolic Pressure (PSP) when reviewing graphic
trend, data base, or when setting the alarm.
 When ECG is not measured, PDP cannot be calculated.

When the BP Label is CVP

The measurement unit can be selected from "mmHg", "kPa" or "cmH2O".
The measurement unit can be selected on the "Initial Settings" menu. The selected unit will be displayed on the BP
numeric data box.

( Maintenance Manual "Measurement Unit" P5-10)

When the BP Label is ICP

CPP (Cerebral Perfusion Pressure) can be measured.
CPP = Mean Arterial Pressure – Mean Intracranial Pressure
If the CPP value is negative, the data will not be displayed. Also, alarm cannot be set for CPP.

7-29
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

PCWP Measurement
When PAP is set as BP label, the mean value can be displayed as PCWP (Pulmonary Capillary Wedge Pressure).

1 Press the key for "PCWP".

PCWP measurement screen will be

displayed.
On the PCWP screen, the current BP 5 4
waveform and RESP waveform will be
displayed.

2 Select the waveform scale from [20]/[50]

2
as necessary.
3
3 Touch [Freeze].

The displayed waveform will freeze

and cursor will be displayed. The cursor point indicates the current mean pressure.

4 Use the / keys to set the PAWP value.

5 Press the [Input] key after setting the PCWP value.

The PCWP value will be displayed inside the PAP (BP label) numeric data box with the measurement time.
It will be also displayed on the trend data.

7-30
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

Scale Setup
CAUTION
 When wireless network is used, BP waveform with a scale above the set scale will not be
properly transmitted. The displayed BP scale should be within the set scale.

NOTE
 Select the full scale for displaying and printing.
 The scale selection will differ depending on the label as shown below.
 Change the scale before the freeze operation, as the waveform will be deleted if the scale
is changed after the freeze operation.

Scale
5 10 15 20 30 40 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 mmHg
BP Label 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 12 16 20 24 32 40 kPa

20 40
cmH2O

BP1 to BP8
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
User Label
ART,
IAP, Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
LVP
PAP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

CVP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

ICP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

1 Press the key for "Scale Selection", and display the scale selection window.

2 Select the scale from the displayed selection.

Alarm Setup
1 Set the BP alarm.
(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 2 mmHg to 300 mmHg / 0.2 kPa to 40.0 kPa. If a value
above 300 mmHg / 40.0 kPa is set, the upper alarm will turn OFF.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 0 mmHg to 295 mmHg / 0 kPa to 39.5 kPa. If a value
below 0 mmHg / 0 kPa is set, the lower alarm will turn OFF.
 Alarm will not generate until 30 seconds has passed after the zero balance or after the
transducer has been opened to air.

REFERENCE
 Select ON/OFF of BP alarm and set the upper and lower alarm limit for systolic (S),
diastolic (D), and mean (M) BP.
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa).
 The adjustable increment will be according to the "BP Alarm Increment" setting. (Normal/
Small).

7-31
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

(
Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)
 The adjustable increment for upper and lower limit changes from 50 mmHg / 7 kPa.
 When [Auto] is set for the BP label of BP1/ART, the upper and lower limit will be
automatically set to +40 mmHg / +5 kPa and -20 mmHg / -3 kPa respectively to the
current value.
 When [Auto] is set for the BP label other than BP1/ART, the upper and lower limit will be
automatically set to +20%, –20% respectively to the current value.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (

Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

"BP Alarm Increment" Setup

If [Normal] is selected; If [Small] is selected;

0 mmHg to 50 mmHg 2 mmHg increment

1 mmHg increment
50 mmHg to 300 mmHg 5 mmHg increment

0 kPa to 7 kPa 0.2 kPa increment

0.1 kPa increment
7 kPa to 40.0 kPa 0.5 kPa increment

Detail Setup (BP Parameter)

Press the [Menu], [BP] keys to display the "BP" setup screen.
The "BP" setup screen can be also displayed by pressing the detail key on the BP floating window.

1 4
2 5
3 6

7
8
9

7-32
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

1 Set the "Synchronized Mark/Tone". (BP1/ART)

The parameter to display the HR synchronized mark can be selected from ECG, SpO2, and BP (BP1 or ART).
If BP1 and ART are measured simultaneously, ART will be prioritized.

[Auto]: The synchronized mark will be displayed in the priority of "ECG > SpO2-1 > SpO2-2 > BP".
[ECG]: HR synchronized mark will be displayed.
[SpO2-1]/[SpO2-2]: SpO2 synchronized mark will be displayed.
[BP]: BP synchronized mark will be displayed.
[OFF]: Synchronized mark will not be displayed.

NOTE
 If the corresponding BP (BP1/ART) is not measured, PR (BP) will be displayed as "---".

2 Set the "Display Type".

CAUTION
 The undisplayed BP data will not generate a BP alarm or be displayed in the tabular
trend. Select the appropriate display type according to the monitoring purpose.

NOTE
 The display type of numeric data can be selected from [S/D/M]/[S/D]/[M]. The BP alarm
will not be generated unless the data is displayed.
 If the BP label is CVP, IAP, PAP, ICP, the display type is fixed.

[S/D/M]: The systolic/diastolic/mean BP value will be displayed.

[S/D]: The systolic/diastolic BP value will be displayed.

[M]: The mean BP value will be displayed.

3 Select the "Wave Filter" from [6Hz]/[8Hz]/[12Hz]/[40Hz].

NOTE
 Select the appropriate filter from 6 Hz, 8 Hz, 12 Hz, 40 Hz. An artifact may interfere on
the BP waveform depending on the combination of BP measurement circuit.

4 Set the "Mean Wave".

[ON]: The mean BP waveform will be displayed and <MEAN_WAVE>

will be displayed inside the numeric data box.

5 Set the "Respiration Filter".

The BP waveform baseline drift caused by the respiration influence can be prevented by setting ON the
respiration filter.

[ON]: Respiration Filter will turn ON.

[OFF]: Respiration Filter will turn OFF.

6 Select the output signal for "IBP Analog Output".

7-33
Chapter 7 Monitoring BP

7 Set the "Alarm during NIBP".

[ON]: BP alarm will generate even during NIBP measurement.

[OFF]: BP alarm will not generate during NIBP measurement and for 30 seconds after the measurement.

8 Set the "ART Catheter Check Message"..

[ON]: When the BP label is "ART" and the catheter is disconnected, check message will be displayed.
[OFF]: ART catheter check message will not be displayed.

CAUTION
 The setting is common for all BP channels. When setting is changed for BP1, the same
setting will be applied for BP2 to 8.
 The default setting of "ART Catheter Check Message" is [OFF].
 When "ART Catheter Check Message" is set to [ON], alarm will generate when the
transducers are opened to air.

9 Select ON/OFF for parameter display.

(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
CAUTION
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and
tabular/graphic trend input will also cease.
 If the display of waveform/numeric data labeled as BP1/ART is set to OFF, the BP pulse
rate will not be displayed.

BP Source Selection for PR_IBP

Select the BP source for the pulse rate measurement.
The PR_IBP source can be set by displaying the PR_IBP floating window, and pressing the key for "PR_IBP
Source".

Selecting [Auto] will measure the pulse rate from ART or BP1.

7-34
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

The procedure of NIBP measurement and measurement condition setup are explained.

CAUTION
 For the following situation, measurements will be terminated.
 When the measurement time has exceeded 160 seconds for adult and child, 80 seconds
for neonate.
 When the inflation value has exceeded 300 mmHg for adult, 210 mmHg for child, and 150
mmHg for neonate.
 If used with the incorrect patient classification, it will not only cause erroneous
measurement, but the inflating level for the adult may be applied to child or neonate causing
dangerous situation to the patient.
 The following factors may affect the NIBP value.
 Body motion, arrhythmia, convulsion, low pulse pressure, slow pulse
 Continuous noise such as cardiac massage
 Noise from the electrosurgical instrument

Lineup of Cuffs

REFERENCE
 According to the AHA (American Heart Association) guideline, the appropriate cuff width is
40% of the arm circumference.
Select the appropriate cuff from the following selections.
For other usable cuffs, refer to
 "NIBP Cuffs" P13-7

NIBP Monitoring

WARNING
 Before the NIBP measurement, make sure the patient classification ([Adult]/[Child]/
[Neonate]) is properly selected on the "Admit/Discharge" menu. Otherwise, correct
measurement cannot be performed, and congestion or other injury may result.

CAUTION
 Correct NIBP measurement cannot be performed if oxygenator is used or if the pulse is
difficult to detect.
 Pay attention when measuring the NIBP of patient with bleeding disorders or
hypercoagulation. The cuff inflation constricting the arm may cause petechia or circulatory
failure with blood clot.
 Do not apply the cuff to the arm or thigh where vein is secured. The blood may backflow
causing the chemical injection to cease.
 Properly arrange the cuff and air hose.
 Check the condition of cuff-applied part on the patient during measurement so that the blood
circulation will not be blocked over long period of time by the squashed or bent cuff hose.

7-35
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

 Check the patient's condition constantly while measuring over a long period of time with
interval of 2.5 minutes or less. Also, periodically check the blood circulation while performing
periodic measurement over a long period of time. Congestion or rash may occur at the
measuring site.
 Make sure to check the patient's condition constantly when repeatedly using continuous
measurement as it may cause dysfunction of patient's circulation.
 When the cuff is not applied to the patient, pay attention not to leave the cuff unattended. If
periodic or continuous measurement is set, the cuff will automatically inflate and may cause
the rubber bag inside the cuff to burst. When not performing the NIBP measurement, set the
NIBP measurement interval OFF and disconnect the air hose from the NIBP connector.
 The following factors may affect the NIBP value.
 Body motion, arrhythmia, convulsion, low perfusion
 Continuous noise such as cardiac massage
 Periodic electromagnetic noise
 If the cuff inflation may adversely affect the patient's blood flow or wound, attach the cuff to
an appropriate position under physician's instruction.
 Do not apply the NIBP cuff to the arm of the mastectomized side. It may cause swelling or
other circulatory failure.
 Do not perform NIBP measurement to patient who is pregnant including preeclampsia.
Accurate measurement may not be possible.

NOTE
 When the [NIBP Start/Stop] key is pressed or when the NIBP measurement interval is
changed, the standby mode will be canceled and the NIBP periodic measurement will start.

1 Select the appropriate cuff type for the patient.

(
"NIBP Cuffs" P13-7)
CAUTION
 Select the appropriate cuff size which best fits the arm circumference.
If the cuff size is inappropriate, it may cause measurement error.
 Do not use a cuff which is worn out or damaged on the exterior.
The cuff may burst during inflation.


2 Connect the cuff to the air hose.

7-36
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

3 Connect the air hose to the NIBP connector.

CAUTION
 Make sure that the cuff and air hose connection is secure.
If there is any air leakage, correct NIBP measurement cannot be performed.

NOTE
 The neonate cuff should be connected to air hose for neonate. Other cuffs should be
connected to air hose for general use.
The HS-8000automatically determines the patient classification (neonate or adult/child)
according to the connected air hose. If the air hose is not connected to the cuff connector,
the measurement will not start.

4 Apply cuff to the patient.

NOTE
 Position the ARTERY mark over the artery on the patient’s arm and wrap the cuff
around.
 One or two fingers should just fit in between the cuff and arm.

REFERENCE
 Align the cuff height and heart position to eliminate an error caused by the blood weight.
It is most appropriate to measure with the patient lying down or comfortably seated, and
arms naturally extended.

7-37
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

5 Press the [NIBP Start/Stop] key (user key or fixed key).

Cuff inflation and measurement will start.

Upon completion, the measured value will be displayed inside the NIBP numeric data box. The
measurement can be also started by pressing the [NIBP Start/Stop] key on the HS-8000. The blue LED will
light during the measurement. After the measurement, a beep tone will generate for 1 second and the
measurement result will be displayed on the monitor.

REFERENCE
 About the Oscillometric Method
 The oscillometric method measures the blood pressure by detecting the pulse oscillation
change by the cuff pressure. The cuff connects to the NIBP connector via the air hose. The
air pressure inside the cuff is converted to voltage by the pressure sensor, converted to
digital signal (A/D conversion), and transmitted to the CPU.
The measurement is performed with the following process.
 The cuff inflates to the set value and inhibits the arterial blood flow at the measured site.
 The cuff gradually deflates.
 The arterial blood flow of the patient will return when the cuff pressure is decreased
sufficiently.
 The oscillation (pulse signal) caused by the restricted blood circulation is transmitted to
the pressure sensor via the air hose, and converted to an electric signal.
 From the pulse signal and cuff pressure detected at the pressure measurement circuit,
the systolic, diastolic, average blood pressure and pulse rate will be measured at the
CPU.
 The systolic, diastolic, mean blood pressure will be displayed on the monitor. The
measurement will start with the following factor.
 When the [NIBP Start/Stop] key (fixed key or user key) is pressed.
 At the selected measurement interval.
 For fixed amount of time after the NIBP Cont. key (user key) is pressed. (Max. 15 min.)
 If "NIBP Measurement at Alarm Occurrence" is set ON, and the set parameter generates
an alarm.
 When the change in patient's circulation condition is detected from the time difference of
ECG and SpO2 waveform.

7-38
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

Inflation Mode Setup

The maximum inflation value and measurement duration needs to be changed according to the patient classification.
The inflation mode will automatically change according to the patient classification setting. Set the appropriate
patient classification on "Admit/Discharge" menu or "Detail Setup" menu under NIBP parameter setup.

The NIBP measurement on this device is provided with forced exhaust system for safety purpose. When the
maximum inflation value is reached or when the fixed measurement duration is exceeded, the system will
automatically start to exhaust. The maximum inflation value, maximum measurement duration, initial inflation
value, measurement range, and alarm limit range for this exhaust system is set according to the patient classification
setting.
Maximum Measurement
Patient Classification Target Inflation Value Maximum Inflation Value
Duration

Adult 100 mmHg to 290 mmHg 300 mmHg 160 sec.

(Default: 180 mmHg)

Child 100 mmHg to 200 mmHg 210 mmHg 160 sec.

(Default: 140 mmHg)

Neonate 100 mmHg to 140 mmHg 150 mmHg 80 sec.

(Default: 110 mmHg)

NIBP Auto Mode Setup

Non-invasive blood pressure can be measured automatically at selected time intervals.

If continuous measurement is started during the NIBP auto mode, the auto mode will automatically resume when the
continuous measurement completes.

1 Press the [NIBP Auto Mode] key on the home display.

The "NIBP Auto Mode" window will be displayed.

7-39
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

2 Select the measurement interval from the displayed selection.

CAUTION
 When [1min] is selected, the 1-minute interval measurement will start from the time the
selection is made.
 The 1-minute interval measurement will automatically stop after 12 minutes (maximum of
15 minutes when re-measured), and 2.5-minutes interval measurement will start.
 The continuous mode will continuously measure for 12 minutes (maximum of 15 minutes
when re-measured). When the measurement completes, 2.5 minute interval
measurement will start.
 When "Auto Mode with Start/Stop Key" is set to [ON], the auto mode measurement needs
to be started manually.
 When using the continuous mode or Lumbar mode for measurement, make sure that the
setting is according to the intended purpose.
(
 "About the Lumbar Mode" P7-41)
 The Lumbar mode is recommended for use during spinal anesthesia. It should be used
with sufficient safety measures.

NOTE
 1-minute interval measurement cannot be stopped by pressing the [NIBP Start/Stop] key
(fixed key or user key). To stop the 1-minute interval measurement, select [OFF] or other
interval on "NIBP Auto Mode" window.
 When the NIBP auto mode interval is [Cont.]/[1min]/[2min]/[2.5min]/[5min]/[Lumbar
Mode], NIBP measurement cannot be started from the central monitor.
 When the [NIBP Start/Stop] key is pressed or when the NIBP measurement interval is
changed, the standby mode will be canceled and the NIBP periodic measurement will
start.

The measurement will automatically start at selected interval.

The selected interval will be displayed inside the numeric data box.

REFERENCE
 Select [OFF] if not performing the auto mode measurement.
 The measurement starting point can be selected from [Time] (start from 0 min.) or [Meas.]
(start from actual measured time).
(
 "NIBP Parameter Setup" P7-45)
measurement interval when "NIBP Start 5 min. early" is set to [ON], the measurement will
start 5 minutes before the set time. If outputting the data to PC or other external device
using the PC communication function of this system, an error may be generated to the
NIBP measurement time depending on the input interval of the external device. This
system outputs the data at completion of NIBP measurement, and if the external device
inputs the data at 60 minutes interval, 60 minutes time lag will occur. By starting the
measurement 5 minutes early, this time lag between the external device can be
minimized.
[Menu > Initial Settings > Meas. > Other]

7-40
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

 On the "Initial Settings", whether or not to backup the NIBP measurement interval at
discharge/power ON can be selected. (OFF/Backup/OFF→2.5min./OFF→5min.)

About the Lumbar Mode

The Lumbar mode is intended for use during spinal anesthesia.
The Lumbar mode performs the measurement as follows.

↓Start Lumbar Mode End of Lumbar Mode

1 min. 2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 2 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min.

Lumbar Mode Periodic Measurement

If [Lumbar] is selected when the measurement is not performed, the first measurement will start.
If [Lumbar] is selected during the measurement, the current measurement will be counted as the first measurement.
The second measurement will start after 1 minute, and after 7 times of 2-minute interval measurement, the Lumbar
mode will end. The Lumbar mode can be manually stopped by selecting other interval or selecting [Lumbar] again.
When the Lumbar mode ends, 5-minute interval measurement will automatically start.

CAUTION
 Pressing the [NIBP Start/Stop] key during measurement will only stop the measurement and
not the Lumbar mode. To stop the Lumbar mode, select other interval or select [Lumbar]
again.
 The manual measurement can be performed in between the Lumbar mode measurement.
The Lumbar mode measurement will not start if the manual measurement is still in progress
when the next Lumbar mode measurement time arrives.

7-41
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

Oscillation Graph Display

When the NIBP numeric data box size is 2-box size or larger, and "Oscillograph" is set to ON on the "NIBP" setup

screen, the oscillation graph will be displayed inside the NIBP numeric data box. ( "NIBP Parameter Setup" P7-
45)

The description of the oscillation graph is as follows.

The horizontal axis shows the cuff pressure, and vertical axis shows the pulse amplitude with reference to maximum
pulse amplitude.
The bar graph shown at left indicates the size of maximum pulse amplitude compared with the reference value.
For example, if the maximum pulse amplitude is 1/2 of the reference value, the bar graph will be half Fill in.
1 Bar Graph

2 DIA Value

3 SYS Value

When the NIBP measurement result seems not match to the patient, the reliability of the NIBP measurement
can be checked by the oscillation graph.
Oscillation Graph (When NIBP is correctly measured.)

Oscillation Graph (When NIBP measurement is unreliable.)

When NIBP measurement is unreliable, the measurement value will not be displayed correctly.
When noise interferes in the measurement

When noise interferes, the amplitude will be measured higher than actual value and the measurement value may not
be displayed correctly.

7-42
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

When pulse is not detected.

When pulse is not detected, amplitude may not detected and the measurement value may not be displayed correctly.

Dyna Alert Function Status

The Dyna Alert function is a technology to prevent accidents which may occur by sudden BP change during the non-
measured duration by estimating the variation of circulatory dynamics.
This function is available for the HS-8312N, or DS-8007N with the Medtronic SpO2 module.
When [ON] is selected for "Dyna Alert", NIBP measurement will automatically start when the Dyna Alert estimated
value exceeds the alarm limit. The function will activate with the following condition.

( "Dyna Alert" P7-46)
 Patient Classification: Adult (20 kg or above)
 Cuff Applied Site: Upper Arm
 SpO2 Sensor Attachment Site: Fingertip
 NIBP Measurement Interval: 5 minutes to 60 minutes

CAUTION
 When the SpO2 sensor is applied to the toe or forehead, the circulatory dynamics variation
monitoring by the Dyna Alert may not properly function.
 The circulatory dynamics variation monitoring by the Dyna Alert is effective only on the HS-
8312N, or DS-8007N with the Medtronic SpO2 module.


In the NIBP numeric data box, the following mark and message indicating the status of the Dyna Alert function will
be displayed.

7-43
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

Dyna Alert
Message Status Function
Color of Mark Status*1

Gray DA Setup: OFF Dyna Alert (DA) is set to OFF. Disable

Patient: Child NIBP measurement is performed on child. Disable

Patient: Neonate NIBP measurement is performed on neonate. Disable

Pacemaker: ON Pacemaker setting is set to ON. Disable

Interv.: <5min. NIBP interval is set to Cont., 1min, 2min, or 2.5min. Suspended

Interv.: >60min. NIBP interval is set to 120min. Suspended

Interv.: OFF NIBP interval is set to OFF. Suspended

*2
Measuring BP Invasive blood pressure is measured. Suspended

Yellow Measure NIBP Initialization of Dyna Alert is complete, and the NIBP Suspended
measurement has not been performed since the power is
turned ON.

Poor ECG Signal ECG signal failure due to lead-off, noise, etc. Disable

Poor PTG Signal PTG (Photoplethysmograph) signal failure due to sensor off, Disable
noise, severe low perfusion, etc.

DA-NIBP Suspended Within 2.5 minutes from previous Dyna Alert NIBP Suspended
measurement.

Measuring NIBP NIBP measurement other than Dyna Alert is in progress. Disable

Initializing Waiting for stable signal after starting Dyna Alert. Disable

Green PTG Low Perfusion PTG amplitude is 200 unit or above, and below 800 unit. Enable

Mon. BP Var. Dyna Alert is properly monitoring circulatory dynamics Enable

variation.

Pink Measuring DA-NIBP Dyna Alert NIBP measurement is in progress. Disable

*1: Disable: Circulatory dynamics variation is not monitored.

Suspended: Circulatory dynamics variation is monitored. But the display suspends the measurement when NIBP
measurement is requested. When the suspending factor is resolved, the measurement will resume as
quickly as possible.

Enable: Circulatory dynamics variation is monitored. The display control software responds to NIBP
measurement request as quickly as possible.

*2: "Measuring BP" indicates the status when IBP (BP1 or ART) measurement is possible and can be
displayed on the monitor.

CAUTION
 When using the Dyna Alert function, be aware of these risks and do not increase the NIBP
interval time by relying only on the Dyna Alert function.
 After the Dyna Alert NIBP measurement, the next Dyna Alert NIBP measurement cannot be
performed for 2.5 minutes.
 The Dyna Alert will not properly function for the following cases.
 If peripheral circulatory insufficiency or very low BP is developed.
 If highly-frequent arrhythmia is generated.
 If an oxygenator is used.
 If a large noise from body movement or electric surgery device is interfering.
 If autonomic nerve or circulatory dynamics is largely affected by medication.

7-44
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

NIBP Parameter Setup

Press the [Menu], [NIBP] keys to display the "NIBP" setup screen.

2
1
3 8
4 9
5 10
6 11
7 12

13
14
15 18
16
17
1 NIBP Alarm
(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 15 mmHg to 300 mmHg / 2.0 kPa to 40.0 kPa. If a value
above 300 mmHg / 40.0 kPa is set, the upper alarm will turn OFF.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 10 mmHg to 295 mmHg / 1.5 kPa to 39.5 kPa. If a value
below 10 mmHg / 1.5 kPa is set, the lower alarm will turn OFF.

REFERENCE
 Set ON/OFF of NIBP alarm, upper and lower alarm limits of systolic (S), diastolic (D),
mean (M) NIBP.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +40 mmHg / +5
kPa and -20 mmHg / -3 kPa respectively to the current value.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa).
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 5 mmHg / 0.5 kPa increment.

7-45
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

2 NIBP Auto Mode

NIBP measurement will be performed automatically at selected time intervals.

(
"NIBP Auto Mode Setup" P7-39)
3 Patient Classification

The patient classification setting is linked with that on the "Admit/Discharge" screen. The inflation value and
measurement duration will differ according to the patient classification setting.
(
"Inflation Mode Setup" P7-39)
WARNING
 The patient classification selection influences the precision of the QRS detection and
NIBP measurement. Make sure the correct selection is made.
 The NIBP air hose corresponded to the set patient classification must be used to
perform NIBP measurement. However, if the patient classification is child, NIBP air
hose for adult can be used.

4 Dyna Alert

[ON]: Dyna Alert function will turn ON when HS-8312N or DS-8007N, HG-820 is used.

Parameters used for Dyna Alert Function

CAUTION
 When the PTG (SpO2) sensor is applied to the toe or forehead, the circulatory
dynamics variation monitoring by the Dyna Alert may not properly function.
 The circulatory dynamics variation monitoring by the Dyna Alert is effective only on the
HS-8312N or DS-8007N, HG-820 with the NellcorTM SpO2 module.

REFERENCE
 About the Dyna Alert: Using a cuff allows to measure the blood pressure
noninvasively, but on the other hand, there is a demerit of not being able to perform
the measurement continuously.Therefore, there is always a risk of sudden blood
pressure change in between the periodic measurements.

5 Oscillograph

[ON]: Oscillation graph will be displayed inside the numeric data box.
[Oscill. Print] key will be also displayed.
[Oscill. Print]: Oscillation graph will be output on the HR-800 Recorder Unit.
[OFF]: Oscillation graph will not be displayed.

7-46
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

[Real Time]: Oscillation graph will be updated during the measurement.

NOTE
 The oscillation graph can be displayed when the NIBP numeric data box size is 2-box size
or larger, and "Oscillograph" is set to [ON] on the "NIBP" setup screen.

6 PR Display

[ON]: PR will be displayed.

NOTE
 PR will be displayed only. It will not generate alarm, or be displayed for the tabular
trend.

7 NIBP Erase Time

NIBP data will be erased after the set duration (60min/120min).

8 Measure at Alarm

NIBP measurement will start at alarm generation.

Select [ON] for "NIBP Measurement at Alarm Occurrence", and select the alarm factor to start the NIBP
measurement. Multiple parameters can be selected.

CAUTION
 If the NIBP measurement has not been performed since the power was turned ON,
NIBP measurement at alarm occurrence will not be performed.

9 Quick Measurement

[ON]: NIBP measurement will be performed in duration of about 20 seconds to 25 seconds in case of adult
patient.

NOTE
 The quick measurement can be performed only if the patient classification is adult or
child. For neonate, normal measurement will be performed regardless of this setting.

10 Sight Inflation

[ON]: Sight inflation function will turn ON.

The inflation target level will be automatically estimated during the inflation, and starts to deflate after the
target level is reached.
If [ON] is selected for "Sight Inflation", the target inflation value will be increased in case such as sudden
increase of blood pressure to prevent the re-inflation.
[OFF]: Sight inflation function will turn OFF.
It will inflate to the target level set according to the previous measurement result.

NOTE
 The sight inflation function can be used only during the NIBP auto mode
measurement.
 The sight inflation function cannot be used when the patient classification is "Neonate".
 The sight inflation function cannot be used when performing the 1-minute interval
measurement or continuous measurement.

7-47
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

 When performing manual measurement/measurement at alarm occurrence, it will

inflate to the set target inflation value regardless of the sight inflation setting.

11 Mean BP (MAP) Display

[ON]: Mean BP (MAP) value will be displayed.

CAUTION
 If the mean BP (MAP) value is not displayed, the mean BP (MAP) alarm will not be
generated.

12 End Tone

[ON]: A buzzer tone will be generated when the NIBP measurement completes.

13 User Interval

The interval is fixed as "Lumbar Mode".

(
"About the Lumbar Mode" P7-41)
14 Auto Mode with Start/Stop Key

NIBP measurement will be performed automatically at selected time intervals.

[OFF]: When the power is turned ON, NIBP auto mode will resume even after the patient is discharged
regardless of whether the next patient is admitted or not.

[ON]: When the power is turned ON, NIBP auto mode will resume by starting a manual measurement
for the newly admitted patient. Until the NIBP auto mode is resumed or the interval is changed,
"Standby" will be displayed inside the NIBP numeric data box.

NOTE
 If the power OFF duration was within 30 seconds, the NIBP auto mode will resume at
power ON even when the above setting is [ON].
 When the [NIBP Start/Stop] key is pressed or when the NIBP measurement interval is
changed, the standby mode will be canceled and the NIBP periodic measurement will
start.

15 Time Display

The time for the NIBP measurement will be displayed.

[Elapsed]: The elapsed time from the previous NIBP measurement will be displayed.
[Meas.]: The NIBP measured time will be displayed.

16 Periodic Measurement Starting Time

The starting time of periodic measurement can be set.

[Time]: The periodic measurement will start from the integral multiple of the selected interval starting
from 0min.

7-48
Chapter 7 Monitoring Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

[Meas.]: The periodic measurement will start from the actual starting time.
Measurement time when [Time] is Measurement time when [Meas.]
selected: is selected:

When the interval is 15:11:15 15:11:15

[15min.] and the 15:15:00 15:26:15
measurement is started on 15:30:00 15:41:15
15:11:15 15:45:00 15:56:15

When the interval is 16:00:00 16:26:15

changed to [30min.] on 16:30:00 16:56:15
15:58 17:00:00 17:26:15

17 Target Inflation Value

The window to set the target inflation value will be displayed.

Set the target inflation value using the up/down keys. The indication of target inflation value is SYS + 40 mmHg
for adult/child, SYS + 30 mmHg for neonate.

Patient Target Inflation Value Maximum Inflation Maximum Measurement

Classification Value Duration
100 mmHg to 290 mmHg
Adult 300 mmHg 160 sec.
(Default: 180 mmHg)

100 mmHg to 200 mmHg

Child 210 mmHg 160 sec.
(Default: 140 mmHg)

100 mmHg to 140 mmHg

Neonate 150 mmHg 80 sec.
(Default: 110 mmHg)

For the following case, the target inflation value will be automatically set to the default value of each patient
classification.
 At Discharge
 When the patient classification is changed

CAUTION
 When the "Sight Inflation" is [OFF], the target inflation value after the first periodic
measurement will be automatically set based on the previous measurement value.
 When the "Sight Inflation" is [ON], the target inflation value after the first periodic
measurement will be set based on the sight inflation function. (
 "Sight Inflation" P7-47)

18 Cancel Error

By pressing [Cancel Error] , the measurement error can be canceled.

NOTE
 Make sure that the NIBP measurement can be properly performed after solving the
cause of the NIBP system error message. If the message still remains, device failure
can be considered.

(
"Non-Invasive Blood Pressure" P11-35)
7-49
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

Pulse Oximetry

This section explains the procedures and settings of SpO2 measurement.

When using the HG-810/HG-820, it is necessary to set the SpO2 channel manually.

( Maintenance Manual "Unit Module Setup" P4-19)

SpO2 Monitoring

WARNING
 When measuring the SpO2 of patient with high fever or peripheral circulatory insufficiency,
check the sensor attachment periodically and change the attachment site.The temperature
of the attachment site will rise due to the sensor heat which may result in burn injury.
 For the following case, accurate measurement may not be possible.
 Patient with excessive abnormal hemoglobin (COHb, MetHb)
 Patient with the pigment injected to the blood
 Patient receiving CPR treatment
 When a sensor is applied to a limb with NIBP cuff, arterial catheter, or intracatheter
 When measuring at site with venous pulse
 Patient with body motion
 Patient with small pulse
 When a patient is receiving a photodynamic therapy, measuring SpO2 on a same site for a
long duration may cause blisters from the irradiation light of the SpO2 sensor. Make sure to
periodically change the sensor attachment site.
 Do not connect unspecified sensor or cable to any I/O connector. If done so by mistake, not
only that the device cannot deliver its maximum performance, the device may be damaged
and safety cannot be ensured.
 If any measurement seems questionable, first check the patient's vital signs by alternate
means and then check the pulse co-oximeter for proper functioning.
 For the following case, accurate measurement of SpO2 may not be possible.
 Improper sensor application
 Elevated levels of COHb or MetHb: High levels of COHb or MetHb may occur with a
seemingly normal SpO2. When elevated levels of COHb or MetHb are suspected,
laboratory analysis (CO-Oximetry) of a blood sample should be performed.
 Elevated levels of bilirubin
 Elevated levels of dyshemoglobin
 Vasospastic disease, such as Raynaud's, and peripheral vascular disease
 Hemoglobinopathies and synthesis disorders such as thalassemias, Hb s, Hb c, sickle
cell, etc.
 Hypocapnic or hypercapnic conditions
 Severe anemia
 Very low arterial perfusion
 Extreme motion artifact
 Abnormal venous pulsation or venous constriction
 Severe vasoconstriction or hypothermia

7-50
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

 Arterial catheters and intra-aortic balloon

 Intravascular dyes, such as indocyanine green or methylene blue
 Externally applied coloring and texture, such as nail polish, acrylic nails, glitter, etc.
 Birthmark(s), tattoos, skin discolorations, moisture on skin, deformed or abnormal
fingers. etc.
 Dyes or any substance containing dyes that change usual blood pigmentation may cause
erroneous readings.
 The SpO2 data should not be used as the sole basis for diagnosis or therapy decisions. It
must be used in conjunction with clinical signs and symptoms.
 Do not use the SpO2 data to monitor apnea condition.
 This device may be used during defibrillation, but this may affect the accuracy or availability
of the SpO2 parameters and measurements.
 This device may be used during electrocautery, but this may affect the accuracy or
availability of the SpO2 parameters and measurements.
 The SpO2 data cannot be used for arrhythmia analysis.
 SpO2, SpCO, SpMet, and SpHb are empirically calibrated in healthy adult volunteers with
normal levels of carboxyhemoglobin (COHb) and methemoglobin (MetHb).

CAUTION
 If irritation such as skin reddening appears with the sensor use, change the attachment site
or stop using the sensor.
 When attaching the sensor with tape, do not wrap the tape too tight. At the same time, check
the blood flow constantly so that congestion is not generated at the peripheral site.
 Even attachment for a short duration may inhibit the blood flow and generate compression
necrosis or burn injury. Also, blood flow inhibition may prevent correct measurements.
 If SpO2 values indicate hypoxemia, a laboratory blood sample should be taken to confirm
the patient's condition.
 If the <SpO2 Low Perfusion> message is frequently displayed, find a better perfused
monitoring site. In the interim, assess the patient and, if indicated, verify oxygenation status
through other means.
 Change the application site or replace the sensor and/or patient cable when a <Replace
Sensor>, <Replace Cable>, <Low Signal IQ> is displayed on the monitor. These messages
may indicate that patient monitoring time is exhausted on the patient cable or sensor.
 Replace the cable or sensor when a <Replace Sensor> or <Low Signal IQ> message is
consistently displayed while monitoring consecutive patients after completing
troubleshooting steps listed in this manual.
 If using pulse oximetry during full body irradiation, keep the sensor out of the radiation field.
If the sensor is exposed to the radiation, the reading might be inaccurate or the device might
read zero for the duration of the active irradiation period.
 The device must be configured to match your local power line frequency to allow for the
cancelation of noise introduced by fluorescent lights and other sources.
 Variation in hemoglobin measurements may be profound and may be affected by sampling
technique as well as the patient's physiological conditions. Any results exhibiting
inconsistency with the patient's clinical status should be repeated and/or supplemented with
additional test data. Blood samples should be analyzed by laboratory devices prior to clinical
decision making to completely understand the patient's condition.
 Check the sensor attachment site constantly in every 4 hours when probes or reusable
sensor are used, and at least every 8 hours when single patient use sensors are used.Be
especially careful of a patient with bad perfusion. If the sensor attachment position is not

7-51
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

changed constantly, skin irritation or skin necrosis due to compression may be developed.
For the patient with bad perfusion, check the sensor attachment position at least every 2
hours.
 As skin for neonate, premature infant is immature, change the sensor attachment site more
frequently depending on the condition.
 Direct sunlight to the sensor area can cause a measurement error. Place a black or dark
cloth over the sensor if using in direct sunlight.
 When not measuring, unplug the relay cable and sensor from the SpO2
connector.Otherwise, the outside light may affect to falsely display measurements.
 If "– – –" is displayed for the numeric data, make sure that the sensor is properly attached.
 Before bathing the patient, make sure to remove the sensor and device from the patient.

Precautions when using the Masimo Rainbow SET Sensor

WARNING
 As with all medical device, carefully route patient cabling to reduce the possibility of patient
entanglement or strangulation.
 Do not place this device or accessories in any position that might cause it to fall on the
patient.
 Do not start or operate this device unless the setup was verified to be correct.
 Do not use this device during magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) or in an MRI environment.
 Do not use this device if it appears or is suspected to be damaged.
 Explosion hazard: Do not use this device in the presence of flammable anesthetics or other
flammable substance in combination with air, oxygen-enriched environments, or nitrous
oxide.
 To ensure safety, avoid stacking multiple devices or placing anything on the instrument
during operation.
 To protect against injury, follow the directions below:
 Avoid placing the device on surfaces with visible liquid spills.
 Do not soak or immerse the device in liquids.
 Do not sterilize the device.
 Use cleaning solutions only as instructed in this operation manual.
 Do not attempt to clean the device while monitoring patient.
 To protect from electric shock, always remove the sensor and completely disconnect this
device before bathing the patient.
 If any measurement seems questionable, first check the patient's vital signs by alternate
means and then check this device for proper functioning.
 Inaccurate SpCO and SpMet readings can be caused by the following.
 Improper sensor application
 Intravascular dyes, such as indocyanine green or methylene blue
 Abnormal hemoglobin levels
 Low arterial perfusion
 Low arterial oxygen saturation levels including altitude induced hypoxemia
 Elevated total bilirubin levels
 Motion artifact

7-52
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

 Inaccurate SpHb and SpOC readings can be caused by the following.

 Improper sensor application
 Intravascular dyes, such as indocyanine green or methylene blue
 Externally applied coloring and texture such as nail polish, acrylic nails, glitter, etc.
 Elevated PaO2 levels
 Elevated levels of bilirubin
 Low arterial perfusion
 Motion artifact
 Low arterial oxygen saturation levels
 Elevated carboxyhemoglobin levels
 Elevated methemoglobin levels
 Hemoglobinopathies and synthesis disorders such as thalassemias, Hb s, Hb c, sickle
cell, etc.
 Vasospastic disease such as Raynaud's
 Elevated altitude
 Peripheral vascular disease
 Liver disease
 EMI radiation interference
 Inaccurate SpO2 readings can be caused by the following.
 Improper sensor application
 Elevated levels of COHb or MetHb: High levels of COHb or MetHb may occur with a
seemingly normal SpO2. When elevated levels of COHb or MetHb are suspected,
laboratory analysis (co-oximetry) of a blood sample should be performed.
 Intravascular dyes, such as indocyanine green or methylene blue
 Externally applied coloring and texture such as nail polish, acrylic nails, glitter, etc.
 Elevated levels of bilirubin
 Elevated levels of dyshemoglobin
 Low arterial perfusion
 Motion artifact
 Interfering Substances: Dyes or any substance containing dyes that change usual blood
pigmentation may cause erroneous readings.
 This device is intended only as an adjunct device in patient assessment. It should not be
used as the sole basis for diagnosis or therapy decisions. It must be used in conjunction with
clinical signs and symptoms.
 This device may be used during defibrillation, but this may affect the accuracy or availability
of the parameters and measurements.
 This device may be used during electrocautery, but this may affect the accuracy or
availability of the parameters and measurements.
 This device should not be used for arrhythmia analysis.
 SpCO readings may not be provided if there are low arterial saturation levels or elevated
methemoglobin levels.
 SpO2, SpCO, SpMet, and SpHb are empirically calibrated in healthy adult volunteers with
normal levels of carboxyhemoglobin (COHb) and methemoglobin (MetHb).
 Do not adjust, repair, open, disassemble, or modify this device or accessories. Injury to

7-53
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

personnel or device damage could occur. Return this device for servicing if necessary..

CAUTION
 Do not place this device where the controls can be changed by the patient.
 Electrical shock and flammability hazard: Before cleaning, always turn off the device and
disconnect from any power source.
 When patients are undergoing photodynamic therapy, they may be sensitive to light
sources. Pulse oximetry may be used only under careful clinical supervision for short time
periods to minimize interference with photodynamic therapy.
 Do not place this device on electrical device that may affect the operation, preventing it from
working properly.
 If SpO2 values indicate hypoxemia, a laboratory blood sample should be taken to confirm
the patient’s condition.
 If the <SpO2 Low Perfusion> message is frequently displayed, find a better perfused
monitoring site. In the interim, assess the patient and, if indicated, verify oxygenation status
through other means.
 If using this device during full body irradiation, keep the sensor out of the radiation field. If
the sensor is exposed to the radiation, the reading might be inaccurate or the device might
read zero for the duration of the active irradiation period.
 The device must be configured to match your local power line frequency to allow for the
cancelation of noise introduced by fluorescent lights and other sources.
 To ensure that alarm limits are appropriate for the patient being monitored, check the limits
each time this device is used.
 Variation in hemoglobin measurements may be profound and may be affected by sampling
technique as well as the patient's physiological conditions. Any results exhibiting
inconsistency with the patient’s clinical status should be repeated and/or supplemented with
additional test data. Blood samples should be analyzed by laboratory instruments prior to
clinical decision making to completely understand the patient’s condition.
 Do not submerge this device in any cleaning solution or attempt to sterilize by autoclave,
irradiation, steam, gas, ethylene oxide or any other method. This will seriously damage this
device.
 Electrical Shock Hazard: Carry out periodic tests to verify that leakage currents of patient-
applied circuits and the system are within acceptable limits as specified by the applicable
safety standards. The summation of leakage currents must be checked and in compliance
with IEC 60601-1 and UL 60601-1. The system leakage current must be checked when
connecting external device to the system. When an event such as a component drop or a
spillage of blood or other liquids occurs, retest before further use. Injury to personnel could
occur.
 Disposal of product - Comply with local laws in the disposal of the device and/or its
accessories.
 To minimize radio interference, other electrical device that emits radio frequency
transmissions should not be in close proximity to this device.

NOTE
 A functional tester cannot be used to assess the SpO2 accuracy.
 High-intensity extreme lights (such as pulsating strobe lights) directed on the sensor, may
not allow this device to obtain SpO2 readings.
 When the pulse detection sensitivity is set to [High], performance of the "Sensor Off"
detection may be compromised. If the device is in this setting and the sensor becomes
dislodged from the patient, the potential for false readings may occur due to environmental
"noise" such as light, vibration, and excessive air movement.

7-54
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

 Changes or modifications shall void the warranty for this device.

NOTE
 SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, PI, and PVI are parameters which can be measured by the Masimo
unit.
 SpOC can be measured on the DS-8007M/ HS-8412M.
 High-intensity extreme lights (such as pulsating strobe lights) directed on the sensor, may
not allow this device to obtain SpO2 readings.
 Do not loop the patient cabling into a tight coil or wrap around the device, as this can damage
the patient cabling.
 Additional information specific to the Masimo sensors compatible with this device, including
information about parameter/measurement performance during motion and low perfusion,
may be found in the sensor's directions for use.

1 Prepare an appropriate probe or sensor for the patient.

(
"SpO2 Sensors for Nellcor Manufacturer: Medtronic" P13-8)
(
"SpO2 Sensors for Masimo Manufacturer: Masimo Corporation" P13-8
2 Connect the sensor to HS-8312N or DS-8007N, HG-820.

In Case of Medtronic Unit:

1 Connect the DOC-10 SpO2 Relay Cable to the SpO2 connector on the HS-8312N or DS-8007N, HG-820.
The illustration is example of connection with HS-8312.

2 Insert the sensor into the SpO2 relay cable connector, and lock it with the transparent cover.

In Case of Masimo Unit:

1 Connect the SpO2 patient cable (LNOP®, LNCS®, M-LNCSTM, Rainbow®) to the SpO2 connector on the
HS-8312M or DS-8007M, HG-810.
2 Connect the patient cable and the sensor.
Face the metallic side of the sensor upward and align the logo with that of the patient cable.
Then, insert the sensor connector to the patient cable until a click sound is heard.

7-55
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

CAUTION
 The SpO2 patient cables (LNOP®, LNCS®, M-LNCSTM, Rainbow®) are for Masimo SET
sensor, Rainbow SET sensor only. Connect them only to the HS-8312M or DS-8007M,
HG-810. Otherwise, the device will not properly function.

NOTE
 Pull the connector slowly to ensure it is securely connected.
 If necessary, secure the cable to the patient.

3 Attach the sensor to the patient.

CAUTION
 If the nail is rough, dirty, or manicured, accurate measurement will not be possible.
Change the finger or clean the nail before attaching the probe and sensor.

Probe Type
1 As shown below, the probe cable should be on the nail side.

1 Light Emitting Part

2 Light Receiving part

1
2

2 Adjust the sensor so that the light-

emitting part (on cable side) is over the nail, or as instructed per the related sensor instruction manual.

3 Press the probe lightly so that the finger and the rubber cover are appressed.
This is to stabilize the probe, and to avoid ambient light.

7-56
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

Single-Patient-Use Type
1 Clean the attachment site with alcohol, etc., and allow to dry.
2 Align the light emitting element and light receiving element of the sensor with the measuring site in between
when attaching the sensor to patient.

1 Light Emitting 1
Element
2 Light Receiving
Element

3 Secure the cable with surgical tape so that the sensor does not come off when the cable is pulled.

Attachment to the toe Attachment to the finger

4 Verify that the SpO2 measurement and SpO2 waveform are displayed on the home display.

7-57
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC Measurement (Masimo)

This section explains the SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC measurement procedure when using the HS-8312M or DS-
8007M, HG-810.

CAUTION
 The SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC measurements are provided only with specific rainbow
sensors supporting specific parameter combinations. SpHb/SpOC/SpMet and SpCO/SpMet
are each valid sensor combinations which also support PVI.
SpHb/SpCO is not a valid sensor combination.
 For details, contact your nearest service representative.

REFERENCE
 SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC measurements are optional function.

1 Select the Rainbow sensor for the patient.

(
"SpO2 Sensors for Masimo Manufacturer: Masimo Corporation" P13-8)
2 The measurement procedure is the same with that of the SpO2.
Verify that the SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC value is displayed on the monitor.
(
"SpO2 Monitoring" P7-50)
Precautions about the Masimo Sensors and Cables

A technology called X-Cal for patient safety and reinforcement of efficiency in a clinical site is implemented for
Masimo sensors and cables.
X-Cal is designed to address the following three common factors that can impact measurement accuracy and patient
safety due to reliability risks.
1 Imitation Masimo sensors and cables

2 Cables and sensors used far beyond their expected life

3 Third-party reprocessed pulse oximetry sensors

If a sensor or cable that does not support X-Cal is used with an X-Cal enabled device, SpO2 measurement will not
be available.
Even if Masimo sensors or specified sensors and cables are used, SpO2 measurement may not be available if the
sensors and cables are used beyond their expected life.

About the Expected Life of Sensors and Cables

 The X-Cal function automatically monitors the Active Monitoring Time (actual time of SpO2 monitoring) for
each sensor and cable.If the sensors and cables are used beyond the expected life, the message, <Replace
Cable> or <Replace Sensor> will be displayed.
 The measurement will not cease until it is completed even if the cable or sensor has reached end of life during
the measurement.
 When a measurement with cable or sensor that has reached end of life is suspended for certain amount of time,
and resumed with the same cable or sensor, a message to replace the sensor or cable will be displayed.
 The sensor or cable that has reached end of life needs to be replaced before resuming monitoring.
 The following table shows the expected life of cable and sensor. The indication of usage hours per day (24
hours/12 hours/8 hours) are also shown.

7-58
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

Active Monitoring Time (actual time of monitoring)

Sensors or Expected Life When monitoring When monitoring When monitoring
Cables 24 hours/day 12 hours/day 8 hours/day

Single Patient Use 336 hours 14 days 28 days 42 days

SpO2 "L" Sensor
with replaceable tape

Single Patient Use 168 hours 7 days 14 days 21 days

SpO2 Sensor

Reusable SpO2 8,760 hours 12 months 2 years 3 years

Sensor (DCI, DCIP,
YI, TF-I, DBI)

Patient Cable 17,280 hours 24 months 4 years 6 years

SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)

This section explains the measurement procedure when using the HS-8312N or DS-8007N, HG-820.
Press the [Menu], [SpO2] keys to display the "SpO2" setup screen.

3
4
1
5
2
6
7
8
When Using the HS-8312N

1 Set the waveform size from ,[x1/4]/[x1/2]/[x1]/[x2]/[x4]. (shown on right)

2 Select the label from [None]/ [Auto]/ [RH]/ [LH]/ [RF]/ [LF]/ [OT].

When [Auto] is selected, the label will be automatically assigned depending

on the SpO2 unit type and channel number.
Nellcor 1ch: N1, 2ch: N2
MASIMO1ch: M1, 2ch: M2

3 Set the SpO2 alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Whether to use the second alarm function and its threshold selection should be based on
the patient's clinical indication portent and medical evaluation.
 Set the upper limit in the range of 51%SpO2 to 100%SpO2. If a value above 100%SpO2
is set, the upper alarm will turn OFF.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 50%SpO2 to 99%SpO2. If a value below 50%SpO2 is
set, the lower alarm will turn OFF.

7-59
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

REFERENCE
 Also, when the SpO2 value is unstable around the lower alarm limit, the frequently
generated alarm can be corrected by setting the second alarm function.
(
 "SpO2 Second Alarm Setup" P6-3)
 When [Auto] is set, the upper limit will be turned OFF and the lower limit will be set to
90%SpO2.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 1%SpO2 increment.
 indicates the current measurement value.
 The following delay occurs for the SpO2 alarm depending on the patient classification and
second alarm setting. (For Nellcor)

Second Alarm Patient Classification

Setup Adult/Child Neonate
SpO2 Alarm Condition Delay For all settings About 7 sec. to 9 sec. About 7 sec. to 9 sec.

SpO2 Alarm Signal Delay OFF About 5 sec. 0 sec.

10 About 5 sec. to 7 sec. About 5 sec. to 7 sec.

25 About 11 sec. to 13 sec. About 11 sec. to 13 sec.

50 About 19 sec. to 22 sec. About 19 sec. to 22 sec.

100 About 36 sec. to 38 sec. About 36 sec. to 38 sec.

4 Set the Ext SpO2 alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the lower limit in the range of 50%SpO2 to 98%SpO2. If a value below 50%SpO2 is
set, the lower alarm will turn OFF.
 When the ExtSpO2 alarm is ON, the lower limit of SpO2 cannot be set below EXT SpO2.

REFERENCE
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.
 When [Auto] is set, the lower limit will be set to "SpO2 lower limit - 10%SpO2".
 The lower limit can be set in 1%SpO2 increment.
 indicates the current measurement value.

7-60
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

 The following delay occurs for Ext SpO 2 alarm depending on the patient classification
and second alarm setting. (For Nellcor)

Patient Classification

Adult/Child Neonate

SpO2 Alarm Condition Delay About 7 sec. to 9 sec. About 7 sec. to 9 sec.

SpO2 Alarm Signal Delay About 5 sec. 0 sec.

5 Set the PR alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 22 bpm to 300 bpm. The upper limit alarm will become
OFF if the value exceeds 300 bpm.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 20 bpm to 295 bpm. If a value below 20 bpm is set, the
lower alarm will turn OFF.

REFERENCE
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under "Initial
Settings". (
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto setting
is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +40 bpm and -40
bpm to the current value respectively.
 The upper and lower limit can be set in 5 bpm increments.
It can be set in 1 bpm increment for 25 bpm and below.
 The following delay occurs for the PR alarm depending on the patient classification. (For
Nellcor)
 PR Alarm Condition Delay: <Adult/Child/Neonate> About 5 sec. to 6 sec.
 PR Alarm Signal Delay: <Adult/Child> About 5 sec., <Neonate> 0 sec.

6 Set the "Alarm during NIBP".

NOTE
 During the NIBP measurement, the cuff inflation restricts the blood flow which disables
the correct detection of the SpO2 and PR, and may generate an improper alarm.
 Selecting [OFF] for "Alarm during NIBP" will not generate the SpO2, Ext SpO2, PR, SpCO
(Masimo only), SpMet (Masimo only), SpHb (Masimo only) alarm until the NIBP
measurement is complete.

REFERENCE
 This setup can be used when the SpO2 sensor and the NIBP cuff is placed on the same
limb for measurement.

[ON]: Alarm will be generated even during NIBP measurement.

[OFF]: SpO2/PR alarm will not be generated during NIBP measurement.

7-61
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

7 Set the "Synchronized Mark/Tone".

(
"BP Parameter Setup" P7-28)
8 Select ON/OFF for parameter display.
(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
CAUTION
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and
tabular/graphic trend input will also cease.
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the pulse rate measured by
SpO2 will not be displayed either.

REFERENCE
 When SpO2 sensor is attached to the patient with the SpO2 display set to OFF, and SpO2
is measured for 10 seconds, the pulse wave and numeric data will be automatically
displayed.

RR_SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)

This section explains the RR_SpO2 measurement procedure when using the DS-8007N.

CAUTION
 The RR_SpO2 can be measured only when using the Medtronic Respiratory Sensor.
 For details, contact your nearest service representative.

1 Prepare the sensor.

(
"SpO2 Sensors for Nellcor Manufacturer: Medtronic" P13-8)
2 The measurement procedure is the same with that of the SpO2.
Verify that the RR_SpO2 value is displayed on the monitor.
(
"SpO2 Monitoring" P7-50)

7-62
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

SpO2 Parameter Setup (Masimo)

This section explains the measurement procedure when using the HS-8312M or DS-8007M, HG-810. Press the
[Menu], [SpO2] keys to display the "SpO2" setup screen.
REFERENCE
 This setting is available when using the HS-8312M or DS-8007M, HG-810. PVI, SpCO,
SpMet, SpHb, SpOC measurements are an optional function.

1
2 5
6 4 10
7 3 11
8 12 13
9

1 Set the waveform size.

(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)
2 Set the label.
(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)
3 Set the SpO2 alarm.
(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)
REFERENCE
 The following delay occurs for the SpO2 alarm depending on the patient classification and
SpO2 averaging duration setting (for Masimo).

Patient Classification
SpO2 Averaging
Adult/Child Neonate

SpO2 Alarm Condition Delay For all settings About 7 sec. to 9 sec. About 7 sec. to 9 sec.

SpO2 Alarm Signal Delay For all settings About 5 sec. 0 sec.

4 Set the Ext SpO2 alarm.

(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)
5 Set the PR alarm.
(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)
REFERENCE
 The following delay occurs for the PR alarm depending on the patient classification.
(For Masimo)

7-63
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

 PR Alarm Condition Delay: <Adult/Child> About 8 sec. to 10 sec. <Neonate> About 7

sec. to 9 sec.
 PR Alarm Signal Delay: <Adult/Child> About 5 sec., <Neonate> 0 sec.

6 Set the "Alarm during NIBP".

(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)
7 Set the "Synchronized Mark/Tone".
(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
8 Select the SpO2 averaging duration from [2- 4 sec.]/[4- 6 sec.]/[8 sec.]/[10 sec.]/[12 sec.]/[14 sec.]/[16 sec.].

WARNING
 Be careful when setting the "SpO2 Averaging" duration as the SpO2 alarm is based on
the displayed SpO2 value which is averaged from the duration set in "SpO2 Averaging".
The alarm occurrence time will be affected or may not occur for the transient value of
SpO2 depending on the set duration.

9 Select the pulse detection sensitivity from [High]/[Normal]/[APOD].

CAUTION
 If [High] is selected for pulse sensitivity, probe-off detection will become somewhat
inaccurate.

NOTE
 To improve the low perfusion condition, or to perform fast tracking when the SpO2
value changes abruptly, select [High].
 For standard use, select [Normal].
 If there is a high possibility of sensor getting disconnected, select [APOD].
 When the pulse detection sensitivity is set to [High], performance of the "Sensor Off"
detection may be compromised. If the device is in this setting and the sensor becomes
dislodged from the patient, the potential for false readings may occur due to
environmental "noise" such as light, vibration, and excessive air movement.

10 Set the "FAST SAT".

NOTE
 To pick up the abrupt change of the value sooner, and to take advantage of the qualities
of FAST SAT mode, SpO2 averaging time will be fixed as [2- 4 sec.] when FAST SAT is
set ON.

[ON]: Abrupt change of the SpO2 value can be monitored.

[OFF]: FAST SAT mode will turn OFF.

11 Set the "PI (Perfusion Index) Display".

NOTE
 The perfusion index is calculated by pulsatile signal divided by apulsatile signal times
100, and indicates patient’s circulation condition at the monitoring site.

7-64
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

 The perfusion index assists clinicians in determining optimal placement of the SpO2
sensor. This parameter is also useful as a troubleshooting tool by helping a clinician rule
out whether a questionable value may be due to low perfusion and/or a low signal to noise
condition. Also, it can be used as diagnosis index to predict the patient’s critical condition
when at low perfusion.

[ON]: PI will be displayed.

[OFF]: PI will not be displayed.

REFERENCE
 Perfusion Index (PI) is a relative assessment of the pulse strength at the monitoring site.
It is a ratio of the pulsatile and the non-pulsatile blood flow at the monitoring site. It can
be used to find the most appropriate sensor application site by finding the site with the
highest PI. Perfusion Index (PI) is displayed in the range from 0.02% to 20%.
 Pleth Variability Index (PVI) is an index of the change in PI that occurs during the
respiratory cycle. It is calculated by measuring the changes in PI over a time interval
where one or more complete respiratory cycles have occurred. Pleth Variability Index
(PVI) is displayed in the range from 0% to 100%.

12 Select [ON]/[OFF] for "Signal IQ Wave".

NOTE
 The signal IQ wave cannot be printed.

REFERENCE
 The signal IQ wave indicates the signal confidence and pulse beat. The vertical length
indicates the signal confidence. A low vertical line indicates a lower signal confidence.

13 Select ON/OFF for parameter display.

(
"SpO2 Parameter Setup (Medtronic)" P7-59)

7-65
Chapter 7 Monitoring Pulse Oximetry

14 Set the SpCO alarm.

Press the [ ], [Sp*], [SpCO] keys to display the SpCO alarm setup screen.

15 16

14

CAUTION
 Set the upper limit in the numeric range of 1% to 40% SpCO. If a value above 40% SpCO
is set, the upper alarm will turn OFF.
 The lower limit cannot be set.
 The automatic alarm cannot be set.

15 Set the SpMet alarm.

Press the [SpMet] key to display the SpMet alarm setup screen. Set the alarm in the same procedure as SpCO.

CAUTION
 Set the upper limit in the range of 1% to 15%SpMet. The upper limit alarm will turn OFF
if a value above 15%SpMet is set.
 The lower limit cannot be set.
 The automatic alarm cannot be set.

16 Set the SpHb measurement condition. Press the [SpHb] key to display the SpHb setup screen.

1
2

1 Select the SpHb averaging duration from [Short] / [Medium] / [Long].

2 Set the SpHb alarm.

CAUTION
 Set the upper limit in between 2.0 g/dL to 24.5 g/dL. The upper limit alarm will turn OFF
if the value above 24.5 g/dL is set.

7-66
Chapter 7 Monitoring Temperature

 Set the lower limit in between 1.0 g/dL to 24.0 g/dL. The lower limit alarm will turn OFF if
the value below 1.0 g/dL is set.
 The automatic alarm cannot be set.

Temperature

This section explains the measurement procedure and measurement condition setup of temperature (T1 to T8).

TEMP Monitoring

1 Select the appropriate probe for the patient.

CAUTION
 Before the measurement, make sure that the specified probe/relay cable is used.
If unspecified probe/relay cable is used, measurement error may occur.
 Stop using the probe if it is damaged..

NOTE
 700 series temperature probe cannot be used.

2 Connect the probe to HS-8000 or module.

REFERENCE
 The HS-8000 or module utilizes multiparameter amplifier input method which allows
monitoring of 2 channels of temperature through the 2ch temperature relay cable (CJO-
P01T-DA**) connected to the HS-8000 or module connector.
The measurement is also possible using the HM-800/HM-801 Multi Module inserted to
the input box.

1 Connect the 2ch temperature relay cable (CJO-P01T-DA**) to the multiparameter connector on the HS-
8000.
2 Connect the temperature probe to the 2ch temperature relay cable.

7-67
Chapter 7 Monitoring Temperature

3 Attach the probe to the patient.

In Case of Body Surface Probe 409B:

1 Attach the probe to the body surface, and secure with surgical tape.

NOTE
 The probe location shown above is an example. Adjust the probe location according
to the patient's condition.

In Case of Rectal Temperature Probe 401, 402:

1 Clean/Disinfect/Sterilize the probe according to the guidelines provided with the probe product.
2 Insert the probe into the rectum about 3 cm to 7 cm deep.
3 Secure the probe to inner thigh with surgical tape.

4 Check that the temperature is displayed.

1 Press the [Home] key on the user key.

2 Verify that the measured data is displayed on the home display.
If the measured data is not displayed during the 1 channel temperature measurement, the temperature
probe may be connected to incorrect channel. Connect the probe to the correct channel and verify that the
measured data is displayed.

7-68
Chapter 7 Monitoring Temperature

TEMP Parameter Setup

Channel Settings of BP, TEMP

The default settings of BP and TEMP channels are as follows.
For HS-8000 For DS-8007

%3 7(03 %3
  

%3 %3
 

When the DS-8007 is used, the temperature measured on temperature jack is fixed as T1, T2.
NOTE
 The channel settings can be changed on the "Multi-amplifier" screen ([Initial Settings >
System > Unit Module]).
(

Maintenance Manual "Unit Module Setup" P4-19)

Parameter Setup
Press the [Menu], [TEMP] keys to display the "TEMP" setup screen.

1 4
2

1 TEMP Label

Select the label from [Tx] to [US7].

REFERENCE
 Description of Each Label:
T1-T8 (Default)
Tsk (Skin Temperature)
Tre (Rectal Temperature)
Tes (Esophageal Temperature)
Tco (Core Temperature))
US1 to US7: User labels (3 characters) which can be set on the "Initial Settings".
(
 Maintenance Manual "User Label Setup" P5-9)

7-69
Chapter 7 Monitoring Temperature

NOTE
 US3 to US7 cannot be selected for the device connected to DS-LANII/III.

2 Temperature Alarm

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 31.0°C to 45.0°C. If a value above 45.0°C is set, the
upper alarm will turn OFF.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 30.0°C to 44.0°C. If a value below 30.0°C is set, the
lower alarm will turn OFF.

REFERENCE
 The upper and lower limit can be set in 0.5°C increments.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +2.0 °C and -
2 °C to the current value respectively.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under

"Initial Settings". ( Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto
setting is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

3 Display ON/OFF

(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
CAUTION
 When the parameter display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and tabular/graphic
trend input will also cease.

4 ΔT Display

[ΔT]: ΔT setup menu will be displayed.

Select the parameter for each ΔT.
For ΔT, the difference of temperature will be displayed.
Maximum of 4 types of ΔT (ΔTemp-A to ΔTemp-D) can be registered and
displayed.

NOTE
 To display on the home display, the setup on the "Display Config." is necessary.
(
 "To Configure the Display" P10-4)
 The alarm cannot be set for ΔT.

7-70
Chapter 7 Monitoring Cardiac Output and Blood Temperature

Cardiac Output and Blood Temperature

When thermodilution catheter is used to measure the cardiac output, the blood temperature (Tb) can be monitored.
The CO measurement can be performed using the multiparameter connector on the HS-8000 or module.
The measurement is also possible using the HM-800/HM-801 Multi Module inserted to the input box.

( "Cardiac Output (CO)" P8-45)

Connecting the Super Unit

1 Select the catheter relay cable.

NOTE
 The usable catheter relay cable depends on the injectate temperature measurement
method.Select the appropriate cable according to the used measurement method.

Injectate Temperature Catheter Relay Cable

Measurement Method

0°C/24°C Temperature CJO-P01C-C2.4

Flow-through Sensor CJO-P01C-F2.4

In-line Sensor CJO-P01C-L2.4

Injectate Temperature Probe CJO-P01C-T2.4

2 Connect the catheter relay cable to the multiparameter connector on the HS-8000/DS-8007 or HM-800/HM-
801 Multi Module, and connect the catheter to the catheter relay cable.

Example of In-line Sensor

7-71
Chapter 7 Monitoring Cardiac Output and Blood Temperature

Example of Injectate Probe

Cardiac Output Measurement Algorithm

Cardiac output is measured using the thermodilution method.

Thermodilution Method
The thermodilution catheter is inserted from the vein through the right atrium, right ventricle, and pulmonary artery.
From the side hole near the catheter tip, injectate is injected quickly to the right atrium. At this time, the heart
contraction and heat diffusion mixes the injectate with blood, and causes blood temperature fall.
Variable initiated by these effects are measured as time function at the pulmonary artery, and the following
thermodilution curve can be drawn.
Cardiac output is calculated by applying this to the Stewart-Hamilton formula shown below.

CO : Cardiac Output [L/min]

Vi : Injectate Volume [L]

Tb : Blood Temperature [°C]

Ti : Injectate Temperature [°C]

Ct : Correction coefficient for injectate temperature rise inside catheter

60 : seconds

S : Area of thermodilution curve ΔTb(t)dt[°C sec]

ΔTb(t) : Temperature change of Tb after "t" seconds. [°C]

CC : Catheter Constant (Computation Constant: CC value)

Si : Specific Gravity of Injectate [g/cm3]

Sb : Specific Gravity of Blood [g/cm3]

Ci : Specific Heat of Injectate [cal/(g/°C)]

Cb : Specific Heat of Blood [cal/(g/°C)]

7-72
Chapter 7 Monitoring Cardiac Output and Blood Temperature

As shown above, cardiac output is directly proportional to the Injectate Volume (Vi) and the difference between
Blood Temperature and Injectate Temperature (Tb - Ti), and is inversely proportional to the area of the
thermodilution curve (S).

Hematocrit Value
Hematocrit value of 45%, (Si*Ci)/(Sb*Cb) = 1.08 is programmed for this device.
NOTE
 If the hematocrit value is different, an error may be caused in cardiac output measurement.

Blood Temperature Alarm Setup

1 Press the [TEMP], [Tb] keys.

(
"To Display the Parameter Setup Screen" P7-1)
The alarm setup menu will be displayed.

2 Select ON/OFF of blood temperature alarm and set the upper and lower alarm limits.
(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 31.0°C to 45.0°C. If a value above 45.0°C is set, the
upper alarm will turn OFF.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 30.0°C to 44.0°C. If a value below 30.0°C is set, the
lower alarm will turn OFF.

REFERENCE
 The upper and lower limit can be set in 0.5°C increments.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +2.0 °C and -2
°C to the current value respectively.
 [Auto] key will be displayed only when [Enable] is set for "Auto Alarm Setup" under "Initial
Settings".

7-73
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

This section explains about the CO2 concentration measurement procedure and measurement condition setup when
using the Philips Capnostat 5 (Mainstream Method, Gas Unit I/F HPD-810/HPD-820) .

CAUTION
 When the multigas unit (MGU-800/MGU-810) and HPD-810/HPD-820 are simultaneously
used, the CO2 concentration measurement will be performed by the equipment selected for
the "CO2 Source Priority" under ([Menu] > "Parameter" [CO2]).

Patient Application and Display

By using the HPD-810/HPD-820 CO2 Gas Unit I/F, CO2 measurement by the Philips Capnostat 5 (Mainstream
Method) can be performed.

1 Connect the HPD-810/HPD-820 Gas Unit I/F to the connector.

The connection procedure differs depending on the gas unit type.
In Case of HPD-810
Connect to the AUX connector of the HS-8000, DS-8007 or HM-801.
In Case of HPD-820
Connect to the CO2 I/F connector on the DS-8007.

2 Connect the CO2 sensor (Capnostat5) to the CO2 connector on the HPD-810/HPD-820.

The CO2 sensor will automatically begin warming up. The CO2 sensor requires a warming up process to
achieve stable operating temperature. Warm up process will require minimum of 2 minutes.

During the warm up period, <CO2 Warm Up> message will be displayed on the monitor.
When the warm up completes, the message will disappear.

NOTE
 When using more than one HM-801, only one AUX connector on the HM-801 can be used
for measurement of CO2, BIS (with HBX-800).
 When the CO2 is measured on both the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801, the
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

3 Prepare an airway adapter suitable for the patient.

7-74
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

CAUTION
 The disposable airway adapter should be opened just before use.
 Do not reuse the disposable airway adapter. Do not disassemble, clean, disinfect, or
sterilize it.

NOTE
 There are 4 types of airway adapters. Select the appropriate adapter according to the
used endo-tracheal tube size and operating environment.

Airway Adapter (Adult) 7007

For patients using an endo-tracheal tube more than, or equal to 4.0
mm in diameter.
Reusable Type

Airway Adapter (Neonate) 7053

For patients using an endo-tracheal tube less than, or equal to 4.0
mm in diameter.
Reusable Type

Airway Adapter (Disposable, Adult) 6063

For patients using an endo-tracheal tube more than, or equal to 4.0
mm in diameter.
Single-Use Type

Airway Adapter ( neonate) 6312

For patients using an endo-tracheal tube less than, or equal to 4.0
mm in diameter.
Single-Use Type

4 Verify that the warm up is complete, and attach the CO2 sensor to the airway adapter until a click sound is
heard.

1 Capnostat 5 CO2 Sensor

2 Window 1

3 Airway Adapter

A: Thick Side 3
B: Thin Side
B

2
A

CAUTION
 The airway adapter should be attached with the thicker side facing to the patient. If
attached oppositely, it may damage the CO2 sensor or airway adapter.

5 Perform the setting for the O2 compensation, N2O compensation, anesthetic gas compensation, atmospheric
pressure Set these items each time the condition changes. (
"CO2 Parameter Setup" P7-77)
6 Press the [Menu], [CO2] ("Parameter"), [Calibrate Airway Adapter] keys to calibrate the airway adapter.

Calibration will start.

7-75
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

During calibration, <Zeroing> will be displayed.

Upon completion of calibration, a tone will be generated and <Cal. complete> will be displayed.
If the calibration fails, an error tone will be generated and <Cal. error> will be displayed.

NOTE
 The airway adapter calibration must be performed before connecting to the respiration
circuit.
The airway adapter calibration should be also performed for the following case.
 When the airway adapter is replaced.
 When <Zero the CO2 Adapter> or <Check airway adapter.> is displayed.
 A clean airway adapter must be used.
If reusing an airway adapter, clean and air-dry it. Then, wipe the window with a swab, and
sterilize (EOG, etc.) before use.
 During the calibration, the measurement data will be displayed as "---". The measurement
data during calibration may be included in the trend data causing discontinuity.
 Calibration cannot be performed if respiration is detected within 20 seconds before
calibration. In such case, wait for 20 seconds and perform the calibration again.
 When <Cal. error> is displayed, perform the airway adapter calibration again.
 The EtCO2 accuracy is checked according to the test method of ISO 80601- 2-55: 2011
(Medical electrical equipment-Part 2-55: Particular requirements for the basic safety and
essential performance of respiratory gas monitors) .
 The waveform sampling rate is 100 Hz.
 The CO2 measurement accuracy is not guaranteed for all humidity levels (non-
condensing).
 The CO2 measurement accuracy is tested at 35°C.
 The respiration rate accuracy was verified by using a solenoid test setup to deliver a
square wave of known CO2 concentration to the device. 5% and 10% CO2 concentrations
were used and respiration rate was varied over the range of the device. Pass/Fail criteria
was comparison of the respiratory rate output from the sensor to the frequency of the
square wave. EtCO2 measurements at those rates were compared to the CO2 readings
under static flow conditions.

7 Verify that the airway adapter calibration is properly completed, disconnect the CO2 sensor from the airway
adapter temporarily, and attach the airway adapter to the patient’s respiration circuit.

8 Connect the CO2 sensor to the airway adapter.

1 Capnostat 5 CO2 Sensor

2 Y-Piece 1

3 Airway Adapter for Adults B

A: Patient Side
B: Device Side

3
A

7-76
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

NOTE
 Attach the airway adapter between the patient's circuit Y-piece and intubation tube.
 The CO2 sensor should be facing upward.

9 Verify that the CO2 waveform, EtCO2 value, InspCO2 value are displayed.

NOTE
 Set the scale, measurement unit, alarm, etc. as necessary.

CO2 Parameter Setup

Press the [Menu], [CO2] keys to display the "CO2" setup screen.

4
1
3
2
5 8
6 9
7 10 11

1 Calibrate Airway Adapter

The airway adapter will be calibrated. (
"Patient Application and Display" P7-74)
2 Scale

Select from [0- 50]/[0- 100] if the measurement unit is mmHg, and from [0- 4]/[0- 8]/[0- 10] if the unit is kPa or %.

3 EtCO2 (End-tidal CO2)

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 The EtCO2 alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is detected within 30
seconds after the power is turned ON, monitoring is resumed, CO2 unit is connected,
or a patient is discharged.

7-77
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

 Set the upper limit in the range of 3 mmHg to 100 mmHg/0.3 kPa to 13.3 kPa/0.3% to
13.3%.
Setting a value above 100 mmHg/3.3 kPa/13.3% will turn OFF the alarm.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 1 mmHg to 98 mmHg/0.1 kPa to 13.1 kPa/0.1% to
13.1%.
Setting a value below 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% will turn OFF the alarm.
 When Capnostat 5 is used, EtCO2 alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration
is detected after completion of the airway adapter calibration.

REFERENCE
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa/%).
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% increment.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +10 mmHg /
+1.3 kPa / +1.3%, and -10 mmHg / -1.3 kPa / -1.3% respectively to the current value.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under

"Initial Settings". ( Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto
setting is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

4 InspCO2 (Inspired CO2)

"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)

(

NOTE
 The InspCO2 alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is detected within 30
seconds after the power is turned ON, monitoring is resumed, CO2 unit is connected,
or a patient is discharged.
 Set the upper limit in the range of 1 mmHg to 4 mmHg/0.1 kPa to 0.4 kPa/0.1% to
0.4%.
Setting a value equal to or above 4 mmHg/0.4 kPa/0.4% will turn OFF the alarm.
 When Capnostat 5 is used, InspCO2 alarm will not generate unless 2 or more
respiration is detected after completion of the airway adapter calibration.

REFERENCE
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa/%).
 The upper limit can be set in 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% increments. There is no lower limit.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper limit will be set to 3 mmHg / 0.4 kPa / 0.4%.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under

"Initial Settings". ( Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto
setting is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

7-78
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

5 EtCO2 Peak Duration

[10sec]/[20sec]: Maximum EtCO2 value for the selected duration will be displayed.
[OFF]: EtCO2 value for each respiration will be displayed.

NOTE
 As the EtCO2 value display is updated each second, EtCO2 value for each respiration
cannot be displayed if respiration rate is 60 Bpm and above.
 For the InspCO2 value, minimum value of 20 seconds will be displayed regardless of
the setting.

6 O2 Compensation

By entering the used O2 concentration value, compensation can be made to display more accurate value.
Enter the O2 compensation value on the "O2" screen, and press the [Set] key.

NOTE
 The value cannot be changed if the total value of O2 compensation and anesthetic
agent compensation exceeds 100%. In such case, change the O2 compensation value
after changing the anesthetic agent compensation value.

7 N2O Compensation

NOTE
 If N2O is present in the respiration circuit, the CO2 value tends to be displayed higher
than the actual value. By setting the N2O compensation to [ON], this can be adjusted.

8 Anesthetic Agent Compensation

By entering the used anesthetic agent concentration value, compensation can be made to display more
accurate value.
Enter the anesthetic compensation value on the "Agent" screen, and press the [Set] key.

NOTE
 The value cannot be changed if the total value of O2 compensation and anesthetic
agent compensation exceeds 100%. In such case, change the anesthetic agent
compensation value after changing the O2 compensation value.

7-79
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)

9 Atmospheric Pressure

By entering the atmospheric pressure, the pressure difference will be compensated and allows more accurate
measurement.
Enter the atmospheric pressure value on the "Atmos. Pressure" screen, and press the [Set] key.

10 CO2 Source Priority

When MGU-800/MGU-810 andHS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2 source to
prioritize the measurement can be set.

[MGU-800]: CO2 value measured by the MGU-800/810 Multigas Unit will be prioritized.
[HS-8000]: CO2 value measured by the HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 will be prioritized.

NOTE
 When the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

11 Display ON/OFF

(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
CAUTION
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and
tabular trend input will also cease.
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the respiration rate
measured by CO2 will not be displayed either.

REFERENCE
 When the filter line is applied to the patient during the "Display OFF" condition, the
waveform and numeric data will be automatically displayed when 2 or more
respirations are detected in 30 seconds.

7-80
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)

CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)

The HCP-810/HCP-820 is a CO2 Gas Unit which measures CO2 concentration. The HCP-810/HCP-820 CO2 Gas
Unit incorporates Microstream technology of Covidien for EtCO2 (End-tidal CO2 concentration) and InspCO2
(Inspiratory CO2 concentration) measurement. This section explains about the procedure and setup of the CO2
concentration measurement of the HCP-810/HCP-820.

WARNING
 When using a sampling line for intubated patients with a closed suction system, do not place
the airway adapter between the suction catheter and endotracheal tube. This is to ensure
that the airway adapter does not interfere with the functioning of the suction catheter.
 Loose or damaged connections may compromise ventilation or cause an inaccurate
measurement of respiratory gases. Securely connect all components and check
connections for leaks according to standard clinical procedures.
 Do not cut or remove any part of the sampling line. It could lead to erroneous readings.
 If too much moisture enters the sampling line (i.e., from ambient humidity or breathing of
unusually humid air), <Check Sample Line> will appear in the message area. Replace the
sampling line when this message appears.
 Carefully route the filter line to reduce the possibility of patient entanglement or
strangulation.
 Do not lift the HCP-810/HCP-820 by the filter line, as the filter line could disconnect from the
device, causing the device to fall on the patient.
 CO2 readings and respiratory rate can be affected by sensor application errors, certain
ambient environmental conditions, and certain patient conditions.

CAUTION
 When the multigas unit (MGU-800/MGU-810) and HPD-810/HPD-820 are simultaneously
used, the CO2 concentration measurement will be performed by the device selected for the
"CO2 Source Priority" under ([Menu] > "Parameter" [CO2]).
 The Microstream EtCO2 sampling lines are designed for single patient use, and are not to
be reused. Do not attempt to clean, disinfect, sterilize or flush any part of the sampling line
as this can cause damage to the monitor.
 Dispose of sampling lines according to standard operating procedures or local regulations
for the disposal of contaminated medical waste.
 Before use, carefully read the Directions for Use for the Microstream EtCO2 sampling line.
 Use only the Microstream EtCO2 sampling line to ensure proper function of the monitor.
 During nebulization or suction for intubated patient, remove the sampling line from the HCP-
810/HCP-820 to avoid moisture buildup and sampling line occlusion.
 Replace the sampling line according to hospital protocol or when a blockage is indicated on
the device. Excessive patient secretions or a buildup of liquids in the airway tube may
occlude the sampling line, requiring more frequent replacement.

NOTE
 When connecting a sampling line to the HCP-810/HCP-820, screw the sampling line
clockwise into the connector firmly to avoid inaccurate measurement which may be caused
by gas leak from the connection point.
 When <Check Sample Line> appears on the screen indicating that the filter line connected
to the HCP-810/HCP-820 is blocked, the CO2 pump will stop pumping the patient's breath
to the monitor. In such case, follow the instructions in the "Troubleshooting" section of this

7-81
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)

manual. First, disconnect and reconnect the filter line. If the message still appears,
disconnect and replace the filter line. Once a working filter line is attached, the pump will
automatically resume operation.
 After connecting the CO2 sampling line to the HCP-810/HCP-820 and patient, check that
CO2 values appear on the monitor display.
 The EtCO2 accuracy is checked according to the test method of ISO 80601- 2-55: 2011
(Medical electrical equipment 2-Part 2-55: Particular requirements for the basic safety and
essential performance of respiratory gas monitors) .
 The waveform sampling rate is 20 samples per second.
 The minimum value and maximum value of the CO2 waveform are used for the InspCO2
value and EtCO2 value respectively.
 When using the HCP module with a ventilator, under high over pressures close to 10 kPa
(100 cmH2O), the module may enter into a blockage mode in order to protect the module
from damage.
 The respiration rate test simulates breaths for use in respiration rate measurement with a
system which uses a tank of N2 (representing no CO2 for inhalation) and a tank of CO2 (of
the %CO2 required for the particular test). A control board, which is triggered by a computer,
uses solenoids to switch the module input between the 2 tanks of gas, creating a gas CO2
square wave. This system can create simulated breaths over the full required range of
specified respiration rates.

Patient Application and Display

The CO2 concentration can be measured by using the HCP-810/HCP-820 CO2 Gas Unit.
NOTE
 Accurate CO2 concentration measurement can be acquired after 40 seconds from turning
the power ON.

1 Connect the HCP-810/HCP-820 CO2 Gas Unit to the connector.

The connection procedure differs depending on the gas unit type.
In Case of HCP-810
Connect to the AUX connector of the HS-8000, DS-8007 or HM-801.
In Case of HCP-820
Connect to the CO2 I/F connector on the DS-8007.

NOTE
 When using more than one HM-801, only one AUX connector on the HM-801 can be used
for measurement of CO2, BIS (with HBX-800).
 When the CO2 is measured on both the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801, the
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

7-82
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)

2 Attach the airway adapter, oral/nasal sampling line or nasal sampling line to the patient.

For intubated patient

1 Attach the airway adapter to respiration circuit.

2 Connect one end of the sampling line to the connector on the HCP-810/HCP-820. Verify that all the tubes
are properly connected.
For patient using the nasal prong

1 Attach the nasal or oral/nasal patient interface of the sampling line to the patient as described in the
sampling line directions for use.
2 Connect the sampling line to the connector on the HCP-810/HCP-820.
Verify that all the tubes are properly connected.

3 Start the CO2 concentration measurement.

Verify that the CO2 waveform, EtCO2 value, InspCO2 value are displayed.

CAUTION
 If the power supply is interrupted due to power failure, etc., HCP-810/HCP-820 will be
initialized even if the power interruption was within 30 seconds.

7-83
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)

NOTE
 Connecting a sampling line or nasal prong to the HCP-810/HCP-820 will automatically
start the sampling pump. To prevent the pump from deteriorating, disconnect the
sampling line and nasal prong from the HCP-810/HCP-820 when not measuring the CO2
concentration.
 Set the scale, measurement unit, alarm, etc. as necessary.
 When ambient temperature or atmospheric pressure changes significantly, auto zeroing
will function. During auto zeroing, "---" will be displayed inside the CO2 numeric data box
and CO2 measurement cannot be performed.

CO2 Parameter Setup

Press the [Menu], [CO2] keys to display the "CO2" setup screen.

1 3
4 2
5
6 7
8
1 Scale

Select from [0- 50]/[0- 100] if the measurement unit is mmHg, and from [0- 4]/[0- 8]/[0- 10] if the unit is kPa or %.

2 EtCO2 (End-tidal Carbon Dioxide)

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 The EtCO2 alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is detected within 30
seconds after the power is turned ON, monitoring is resumed, CO2 unit is connected,
or a patient is discharged.
 Set the upper limit in the range of 3 mmHg to 100 mmHg/0.3 kPa to 13.3 kPa/0.3% to
13.3%.
Setting a value above 100 mmHg/3.3 kPa/13.3% will turn OFF the alarm.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 1 mmHg to 98 mmHg/0.1 kPa to 13.1 kPa/0.1% to
13.1%.
Setting a value below 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% will turn OFF the alarm.

REFERENCE
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa/%).
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% increment.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper and lower limit will be automatically set to +10 mmHg /
+1.3 kPa / +1.3%, and -10 mmHg / -1.3 kPa / -1.3% respectively to the current value.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under

"Initial Settings". ( Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)

7-84
Chapter 7 Monitoring CO2 Concentration (Sidestream Method)

 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto
setting is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

3 InspCO2 (Inspired Carbon Dioxide)

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 The InspCO2 alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is detected within 30
seconds after the power is turned ON, monitoring is resumed, CO2 unit is connected,
or a patient is discharged.
 Set the upper limit in the range of 1 mmHg to 4 mmHg/0.1 kPa to 0.4 kPa/0.1% to
0.4%.
Setting a value equal to or above 4 mmHg/0.4 kPa/0.4% will turn OFF the alarm.

REFERENCE
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa/%).
 The upper limit can be set in 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% increments. There is no lower limit.
 When [Auto] is set, the upper limit will be set to 3 mmHg / 0.4 kPa / 0.4%.
 To use the auto setting, [Enable] should be selected for "Alarm Auto Setup" under

"Initial Settings". ( Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)
 When [Enable] is set for "Alarm Threshold Limit" under "Initial Settings", and auto
setting is used, the upper and lower alarm limit will be clipped to the set limit.

4 EtCO2 Peak Duration

[10sec]/[20sec]: Maximum EtCO2 value, minimum InspCO2 value for the selected duration will be displayed.
[OFF]: EtCO2 value, InspCO2 value for each respiration will be displayed.

NOTE
 As the EtCO2 value display is updated each second, EtCO2 value for each respiration
cannot be displayed if respiration rate is 60 Bpm and above.

5 CO2 Source Priority

When MGU-800/MGU-810 andHS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2 source to
prioritize the measurement can be set.

[MGU-800]: CO2 value measured by the MGU-800/810 Multigas Unit will be prioritized.
[HS-8000]: CO2 value measured by the HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 will be prioritized.

NOTE
 When the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

6 CO2 Calibration

CO2 calibration can be performed.

(
Maintenance Manual "CO2 Calibration (HCP-810/HCP-820)" P9-10)

7-85
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

7 Suspend CO2

[Suspend]: The pump operation will stop, CO2 waveform and numeric data display will disappear, and
"Suspended" will be displayed inside the CO2 numeric data box.
[Resume]: Resumes CO2 monitoring. This key will be displayed when the measurement is suspended.

CAUTION
 When the measurement is suspended, the alarm generation and trend input will be also
suspended.

8 Display ON/OFF

(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
CAUTION
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and
tabular trend input will also cease.
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the respiration rate
measured by CO2 will not be displayed either.

REFERENCE
 When the filter line is applied to the patient during the "Display OFF" condition, the
waveform and numeric data will be automatically displayed when 2 or more
respirations are detected in 30 seconds.

Multigas Unit/SPIRO

The MGU-800/810 series Multigas Unit can be connected to the DS-8400 system via U-LINK connector.

( Maintenance Manual "Connection of Multigas Unit" P1-11)
When the multigas unit is connected, monitoring conditions for CO2 concentration, anesthetic gas concentration, O2
concentration, and N2O concentration, respiration (SPIRO) can be set.
The MGU-800/810 series have an internal barometer and thermistor that allow compensation for changes over a
range of temperature and atmospheric pressures.

WARNING
 Make sure to use only the specified Mindray Medical Sweden AB product.
(
 "AG Sensors for MGU-800/MGU-810 Manufacturer: Mindray" P13-11)
 Be careful not to damage the water trap during operation as bacteria and/or mucus may
contaminate the MGU-800/810 series.
 The airway adapter, sampling line, flow sensor are disposable products that are intended for
single patient use only. Do not reuse them on other patients as it may cause cross-infection.
 Do not use the MGU-800/810 series with the flammable anesthetic agents.
 To protect the hospital staffs from unnecessary anesthetic agent, it is strongly
recommended to connect the exhaust hole to the gas exhaust system in the hospital.
 The sampling line may get clogged by internal condensation.

CAUTION
 When the multigas unit (MGU-800/MGU-810 series) and HPD-810/HPD-820, HCP-810/
HCP-820 are simultaneously used, the CO2 concentration measurement will be performed
by the device selected for the "CO2 Source Priority" under ( [Menu] > "Parameter" [CO2]) .

7-86
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

 The MGU-800/MGU-810 series require warm up of about 10 minutes to correctly measure

the data.
 If the power supply is interrupted due to power failure, etc., MGU-800/810 series multigas
unit will initialize and enter into warm-up mode even if the power interruption is within 30
seconds.
 Zero Calibration:
The zero calibration will automatically start when the MGU-800/810 series multigas unit is
connected.
After the warm-up completes, zero calibration will be performed every 4 hours during stable
operation.
During warm-up, zero calibration interval will become shorter than during normal operation.
During zero calibration, measurement data will not be updated.
Calibration gas is not required during zero calibration.
 Make sure the sampling line and flow sensor is securely connected to prevent any leakage.
 An environment with alcoholic vapor may adversely affect the measurement readings.
 CO2, N2O or anesthetic agent in the atmosphere around the MGU-800/810 series may
adversely affect the measurement readings.
 SPIRO and ventilator cannot be used simultaneously.
 The anesthesia delivery system and MGU-800/810 cannot be connected simultaneously.

NOTE
 The MGU-800/810 series uses a fixed correction of 11hPa (22ºC@40% RH) to compensate
for the influence of water vapor in the gas sample, when converting the gas readings to
ATPD. An increase in the ambient H20 partial pressure to 30 hPa (28ºC@80% RH or
33ºC@60% RH) will cause a general error for all gases of only -2% REL.
 The EtCO2 accuracy is checked according to the test method of ISO 80601-2-55: 2011
(Medical electrical equipment-Part 2-55: Particular requirements for the basic safety and
essential performance of respiratory gas monitors) under the condition of 60 Bpm and below
with I:E ratio of 1:1.
 When the RR exceeds 60 Bpm, the EtCO2 accuracy cannot be specified. (Depends on the
I:E ratio.)
 The data sampling rate is 25 Hz.
 The minimum value and maximum value of the CO2 waveform are used for the InspCO2
value and EtCO2 value respectively.
 For the gas measurement data, "0" will be displayed if the value becomes below the
following threshold for 3 seconds or more. (Full Accuracy/during warm-up)
CO2: 0.1/0.3[vol%]
N2O: 3/3[vol%]
O2: 0/0[vol%]
Volatile Anesthetic: 0.15/0.3[vol%]
 The ability to properly resolve end-tidal values can be measured by using the set-up
described in ISO 80601-2-55: 2011, figure 201. 101.
In short, the method consists of sampling gas from two different sources connected to an
electrically controlled pneumatic valve to permit rapid switching between the two sources.
During the test, the valve is set to switch gas source at a number of frequencies (simulating
the range of specified breath rates) and for each frequency, the end-tidal value presented
by the gas analyzer is noted. From a diagram of end-tidal value over frequency, the
frequency at which the gas analyzer is no longer able to resolve end-tidal values according
to specification is identified.

7-87
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

Connecting to the Respiration Circuit

Multigas Concentration Measurement (MGU-800 Series)

WARNING
 Do not use adult/pediatric type water traps and/or sampling lines with neonates to avoid high
sampling flow.
 Connect only DRYLINE gas sampling lines to the water trap. Note that there may be other
compatible tubing present, e.g. IV-lines.
 Do not use DRYLINE neonatal sampling lines (blue luer lock nuts) with DRYLINE adult water
traps as this could result in incorrect measurement data.
 Do not use DRYLINE adult sampling lines (colorless luer lock nuts) with DRYLINE neonatal
water traps as this could result in incorrect measurement data.

NOTE
 If [Adult] or [Child] is selected as patient classification on the "Admit/Discharge" screen,
install the DRYLINE Adult/Child Water Trap (60-13100-0).
If [Neonate] is selected as patient classification on the "Admit/Discharge" screen, install the
DRYLINE Neonatal Water Trap (60- 13200-0).
If the used water trap and the set patient classification does not match, <GAS Check Water
Trap Class> will be displayed.

1 Install the DRYLINE Water Trap (Adult/Child: 60-13100-00, Neonate: 60-13200-00), DRYLINE II Water Trap
(Adult/Child: 100-000080-00, Neonate: 100-000081-00) aligning the lugs with the corresponding holes in the
receptacle and pushing gently into place. (See below.)
Make sure that both barbs on the lugs are fully engaged by pulling the water trap, which should be firmly
seated.

2 Connect the DRYLINE Airway Adapter (Straight: 60-14100-00, or Elbow: 60-14200-00) to the patient breathing
system.

3 Remove the protective cap from the airway adapter and connect it to the sampling line (for adult/child: 60-
15200-00, for neonate: 60- 15300-00).

4 Connect the other side of the sampling line to the inhale port of the water trap. When the water trap is half full,
empty the water trap's reservoir.
(
Maintenance Manual "Water Trap (Multigas Unit)" P8-5)
WARNING
 The contents of the water trap should be handled as a potential infection hazard.

7-88
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

Multigas Concentration/Spirometry Measurement (MGU-810 Series)

WARNING
 Combination of the SPIRIT Flow Sensors and DRYLINE Water Traps as described in the
table below are recommended. Other combinations might lead to incorrect measurements.

Patient
Classification
Patient Selection on
SPIRIT Flow Sensor DRYLINE Water Trap DRYLINE II Water Trap
Category "Admit/
Discharge"
Screen

Adult Adult Adult (60- 16100-00) Adult/Child (60- 13100-00) Adult/Child (100- 000080-00)

Child Child Child (60- 16200-00) Neonate (60- 13200-00) Neonate (100- 000081-00)
Neonate Neonate Child (60- 16200-00) Neonate (60- 13200-00) Neonate (100- 000081-00)

 Use the adult flow sensor for a patient whose tidal volume is above 150 mL.
 Use the pediatric flow sensor for a patient whose tidal volume is below 300 mL.
 Make sure to use the correct flow sensor depending on the patient conditions, adult or
pediatric and the tidal volume.
 Do not confuse the gas sampling line with other compatible tubing, e.g. IV-lines.

1 Install the DRYLINE Water Trap.

2 Connect the end (for adult: 22/15 mm, pediatric: 15 mm) of the flow sensor, marked to the patient tracheal
tube or similar.

3 Connect the end of the flow sensor to the patient breathing system. For best results, a heat and moisture
exchanger (HME) or similar should be put between the flow sensor and the breathing system.

4 Connect the pressure line of the flow sensor to the flow sensor connector on the MGU-810.

5 Connect the gas sampling line of the flow sensor (for adult: colorless, for pediatric: blue) to the gas inlet of the
water trap. When the water trap is half full, empty the water trap's reservoir.
(
Maintenance Manual "Water Trap (Multigas Unit)" P8-5)
WARNING
 The contents of the water trap should be handled as a potential infection hazard.

6 To prevent accumulation of condensed fluid, the flow sensor shall be always be positioned a few degrees off
the horizontal level towards the ventilator side. For the same reason, the pressure tubes shall exit the flow
sensor upwards.

7 The pressure tubes should be routed in such a way that a water lock is formed by a section of tubing being
positioned lower than the flow sensor connector on the MGU-810.

8 A patient breathing system leakage test shall be performed according to the recommendations of the ventilator
manufacturer.

7-89
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

CAUTION
 The adult flow sensor dead space is 6.9 mL and the flow resistance is 1.8 cmH2O at 60 L/
min.
The pediatric flow sensor dead space is 0.75 mL and the flow resistance is 0.9 cmH2O at 10
L/min.
Adjust ventilation accordingly.
 To prevent condensation, the patient breathing circuit, flow sensor and pressure tubing
should not be directly exposed to cooling device such as fans or cooling blankets.
 Leakage of gas from the patient breathing system may occur if the pressure or gas sampling
lines are not connected to the MGU-810.
 The pressure tube and gas sampling lines of the flow sensor should always be routed from
the patient circuit to the MGU-810 such a way as to avoid kinking.
 Flow sensors that have suffered damage to sensor head, tubing or tubing connector must
not be used.
 If liquid has entered the pressure tubes, it can be removed by gently tapping or shaking the
flow sensor.

CO2 Measurement Unit Setup

NOTE
 Even though the CO2 measurement can be done in several units or modules, setups for the
alarm limit, measurement unit and scale are common for all the units and modules.
 When a measurement unit is changed, make sure to set the alarm condition for that unit. Set
the alarm for each measurement unit.

1 Press the [Menu], [Initial Settings], [Meas.], [Unit] keys.

The "Unit" menu will be displayed.

2 Press the [mmHg]/[kPa]/[%] key.

The data of currently set measurement unit will be displayed on the graphic/tabular trend.

7-90
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

GAS Display during Undetected Breath

The gas data display when a respiration is not detected can be selected from [None] (bar display) or [Insp. Only]
(displays only the inspiratory data).

1 Press the [Menu], [Initial Settings], [Meas.], [Other] keys.

The "Other" menu will be displayed.

2 Press the [None]/[Insp. Only] key.

[None]: When a respiration is not detected, inspiratory and expiratory data will become invalid and bar marks
will be displayed instead.
[Insp. Only] : When a respiration is not detected, only the inspiratory data will become valid and bar marks will
be displayed for expiratory data.

NOTE
 When [Insp. Only] is selected for "GAS Display during Undetected Breath" and if only
inspiratory data is displayed, inspiratory and expiratory data display on the central
monitor will become invalid.
 When [Insp. Only] is selected for "GAS Display during Undetected Breath" and if only
inspiratory data is displayed, the GAS alarm will not be generated.

7-91
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

Multigas Unit Data Setup (Multigas Concentration/Spirometry)

1 Press the [Menu], [GAS] "Parameter" keys.

The Multigas setup screen will be displayed.

GAS_CO2 Screen (MGU-800 series) GAS_O2 Screen (MGU-800 series)

2 4 3 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 11 11
GAS_N2O Screen (MGU-800 series ) GAS_AGT Screen (MGU-800 series )

5 4 4
9 6
6
7
11
GAS_MAC Screen (MGU-800 series) GAS_RESP Screen (MGU-800 series)

4 4

11
GAS_SPIRO Screen (MGU-810 series )

4
10

11

2 Set the CO2 waveform scale.

Select from [0- 50]/[0- 100] if the measurement unit is mmHg, and from [0- 4]/[0- 8]/[0- 10] if the unit is kPa or %.

7-92
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

3 Set the O2 waveform scale.

Select from [18- 30]/[18- 60]/[18- 100]/[0- 30]/[0- 60]/[0- 100].

4 Set the alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 The following alarm will not generate unless 2 or more respiration is detected within 30
seconds after the power is turned ON, monitoring is resumed, multigas unit is connected,
or a patient is discharged.

EtCO2 Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 3 mmHg to 100 mmHg/0.3 kPa to 13.3 kPa/0.3% to
13.3%. Setting a value above 100 mmHg/3.3 kPa/13.3% will turn OFF the alarm.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 1 mmHg to 98 mmHg/0.1 kPa to 13.1 kPa/0.1% to
13.1%. Setting a value below 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% will turn OFF the alarm.

REFERENCE
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa/%).
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% increment.

InspCO2 Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 1 mmHg to 4 mmHg/0.1 kPa to 0.4 kPa/0.1% to 0.4%.
Setting a value above 4 mmHg/0.4 kPa/0.4% will turn OFF the alarm.

REFERENCE
 The alarm limit should be set for each unit (mmHg/kPa/%).
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 1 mmHg/0.1 kPa/0.1% increment.

ExpO2 Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 18% to 100%.
The alarm will turn OFF if a value above 100% is set.
 Set the lower limit in the range of 18% to 100%.
The alarm will turn OFF if a value below 18% is set.

REFERENCE
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 2% increment.

InspO2 Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 18% to 100%.

7-93
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

The alarm will turn OFF if a value above 100% is set.

 Set the lower limit in the range of 18% to 100%.
The alarm will turn OFF if a value below 18% is set.

REFERENCE
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 2% increment.

ExpN2O/ InspN2O Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper/lower limit in the range of 0% to 100%.
The upper limit and lower limit will turn OFF if a value above 100% and below 0% is set
respectively.

REFERENCE
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 2% increment.

AGT-E/AGT-I Alarm (MGU-810)

NOTE
 The adjustable range of the upper limit differs depending on the anesthetic gas label.
ISO, HAL, ENF: 0.5% to 6.0%
SEV: 0.5% to 8.0%
DES: 0.5% to 18.0%
The alarm will turn OFF if a value above the range is set.
 The adjustable range of the lower limit differs depending on the anesthetic gas label.
ISO, HAL, ENF: 0.5% to 6.0%
SEV: 0.5% to 8.0%
DES: 0.5% to 18.0%
The alarm will turn OFF if a value below the range is set.

REFERENCE
 The upper/lower limit can be set in 0.5% increment.

MAC Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of 0.1 to 9.9.
The upper limit alarm will turn OFF if a value below 9.9 is set.

REFERENCE
 The upper limit can be set in 0.1 increments.

RR/Apnea Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper limit of the RR alarm in the range of 10 to 150Bpm. The upper limit alarm
will turn OFF if a value above 150Bpm is set.
Set the APNEA upper limit in the numeric range of 10 to 60 sec. The upper limit alarm will
turn OFF if a value above 60 seconds is set.

7-94
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

 Set the lower limit of the RR alarm in the range of 5 to 145Bpm. The alarm will turn OFF
if a value below 5Bpm is set.

REFERENCE
 The adjustable increment for RR alarm depends on the patient classification and "RR
Alarm Increment" setting. (Initial Settings>User I/F).

Alarm Increment (Initial Settings > User I/F)

Normal Small

Adult 5 Bpm increment 1 Bpm increment

Child/Neonate 2 Bpm increment 1 Bpm increment

 The apnea alarm can be set in 1 second increment.

ExpMV/PEAK/PEEP Alarm

NOTE
 Set the upper/lower limit of ExpMV alarm in the range of 2.0 L/minute to 20 L/minute for
Adult, 0.5 L/minute to 5.0 L/minute for Child/Neonate.
 Set the upper/lower limit of PEAK alarm in the range of 8 cmH2O to 100 cmH2O.
 Set the upper/lower limit of PEEP alarm in the range of 2 cmH2O to 50 cmH2O.

REFERENCE
 The upper/lower limit can be set as followings.
ExpMV alarm can be set in 0.5 L/minute increment.
PEAK/PEEP alarm can be set in 1 cmH2O increment.

5 Perform a zero calibration. Press the [Zero Cal.] key to start the zero calibration.

NOTE
 While performing the zero calibration, the baseline waveform is displayed.

REFERENCE
 On the patient monitor, a zeroing (zero calibration) of the multigas unit is periodically
performed, but it can also be performed manually when necessary.

6 Set the "Flow Rate" (sampling flow rate for the multigas unit ).
The selectable "Flow Rate" value differs depending on the type of used water trap (adult/child or neonate) and
sampling line.

When using a water trap for adult/child, select from [120]/[150]/[200].

When using a water trap for neonate, select from [70]/[100]/[120].

NOTE
 If the used water trap and the set patient classification does not match, <GAS Check
Water Trap Class> will be displayed.
 If <GAS Pump Regulating> is displayed, the gas sampling flow rate may be insufficient.
Check the sample line for any blockage or bent. If the message is still displayed, adjust
the flow rate.
 Select the appropriate water trap, sampling line, or flow sensor from 2 types according to

7-95
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

the patient classification.

User water trap and sampling line for MGU-800, water trap and flow sensor for MGU-810.
 Refer to "Chapter 13 System Components" for the usable water trap, sampling line, or
flow sensor.
(
 "AG Sensors for MGU-800/MGU-810 Manufacturer: Mindray" P13-11)

7 Set the "Wave Clip".

If the gas waveform amplitude exceeds the waveform display area, whether or not to clip the exceeded part
can be selected.

[ON]: The exceeded part of the waveform will be displayed in straight line at the upper or lower scale limit.
[OFF]: The whole part of the waveform will be displayed even if it exceeds the scale. However, the exceeded
part may not be displayed depending on the sweep speed of the waveform displayed above or below the
gas waveform.

8 Set the "CO2 Source Priority".

When MGU-800/MGU-810 andHS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2 source to
prioritize the measurement can be set.

[MGU-800]: CO2 value measured by the MGU-800/MGU-810 will be prioritized.

[HS-8000]: CO2 value measured by the HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 will be prioritized.

NOTE
 When the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

9 Set the agent gas label. Select from [Auto]/[ISO]/[SEV]/[HAL]/[ENF]/[DES].

[Auto]: The label will be automatically set according to the detected anesthetic gas.

10 When the MGU-810 series is used, set the respiratory waveform scale.

11 Select ON/OFF for parameter display.

(
"ECG Parameter Setup" P7-6)
CAUTION
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the alarm generation and
tabular/graphic trend input will also cease.
 When the waveform and numeric data display is set to OFF, the respiration rate
measured by the multigas unit will not be displayed either.

7-96
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multigas Unit/SPIRO

MAC Display
The MAC value can be displayed in the numeric data display area.
Minimum Alveolar Concentration (MAC) is defined in ISO-80601-2-55 as the concentration of anesthetic at which
50% of patients do not move in response to a surgical stimulus.
NOTE
 The MAC value will be displayed only if [ON] is set for "MAC Value". Perform the setting if
necessary.

1 Press the [Menu], [GAS] "Parameter", [MAC] keys.

The MAC value setup screen will be displayed.

2 Select ON/OFF for "MAC Value".

[ON]: The MAC value will be displayed in the

numeric data display area.

[OFF]: The MAC value will not be displayed in the

numeric data display area.

To change the displayed default value, enter the

value using the numeric keys, and press the key for
the corresponding constant.

3 Select ON/OFF for "MAC Age".

Age compensation can be performed from 1 to 95 years old. Effective MAC range is 0.6 to 1.6.
[ON]: MAC will be calculated by the compensation formula.
[OFF]: The measurement will not be compensated.

The MAC value is calculated from the following formula.

Ex N2O: Expired N2O (%)

Ex PAGT: Expired Primary Agent (%)
Ex SAGT: Expired Secondary Agent (%)
X (N2O): N2O Constant
X (PAGT): Primary Agent Constant
X (SAGT): Secondary Agent Constant

The MAC value for MAC correction is calculated from the following formula.
MAC(age)
K(age)N2O K(age)PAGT K(age)SAGT

Ex N2O: Expired N2O (%)

Ex PAGT: Expired Primary Agent (%)
Ex SAGT: Expired Secondary Agent (%)
K (age) N2O: Age N2O Constant
K (age) PAGT: Age Compensation Primary Agent Constant

7-97
Chapter 7 Monitoring BIS Data (BISx)

K (age) SAGT: Age Compensation Secondary Agent Constant

Age compensation is calculated from the following formula.

MAC(age) MAC40 × 10  0.00269 (age 40)

Minimum Alveolar Concentration Initial Value

N2O, Anesthetic Initial Value

N2O 104

ISO 1.17

HAL 0.75

ENF 1.63
SEV 1.80

DES 6.60

* Reference for constant number: “Age-related iso-MAC charts for iso¯urane, sevo¯urane and des¯urane in man [R.
W. D. Nickalls and W. W. Mapleson] 2003”

BIS Data (BISx)

This section explains about the BIS measurement and setup procedure when using the BISx with the BIS I/F Unit,
HBX-800.

WARNING
 Clinical judgment should always be used when interpreting BIS in conjunction with other
available clinical signs. Reliance on BIS alone for intra-operative anesthetic management is
not recommended.
 BIS values should also be interpreted cautiously with certain anesthetic combinations, such
as those relying primarily on either ketamine or nitrous oxide/narcotics to produce
unconsciousness.
 As with any monitored parameter, artifacts and poor signal quality may lead to inappropriate
BIS values. Potential artifacts may be caused by poor skin contact (high impedance),
muscle activity or rigidity, head and body motion, sustained eye movements, improper
sensor placement and unusual or excessive electrical interference.

CAUTION
 Generally, the BIS value decreases with the decrease of brain activity. When a patient is in
hypothermia state during cardiac bypass surgery, the suppression of brain wave will cause
the BIS value to decrease.
 Pay attention when artifact interferes or signal quality decreases, as it may cause incorrect
BIS measurement.
 Pay attention when AC disturbing signal interferes during Filter OFF condition, as it may
cause incorrect BIS measurement.
 Pay attention when a pacemaker pulse is displayed in the brain wave, as it may cause
incorrect BIS measurement.
 The BIS value tends to increase with the EMG interference. The patient's shivering during
recovery from anesthesia increases the EMG and may cause the BIS value to increase.
 When attaching the BIS sensor, lightly apply pressure to the electrode part for about 5
seconds to decrease the electrode impedance.

7-98
Chapter 7 Monitoring BIS Data (BISx)

Preparation for Monitoring

By connecting the BISx module using the HBX-800 BIS I/F Unit, BIS data can be monitored.
NOTE
 When using more than one HM-801, only one AUX connector on the HM-801 can be used
for measurement of CO2, BIS (with HBX-800).
 When the BIS data is measured on both the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801, the
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

1 Select the appropriate sensor for the patient.

2 Connect the HBX-800 to the AUX connector on one of the following equipments, and connect the BISx to the
serial communication connector on the HBX-800.
*HS-8000 Super Unit
*DS-8007
*HM-801

3 Attach the BIS sensor to the patient.

4 When the system detects the sensor, "Sensor Check" window will be displayed, and impedance for all the
electrodes will be automatically measured.

REFERENCE
 Pressing the [Sensor Check] key will also start the sensor check process.

The measured results will be displayed on the "Sensor Check" window.

In this display, the impedance value for each electrode, in kilo ohms, appears on the screen along with its
status.

7-99
Chapter 7 Monitoring BIS Data (BISx)

 <PASS>: An electrode passes if the impedance for that electrode is less than 7.5 kilo ohms, and the
ground electrode (electrode #2) is less than 30 kilo ohms.
 <HIGH>: The impedance value is above 7.5 kilo ohms.
As long as the combined impedance of electrodes #1 and #3 and the combined impedance of
electrodes #1 and #4 are less than 15 kilo ohms, and the ground electrode is less than 30 kilo ohms, the
sensor check will be considered successful.
 <LEAD OFF>: The electrode is detached from the patient.
 <NOISE>: The signal from the electrode is outside the measurable range.

NOTE
 During the sensor check process, EEG waveform will become unstable.

5 If the impedance for all the electrodes are within variable range, <Sensor Check Passed> will be displayed on
the "Sensor Check" window.

6 Press the key on the "Sensor Check" window to end the sensor check process.

BIS measurement will automatically start when the "Sensor Check" window is closed.

NOTE
 If the "Sensor Check" window is closed before <Sensor Check Passed> is displayed,
<BIS Perform "Sensor Check"> will be displayed. Press the [Sensor Check] key and start
the sensor check again.

BIS Setup

Press the [Menu], [BIS] keys to display the "BIS" setup screen.

2
1
5
3
6
4

1 Scale

Select the EEG waveform scale from [±25]/[±50]/[±100]/[±250].

2 Alarm

Select ON/OFF of BIS alarm and set the alarm limits.

3 Short Trend 2nd Parameter

Select the second parameter for short trend from [SR]/[EMG]/[SQI].

Selecting [OFF] will not display the second parameter for short trend.

7-100
Chapter 7 Monitoring BIS Data (BISx)

4 Continuous Impedance Check

Select whether or not to perform continuous impedance check.

If [ON] is selected, the check process will continue until it passes.
Select [OFF] if it affects other measurements.

CAUTION
 The conductive parts of sensors and connectors should not contact other conductive
parts, including earth.
 To reduce the hazard of burns in the high-frequency surgical neutral electrode
connection, the BIS sensor should not be located between the surgical site and the
electrosurgical unit return electrode.
 The BIS sensor must not be located between defibrillator pads when a defibrillator is used
on a patient connected to the patient monitor.
 Continuous impedance checking may need to be disabled if the 1 nA, 128 Hz impedance
check signal interferes with other device (e.g., evoked potential monitors).
 Considerations when using Electro-Convulsive Therapy (ECT) device during BIS
monitoring: Place ECT electrodes as far as possible from the BIS sensor to minimize the
effect of interference. Certain ECT device may interfere with the proper function of the
BIS monitoring system.

NOTE
 During the continuous impedance check, the following impedance will be measured.
 A) Combined Impedance of Signal Electrode and Reference Electrode
This check process will not affect the EEG waveform. If the impedance value is within
the allowable range, the check result will not be notified.
 B) Impedance of Ground Electrode
This check process will be performed every 10 minutes. During this process, <Ground
Check in Progress> will be displayed, as artifact interferes to the EEG waveform.

5 Smoothing Rate

Select from [10 sec.] / [15 sec.]/ [30 sec.].

6 EEG Filter

Select from [ON]/[OFF].

7-101
Chapter 7 Monitoring BIS Data (A-2000/A-3000)

BIS Data (A-2000/A-3000)

This section explains about the BIS setup procedure when

using the A-2000 BIS Monitor or A-3000 BIS Vista
(Medtronic).
On the BIS setup screen, the second parameter to be
displayed on the short trend can be selected.
The first parameter is fixed to BIS value.

Press the [Menu], [BIS] ("Parameter") keys to display the BIS setup screen.

1
2

1 Short Trend 2nd Parameter

Select the second parameter for short trend from [SR]/[EMG]/[SQI].

Selecting [OFF] will not display the second parameter.

2 Trend E

Trend E screen will be displayed.

Ventilator

By connecting a ventilator, numeric data and waveform measured by the ventilator can be displayed on the DS-8400
System.

( Maintenance Manual "Ventilator Connection" P4-3)
By assigning [P-V/F-V] to numeric data box, P-V (pressure-volume) loop/F-V (flow-volume) loop can be also
displayed.

This section explains about the AWP/AWF/AWV scale setup procedure and P-V/F-V screen operation.

7-102
Chapter 7 Monitoring Ventilator

AWP/AWF/AWV Scale Setup

Press the [Menu], [Ext. Device], ("Parameter"), [VENT] key to display the "VENT" screen.
The ventilator measurement will be displayed, and AWF / AWP / AWV / P-V, F-V scale can be set.

1 3
2 4
5

REFERENCE
 The scale setup window can be also displayed by pressing the scale on the waveform
display area or [Scale] on the user key.

1 Press the key for "AWF Scale", and set the AWF scale.

2 Press the key for "AWP Scale", and set the AWP scale.

3 Press the key for "AWV Scale", and set the AWV (Airway Volume) waveform scale.

4 Press the key for "P-V, F-V Scale", and set the P-V (Pressure-
Volume) scale.

Pressure: Select from [10]/[20]/[30]/[50]/[120] (cmH2O).

Volume: Select from [250]/[500]/[750]/[1000] (mL).

5 Press the key for "P-V, F-V Scale", and set the F-V (Flow-
Volume) scale.

Flow: Select from [±20]/ [±50]/ [±180] (L/min) .

Volume: Select from [250]/[500]/[750]/[1000] (mL).

7-103
Chapter 7 Monitoring Ventilator

P-V/F-V Loop Display

The ventilator data can be displayed in P-V/F-V loop for review.

CAUTION
 For PURITAN-BENNETT ventilator, P-V loop and F-V loop cannot be displayed or printed.

1 Press the P-V/F-V numeric data box.

The P-V/F-V review screen will be displayed.

4
2
3

P-V (pressure-volume) loop/F-V (flow-volume) loop is sampled each 60ms and displayed for each
respiration. The beginning of the loop is displayed in cyan, and the rest of the loop is displayed in white.

For the P-V loop, the horizontal axis shows AWP (unit: cmH2O), and vertical axis shows volume (unit: mL).
For the F-V loop, the horizontal axis shows volume (unit: mL), and vertical axis shows AWF (unit: L/min).

2 Press the [Scale] key to set the P-V/F-V scale.

Select the scale from the displayed scale selection window.

3 To stop the loop drawing, press the [Freeze] key.

The loop drawing will stop.

Press the [Freeze] key again to resume the waveform trace.

4 A control loop can be registered to see the change in P-V/F-V loop.

 Press the [Regist] key to store the displayed P-V/F-V loop as a control loop.
 Press the [Review] key to display the registered control loop.
The control loop 1 will be displayed in yellow, and control loop 2 will be displayed in green.

7-104
Chapter 7 Monitoring FLOW-i Data

FLOW-i Data

The FLOW-i can be connected to the serial port, status port of the DS-8400 System or to the HP-800.

( Maintenance Manual "Connection with the FLOW-i" P4-14)
When the FLOW-i is connected, monitoring conditions for CO2 concentration, anesthetic gas concentration, O2
concentration, N2O concentration, and respiration can be set.

WARNING
 When the numeric data acquired from FLOW-i is displayed, the following alarms cannot be
set. Also, these alarms will not generate.
InspCO2/EtCO2, InspO2/ExpO2, InspN2O/ExpN2O, InspAgent/ExpAgent, MAC, ExpMV,
PEAK, PEEP

CAUTION
 The FLOW-i and MGU-800/MGU-810 cannot be used simultaneously.
 The FLOW-i and ventilator cannot be used simultaneously.

CO2 Measurement Unit Setup

NOTE
 The CO2 measurement unit is not linked between the FLOW-i and this device.
 When the FLOW-i is connected, CO2 alarm cannot be set. Also, the alarm will not generate.

1 Press the [Menu], [Initial Settings], [Meas.], [Unit] keys.

The "Unit" menu will be displayed.

2 Press the [mmHg]/[kPa]/[%] key.

The data of currently set measurement unit will be displayed on the graphic/tabular trend.

7-105
Chapter 7 Monitoring FLOW-i Data

FLOW-i Setup

1 Press the [Menu], [Anes.] "Parameter" keys.

The anesthesia setup menu will be displayed.

2 3
5 5
6

FLOW-i_CO2 Setup FLOW-i_O2 Setup

5 4
5

FLOW-i_N2O Setup FLOW-i_AGT Setup

FLOW-i_MAC Setup FLOW-i_RESP Setup

FLOW-i_VENT Setup

2 Set the CO2 waveform scale.

7-106
Chapter 7 Monitoring FLOW-i Data

Select from [0-50]/[0-100] if the measurement unit is mmHg, and from [0-4]/[0-8]/[0-10] if the unit is kPa or %.

3 Set the O2 waveform scale.

Select from [18-30]/[18-60]/[18-100]/[0-30]/[0-60]/[0-100].

4 Set the scale for anesthetic gas concentration.

Select from [0-4]/[0-8]/[0-16].

5 Set the "Wave Clip".

If the gas waveform amplitude exceeds the waveform display area, whether or not to clip the exceeded part
can be selected.

[ON]: The exceeded part of the waveform will be displayed in straight line at the upper or lower scale limit.
[OFF]: The whole part of the waveform will be displayed even if it exceeds the scale. However, the exceeded
part may not be displayed depending on the sweep speed of the waveform displayed above or below the
gas waveform.

6 Set the "CO2 Source Priority".

When the FLOW-i and HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2 source to prioritize the
measurement can be set.

[Anesthesia]: CO2 value measured by the FLOW-i will be prioritized.

[HS-8000]: CO2 value measured by the HS-8000/DS-8007/HM-801 will be prioritized.

NOTE
 When the HS-8000/DS-8007 and HM-801 are simultaneously used, the CO2
measurement of the HS-8000/DS-8007 will be prioritized.

7 Set the RR/APNEA alarm.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-11)
NOTE
 Only the RR/APNEA alarm can be set. The following alarms cannot be set. Also, these
alarms will not generate.
InspCO2/EtCO2, InspO2/ExpO2, InspN2O/ExpN2O, InspAgent/ExpAgent, MAC, ExpMV,
PEAK, PEEP

NOTE
 Set the upper limit of RR alarm in the range of 10 Bpm to 60 Bpm. If a value above 150
Bpm is set, the upper alarm will turn OFF.
Set the upper limit of apnea alarm in the range of 10 sec. to 60 sec. If a value above 60
sec. is set, the upper alarm will turn OFF.
 Set the lower limit of RR alarm in the range of 5 Bpm to 145 Bpm. If a value below 5 Bpm
is set, the lower alarm will turn OFF.

REFERENCE
 The adjustable increment for RR alarm depends on the patient classification and "RR
Alarm Increment" setting. (Initial Settings>User I/F).

Alarm Increment (Initial Settings > User I/F)

Normal Small

7-107
Chapter 7 Monitoring FLOW-i Data

Adult 5 Bpm increment 1 Bpm increment

Child/Neonate 2 Bpm increment 1 Bpm increment

 The apnea alarm can be set in 1 second increment.

8 Set the respiration waveform scale.

MAC Display
The MAC value can be displayed in the numeric data display area.
NOTE
 The MAC value will be displayed only if [ON] is set for "MAC Value". Perform the setting if
necessary.

1 Press the [Menu], [GAS] "Parameter", [MAC] keys.

The MAC value setup screen will be displayed.

2 Select ON/OFF for "MAC Value".

[ON]: The MAC value will be displayed in the numeric data display area.
[OFF]: The MAC value will not be displayed in the numeric data display area.

Ventilator Data Display and Setup

By connecting the FLOW-i, the numeric data and
waveform measured by the ventilator can be displayed.
By assigning [P-V/F-V] to numeric data box, P-V
(pressure-volume) loop/F-V (flow-volume) loop can be
also displayed.

This section explains about the AWP/AWF/AWV scale

setup procedure and P-V/F-V screen operation.

Press the [Menu], [Anes.], ("Parameter"), [VENT] key to

display the ventilator screen.

7-108
Chapter 7 Monitoring FLOW-i Data

The ventilator measurement will be displayed, and AWF / AWP / AWV / P-V, F-V scale can be set.

3
1 4
2 5

REFERENCE
 The scale setup window can be also displayed by pressing the scale on the waveform
display area or [Scale] on the user key.

1 Set the AWF scale.

1 Press the key for "AWF Scale".

The scale selection for AWF (airway flow) waveform will be
displayed.

2 Select from [±5]/ [±10]/ [±20]/ [±50]/ [±180] (L/min).

2 AWP Scale

1 Press the key for "AWP Scale".

The scale selection for AWP (airway pressure) waveform will
be displayed.

2 Select from [10]/[20]/[30]/[50]/[120] (cmH2O).

3 AWV Scale

1 Press the key for "AWV Scale".

The scale selection for AWV (airway volume) waveform will be
displayed.

2 Select from [50]/[250]/[500]/[1000]/[3000] (mL).

4 Set the P-V Scale.

1 Press the key for "P-V, F-V Scale".

The scale selection for P-V (pressure-volume) loop will be
displayed.

2 Pressure: Select from [10]/[20]/[30]/[50]/[120] (cmH2O).

3 Volume: Select from [250]/[500]/[750]/[1000] (mL).

5 Set the F-V Scale.

1 Press the key for "P-V, F-V Scale".

The scale selection for F-V (flow-volume) loop will be displayed.
2 Flow: Select from [±20]/ [±50]/ [±180] (L/min) .
3 Volume: Select from [250]/[500]/[750]/[1000] (mL).

7-109
Chapter 7 Monitoring FLOW-i Data

P-V/F-V Loop Review

The ventilator data of the FLOW-i can be reviewed in P-V/F-V loop display.

1 Press the P-V/F-V numeric data box on the home display.

The P-V/F-V review screen will be displayed.

4
2
3

P-V (pressure-volume) loop/F-V (flow-volume) loop is sampled each 60ms and displayed for each
respiration. The beginning of the loop is displayed in cyan, and the rest of the loop is displayed in white.

For the P-V loop, the horizontal axis shows AWP (unit: cmH2O), and vertical axis shows volume (unit: mL).
For the F-V loop, the horizontal axis shows volume (unit: mL), and vertical axis shows AWF (unit: L/min).

2 Press the [Scale] key to set the P-V/F-V scale.

Select the scale from the displayed scale selection window.

3 To stop the loop drawing, press the [Freeze] key.

The loop drawing will stop.

Press the [Freeze] key again to resume the waveform trace.

4 A control loop can be registered to see the change in P-V/F-V loop.

 Press the [Regist] key to store the displayed P-V/F-V loop as a control loop.
 Press the [Review] key to display the registered control loop.
The control loop 1 will be displayed in yellow, and control loop 2 will be displayed in green.

7-110
Chapter 7 Monitoring SvO2/CCO Data

SvO2/CCO Data

The DS-8400 System can display the monitoring data of oximeter/CCO measurement device, Vigilance, Vigilance
CEDV, Vigilance II, Vigileo, EV-100, HemoSphere (Edwards Lifescience) or the hemodynamic monitoring device,
PiCCO2, PulsioFlex (PULSION Medical Systems).

( Maintenance Manual "SvO2/CCO Monitor Connection" P4-7)
On the SvO2/CCO data screen, the displayed numeric data can be switched.

Display Example for ICO Mode

STAT Mode: When the Vigilance is in CCO mode, STAT mode display can be set ON or OFF.
Index Display: When the Vigilance is in CCO mode, Index Display can be set ON or OFF.

When the Vigilance is in ICO mode, the 6 latest data of ICO (Intermittent Cardiac Output) and ICI (Intermittent
Cardiac Index) will be displayed.

STAT Mode / Index Display

1 Press the [Menu], [Ext. Device] ("Parameter") keys.

The Vigilance screen will be displayed.

NOTE
 STAT Mode: When Vigilance is in CCO mode, STAT mode display can be set ON or OFF.
 Index Display: When Vigilance is in CCO mode, Index display can be set ON or OFF.
 When the Vigilance is in ICO mode, the 6 latest data of ICO (Intermittent Cardiac Output)
and ICI (Intermittent Cardiac Index) will be displayed.

2 Select [ON]/[OFF] for "STAT Mode" and "Index Display".

STAT Mode [OFF], Index Display [OFF]: SvO2 (or ScvO2) , CCO, EDV, BT will be displayed inside the
SvO2+CO numeric data box.

7-111
Chapter 7 Monitoring INVOS Data

STAT Mode [OFF], Index Display [ON]: CCI and EDVI will be displayed instead of CCO and EDV.

STAT Mode [ON], Index Display [OFF]: CCO_STAT and EDV_STAT will be displayed instead of CCO and
EDV.

STAT Mode [ON], Index Display [ON]: CCI_STAT and EDVI_STAT will be displayed instead of CCO and
EDV.

NOTE
 ON/OFF of STAT mode can be changed only when Vigilance is connected.

INVOS Data

By connecting the INVOS 5100C Cerebral Oximeter

(Medtronic), regional cerebral oxygen saturation (rSO2) can
be monitored non-invasively on the DS-8400 System.

( Maintenance Manual "Connecting to the INVOS" P4-
13)
On the INVOS screen (shown on right), the channel can be
changed for each INVOS data.
Lt-rSO2/Rt-rSO2 data of the selected channel will be
displayed inside the INVOS numeric data box.

Channel Number Setup for INVOS Data

In the INVOS numeric data box, measurement data of Lt-rSO2/Rt-rSO2 will be displayed.
On the INVOS screen, the channel for Lt-rSO2/Rt-rSO2 data can be selected.

1 Press the [Menu], [Ext. Device] ("Parameter"), [INVOS] keys.

The INVOS screen will be displayed.

2 Press the [ch*] key for the INVOS label ("Lt-rSO2" / "Rt-rSO2" / "S1-rSO2" / "S2-rSO2") to set the channel.

The dropdown list will be displayed.

3 Select the channel from [ch1]/[ch2]/[ch3]/[ch4].

7-112
Chapter 7 Monitoring Stopwatch

Stopwatch

The stopwatch function can be used by setting the [Stopwatch] key on the numeric data box or on the user key.

1 Press the [Stopwatch] key on the numeric data box or on the user key.

The "Stopwatch" window will be displayed.

Label Setup

1 Press the [Label] key on the "Stopwatch" window.

The stopwatch label setup window will be displayed.

2 Enter 8 characters using alphanumeric keypad.

Start/Stop

1 Press the [Start]/[Stop]/[Reset] key on the "Stopwatch" window.

[Start]: The stopwatch will start.

[Stop]: The stopwatch will suspend/resume.
[Reset]: The stopwatch will reset to "00:00:00". If pressed during stopwatch operation, counting will resume
from "00:00:00".

NOTE
 If the discharge procedure is performed during stopwatch operation, the counting will
stop and will be reset to "00:00:00" .
 The stopwatch counting will continue even when the monitoring is suspended.

7-113
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multiparameter Connector Setup for BP, TEMP, CO Measurement

Multiparameter Connector Setup for BP, TEMP, CO Measurement

On the Super Unit and Multi Module, multiparameter connectors are provided. The quantity of multiparameter
connectors are as follows.
Multiparameter Connectors Super Unit Multiparameter Connectors Super Unit

3 ports 2 ports

TEMPx6 (maximum) HS-8312N, HS-8312M TEMPx6 (maximum)* DS-8007N, DS-8007M

BPx6 (maximum) BPx4 (maximum)
COx1 (maximum) COx1 (maximum)

Multiparameter Connectors Multi Module Multiparameter Connectors Multi Module

2 ports 1 ports

TEMPx4 (maximum) HM-800 TEMPx2 (maximum) HM-801

BPx4 (maximum) BPx2 (maximum)
COx1 (maximum) COx1 (maximum)

*: TEMPx2 are fixed jacks.

By using the multiparameter connector, any combination of BP, TEMP and CO measurement can be performed
according to the monitoring purpose.
By using the 2ch TEMP relay cable, 2ch BP relay cable, or 2ch BP conversion cable, 2 channels of temperature and
BP can be monitored through one multiparameter connector.
By using the Multi Module with the Input Box, up to 8 channels of BP, 8 channels of TEMP and 1 channel of CO
can be measured.
The multiparameter connector setup can be performed on the "Initial Settings" menu.

( Maintenance Manual "Unit Module Setup" P4-19)

For HS-8312N, HS-8312M

Combination of BP, TEMP, CO Channels

3 Ports Blood Pressure Temperature CO
Blood Pressure
6ch
Blood Pressure - -
(3ch)
Blood Pressure

Blood Pressure
4ch
Blood Pressure 2ch -
(2ch)
Temperature
Blood Pressure
2ch
Temperature 4ch -
(1ch)
Temperature

Temperature

Temperature - 6ch -

Temperature
Blood Pressure
2ch
Temperature 2ch 1ch
(1ch)
CO
Blood Pressure
4ch
Blood Pressure - 1ch
(2ch)
CO

7-114
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multiparameter Connector Setup for BP, TEMP, CO Measurement

Combination of BP, TEMP, CO Channels

3 Ports Blood Pressure Temperature CO

Temperature

Temperature - 4ch 1ch

CO

The numbers in parenthesis shows the channels when using the 1ch BP conversion cable.

For DS-8007N, DS-8007M

Combination of BP, TEMP, CO Channels

2 Ports Blood Pressure Temperature CO

Blood Pressure 4ch

- -
Blood Pressure (2ch)

Blood Pressure 2ch

2ch -
Temperature (1ch)

Temperature
- 4ch -
Temperature

Blood Pressure 2ch

- 1ch
CO (1ch)

Temperature
- 2ch 1ch
CO

The numbers in parenthesis shows the channels when using the 1ch BP conversion cable.

On the DS-8007, there are 2 temperature connectors in addition to the multiparameter connectors.

7-115
Chapter 7 Monitoring Multiparameter Connector Setup

Multiparameter Connector Setup

It is necessary to manually set the measuring parameter for each multiparameter connector.

Example:
To assign BP5 to multiparameter connector 1 for the HM-800 Multi Module inserted to the built-in slot:
1

1 Press the [Menu], [Initial Settings], [System], [Unit Module], [Multiamplifier] keys.

2 Select the multiparameter connector location. The selected location will be displayed in blue.

3 Assign the parameter to the selected location. In this case, select [5] for "BP".
The parameter will be assigned to the selected connector.

CAUTION
 The same parameter cannot be set to more than one connectors.
 By setting [OFF] for the unused connector, the parameter will become selectable on another
connector.
 If the parameter assigned to the multiparameter connector and the connected relay cable
does not match, the connector location will be displayed in red and the connected relay
cable type will be displayed.

NOTE
 The temperature measured on the temperature connectors on the DS-8007 are fixed as T1,
T2.

7-116
Chapter 8 Review Function Common Operation

Chapter 8 Review Function

Common Operation

The common operations for all the review screens are explained below.

1 Time Bar

Changing the time span, scrolling the time, displaying the latest data can be performed.

1 2 3 4 2 1 5

1 The display can be switched in 24 hours interval.

2 Pressing the / key will move the cursor to the alarm generated time.
3 The time zone for the whole data is shown. indicates the alarm occurrence point.
The lower row shows the time zone for the displayed data.
Pressing the time bar will display the data at pressed time.
4 Indicates the displayed time range with the bar length.
Dragging the slider to the right will display newer data, and dragging it to the left will display older data.
5 Pressing the will display the latest data.
6 Pressing the / will switch the display by page.
7 Pressing the / will switch the display by 1 data/block each.

2 Displays other review data at the same time.

With the displayed date/time, the review data display can be switched.
Other review data (graphic/tabular trend) can be displayed without moving the current cursor time.

8-1
Chapter 8 Review Function Arrhythmia Analysis

Arrhythmia Analysis

This section explains about the arrhythmia analysis.

Arrhythmia Definition

QRS
Learn Judgment Pattern Matching
Waveform Arrhythmia
VPC? VPC!

The arrhythmia detection is performed by learning the normal waveform of the patient, and determines the VPC by
comparing the waveform (QRS pattern) and R-R interval for each heartbeat.
The parameters such as QRS amplitude, QRS width, QRS polarity, RR interval are compared with the normal
waveform to extract the abnormal QRS.
Then, the QRS with suspected VPC is pattern matched. The noise and VPC are distinguished to determine the VPC,
and generates the arrhythmia alarm.

WARNING
 Objective and constant arrhythmia detection is possible through the fixed algorithm
incorporated in this unit.
However, excessive waveform morphology change, motion artifact, or the inability to
determine the waveform pattern may cause an error, or fail to make adequate detection.
Therefore, physicians should make final decisions by closely checking the data obtained by
printing and recall waveform.

CAUTION
 For stable arrhythmia detection and ECG monitoring, verify proper electrode placement,
lead, waveform size, and filter mode selection. If not properly selected, it may cause
erroneous detection.Waveform Size: ECG

QRS Classification
Each QRS will be classified to the following pattern.
N (Normal) Normal QRS beat

V (VPC) Ventricular extrasystole

P (Pacing Beat) Pacing beat

F (Fusion Beat) Fusion beat of pacing and spontaneous beat

S (SVPC) Supraventricular extrasystole

? (Undetermined Beat) Learning arrhythmia, or unmatched beat

8-2
Chapter 8 Review Function Arrhythmia Analysis

Arrhythmia Type
With the QRS judgment, the following types of arrhythmia alarm will be generated.
Arrhythmia Description Detection Criteria

ON, OFF Cardiac arrest is detected for more than preprogrammed

Asystole
3 sec. to 10 sec., 1 sec. increments time.
VF ON, OFF A random, rapid electrical activity of the heart is detected.

VT (Ventricular 9 or more continuous VPC beats are detected.*1

ON, OFF
Tachycardia)
Slow VT ON, OFF 9 or more continuous VPC beats are detected.*2

Run (Consecutive VPC) ON, OFF Continuous VPC exceeding the preprogrammed value (2
2 beats to 8 beats, 1 beat increments beats to 8 beats) is detected.*3
Couplet (Couplet VPC) ON, OFF 2 continuous VPC beats are detected.

ON, OFF Cardiac arrest exceeding the preprogrammed duration is

Pause
1.5 sec. to 5.0 sec., 0.5 sec. increments detected.
Bigeminy (Ventricular
ON, OFF QRS pattern of V-x-V-x-V-x is detected.*4
Bigeminy)

Trigeminy ON, OFF QRS pattern of x-x-V-x-x-V is detected.*4

Frequent (Frequent VPC) ON, OFF VPC exceeding the preprogrammed value is detected within
1 bpm to 50 bpm, 1 beat increments 1 minute.

Tachy(Tachycardia) ON, OFF The upper HR alarm limit is exceeded.

Brady (Bradycardia) ON, OFF The lower HR alarm limit is exceeded.

Ext Tachy (Extreme ON, OFF The upper alarm limit of extreme tachycardia is exceeded.
Tachycardia) 22 bpm to 300 bpm,
22 bpm to 60 bpm, 1 beat increments
60 bpm to 300 bpm, 5 beat increments

Ext Brady (Extreme ON, OFF The lower alarm limit of extreme bradycardia is exceeded.
Bradycardia) 20 bpm to 295bpm
20 bpm to 60 bpm, 1 beat increments
60 bpm to 295 bpm, 5 beat increments

R on T (R on T VPC) ON, OFF VPC is detected within the preprogrammed RR interval (200
200 ms to 600 ms, 8 ms increments ms to 600 ms).

Multiform (Multiform ON, OFF 2 different forms of VPC beats are detected within 4
VPC) minutes.

Vent Rhythm (Ventricular ON, OFF Continuous VPC beats with HR below the set value for "HR
Rhythm) Lower Limit for Run" (0 bpm to 100 bpm), and same or
above value of the set beats for Run (2 beats to 8 beats) are
detected.

SVT (Supraventricular ON, OFF Continuous SVPC exceeding the preprogrammed value (2
Tachycardia) 2 beats to 10 beats, 1 beat increments beats to 10 beats) is detected.

Irregular RR (Irregular ON, OFF RR interval variability exceeding the preprogrammed value
RR Interval) 10% to 20%, 5% increments (10% to 20%) is detected.

Prolonged RR ON, OFF RR interval of 1.75 times longer than the normal RR interval
(Prolonged RR Interval) is detected.

Pacer Not Capture (Non- ON, OFF HR is not detected from the pacing pulse within the set
Capture) 80 ms to 480 ms, 8 ms increments duration.

Pacer Not Pacing ON, OFF Pacing pulse and HR are not detected during the set instant
(Oversensing) 20 bpm to 200 bpm, HR.
20 bpm to 150 bpm, 5 beat increments
150 bpm to 200 bpm, 10 beat
increments

Triplet (Triplet VPC) ON, OFF 3 continuous VPC beats are detected.

S Frequent (Frequent ON, OFF SVPC exceeding the preprogrammed value is detected
SVPC) 1 bpm to 50 bpm, 1 beat increments within 1 minute.

8-3
Chapter 8 Review Function Arrhythmia Analysis

S Couplet (Couplet ON, OFF 2 continuous SVPC beats are detected.

SVPC)

VPC (Ventricular ON, OFF VPC is detected.

Extrasystole)

SVPC (Supraventricular ON, OFF SVPC is detected.

Extrasystole)

*1: HR of 140 bpm/120 bpm and above

*2: HR of 100 bpm to 140 bpm or 100 bpm to 120 bpm

*3: HR of same or above the set value of "HR Lower Limit for RUN" (0 bpm to 100 bpm)

*4: x indicates N, P, F, ?.

Arrhythmia Alarm Setup

Arrhythmia alarm setup procedure is explained below.

ON/OFF of arrhythmia alarm and arrhythmia detection level can be set.
When the measured value exceeds the set arrhythmia detection level, arrhythmia alarm will generate.

Arrhythmia Detection Level Setting

Item Description Item Description

Asystole 3 sec. to 10 sec. R on T 200 ms to 600 ms

Run 2 beats to 8 beats SVT 2 beats to 10 beats

Pause 1.5 sec. to 5 sec. Irregular RR 10, 15, 20%

Frequent 1 bpm to 50 bpm/ min. S Frequent 1 beats to 50 beats

Ext Tachy 22 beats to 300 beats Pacer Not Capture 80 ms to 480 ms

Ext Brady 20 beats to 295 beats Pacer Not Pacing 20 bpm to 200 bpm

1 Press the [Menu], [Arrhy.] ("Alarm") key.

The arrhythmia alarm setup screen will be

displayed.

2 Set the detection level.

Set using the dropdown list, numeric keys, or
displayed key selection.

3 Select ON/OFF for the alarm.

[ON]: Alarm will generate.

[OFF]: Alarm will not generate.

NOTE
 If the patient classification is "Adult" or "Child", Asystole, VF, VT alarm cannot be turned OFF
unless [ON/OFF] is selected for "Asystole, VF, VT Alarm" under "Initial Settings".
 If the patient classification is "Neonate", VF, VT can be turned OFF regardless of the setting
for "Asystole, VF, VT Alarm" under "Initial Settings".

8-4
Chapter 8 Review Function Arrhythmia Analysis

Arrhythmia Alarm Detail Setup

On the "Detail Setup" of arrhythmia alarm, HR Lower Limit for VT, RUN, and SVT can be set .

1 Press the [Menu], [Arrhy.] ("Alarm"), [Detail Setup] key.

2
The "Detail Setup" window for arrhythmia alarm will be
displayed. 3
2 Set the "HR Lower Limit for VT". 4
Set the VT analyzing condition for the arrhythmia analysis.
VT alarm will generate if the HR is same or above the set
value (120 bpm/140 bpm). Slow_VT alarm will generate
when the HR is below the set value.

Select from [120] or [140] (bpm).

3 Set the "HR Lower Limit for Run".

Set the Run analyzing condition for the arrhythmia analysis. Run alarm will generate if the HR is same or
above the set value.

Press the / keys for "HR Lower Limit for Run" to set the HR in the range from 0 bpm to 100 bpm.

4 Set the "HR Lower Limit for SVT".

Set the SVT analyzing condition for the arrhythmia analysis. SVT alarm will generate if the HR is same or
above the set value.

Press the / keys for "HR Lower Limit for SVT" to set the HR in the range from 100 bpm to 250 bpm.

Arrhythmia Learn

Learning the normal ECG largely affects the accuracy of arrhythmia analysis.
If any error occurs in arrhythmia detection and QRS judgment, performing arrhythmia learning will recover the
original analyzing accuracy.
Arrhythmia learning will be performed for about 20 beats for the normal ECG, but it may take longer if the heartbeat
is unstable.
During arrhythmia learning, arrhythmia alarm other than Asystole, VF, Tachy, Brady, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady will not
generate.

1 Press the [Menu], [ECG] "Parameter" keys.

Or, press the HR numeric data box , and press .

The ECG setup screen will be displayed.

8-5
Chapter 8 Review Function Graphic Trend

2 Press the [Learn] key while displayed in gray.

The key will change to blue.

Arrhythmia learning will start.
During arrhythmia learning, a message will be
displayed.

NOTE
 If [Used] is selected for "Pacemaker", the [Learn] key will not change to blue and
<LEARN> will not be displayed, but the learning process will be performed.
 Pressing the key while arrhythmia learning is in process will not stop the process.

Graphic Trend

This section explains the graphic trend function and printing procedure.
If the numeric data is displayed on the home display, 24 of data will be automatically stored and displayed as trend
data.

Graphic Trend Setup

1 Press the [Menu], [Trend] ("Data Review") keys.

Or, press the [Graphic Trend] key on the user key area.

The graphic trend will be displayed.

2 2
5
3 6
4 7
8
2 graphs are displayed on each page, and graphic trend of 4 parameters can be displayed simultaneously
on each graph.

2 Changing the time span, scrolling the time, displaying the latest data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
3 Set the parameter, display type, scale.

1 Press the scale area for each parameter, and display the scale selection window.

8-6
Chapter 8 Review Function Graphic Trend

2 Press the key for "Parameter Selection", and select the parameter.

NOTE
 The selected parameter will be also registered for the trend group.
 The APNEA duration will be stored when it exceeds the upper alarm threshold level.
If lower than the alarm threshold level, it will be stored as "0 (zero)".

3 Select the scale.

4 Press the key for "Display Selection", and select the display type.

4 Move the cursor.

1 Pressing the center part of will display the trend data at the cursor position.
2 The cursor will move to left and right by dragging.
3 Press / to adjust the cursor position.
The data display at cursor position will be automatically erased after fixed duration.
4 Press to display the 10-minute trend data before and after the cursor position.
5 Press to return the display to the previous time range.

5 Set the display range.

REFERENCE
 The displayed data is compressed as follows depending on the display interval.
VPC: Maximum value within the display interval
APNEA: Maximum value within the display interval
Other than above: Latest value within the display interval
For example, if the 24-hour trend for the parameter with minimum resolution of 1 minute
is displayed, one mark will be displayed for the 12-minute (720-second) data.
 If the display resolution is higher than the minimum resolution of the data, the same data
is repeated to match the display resolution.
Refer to the following table for resolution. The data resolution differs according to the
parameter.

Display Resolution
Minimum Resolution

Time Span Line Display Mark Display (Mark: Small)

10 sec. Sample 30 sec. Sample 10 sec. Sample 30 sec. Sample

10 min. 10 sec. 30 sec. 10 sec. 30 sec.

1 hours 10 sec. 30 sec. 30 sec. 30 sec.

2 hours 10 sec. 30 sec. 60 sec. 60 sec.

4 hours 20 sec. 60 sec. 120 sec. 120 sec.

8 hours 40 sec. 120 sec. 240 sec. 240 sec.

8-7
Chapter 8 Review Function Graphic Trend
Display Resolution
Minimum Resolution

Time Span Line Display Mark Display (Mark: Small)

10 sec. Sample 30 sec. Sample 10 sec. Sample 30 sec. Sample

12 hours 60 sec. 120 sec. 360 sec. 360 sec.

16 hours 80 sec. 240 sec. 480 sec. 480 sec.

24 hours 120 sec. 240 sec. 720 sec. 720 sec.

Data Resolution
Minimum
Parameter
Resolution

10 sec. HR, ST, SpO2, PR_SpO2, BP1, BP2

30 sec. Other than above (Excluding NIBP*)

* Actual measured data will be displayed for NIBP.

6 Press the [Trend Group] key to change the trend

group.
Maximum of 5 groups with 8 parameters each can be
registered, and can be selected according to the
monitoring purpose.

1 Select the group.

2 To change the name of trend group, press the
[Change Name] key. (
P3-26)

"To Enter Characters"

7 Perform the setup for the graphic trend display.

3
1 Time Bar 1 4
Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/[12h]/
[16h]/[20h]/[24h]/[36h]/[48h]. 2

2 Alarm Display Selection

Select the alarm display status.
If the alarm for the selected arrhythmia, parameter is
generated during the displayed time range, it will be indicated
in red at the alarm status display area.
[Trend Parameters]: The displayed trend parameters will be selected.
[Select All]: All parameters including arrhythmia will be selected.
[Cancel All]: All selections will be canceled.
[Select All Arrhythmia]: All arrhythmia will be selected.
Each parameter key: Each time the key is pressed, selected/unselected status will change.
3 Background Color
Select the background color of the graphic trend from [White]/[Black]/[Gray].
4 Mark
Select the mark size on the graphic trend from [Small]/[Big].

8 Press [Print].

To print the trend data, press the [Print] key, select the parameter, and press the [Enter] key.
8-8
Chapter 8 Review Function Graphic Trend

Description for Each Parameter

Numeric Data Description Scale Unit

HR HR 100, 200, 300 bpm

VPC VPC Counts 20, 50, 100 -

ST (I, II, III, aVR, aVL, ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1.0, ±2.0 mV

ST Level
aVF, V1 to V6) ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20 mm

SpO 2-1, SpO2-2 SpO2 Value 0 to 100, 50 to 100, 80 to 100 %SpO2

PR_SpO2-1,
SpO2 Pulse Rate 100, 200, 300 bpm
PR_SpO2-2

RR_SpO2 SpO2 Respiration Rate 50, 100, 150 Bpm

100, 150, 200, 300 mmHg

NIBP NIBP Value (SYS / DIA)
16, 20, 24, 40 kPa

20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 mmHg

BP1~8 Blood Pressure (Systolic / Mean / Diastolic) 4, 8, 16, 20, 24, 40 kPa

20, 40 cmH2O
20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 mmHg
PDP Peak Diastolic Pressure of IABP
4, 8, 16, 20, 24, 40 kPa

20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 mmHg

CPP Cerebral Perfusion Pressure
4, 8, 16, 20, 24, 40 kPa

20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 mmHg

PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure
4, 8, 16, 20, 24, 40 kPa

PR_IBP BP Pulse Rate 100, 200, 300 bpm

T1 to 8 Temperature 20.0 to 45.0, 30.0 to 40.0 °C

Tb Blood Temperature (Cardiac Output 20.0 to 45.0, 30.0 to 40.0 °C

Measurement)

ΔTEMP-A to D Temperature Difference ±10.0, ±25.0 °C

RR_IMP Impedance Respiration Rate 50, 100, 150 Bpm

Apnea Duration
Apnea 15, 30 s (second)
(Impedance, CO2, Ventilator)

50, 100 mmHg

EtCO2, InspCO2*1 Gas Unit CO2 Concentration
4, 8, 10 kPa, %
*1
ExpO2, InspO2 Gas Unit O2 Concentration 50, 100 %
*1
ExpN2O, InspN2O Gas Unit N2O Concentration 50, 100 %
RR_GAS*1 Gas Unit Respiration Rate 50, 100, 150 Bpm
*1
ΔO2 ΔO2 3, 6, 9 %
*1
ExpAGT, InspAGT Gas Unit Agent Concentration 4, 8, 10 %
MAC*1 Minimal Alveolar Concentration 5, 10 -

BIS Bispectral Index (BIS Monitor Measurement) 25, 50, 75, 100 -

SR Suppression Ratio (BIS Monitor 25, 50, 75, 100 %

Measurement)

EMG*1 Electromyography (BIS Monitor 30 to 80 dB

Measurement)
SQI Signal Quality Index (BIS Monitor 0 to 100 %
Measurement)

8-9
Chapter 8 Review Function Short Trend

Numeric Data Description Scale Unit

AEP Anesthetic Depth 0 to 100, 50 to 100, 80 to 100 -

*2
SvO2 Mixed Venous Oxygen Saturation 0 to 100, 50 to 100, 80 to 100 %
*2
ScvO2 Central Venous Oxygen Saturation 0 to 100, 50 to 100, 80 to 100 %
*2
CCO Continuous Cardiac Output 6, 12, 20 L/min
*1
CCI Continuous Cardiac Index 6, 12, 20 L/min/m2
BT*1 Blood Temperature (SvO2/CCO Monitor) 20 to 45, 30 to 40 °C

RR_VENT Ventilator Respiration Rate 50, 100, 150 Bpm

SpCO (1, 2) Carboxyhemoglobin Concentration 20, 40, 100 %SpCO

SpMet (1, 2) Methemoglobin Concentration 10, 15, 100 %SpMet

SpHb (1, 2) Total Hemoglobin Concentration 10 to 20, 0 to 25 g/dL

PI(1,2) Perfusion Index 10, 20 %

PI(1,2) Pleth Variability Index 30, 60, 100 %
*1 Expiratory Minute Ventilation Volume 6.0, 12.0, 20.0 L/min
ExpMV
*1
PEAK Peak Airway Pressure 10, 20, 50, 100 cmH2O

PEEP*1 Peak End Expiratory Pressure 10, 20, 50, 100 cmH2O
*2
Lt-rSO2

Rt-rSO2*2
Regional Cerebral Oxygen Saturation 20 to 100 %
S1-rSO2*2

S2-rSO2*2

*1: When an anesthesia delivery system (FLOW-i, GE, Draeger) is used, the measurement by the anesthesia delivery system will
be used.
*2: The external device parameters to be displayed on the graphic trend/tabular trend needs to be selected in advance on the
"Trend Data Setup" window ([Data Review>Graphic Trend or Tabular Trend] or [Initial Settings>External Device>Main Unit/HP-
800]).

NOTE
 The apnea duration will be stored when it exceeds the upper alarm threshold level. If lower
than the alarm threshold level, it will be stored as "0 (zero)".

Short Trend

The trend data can be displayed on the home display.

As the alarm occurrence point on the graph is displayed in
red, the alarm data of up to 3 hours (*) can be verified on
the home display.
(*: In case when the short trend data resolution is set to [30
sec.].)
Pressing the short trend of an alarm generated parameter
will display the recall screen.
The short trend can be displayed for each display layout.
When 12-lead layout is displayed, ST value of each lead
can be displayed in short trend.
The short trend display can be turned ON or OFF using the [Short Trend ON/OFF] user key.

( "User Key Selection" P10-15)
NOTE
 When the cursor function or reference line function of the short trend is enabled, the alarm
condition cannot be displayed.
 When the short trend of multiple parameters are displayed overlapped, only the parameter

8-10
Chapter 8 Review Function Short Trend

displayed on top will be displayed in red at alarm occurrence.

Selecting the Parameters to be Displayed

The parameters to be displayed can be changed on the "Display Config." menu.

( "Display Configuration" P10-1)
Also, by setting the auto display configuration, the short trend parameters can be
changed automatically according to the displayed waveforms and numeric data.

( Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)
Maximum of 4 parameters can be displayed overlapped in the same short trend
display area. (shown on right)

Changing the Trend Scale and Display Duration

The short trend scale will be displayed on the right or left side of the short trend.
The displayed scale will be in accordance with the scale set on the "Trend" screen.
For the following parameters, the short trend scale can be synchronized with the corresponding waveform scale by
selecting [Waveform] for "Short Trend Scale" under [Menu>Display Config.>Detail Setup].
BP, PEAK, VT, CO2, O2, Agent
The short trend display width can be selected from 7 levels by pressing the waveform display area.
Also, by setting the "Data Resolution" (5 sec./10 sec./30 sec.) under [Display Config.] > [Detail Setup], maximum
display duration (30 min./1 hr./3 hr.) can be changed. The display width can be selected from 7 levels.

Changing the Display for Each Parameter

The graph type and display order can be changed for each
parameter.
By pressing the short trend scale area, "Short Trend Setup"
window (shown on right) will be displayed.
"Display Selection"
Select the graph type.
 For example, there are following graph types.
 Line
 Filled in with black color from the baseline
 Filled in with black color between S-D (For BP)
 Filled in with black color from the top
 [OFF]: Graph will not be displayed.
The displayable graph types will differ depending on the parameter.
"Display Order"
When the parameters are displayed overlapped (ex. short trend overlap, BP overlap), the display order can be
selected.
 [Front]: The display will be on the front side.
 [Back]: The display will be on the back side.

8-11
Chapter 8 Review Function Short Trend

Displaying the Reference Line

For the short trend of the following parameters, reference lines can be
displayed.
 HR (Upper/Lower Limit)
 ST (Upper/Lower Limit) *Only for the ECG1 lead
 BP1 to 4 (Upper/Lower Limit) *S/D/M can be selected for each limit.
 NIBP (Upper/Lower Limit) *S/D/M can be selected for each limit.
 EtCO2 (Upper/Lower Limit)
 SpO2 (Lower Limit)
 BIS (Upper/Lower Limit)

The data within the reference lines (including the parameters without the reference line display) will be displayed
with lower brightness.
The data outside the reference lines will be displayed with higher brightness.
The reference lines can be displayed by selecting [Enable] for "Reference Line Function". (Menu>Display
Config.>Detail Setup)
However, it cannot be displayed for the overlapped short trend. And, when the reference line function is enabled, the
function to display the alarm occurrence point on the graph in red cannot be used.
When [Enable] is set for "Reference Line Function", ON/
OFF and upper/lower limit of reference line display can be
selected on the "Short Trend Setup" window for each
parameter.
The "Short Trend Setup" window can be displayed by
pressing the short trend scale area.

Displaying the Cursor

By displaying a cursor, the numeric data and review data at cursor
position can be displayed.
The cursor can be displayed by selecting [Enable] for "Cursor
Function". (Menu>Display Config.>Detail Setup)
Pressing the short trend display area will display the cursor at the
last displayed position (time). If the last displayed position is
cleared by scrolling, the cursor will be displayed at the latest data position.
The cursor can be moved by dragging or pressing the short trend display area.

Pressing the center part of will display the review data (tabular trend/graphic trend/zoom wave)
at the cursor point.
(However, zoom wave can be displayed only when the full disclosure waveform function is enabled.)
The cursor cannot be displayed for the overlapped short trend. And, when the cursor function is enabled, the function
to highlight the alarm generated data cannot be used.
When the cursor function is enabled, the function to enlarge/reduce the short trend display area cannot be used.
During the cursor display, the short trend data will not be updated. When the cursor is not used for 10 seconds or
when other window is displayed, the cursor will be automatically cleared.

8-12
Chapter 8 Review Function Tabular Trend

Tabular Trend

This section explains the tabular trend function and printing procedure.
If the numeric data is displayed on the home display, 24 of data will be automatically stored and displayed in 10
seconds/30 seconds interval.

To Display/Print the Tabular Trend

1 Press the [Menu], [Tabular Trend] ("Data Review") keys.

Or, press the [Tabular Trend] key on the user key area.

The tabular trend will be displayed.

2
2 3
4
5
8
6
7

2 Changing the displayed time, scrolling the time, updating the data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
3 The list will be scrolled up or down to display other parameters.

4 Select the display interval.

[NIBP]: The tabular trend display interval will be according to the NIBP measurement time.

NOTE
 The minimum resolution of NIBP is 20 seconds. If multiple measurements have been
performed within 20 seconds, the latest value will be displayed.
 The data resolution differs according to the parameter.
24 hours of data will be stored regardless of the time bar display range.
 If the display resolution is higher than the minimum resolution of the data, the same data
is repeated to match the display resolution.

Data Resolution
Minimum Resolution Parameter

10 sec. HR, ST, SpO2, PR_SpO2, BP1, BP2

30 sec. Other than above

8-13
Chapter 8 Review Function Tabular Trend

5 Press the [List-x] key to change the tabular trend group.

Maximum of 6 different groups of parameters can be registered
according to the monitoring purpose.

1 Select a group from [A]/[B]/[C]/[D]/[E]/[F].

2 To change the name of trend group, press the [Change Name]
key.
(
 "To Enter Characters" P3-26)

6 Set the parameters for the tabular trend.

(
"Parameter Setup for Tabular Trend" P8-15)
7 Press the [Print]/[Print (All)] key.

[Print]: The currently displayed tabular trend will be printed.

[Print (All)]: All data for 12 parameters (which fits in 1 page) will be printed.

8 The displayed data time can be scrolled by dragging the data display area.

The Description of the Display

For the data when the measurement was not performed (before admittance) or when the monitoring was suspended,
the time will be displayed as " : ".
Also, if the measured data is not displayed on the home display, or BP zero balance is not performed, the data will
not be displayed.
The alarm generated data will be displayed with red background.
The date column of alarm generated data will be also displayed with red background.
NOTE
 The red background will be displayed for the alarm generated parameter.
The alarm display for the expiratory and inspiratory parameter such as EtCO2 and InspCO2
will be the same.
For example, if the alarm is generated for BP-S, the background color of BP1-S, BP1-M,
BP1-D will be displayed in red.

On the left side of the parameter, the color assigned for the corresponding parameter will be displayed.

8-14
Chapter 8 Review Function Tabular Trend

Parameter Setup for Tabular Trend

1 Press the [Menu], [Tabular Trend] ("Data Review"), [Setup] keys.

The tabular trend setup screen will be displayed.

4
3 2
5
4

6
2 Press the [Fix x param.] key to set the fixed parameters.

Select from [0 param.] to [6 param.].

The selected quantity of parameters will be always displayed on the tabular trend, and these data will be
remained displayed even when scrolled.

3 Select the display location for the parameter. The selected location will be displayed with blue frame and
will be displayed at the side.

To change the location, directly press the desired location or drag the key up or down.

To change the displayed page, press the / keys on the left.

4 Select the parameters.

1 Filter the data by sampling interval.

[OFF]: The line where [OFF] is selected will not be displayed.
[10 sec.]: The displayed data will be filtered in 10 seconds sampling interval.
[All]: All data will be displayed.
2 Select the category and displaying page.
[H Module]/[SvO2/CCO]/[Vent.]/[Anes.]/[Other]: The parameters for the corresponding category will be
displayed.

 / : The displaying page for the parameters can be selected.

Parameters for each Category

H Module/Anes. HR, VPC, ST, SpO2-1, PR_SpO2-1, SpO2-2, PR_SpO2-2, NIBP, BP1 to 8, PR-IBP, PDP, PCWP,
CPP, T1 to 8, Tb, CO, EtCO2, InspCO2, RR-GAS, RR-IMP, RR-VENT, APNEA, MAC, O2, N2O,
Agent, E-TV, I-TV, E-MV, I-MV, P-PEAK, P-PAUSE, PEEP, P-MEAN, RES, COMP, TV 1sec, I/E
RATIO, PI, PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb

SvO2 / CCO SvO2, ScvO2, SaO2, O2EI, B-Temp, CCO, CCO-STAT, CCI, CCI-STAT, DO2, RVEF, RVEF-
STAT, VO2, SV, SV-STAT, SVI, SVI-STAT, SVR, SVRI, SVV, EDV, EDV-STAT, EDVI, EDVI-
STAT, MAP, ESV, ESVI, CFI, iCO, iCI, iSV, iSVI, iSVR, iSVRI, GEDV, GEDI, GEF, EVLW, ELWI,
PVPI, ITBV, ITBI, VO2e, VO2I, VO2Ie, iB-Temp, SQI, MAP, CVP, HR, PR, SpO2, iMAP, iCVP,
iAvgPR, DO2I, HGB, dPmx, CO CAL

8-15
Chapter 8 Review Function Recall

Parameters for each Category

Ventilator E-TV, I-TV, MV, SMV, P-PEAK, P-PAUSE, PEEP, P-MEAN, E-RES, I-RES, COMP, FiO2, P-MIN,
S-COMP, D-COMP, S-RR, I/E RATIO, RES, VTCO2, etCO2, VCO2, Flowee, Ti, Ti/Ttot, PEEPtot,
Elastance, Cdyn, D-Chara, Leakage, S-Mve//Mve, Tc, WOBvent, WOBpat, CPAP, P0.1, Edipeak,
Edmin, SBI, VT/PBW

Anesthesia Flowee, Ti, Ti/Ttot, Sup.Air, SupO2, SupN2O

Delivery System

Other BIS, SQI, EMG, SR, SEF, TOTPOW, IMP, AEP, Lt-rSO2, Rt-rSO2, S1-rSO2, S2-rSO2, tcpO2,
tcpCO2

NOTE
 The APNEA duration will be stored when it exceeds the upper alarm threshold level.
If lower than the alarm threshold level, it will be stored as "0 (zero)".
 The external device parameters to be displayed on the graphic trend/tabular trend
needs to be selected in advance on the "Trend Data Setup" window ([Data
Review>Graphic Trend or Tabular Trend] or [Initial Settings>External Device>Main
Unit/HP-800]).
 The measurement unit of tcpO2, tcpCO2 can be set on the TCM4 or TCM5 FLEX.
When the measurement unit is changed, the tabular trend data of tcpO2 and tcpCO2
on the bedside monitor will be deleted.

REFERENCE
 [H Module] is a generic term for HS-8000, HM-800/HM-801, HP-800, HG-810/HG-820.
 When the FLOW-i, GE or Draeger anesthesia delivery system is connected, the
display will change to [H Module/Anes.].

5 Select the parameter to be displayed for the selected location.

The blue frame will move to one row below.

6 Set the time bar.

Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/[12h]/[16h]/[20h]/[24h]/[36h]/[48h].

Recall

This section explains about the recall function and the setup procedure.

To Display the Recall Waveform

1 Date/Time at Alarm Occurrence

2 Recall Factor

3 Recall Waveform (Compressed: 12

sec.)

4 Mark

When the alarm for the specified recall factor occurs, waveforms (max. 2 waveforms/12 seconds) and numeric data
for each recall factor will be stored up to 200 data. On the display selection menu, the data to be displayed can be
selected from the stored recall data. 5 compressed recall waveforms will be displayed. Pressing the waveform area
will display the enlarged waveform.
If the recall data exceeds 200, the data will be erased from the oldest one.

8-16
Chapter 8 Review Function Recall

The recall waveform will be acquired from the point prior to alarm occurrence so that alarm-generated point will be
displayed at 7 to 8 seconds point on the 12-seconds recall waveform. mark indicates the alarm generated point.

1 Press the [Menu], [Recall] ("Data Review") keys.

Or, press the [Recall] key on the user key area.

Recall screen will be displayed.

5 compressed waveforms (12 sec. per each waveform) will be displayed.
The alarm occurrence time, the recall factor occurred at the same time, and the compressed waveform of
recall waveform 1 will be displayed.

2
3
4
5

2 Changing the displayed time, scrolling the time, updating the data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
3 Press the [Display Selection] key, and set the recall display.

1 Select the quantity of waveforms to be displayed. 1

2 Select the recall factor. 2
The key will turn blue when pressed to indicate that it
is selected as the recall factor.

[Select All]: All parameters including arrhythmia will be

selected.

[Select All Arrhythmia]: All arrhythmia will be selected.

[Cancel All]: All selections will be canceled.

NOTE
 The "Display Selection" setting will be also applied to the recall list display on the numeric
data display area.
(
 "Extended Function (Recall List)" P3-14)

4 Set the storing condition for recall data.

(
"Recall Setup" P8-19)
5 Deleting All Recall Waveform

1 Press the [Delete Sel.] key.

2 Select the parameters to delete. For the selected parameter, "x" will be displayed.
To select all displayed waveforms, press the [Select All] key.
To cancel the selection, select again the parameter with "x" mark. "x" mark will be cleared indicating that

8-17
Chapter 8 Review Function Recall

it has been removed from the deleting parameter selection.

3 Press [Delete]>[Delete OK] keys to delete the parameters with "x" mark.

To Display/Print the Enlarged Recall Waveform

On the enlarged recall waveform display, the recall waveform will be displayed in 25mm/s and by using the cursor,
the data before and after the alarm occurrence can be checked.

1 Press the waveform display area on the recall screen.

The enlarged recall waveform will be displayed.

5
2

1 Shifts the recall waveform display.

2 Measurement
The measurement value will be displayed.

3 Printing the Recall Waveform

The displayed enlarged waveform and numeric data will be printed. The output printer can be selected on the
"Manual Printing" setup.

( "Printing Setup" P9-1)

4 Deleting the Recall Waveform

The displayed recall waveform will be deleted.

5 The waveform can be scrolled by dragging the waveform area to left and right.

8-18
Chapter 8 Review Function Recall

Recall Setup

The storing condition at alarm occurrence can be set for the recall function.
The recall waveform and recall factor (numeric data, arrhythmia) can be selected.

1 Press the [Setup] key on the recall screen.

(
"To Display the Recall Waveform" P8-16)
The "Setup" window will be displayed.

2 3

2 Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/[12h]/[16h]/[20h]/[24h]/[36h]/[48h].

3 Select the recall waveform. Up to 2 waveforms can be selected for recall

waveform. (shown on right)

4 Select the recall factor.

(
"To Display the Recall Waveform" P8-16)
NOTE
 The recall waveform will start with the following delay time tracing back from the alarm
occurrence.

Neonate
Adult Child
Numeric Data Alarm Arrhythmia Alarm

Delay Time 12 sec. 12 sec. 8 sec. 12 sec.

 For the parameters measured on the multigas unit, the delay time is 8 seconds.


8-19
Chapter 8 Review Function OCRG

OCRG

This section explains about the OCRG display.

On the OCRG display, compressed respiration waveform, HR trend and SpO2 trend are displayed simultaneously.
By using the optional CFast card, 240 hours of OCRG data can be saved.

1 Press the [Menu], [OCRG] ("Data Review") keys.

OCRG screen will be displayed.

2
3
4
7 5
8 6
2 / will become effective by using the optional CFast card. The cursor will move to the alarm
generated time.

3 Real Time Update

Updates the paused OCRG review to the latest time.

4 OCRG Setup

The settings for OCRG can be performed.

1
2
3

5 4

1 Time Bar Setup

Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/[12h]/[16h]/[20h]/[24h]/[36h]/[48h].
2 Display Duration
Select from [4min]/[8min]/[16min].
3 SpO2 2ch display
Select from [ON]/[OFF].
ON: SpO2 2ch will be displayed overlapped in the SpO2 trend display area.

8-20
Chapter 8 Review Function OCRG

Displays in order of SpO2 1ch > SpO2 2ch.

OFF: Only SpO2 1ch will be displayed in the SpO2 trend display area.
4 Respiration Waveform
Select from [Impedance]/[CO2].
5 Alarm Display Selection
Select the alarm factor to be displayed in the alarm display.

5 Alarm Display

The color of the alarm occurrence point can be changed for display according to the alarm factor selected on
the Setting > Alarm Display Selection.

6 Printing

The currently displayed trend and compressed waveform on the OCRG screen will be printed.

7 Printing Scale, Size

Scale for HR, SpO2, CO2 in the trend area and waveform size for compressed respiration waveform can be
changed.

Parameter Size, Scale

HR [bpm] [0 to 200]/ [0 to 300]

SpO2 [%] [0 to 100]/ [50 to 100]

Impedance RESP [x1/4]/[x1/2]/[x1]/[x2]/[x4]

CO2 [mmHg] [0 to 50]/ [0 to 100]

[kPa] [%] [4]/[8]/[10]

8 Move the cursor.

1 Pressing the center part of will display the trend data at the cursor position.
2 The cursor will move to left and right by dragging.
3 Press / to adjust the cursor position.
The numeric data on the cursor position will be displayed. The display will not be updated when the numeric
data is displayed by the cursor. Press [Real Time] to resume.

8-21
Chapter 8 Review Function Alarm History

Alarm History

This section explains the alarm history function and printing procedure.
The alarm generation of numeric data, arrhythmia, device status and change in alarm settings can be stored as alarm
history. Maximum of 1599 data can be stored.
NOTE
 The alarm history cannot be deleted manually. When 1600 data is exceeded, the data will
be deleted from the oldest one.

Alarm History Setup

1 Press the [Menu], [Alarm History] ("Data Review") keys.

The alarm history screen will be displayed.

2
2
3
5 4

2 Changing the displayed time, scrolling the time, updating the data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
3 Set the alarm history display.

1 Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/

1
[12h]/[16h]/[20h]/[24h]/[36h]/[48h].
2 Select the alarm level to be displayed. 2
The selected item will be displayed in blue. 3
3 Select the alarm type to be displayed.
The selected item will be displayed in blue.

4 Press the [Print] key.

The currently displayed alarm history will be printed.

5 The displayed data can be scrolled by dragging the display area up and down.

8-22
Chapter 8 Review Function Alarm History

Description for Each Item

The descriptions of each item are as follows.

Item Details

Time The alarm generated time or alarm setting changed time will be displayed.

Code The code related to alarm generation or alarm setting change will be displayed in
hexadecimal.

Factor The factor for alarm generation and alarm setting change will be displayed.

In case of numeric data/arrhythmia alarm, the numeric data and alarm setting at
alarm generation will be also displayed.

In case of device status alarm, a detailed code may be also displayed.

In case of alarm setting change, the changed value will be also displayed.

Duration (sec.) The duration of numeric data/arrhythmia/device status alarm generation, alarm
suspend, monitor suspend, night mode will be displayed in seconds. The
maximum displayable value is 99999 sec.
It will not be displayed for the alarm setting change.

Print Output Example

8-23
Chapter 8 Review Function Zoom Wave

Zoom Wave

This section explains about the "Zoom Wave" window. (When using the optional CFast card)
Maximum of 6 waveforms (9.8 seconds each) can be displayed.
The "Zoom Wave" window can be also displayed by pressing the waveform area on the "Full Disc. Wave" window.
If the optional CFast card is not used, the latest enlarged recall waveform will be displayed.

1 Press the [Menu], [Zoom Wave] ("Waveform Review") key.

The "Zoom Wave" window will be displayed.

2
3
4
5
9 6
7
8
2 The waveform of previous/next alarm event will be displayed.

3 Changing the displayed time, scrolling the time, updating the data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
4 The numeric data of the displayed time will be displayed.

5 Switch the waveform to display.

[Limb]: Limb lead ECG waveform will be displayed.
[Chest]: Chest lead ECG waveform will be displayed.
[User Selection]: The waveform selected at procedure 6 will be displayed.

6 When [User Selection] is set at procedure 5, select the waveforms to be displayed.

7 The size/scale of the displayed waveform will change.

8 The currently displayed waveform will be printed.

On the HR-800, 12 seconds of waveform will be printed. The printing range starts from 1 second before the
left end of the enlarged waveform.
On the laser printer, 10 seconds of waveform will be printed. The printing range starts from the left end of the
enlarged waveform.

9 The waveform can be scrolled by dragging the waveform area to left and right.

8-24
Chapter 8 Review Function ST Measurement

ST Measurement

This section explains about the ST measurement and QT alarm function.

To Display/Print the ST Measurement

On the ST display, ECG for the selected time duration (10 sec./1 min./5 min./10 min.) will be displayed overlapped
in 1 block.
If 3-lead cable is used, maximum of 8 hours of ST waveform will be displayed.
NOTE
 If 3-lead cable is used, the measurement will be performed for only the displayed leads.
 For the following case, ST level will not be displayed.
 When learning arrhythmia.
 When the lead is off.
 When the reference waveform is not set.
 When "N" or "S" is not detected for QRS within 30 seconds.

1 Press the [Menu], [ST] ("Waveform Review") key.

Or, press the [ST] key on the user key area.

ST screen will be displayed.

2
3
4
5
2 Changing the displayed time, scrolling the time, updating the data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
3 Changing the Displayed Waveform Size

Select from [x1/4]/[x1/2]/[x1]/[x2]/[x4].The same waveform size will be applied to all the leads. The selected
size will not be applied to the ECG waveform on the home display.

4 Changing the Displayed Block Duration

The "Setup" window will be displayed and "Slide Show" (1 sec./5 sec./10 sec./20 sec./30 sec.) can be selected.

REFERENCE
 When 3-lead cable is used, 36 blocks will be displayed. When 4, 5, 10-lead cable is
used, 3 blocks for each lead will be displayed.
 The duration of each block can be selected from [10 sec.]/[1 min.]/[5 min.]/[10 min.].
For the selections other than [10 sec.], the overlapped waveform for the selected
duration will be displayed.

8-25
Chapter 8 Review Function ST Measurement

5 Printing

The currently displayed ST waveform will be printed.

Reference Waveform Setup

The ST reference waveform will be automatically set after learning the arrhythmia.
The reference waveform can be updated manually.

1 Press the [Menu], [ST] ("Alarm") key.

The ST alarm setup screen will be displayed.

2 Update the ST reference waveform. Press the [Update Ref. Wave] key.

CAUTION
 For the lead which the electrode is detached, the reference waveform cannot be
set.Check if the electrode is correctly attached, and perform the setup again.

16 beats average of the ECG judged as normal QRS by arrhythmia analysis will be set as the reference
waveform.

While updating the reference waveform, the [Update Ref. Wave] key will be displayed in blue.
The updated time of the reference waveform will be displayed.

NOTE
 While learning arrhythmia, or if VPC is present, it will take more than 16 beats to set the
reference waveform.
 When the electrode quantity is changed, the reference waveform will be automatically
updated.
 In case such as when the patient is discharged, the reference waveform will be
automatically set.

3 Set the reference point and measurement point.

1 Slide the reference point to right and left using the key.
2 Slide the measurement point to right and left using the key.

NOTE
 Set the reference point in the range of –240 ms to 0 ms in increments of 10 ms from
the peak of QRS to the P wave direction.

8-26
Chapter 8 Review Function ST Measurement

 Set the measurement point in the range of 0 ms to 560 ms in increments of 10 ms from

the peak of QRS to the T wave direction.

ST Alarm Setup

Set the ST upper limit and lower limit for the reference waveform.

1 Press the [Menu], [ST] ("Alarm") key.

The ST alarm setup screen will be displayed.

5
3
4

2 Select [ON]/[OFF] for "ST All Alarm" .

[OFF]: Alarms will not generate even if the alarm for each lead is set to ON.

3 Select the lead to set the alarm limit.

The selected lead will be displayed large at the right.

4 Select [ON]/[OFF] of ST alarm for each lead.

5 Set the upper and lower alarm limit.

(
"Alarm Limit Setup for Each Parameter" P6-10)
NOTE
 Set the upper limit in the range of -18mm to +20 mm/-1.8mV to +2.0 mV. Alarm will be
set to OFF if a value of +20 mm / +2.0 mV or above is selected.
 Set the lower limit in the range of -20 mm to 18mm/-2.0 mV to 1.8mV. Alarm will be set
to OFF if a value of -20 mm / -2.0 mV or lower is selected.

REFERENCE
 The upper and lower limit can be set in 1 mm/0.1 mV increments.

6 The ST level display can be selected from [Absolute Value] / [Relative Value].

8-27
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

This section explains about the 12-lead analysis function. By using the 10-electrode cable, 12-lead ECG can be
displayed, analyzed, stored, and printed. Maximum of 10 analyzed results can be saved.

WARNING
 The 12-Lead ECG analysis function is designed to acquire and interpret ECG data from a
resting, supine patient. If ECG signals from moving or shaking patients are acquired,
erroneous 12-lead interpretation result may occur. Always ensure that the patient is kept
motionless during 12-lead ECG signal acquisition and analysis.
 The 12-lead ECG analysis function is intended for use with adult and pediatric patients.
 All computerized ECG analysis results should be reviewed by a physician before making
decision of the patient treatment.

CAUTION
 Interpretation and Minnesota codes given by this device do not instruct the physician as to
the kind and degree of cardiac disease. Accordingly, four value judgments are given for ECG
waveform and although "abnormal" indicates a large possibility of organic cardiac disease,
there are cases where no cardiac disease exists despite an abnormal ECG (that is, an
abnormal ECG may be caused by something other than heart).
On the other hand, care should be taken in the event any preclinical coronary
arteriosclerosis could be present despite a normal ECG interpretation.
Therefore, for a proper diagnosis, the ECG should be integrated with other interpretations.
 ECG Recording by the Mason-Likar System
The 12-lead ECG recorded with the torso placement of the limb leads (Mason-Likar 12-lead
system) may differ from the standard 12-lead ECG. Moreover, waveforms may differ
somewhat also in a supine position and a standing position (sitting position).
We recommend to carry out the recording of the ECG by taking into consideration the
waveform differences according to electrode positions or postures.
 About the ECG Analysis Program
The ECG analysis program is intended to analyze the standard 12-lead ECG waveforms.
Therefore, the analyzed result for waveforms recorded with the torso placement of the limb
leads (Mason-Likar 12-lead system) may differ from that of the standard 12-lead ECG
waveforms.
 When a pacemaker is used, select [Used] for "Pacemaker" under "Admit/Discharge" menu.
 The threshold values for classification of 12-lead ECG interpretation and Minnesota code
are set by age and sex as follows.
1. Male and Female of ages 19 years old and above
2. Male of age 12 through 18 years old
3. Female of age 12 through 18 years old
4. Male and Female of ages 3 through 11 years old
5. Male and Female of ages below 2 years old
 If no patient information (i.e. Default: "Class.": [Adult], "Sex": undetermined) has been
entered, the system algorithm will handle the patient as a "35 years old male".
 Before the analysis, make sure the patient classification ([Adult] / [Child]) is properly
selected. If [Neonate] is selected, the 12-lead ECG analysis will not function.
 Enter the age of patient if known. If no age information (i.e. Default: [0]) has been entered,
the system algorithm will handle the patient as "35 years old".
 Enter the sex of patient if known. If no sex information (i.e. Default: undetermined) has been
entered, the system algorithm will handle the patient as "Male".
 If the patient classification is set as [Child] and no age (i.e. Default: [0] ) has been entered,
the system algorithm will handle the patient as "less than 2 years old."

8-28
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

NOTE
 Electrode Placement for 12-Lead ECG Analysis
When acquiring 12-lead ECG signals, it is recommended to place the limb electrodes
anywhere along the arms and legs. (
 "Electrode Placement" P7-3)
If it is difficult, use the Mason-Likar 12-lead system. To reduce the waveform differences
from the standard 12-lead, it is recommended that the torso placement of the R and L
electrodes be near as possible to each arm, in the infraclavicular fossae, within the area
unaffected by myoelectricity.
 When the 12-lead analysis function is enabled on the DS-8007, the function will be also
enabled on the DS-8400.

12-Lead ECG Display

1 Press the [Menu], [12-Lead] ("Waveform Review") key.

The 12-lead screen will be displayed.

2
3
4
5
6
2 Changing the displayed time, scrolling the time, updating the data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1)
3 The real-time waveforms are displayed.
The 12-lead analysis will be performed based on the displayed waveforms.

REFERENCE
 A pacemaker pulse will not be displayed on the 12-lead analysis screen even if [ON] is
set for "Pacemaker Pulse".

4 The [Chest Lead]/[Limb Lead] keys will switch the display between chest lead and limb lead.

5 Setup
The 12-lead waveform size, filter, analysis method can be set.
(
"12-Lead Analysis Setup" P8-30)
6 Printing

The currently displayed waveform can be printed.

The output printer will be according to the setting made for "12-Lead Waveform" ( [Bedside]/[Laser]) under
[Manual Printing>Printer Sel. (Graphic Printing)].
(
 "Manual Printing (Other Setup)" P9-6)

8-29
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

12-Lead Analysis Setup

1 Press the [Menu], [12-Lead] ("Waveform Review"), [Setup] key.

The 12-lead analysis setup screen will be displayed.

2 ECG Analysis 2
The timing to read the waveform for ECG analysis can be
set.
3
[Real Time]: The waveform of 10 seconds after the [Start
Analyze] key is pressed will be analyzed. 4
[Review]: The waveform of 10 seconds before the [Start
Analyze] key is pressed will be analyzed.
5
3 Waveform Size 6
The waveform size for the real-time waveform displayed on
the 12-lead screen can be set.

Limb Lead: The waveform size for the limb lead can be changed.
Chest Lead: The waveform size for the chest lead can be changed.

4 Filter
The setup for the AC Filter, EMG Filter, Drift Filter can be performed.

AC Filter: If AC noise is present, select [ON]/ [OFF] for "AC Filter".
If [ON] is selected, cut-off frequency will be 75 Hz.

EMG Filter: If EMG noise is present, select [Strong (25Hz)]/ [Weak (35Hz)]/ [OFF].
Drift Filter: If base line drift is present, select [Strong (0.50Hz)]/ [Weak (0.25Hz)]/ [OFF].

CAUTION
 A baseline or notch will be generated on the ECG waveform (display, print, recall) during
the filter setting (up to about 2.4 seconds).
 This device complies to the distortion test of EN 60601-2-25 when all the filters are set to
OFF. The frequency characteristic is 0.05 Hz to 150 Hz when all the filters are set to OFF.]
 When a pacemaker is used, the baseline fluctuation becomes large and it may be difficult
to read the electrocardiogram. Set the drift filter by checking the electrocardiogram.

5 Background Color
The background color for the 12-lead display can be set.

[White]: Similar display with the electrocardiograph.

Background Color: White
Grid Color: Orange
Waveform Color: Black (Fixed)

[Black]: Standard color

Background Color: Black
Grid Color: Gray
Waveform Color: Green (Fixed)

6 Time Bar
Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/[12h]/[16h]/[20h]/[24h]/[36h]/[48h].

8-30
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

12-Lead ECG Analysis

1 Press the [Menu], [12-Lead] ("Waveform Review"), [Start Analyze] key.

When the analysis completes, the analyzed result will be displayed.

For the analyzed result, dominant waveform and analyzed result will be displayed.

Abnormal region will be indicated by highlight display.

4
5
2 6
2
3 7
8
9
2 Analyzed Time

The analyzed time will be displayed.

During the analysis, [Start Analyze] key will change to [In Progress].
The analysis can be suspended by pressing the [In Progress] key.

3 Dominant Waveform

The reference waveform used for the analysis will be displayed.The dominant waveform is the waveform at
the point of mark on the rhythm waveform.

On the analyzed result, the abnormal lead with the highest grade finding will be highlighted in red.
The dominant waveform display can be switched by pressing the [Chest Lead]/[Limb Lead] keys.

4 Filter Information

The filter used for analysis will be displayed.

The filter display can be selected from frequency or type (AC, MF_ST, etc.).
(
 Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)

5 Analyzed Result

For the analyzed result, overall judgment, numeric data, finding will be displayed.

1 Overall Judgment: The highest grade judgment will be displayed.

8-31
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

2 Numeric Data: Main numeric data used for ECG analysis will be displayed.
The abnormal numeric data with the highest grade finding will be highlighted in red.
3 Finding: The findings by the ECG analysis will be displayed. These will be classified by colors according to
the grade specified for each finding.
Grade 6: Red
Grade 4: Blue
Grade 2, 0: Black
The highest grade finding will be highlighted in color specified for each abnormality level.

6 Panorama Display

By pressing the [Panorama] key, overall judgment, finding, abnormal site will be indicated by heart
illustration.

1
2

1 Overall Judgment: The highest grade judgment will be displayed.

2 Finding: The ECG analysis finding of highest grade will be displayed.
3 Abnormal Site: The finding indicated at 2 will be displayed by a heart illustration.
During the panorama display, [Panorama] key will change to [Numeric].
By pressing the [Numeric] key, the analyzed result display will change to numeric data display.

7 Analyze Real Time Waveform

Press the [Real Time] key to return to the 12-lead analyzed result screen.
Press the [Start Analyze] key on the 12-lead analyzed result screen.

8 Display Analyzed Waveform

Press the [Analyzed Wave] key to display the analyzed waveform.

[Chest Lead]: Chest lead (V1 to V6) waveform will be displayed.

[Limb Lead]: Limb lead (I to aVF) waveform will be displayed."

9 Deleting the Analyzed Result

Press the [Delete] key to delete the displayed analyzed result.

[Delete OK] will delete the displayed analyzed result data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the delete process.

8-32
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

12-Lead Analyzed Result Output Example

Press the [Print] key on the analyzed result screen or analyzed waveform screen.
There are following 3 types of analyzed result printing.

Keys displayed when Printer Selection for Graphic Printing Key Note
[Print] key is pressed Display

Waveform Report 12-Lead Waveform Bedside Yes Standard 12-lead waveform printing
Prints the analyzed waveform.
Laser Yes

Panorama Report 12-Lead Analysis Result Bedside × Panorama Report

Displayed only when [Laser] is set as
Laser Yes the printer for graphic printing.

Analyzed Report 12-Lead Analysis Result Bedside Yes Standard analyzed result printing
Prints the waveform and analyzed
Laser Yes
result.

NOTE
 If no patient information has been entered, "Adult", "35 years old", and "Male" will be printed.
 If the patient classification is set as "Child", and no age and sex information have been
entered, "Child", "2 years old", and "Male" will be printed.
 The output printer will be according to the setting made for "12-Lead Analysis Result"
([Bedside]/[Laser]) under [Manual Printing>Printer Sel. (Graphic Printing)]. (
Printing (Other Setup)" P9-6)

"Manual

Printed Data
The following basic data will be printed.
Heart Rate Heart rate obtained by basic arrhythmia measurement

QRS Interval QRS interval of basic waveform measurement. Average value of measurements of leads I to V6. The
equipotential part (I wave) at the beginning of QRS and the equipotential part (K wave) at the end of
QRS are not included in QRS interval.

R-R Interval R-R interval of basic waveform measurement.

Average value calculated from all the heartbeats first, and then recalculated from the R-R interval
within ±25% of that value.

P-R Interval P-R interval of basic waveform measurement.

Average value of measurements of leads I to V6.

QT Interval QT interval of basic arrhythmia measurement.

Average value of measurements of leads I to V6.

QTc Interval QTc interval of basic arrhythmia measurement. This value is calculated from the following equation:

QRS Axis QRS axis of basic arrhythmia measurement. This value is calculated from the following equation:

where, I, II, and III are the sums of the maximum amplitude values (signed) of Q, R, S, R', and S'
waves from each lead.

R V5/ V6 Maximum amplitude of R wave or R' wave of lead V5 or lead V6.

Lead V5 > Lead V6: RV5
Lead V5 = Lead V6: RV6

SV1 Maximum (absolute) value of Q, S, or S' wave of lead V1.

R+S Sum of the amplitudes of RV5/RV6 and SV1.

ST Amplitude from the baseline. Measurement position: End of QRS wave + (QT/10) sec.

8-33
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

Printing on the Bedside Monitor Printer

When [Beside] is set for "12L Analysis Result" under [Manual Printing>Printer Sel.("Graphic Printing")],
pressing the [Print] key will display the [Waveform Report]/[Analyzed Report] keys.

The following is the output example when [Analyzed Report] key is pressed.

Pressing the [Waveform Report] key will print the analyzed waveform in a standard format.

8-34
Chapter 8 Review Function 12-Lead Analysis (Optional Function)

Laser Printer Output

When [Laser] is set for "12-Lead Analysis Result" under [Manual Printing>Printer Sel.("Graphic Printing")],
pressing the [Print] key will display [Waveform Report]/[Analyzed Report]/[Panorama Report] keys.

Pressing the [Analyzed Report] will print the analyzed result in a format set for "12-Lead Analysis Format"
under [Menu>Setup>Manual Printing]. (
"Manual Printing (12-Lead)" P9-4)

Pressing the [Waveform Report] will print the waveform in a format set for "12-Lead Waveform Format"
under [Menu>Setup>Manual Printing]. (
"Manual Printing (12-Lead)" P9-4)
The following is the output example when [Panorama Report] key is pressed.

NOTE
 To print out the 12-lead analysis panorama report in color, use a laser printer with the
page description language in LIPS IV. If a printer with other page description language
is used, the printout will be in black and white.

8-35
Chapter 8 Review Function Full Disclosure Waveform (Optional Function)

Full Disclosure Waveform (Optional Function)

By using the optional CFast card, 240 hours of wave data can be saved.
Up to six waveforms can be displayed. The alarm event and time will be also saved which allows to search the
waveform by each factor.

CAUTION
 Use only the specified CFast card.
 Turn OFF the power before removing the CFast card.
 Check that the CFast card indicator is not lit in orange when turning OFF the power. When
using the CFast card, use the standby switch.
 The CFast card can be used only on the device where it was formatted.
 The CFast card formatted for the central monitor full disclosure waveform data cannot be
used on the DS-8400 System.

NOTE
 When the full disclosure waveform data exceeds the capacity of the CFast card, the data will
be deleted from the old one.
 To delete the full disclosure waveform data, perform the discharge procedure.
(
 "Discharge" P5-7)

To Format the CF Card

REFERENCE
To save the full disclosure waveform, the CFast card needs to be formatted for the full
disclosure waveform. (
Card" P3-4)
 Maintenance Manual "Formatting the Full Disclosure Waveform

Waveform Setup

The displaying/printing waveform quantity and type of storing waveform, display duration (sec.) per line for the full
disclosure waveform can be preprogrammed.

1 Press the [Menu], [Full Disc.] ("Waveform Review"), [Setup] key.

The "Setup" window for full disclosure waveform will be displayed.

2 4
3 5
6

8-36
Chapter 8 Review Function Full Disclosure Waveform (Optional Function)

2 Select the quantity of displaying/printing waveforms from [1]/[2]/[3]/[4]/[5]/[6].

NOTE
 The maximum waveform quantity that can be printed differs depending on the output
printer.

3 Press the key for "Waveform". (shown on right)

4 Set the display duration per line from [10 sec.]/[30 sec.]/[1 min.].

5 Select the slide show interval from [1 sec.]/[5 sec.]/[10 sec.]/[20 sec.]/
[30 sec.].

6 Select the time bar display interval from [4h]/[8h]/[12h]/[16h]/[20h]/

[24h]/[36h]/[48h].

Description of the Full Disclosure Waveform Display

1 Press [Menu > Waveform Review > Full Disc.].

The full disclosure waveform will be

displayed.

2 Changing the time span, scrolling the time,

2
displaying the latest data
(
"Common Operation" P8-1) 3
6
3 Press "Alarm Review" > / .
2
The full disclosure waveform at alarm- 4
generated point can be searched.
5
4 Press the [Alarm Display] key.

The background color of the waveform at alarm occurrence can be changed.

NOTE
 On the full disclosure waveform display, the arrhythmia occurrence point will be displayed
7 seconds before the actual arrhythmia occurrence.

5 Press [Print].

The currently displayed waveform will be output on the printer.

REFERENCE
 The parameter selected for "Waveform" will be printed. The waveform quantity that can
be printed differs depending on the output printer. Maximum of 3 waveforms for the
bedside monitor printer, and maximum of 6 waveforms for the laser printer can be printed.

6 Press the waveform area.

Press the desired waveform area. The Zoom Wave window will be displayed.

8-37
Chapter 8 Review Function Hemodynamics

To Search by Time

The full disclosure waveform of the specified time can be displayed.

1 Press the [Time Search] key on the full disclosure waveform display.

The "Time Search" window will be displayed.

2 Enter the searching date/time using the numeric keys and press the
[Search] key.

Searching will start.

The searched waveform will be displayed on the full disclosure
waveform display.

Hemodynamics

This section explains the procedure for hemodynamics calculation and printing.
NOTE
 When the DS-5700 system central monitor is connected via DS-LAN II network, the system
will function as follows.
 If the device is connected to DS-LAN, and [ON] is selected for "Synchronize
Hemodynamic Data with the Central Monitor", the latest 5 hemodynamic data will be
enabled and other hemodynamic data will be deleted. For the latest 5 data, the edited
hemodynamic data will synchronize between this monitor and the central monitor.
 If the device is connected to DS-LAN, and [OFF] is selected for "Synchronize
Hemodynamic Data with the Central Monitor", the latest 5 data will be transmitted to the
central monitor, but the data will not synchronize between this monitor and the central
monitor. The data edited on the central monitor will be deleted. The data edited on this
monitor will be transmitted to the central monitor.

Calculation Data

This device can calculate and display the following parameters of hemodynamics.
Data Item Formula

h0.725xw0.425x71.84x10-4
BSA Body Surface Area (m2)
(Dubois Formula)

CI Cardiac Index (L/min/m2)

SV Stroke Volume (mL/beat)

SVI Stroke Volume Index (mL/beat/m2)

SVR Systemic Vascular Resistance (dynes·sec·cm-5)

Systemic Vascular Resistance Index

SVRI SVRxBSA
(dynes·sec·cm-5•m2)

PVR Pulmonary Vascular Resistance (dyn·sec·cm-5)

8-38
Chapter 8 Review Function Hemodynamics

Data Item Formula

Pulmonary Vascular Resistance Index

PVRI PVRxBSA
(dyn·sec·cm-5•m2)
LVW Left Ventricular Work (kg·m) COx(MAP-PAWP)x0.0136

LVWI Left Ventricular Work Index (kg·m2)

LVSW Left Ventricular Stroke Work (g·m) SVx(MAP-PAWP)x0.0136

LVSWI Left Ventricular Stroke Work Index (g·m/m2)

RVW Right Ventricular Work (kg·m) COx(MPAP-CVP)x0.0136

RVWI Right Ventricular Work Index (kg•m/m2) RVW

BSA
RVSW Right Ventricular Stroke Work (g·m) SVx(MPAP-CVP)x0.0136

RVSWI Right Ventricular Stroke Work Index (g·m/m2) RVSW

BSA

NOTE
 The blood pressure unit for hemodynamics is "mmHg". If the unit is "kPa" or "cmH2O", it will
be converted to "mmHg" when calculating.

To Display/Print the Hemodynamics Data

10 hemodynamic data can be viewed in list format.

1 Press the [Menu], [Hemodynamics] ("Calculation") keys.

The hemodynamics screen will be

displayed.

2 [Index Disp] key

The display will alternately switch between

"BSA, SV, SVR, PVR, LVW, LVSW, RVW,
RVSW" and "CI, SVI, SVRI, PVRI, LVWI,
LVSWI, RVWI, RVSWI".

3 [Print] key
2
The currently displayed hemodynamic data 3
will be printed.

8-39
Chapter 8 Review Function Hemodynamics

New Input of Hemodynamics Calculation

The hemodynamics calculation can be performed using the newly entered data.
The data can be entered manually using the numeric keys or automatically using the current data.

1 Press the [Menu], [Hemodynamics] ("Calculation"), [New Regist.] keys.

The "Edit" window will be displayed.

2
3

The current time will be displayed at the upper area.

Unmeasured data will be left blank.

2 Enter the calculation data.

Press the [Latest Data] key to display the measured data.

Press the key for the editing data to display the numeric keys. Edit the data using the numeric keys, and
press the [Set] key.

The edited data will be displayed in , blue.

NOTE
 If the height, weight, BSA is changed on the "Admit/Discharge" screen, average CI will
be recalculated. However, the hemodynamic will not be recalculated with the new CI
data.

Input Data
Data Item (Unit) Editing Range

HEIGHT Height (cm) 0 cm to 300 cm

WEIGHT Weight (kg) 0 kg to 350 kg
2) 0 m to 9.99 m2
BSA Body Surface Area (m

CO Cardiac Output (L/min) 0.00 L/min to 20.00 L/min

HR Heart Rate (bpm) 0 bpm to 350 bpm

ART S Systolic Arterial Pressure (mmHg / 0 mmHg to 350 mmHg / 0 kPa to

kPa) 46.6 kPa

ART M Mean Arterial Pressure (mmHg / kPa) 0 mmHg to 350 mmHg / 0 kPa to
46.6 kPa

ART D Diastolic Arterial Pressure (mmHg / 0 mmHg to 350 mmHg / 0 kPa to

kPa) 46.6 kPa
PAP S Systolic Pulmonary Artery Pressure 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg / 0 kPa to
(mmHg / kPa) 13.3 kPa

PAP M Mean Pulmonary Artery Pressure 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg / 0 kPa to

(mmHg / kPa) 13.3 kPa

8-40
Chapter 8 Review Function Hemodynamics

Input Data
Data Item (Unit) Editing Range

PAP D Diastolic Pulmonary Artery Pressure 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg / 0 kPa to

(mmHg / kPa) 13.3 kPa

CVP Central Venous Pressure (mmHg / 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg / 0 kPa to

kPa) 13.3 kPa

PCWP Pulmonary Capillary Wedge Pressure 0 mmHg to 100 mmHg / 0 kPa to

(mmHg / kPa) 13.3 kPa

3 Press the [Regist.]/[Cancel] key.

[Regist.]: The calculation will be performed using the newly entered data, and the entered data and
calculation result will be registered on the list.

[Cancel]: The entered data will be deleted.

REFERENCE
 The calculation result will not be displayed if sufficient data is not entered.
 Maximum of 10 data can be registered. If exceeded, the oldest data will be deleted.
 The edited data will be also displayed in blue on the list.

To Edit the Hemodynamics Input Data

The entered data which has been already calculated can be edited or deleted.

1 Press the [Menu], [Hemodynamics] ("Calculation"), and then the date/time display area for the data to edit.

The "Edit" window will be displayed.

2 Edit the data.

(
"New Input of Hemodynamics
Calculation" P8-40)
2
3 Register the edited data.
(
"New Input of Hemodynamics 3
Calculation" P8-40)
4
4 Delete the data.
A confirmation message will be displayed. To delete the data, press the [ OK ] key.

8-41
Chapter 8 Review Function Lung Function

Lung Function

This section explains the procedure for lung function calculation and printing.

Calculation Data

Data Item Formula

2 0.725 0.425 -4
BSA Body Surface Area (m ) h xw x71.84x10

CaO2 Arterial Oxygen Content (mL/dL) CaO2=1.34xHbxSaO2+0.003xPaO2

CvO2 Mixed Venous Oxygen Content (mL/dL) CvO2=1.34xHbxSvO2+0.003xPvO2

Arteriovenous Oxygen Content Difference

a-vDO2 a-vDO2=CaO2-CvO2
(vol %)
DO2 Oxygen Transport(mL/min) DO2=CaO2xCOx10

DO2I Oxygen Transport Index(mL/min/m2) DO2I=CaO2xCIx10

VO2 Oxygen Consumption(mL/min) VO2=a-vDO2xCOx10

VO2I Oxygen Consumption Index(mL/min/m2) VO2I=a-vDO2xCIx10

O2ER Oxygen Extraction Rate (%) O2ER=(CaO2-CvO2)/CaO2x100

AaDO2=PAO2-PaO2

AaDO2 Alveolar-Arterial Oxygen Difference (Torr) PAO2=PIO2-(PACO2/R)x(1-FIO2x(1-R))

R:Respiration Quotient (0.8 for this device)
PIO2=(PB-47)xFIO2

Qs/Qt=(CćO2-CaO2)/(CćO2-CvO2)
Qs/Qt Shunt Rate (%)
CćO2=1.34xHb+0.003xPAO2

REFERENCE
 The blood pressure unit for lung function calculation is "mmHg". If the unit is other than
"mmHg", it will be converted to "mmHg" when calculating.

To Display/Print the Lung Function Data

256 lung function data can be viewed in list format.

1 Press the [Menu], [Lung Function] ("Calculation") keys.

The lung function list will be displayed.

2 [Index Disp] key

The display of BSA, CaO2, CvO2, a-vDO2,

DO2, VO2, O2ER, AaDO2, Qs/Qt will
alternately switch with that of CI, DO2I,
VO2I.

3 [Print] key
2
The currently displayed lung function data
will be printed. 3

8-42
Chapter 8 Review Function Lung Function

New Input of Lung Function Calculation

The lung function calculation can be performed using the newly entered data.
The data can be entered manually using the numeric keys or automatically using the current data.

1 Press the [Menu], [Lung Function] ("Calculation"), [New Regist.] keys.

The "Edit" window will be displayed.

2
3

2 Enter the calculation data.

Press the [Latest Data] key to display the entered data of "HEIGHT", "WEIGHT", "CO".
Press the key for the editing data to display the numeric keys. Edit the data using the numeric keys, and
press the [Set] key.

The edited data will be displayed in blue.

NOTE
 If the height, weight, BSA is changed on the "Admit/Discharge" screen, average CI will
be recalculated. However, the lung function calculation result will not be recalculated with
the new average CI.

Input Data
Data Item (Unit)

HEIGHT Height (cm)

WEIGHT Weight (kg)

BSA Body Surface Area (m2)

CO Cardiac Output (L/min)

FiO2 Fraction of Inspiratory Oxygen (%)

PB Atmospheric Pressure (mmHg)

PaCO2 Partial Pressure of Arterial Carbon Dioxide (mmHg)

Hb Hemoglobin Concentration (g/dL)

PaO2 Partial Pressure of Arterial Oxygen (mmHg)

SaO2 Arterial Oxygen Saturation (%)

PvO2 Partial Pressure of Mixed Venous Oxygen (mmHg)

SvO2 Mixed Venous Oxygen Saturation (%)

8-43
Chapter 8 Review Function Lung Function

3 Press the [Regist.]/[Cancel] key.

[Regist.]: The calculation will be performed using the newly entered data, and the entered data and
calculation result will be registered on the list.

[Cancel]: The entered data will be deleted.

REFERENCE
 The calculation result will not be displayed if sufficient data is not entered.
 Maximum of 256 data can be registered. If exceeded, the oldest data will be deleted.
 The edited data will be also displayed in blue on the list.

To Edit the Lung Function Input Data

The entered data which has been already calculated can be edited or deleted.

1 Press the [Menu], [Lung Function] ("Calculation"), and then the date/time display area for the data to edit.

The "Edit" window will be displayed.

2 Edit the data.

(
 "New Input of Lung Function
Calculation" P8-43)
2
3 Register the lung function list.
(
 "New Input of Lung Function 3
Calculation" P8-43)
4
4 Delete the data.
(
"New Input of Lung Function Calculation" P8-43)

8-44
Chapter 8 Review Function Cardiac Output (CO)

Cardiac Output (CO)

This section explains about the cardiac output measurement using the thermodilution method, setup procedure for
catheter type, etc., and procedure for editing the measurement result.

To Display the CO Measurement Screen

1 Press the [Menu], [CO] ("Calculation") keys.

Or, press the [CO] key on the user key area.

The CO measurement screen will be displayed.

The message according to the status will be displayed, and if "READY" is displayed, the measurement can
be started.

( "Cardiac Output Message" P11-20)

The Description of the CO Measurement Screen

1 Result Status

2 Thermodilution Curve 4
8
3 Time Scale
5
4 Cardiac Index (CI)

5 Blood Temperature 6

6 Injectate Temperature 7

7 Status Message 1 2
8 Cardiac Output (CO)

8-45
Chapter 8 Review Function Cardiac Output (CO)

Cardiac Output Setup

Before measuring the cardiac output, set the measurement condition such as ON/OFF of auto start, time scale for
thermodilution curve, injection condition, etc.

1 Press the [Menu], [CO] ("Calculation"), [Setup] keys.

The "Setup" window will be displayed.

2
3

2 Set ON/OFF of "Auto Start" .

1 Press the key for "Auto Start".

The dropdown list will be displayed.
2 Select from [ON] or [OFF].
[ON]: The measurement will automatically start when the injectate is injected.
[OFF]: The measurement will start by pressing the [Start] key.

REFERENCE
 Even when [ON] is selected, the measurement can be manually started by pressing
the [Start] key.

3 Set the time scale.

1 Press the key for "Time Scale".

The dropdown list will be displayed.
2 Select from [30 sec.]/[60 sec.].

4 Set the computation constant.

1 Press the key for "CC".

The dropdown list will be displayed.
2 Select from [Auto Input]/[Manual Input].
[Auto Input]: The computation constant will be automatically set according to the catheter size and the
injection volume.

[Manual Input]: The computation constant for the used catheter can be manually input with the numeric
keys.

8-46
Chapter 8 Review Function Cardiac Output (CO)

Auto Input of CC Value

4
2
1 3

1 Select the catheter manufacturer from [BIOSENS]/[ARGON]/[EDWARDS].

REFERENCE
 ARGON: Argon Medical Devices Japan, K.K. (formerly Becton, Dickinson and Company)
 The manufacturer name can be changed on "Catheter Manufacturer for CC Input" setting
(Menu>Initial Settings>Meas.>Other).

2 Select the "Catheter Size (F) from [5]/ [6]/ [7]/ [7.5].

3 Select the "Injectate Volume (mL) " from [3]/ [5]/ [10].

When the above items are selected, the computation constant will be automatically set.

When the CJ0-P01C-C2.4 Catheter Relay Cable is used:

1 Select the "Injectate Temperature" from [Ice]/ [Room].
[Ice]: The measurement will be performed at 0°C.
[Room]: The measurement will be performed at room temperature (24°C).

4 Press the [Set]/[Cancel] key.

[Set]: CC value will be finalized.

NOTE
 If the CC value does not correspond to the used catheter, or to use the previous CC
value, press the [Cancel] key, and enter the value manually.
 To automatically enter the computation constant, the catheter relay cable needs to be
connected.

8-47
Chapter 8 Review Function Cardiac Output (CO)

Manual Input of CC Value

4
2
1

3
1 Select the catheter manufacturer from [BIOSENS]/[ARGON]/[EDWARDS].

2 Up to 3 types of CC value can be programmed for each manufacturer.

If previously entered value is present, press the key for "History".
If the previously entered value is not present, enter the CC value using the numeric keys.

3 Set the "Injectate Temperature".

(
"Auto Input of CC Value" P8-47)
4 Press the [Set]/[Cancel] key.

[Set]: CC value will be finalized.

CO Measurement

1 Press the [Menu], [CO] ("Calculation") keys.

The CO measurement screen will be displayed.

The displayed message will change from "WAIT" to "READY".

NOTE
 While "WAIT" is displayed, the measurement cannot be started. Wait until "READY" is
displayed.

8-48
Chapter 8 Review Function Cardiac Output (CO)

2 Verify that "READY" is displayed, and press the [Start] key.

Pressing the key will generate a sound.

3 Inject as soon as the sound generates.

When the measurement is complete, CO and CI value will be displayed.

REFERENCE
 If "Auto Start" is ON, the measurement will automatically start at injection by detecting the
blood temperature.

4 Press the [Print] key.

The displayed thermodilution curve, CO, CI value will be printed.

NOTE
 When "WAIT" message is continuously displayed, verify that catheter relay cable is
properly connected to the cardiac output module, and thermodilution catheter is securely
connected.
 Before injecting, check that the Ti (injectate temperature) setting is correct.
 When repeatedly performing the measurement, inject at intervals of 30–60 seconds
 The CI value will not be displayed unless height/weight or BSA value is input on the
"Admit/Discharge" screen.
(
 "Entering the Patient Information" P5-1)
 For the following cases, measurements may be inaccurate.
 Shunt disease, tricuspid regurgitation or pulmonic regurgitation.
 During exercise stress
As body temperature varies non-continuously and unevenly by exercise, constant CO
value cannot be measured.
 Excessive Arrhythmia
As blood volume varies non-continuously due to arrhythmia, accurate CO value
cannot be measured.

8-49
Chapter 8 Review Function Cardiac Output (CO)

To Edit the CO Measurement Result

The average CO and average CI can be calculated by performing the CO measurement continuously and editing the
measurement result.

1 Press the [Menu], [CO] ("Calculation") keys.

The CO measurement screen will be displayed.

The average CO and average CI value obtained from the measurement result will be displayed.

3
4
2 To Change the Selected Status

The selected data for the average value will be displayed in blue.
Press the graph area to change the selected status.
V Mark: VPC detected during CO measurement.
*: CO value exceeding the average CO value ±10%.

3 [Average CO Input]

The displayed average CO value will be entered to the list.

NOTE
 If the height, weight, BSA is changed on the "Admit/Discharge" screen, average CI will
be recalculated.
As the CI will not be recalculated after the hemodynamic calculation, save the average
CI by hemodynamic calculation before changing the height, weight, and BSA.

4 [Delete Sel.] ([Delete])

The [Delete Sel.] key will change to [Delete] key, and the data can be deleted.
x mark will be displayed for the data to be deleted, and pressing the [Delete OK] key will delete the data.

8-50
Chapter 8 Review Function Drug Calculation

Drug Calculation

This section explains about the drug calculation function.

The drug calculation function is a function to calculate the flow rate of drug administration to the patient.
Based on the dosing rate, flow rate and dosing duration will be calculated from the weight, drug amount, diluent
amount.
It is also possible to calculate the dosing rate and dosing duration from the flow rate.
REFERENCE
 Under the "Initial Settings", the drug name, and default settings for each drug (drug amount/
unit, diluent amount, dosing rate/unit) can be set. (
Calculation" P5-27)
 Maintenance Manual "Drug

1 Press the [Menu], [Drug Calc.] ("Calculation") keys.

The drug calculation menu will be displayed.

3 4

If the weight is entered on the "Admit/Discharge" menu, the entered weight will be displayed.

NOTE
 The weight can be changed on this menu, but the changed weight will be used only for
the drug calculation and will not be reflected on the "Admit/Discharge" menu.

2 Press the key for "Drug Name".

The list of registered drugs will be displayed. Select the drug to administer to the patient.
When a drug is selected, the drug amount, diluent amount, dosing rate/unit preset for that drug under "Initial
Settings" will be automatically entered.

NOTE
 The flow rate will be automatically calculated when the value for each item is updated.

8-51
Chapter 8 Review Function Drug Calculation

 On the initial display of the drug calculation menu, the previous calculation data will be
displayed. The calculation data will be cleared when the patient is discharged.

3 Enter the value for each item.

To change the automatically entered value, press the key for each item and manually enter the value.
The dosing rate and flow rate can be adjusted by pressing the [+], [-] keys.

NOTE
 If the selected unit for the dosing rate requires weight, the flow rate cannot be calculated
if the weight is not entered.

4 Press the [Update "End by"] key to update the estimated time of completion.

Pressing the [Update "End by"] key will recalculate the time from the pressed time and update the estimated
time of completion.

Calculation Formula for Flow Rate/Dosing Rate

According to the dosing rate unit, the calculation formula from the following 10 types will be automatically selected
for calculation.
Dosing Rate Unit Flow Rate Calculation Formula

mg/min

mg/hr

mg/kg/min

mg/kg/hr

μg/min

μg/hr

μg/kg/min

μg/kg/hr

units/hr

IU/hr

Dosing Rate Unit Dosing Rate Calculation Formula

mg/min

mg/hr

mg/kg/min

mg/kg/hr

μg/min

μg/hr

8-52
Chapter 8 Review Function Drug Calculation

Dosing Rate Unit Dosing Rate Calculation Formula

μg/kg/min

μg/kg/hr

units/hr

IU/hr

Unit and Setting Range (Dosing Rate, Drug Amount, Diluent Amount, Flow Rate, Weight)
Dosing Rate Drug Amount
Drug Unit
Setting Range Unit Setting Range
(Selectable)

AMRINONE

AMINOPHYLLINE

BRETYLIUM

DOBUTAMINE

DOPAMINE
mg/min,
EPINEPHRINE mg/hr,
mg/kg/min,
ISOPROTERENOL mg/kg/hr,
mg
LIDOCAINE μg/min,
μg/hr,
NITROGLYCERIN μg/kg/min,
μg/kg/hr
NITROPRUSSIDE

NOREPINEPHRINE
PHENYLEPHRINE
0.01 to 1500000.00 0.01 to 1500000.00
PROCAINAMIDE

tPA

HEPARIN
units/hr units
INSULIN

STREPTOKINASE IU/hr IU

DRUG-A to G mg/min,
mg/hr,
mg/kg/min,
mg/kg/hr,
mg
μg/min,
μg/hr,
μg/kg/min,
μg/kg/hr

units/hr units
IU/hr IU

Diluent Amount Flow Rate Weight

Unit Setting Range Unit Setting Range Unit Setting Range

mL 1 to 1000 mL/hr 0.1 to 1000.0 kg 0.1 to 449.9

NOTE
 The setting is not possible if it cannot be correctly calculated by the entered value.

8-53
Chapter 8 Review Function Other Bed Display

Other Bed Display

This section explains about the function to display the waveform and numeric data and to set alarms for other bedside
monitors.
The other bed alarm function generates the alarm sound for the other bed on this monitor. To use this function, wired
network (DS-LAN II or DS-LAN III) connection is required.

CAUTION
 On the DS-LANII network system, maximum of 3 monitors (including the central monitor)
can display the data of this monitor using the other bed display function.
However, there is no restriction of numbers for the DS-7000 series central monitors and DS-
5700. These monitors will be counted as 1 monitor regardless of the numbers.
Ex. 1) In case of 1 central monitor and 5 bedside monitors (A to E):
The total number of monitors that can display the data of Bedside Monitor A is 3 monitors
which consist of 1 central monitor and 2 out of 4 bedside monitors (B to E).
Ex. 2) In case of 3 central monitors (DS-7000 series or DS-5700) and 5 bedside monitors
(A to E):
The total number of monitors that can display the data of Bedside Monitor A is 5 monitors
which consist of 3 central monitors and 2 out of 4 bedside monitors (B to E).
 If the number of bedside monitors displaying the same bed exceeds the limit, the bedside
monitor with smaller ID will be prioritized.
 If monitoring 12-lead waveform on the central monitor, the total numbers of monitors that can
display the same bed will be reduced by 1.

NOTE
 This device cannot connect to a wired network of AU-5500N 8ch Recorder set as the
administrator.
Even if connected, other bed display, printing and other function cannot be used.

Other Bed Display/Alarm

The other bed display can be accessed from the menu or from the preprogrammed user key.
Also, by setting the other bed alarm to [ON], [Other Alarm] will be displayed when other bedside monitor generates
an alarm.By pressing this [Other Alarm] key, the display for the other bed can be accessed.

1 Press the [Menu], [Other Bed] keys.

2
4 6
5
3

 On the other bed selection menu, select the bed to display from maximum of 100 beds
(in case of DS-LAN III) connected to the wired network. The Room / Bed ID for the alarm

8-54
Chapter 8 Review Function Other Bed Display

generating bed will be displayed in red. The other bed alarm generating bed will be
indicated by an icon inside the Room/Bed ID key.

2 Select the area.

 Select the area to be displayed.

[All]: The beds for all the area connected to the network will be displayed.
[Area 1 to 5]: The beds for each area will be displayed.

3 Press the Room/Bed ID key to display the other bed.

Waveforms and numeric data for the selected bed will be displayed. If an alarm is generated for this bed, the
physiological alarm / arrhythmia alarm message will be displayed.

1 3

5
2
7
6

1 Message Area
The message for the other bed will be displayed.
2 Waveform Display Area
Maximum of 6 waveforms for the DS-LAN III network, and maximum of 2 waveforms for the DS-LAN II
network can be displayed.
3 By pressing the [Other Bed Alarm Silence] key on the other bed display, the alarm sound for the displayed
bed can be silenced.
4 Pressing this key will switch ON/OFF of menu title display.
5 Numeric Data Area
The numeric data at the bottom of the screen can be switched by using the / keys.
6 Press the [Waveform Selection] key to select the waveforms.
Waveform 1 is fixed as ECG, but other waveforms can be selected.
Maximum of 6 waveforms for the DS-LAN III network, and maximum of 2 waveforms for the DS-LAN II
network can be displayed.
Select the waveform from the waveform selection window.

7 Press the [Numeric Selection] key to display [Numeric Data Selection] window. The parameters to display
on the right side of the screen can be selected.

8-55
Chapter 8 Review Function Other Bed Display

4 Set the other bed alarm.

Press the [Alarm Display] key to change the screen to other alarm setup mode. When the mode is changed,
the [Alarm Display] key will be displayed in blue. To return to the original mode, press the [Alarm Display] key
again.
Select the bed to generate the other bed alarm.
Select the Room/Bed ID for the bed to generate the alarm. The selected bed will be indicated by blue
frame. To cancel the selection, press the key for the bed again.

[Select All], [Cancel All]: Selection/cancellation for all the beds can be performed at once.
[Enter]: The selection will be finalized.

5 Turn ON the other bed alarm.

[ON]: Other bed alarm will be generated.

[OFF]: Other bed alarm will not be generated.

6 Set the area.

All the beds connected to the network can be displayed, but it is also possible to divide the beds by areas,
which allows to display the beds by each area.

1
3

4
2

1 Press the key for "Area Setup" to change the screen to area setup mode. When the mode is changed, the
key for selected area will be displayed in blue. To return to the original mode, press the key again.
2 Select the Room/Bed ID for the bed to assign to the area. The selected bed will be indicated by blue frame.
To cancel the selection, press the key for the bed again.
[Select All], [Cancel All]: Selection/cancellation for all the beds can be performed at once.
[Enter]: The selection will be finalized.
3 Press the key for "Area Setup" to change the screen to area setup mode.
4 Press the [Area Name/Color] key.

1 Select the color to distinguish the area.

A triangle mark with the selected color will be displayed at the corner of the Room/Bed ID key.
2 Enter the area name using the numeric keys.
3 Maximum of 8 characters can be set for the area name.

8-56
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

Chapter 9 Printing
Printing Setup

This section describes the procedure for printing and recording.

For the DS-8400 System, the following type of printing/recording can be performed.
 Manual Printing
 Automatic Printing (Periodic Printing)
 Automatic Printing (Alarm Printing)
 Freeze Printing
 Graphic Printing (Trend, Tabular Trend, Recall, etc.)

REFERENCE
 The printed HR/PR data depends on the ECG/SpO2/BP selection for "Synchronized Mark/
Tone" under [Menu>Parameter>ECG (SpO2, BP)]. ( "Synchronized Mark/Tone Setup"
P7-10)
 Under the following condition, the amplitude value will be printed for the ECG calibration
waveform.
*[Bar (10mm)] is set for "Waveform Size Display" under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Display/
Print].
*[ON] is set for "Print Calibration" under [Manual Printing>Common]

1 Press the [Menu], [Manual Printing] or [Auto Printing] ("Basic Setup") keys.

The manual printing or automatic printing setup screen will be displayed.

Manual Printing (Basic)

The manual printing can be set to start from the time the key is pressed, or 8 sec./16 sec. prior to the time the key is
pressed.
Also, the printing can be set to automatically stop after 24 seconds, or continue to print until the "Print Start/Stop"
key is pressed again.
The printer can be selected from bedside monitor printer or central monitor printer.

1 2
4 3

1 Printer
[Bedside]: Data will be printed on the HR-800 of the bedside monitor.
[Central]: Data will be printed on the central monitor printer.

9-1
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

2 Waveform
On the "Select Wave" window, 3 waveforms can be selected for printing.
The key for the selected waveform will be displayed in blue.

3 Delay Time
[None]: Printing will start from the point the [Print Start/Stop] key is pressed.
[8 sec.] / [16 sec.]: Printing will start 8 sec. or 16 sec. prior from the point the [Print Start/Stop] key is pressed.

NOTE
 If [None] is selected for the manual printing delay time, QRS classification symbol will
not be printed. To print the QRS symbol, set the delay time to [8 sec.] or [16 sec.].
 The HR-800 can be inserted to the internal slot, or connected using the U-LINK cable.
Select which HR-800 to use from [Built-in] or [U-LINK] under [Initial Settings > System
> Other].

4 Print Duration
[24sec.]: Printing will automatically stop after 24 seconds.
[Cont.]: Printing will continue until the [Print Start/Stop] key is pressed again or until paper runs out.

REFERENCE
 For print duration of recall enlarged waveform, refer to
"Zoom Wave" P8-24
To Start/Stop the Printing

1 Press the user key or [Print Start/Stop] key on the HR-800.

Pressing this key during periodic printing, alarm printing, graphic printing, or recall printing will cease the
printing in process.

Inside the [Print Start/Stop] key, the output printer status for manual printing will be displayed.

Message Description

No Normal Operation

PAPER OUT There is no thermal paper.

CASSETTE Check the cassette.

CHECK? Other abnormality is found.

9-2
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

Example of Manual Printing

6 7 8 9 10 11
1
2
3

4
5

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

1 Bed ID 11 Numeric Data (Value at the beginning of the

waveform)

2 Patient Name 12 Printing Mode

3 Waveform Type, Lead, Size 13 Delay Time

4 Waveform Type, Scale 14 Pacemaker

5 Paper Speed 15 QRS Classification

6 Print Duration 16 R Wave Trigger Mark

7 Sex 17 Telemetry Channel

8 Age 18 Device Setting ID (Refer to the next table.)

9 Patient ID 19 Filter Mode

10 Patient Classification

The 21-digit number printed at the bottom of the paper indicates the settings of the device. At the 14th digit from the
left, filter setting (AC filter, drift filter) is printed in hexadecimal number.

0 8 Drift Filter ON

1 9 Drift Filter ON

2 AC Filter ON A AC Filter ON Drift Filter ON

3 AC Filter ON B AC Filter ON Drift Filter ON

4 C Drift Filter ON

5 D

6 AC Filter ON E AC Filter ON Drift Filter ON

7 AC Filter ON F AC Filter ON Drift Filter ON

Filter setting is OFF for the numbers in blank.

9-3
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

Manual Printing (12-Lead)

The monitoring 12-lead waveform can be printed on the bedside monitor printer.The delay time is 6 seconds. The
12-lead waveform cannot be printed on the central monitor printer.

2
3
4
1
5

1 Waveform Format
[Regular]: Printing will start from the limb leads. (In the order of I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6)
[Reverse]: Printing will start from the chest leads. (In the order of V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
aVF)

2 Print Calibration
[ON]: Calibration waveform will be printed. If [Bar (10mm)] is set for "Waveform Size Display" under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Display/Print], the amplitude value corresponding to the displayed waveform size will be
printed.
[OFF]: Calibration waveform will not be printed.

3 Position
[Center]: Equalizes the printing width of each lead so that the waveform baseline will be at the center. The
printing scale of the waveform will be also automatically adjusted.
[Proportional]: Equalizes the blank space between each lead to avoid overlapping of the waveforms. The
printing scale of the waveform will be also automatically adjusted.
[OFF]: Waveform position will not be adjusted when printing.

4 Printer Auto Scale

When position adjustment is [OFF], select whether or not to automatically adjust the scale.

NOTE
 The printer scale will be adjusted in the range of x1, x1/2, x1/4. It will not be adjusted to
x2 or x4 even if the amplitude is small.

[ON]: Printing scale will be automatically adjusted.

[OFF]: Printing will be performed with the displayed scale.

9-4
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

5 Lead Boundary
This setting will be displayed only when [Laser] is selected as the printer for "12-Lead Waveform", "12L
Analysis Result".
[ON]: Lead boundary between the leads will be printed.
[OFF]: Lead boundary will not be printed.

6 12-Lead Waveform Format

When [Bedside] is set as the printer for "12-Lead Waveform", select from [3Wavesx4]/[2Wavesx6].
When [Laser] is set as the printer for "12-Lead Waveform", select from [3Wavesx4]/[3Wavesx4+Rhy.]/
[6Wavesx2]/[12Waves].

Length of
Output Example Waveform Layout Each
Waveform

3 waves x 4
First column:
I,II,III
1 2
Second column:
aVR, aVL, aVF
6 sec.
Third column:
V1, V2, V3
3 4 Fourth column:
V4, V5, V6

2 waves x 6
First column:
I,II
1 2
Second column:
III, aVR
Third column:
aVL, aVF
3 4 6 sec.
Fourth column:
V1, V2
Fifth column:
V3, V4
5 6 Sixth column:
V5, V6

7 12-Lead Analysis Format

When [Bedside] is set as the printer for "12L Analysis Result", the format is fixed as [3Wavesx4].
When [Laser] is set as the printer for "12L Analysis Result", select from [6Wavesx2 (2 pages)]/[6Wavesx2 (1
page)]/[3Wavesx4+Rhy.].

9-5
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

Manual Printing (Other Setup)

Select the printer for graphic printing and recall printing.

1 2

1 Press the key for [Graphic Printing] to display the

"Printer Selection" window.
[Bedside]: Data will be printed on the HR-800 of the
bedside monitor.

[Central]: Data will be printed on the central monitor

printer.

[Laser]: Data will be printed on the laser printer.

NOTE
 The HR-800 can be inserted to the internal slot, or connected using the U-LINK cable.
Select which HR-800 to use from [Built-in] or [U-LINK] under [Initial Settings > System >
Other].

REFERENCE
 Graphic printing is a printing performed from the data review screen such as graphic trend
and tabular trend.
 To select laser printer, it is necessary to select [ON] or [DS-LAN] for "Network Printer"
under [Menu > Initial Settings > External Device > Network] in advance.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Laser Printer Setup" P4-30)

2 Recall Printing
[Graphic Printing]: Recall data will be output on the printer selected for "Graphic Printing".
[Manual Printing]: Recall data will be output on the printer selected for "Printer" under "Basic".

9-6
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

Automatic Printing (Alarm Printing)

When numeric data alarm or arrhythmia alarm occurs, printing will automatically start.
NOTE
 The alarm detection is performed each second, and if more than one alarm occurs at the
same time, one data will be stored according to the alarm priority.
 Maximum of 3 alarm data can be stored. If more than 3 alarms generate, the higher priority
alarm will replace the previously stored lower priority alarm. The stored data will be deleted
once it is printed.
 Priority of alarm printing factor ;
ASYSTOLE > VF > VT > Ext Tachy > Ext Brady > SLOW VT > TACHY > BRADY > RUN >
HR (HR / PR_SpO2 / PR_IBP) > APNEA > BP1 (or ART) > SpO2 >
NIBP > RR (RR_IMP / RR_CO2 / RR_GAS / RR_VENT) > EtCO2 >
GAS (CO2-E / CO2-I / AGT-E / AGT-I / O2-E / O2-I / N2O-I) > MAC > MV > PAUSE >
COUPLET > BIGEMINY > TRIGEMINY > FREQUENT > SVT > IRREGULAR RR >
PROLONGED RR > S FREQUENT > S COUPLET > VPC > SVPC > NOT CAPTURE
> NOT PACING > BP2 > BP3 > BP4 > BP5 > BP6 > BP7 > BP8 > ST > TEMP > Tb >
InspCO2 > SpCO > SpMet > SpHb > RR_SpO2 > PEAK > PEEP > BIS

1 3
2 4
5

1 Alarm Printing

[ON]: Printing will automatically start at alarm occurrence.

[OFF]: Printing will not start at alarm occurrence.

2 Alarm Factor Selection

The "Factor Selection" window will be displayed.

The selected alarm factor key will be displayed in blue.
The alarm OFF mark will be displayed inside the key for the
parameter in alarm OFF condition.
[Select All Arrhythmia]: All arrhythmia factors will be selected.
[All ON]: All alarm factors will be selected.
[All OFF]: All selections for the alarm factor will be cancelled.

3 Printer

[Bedside]: Data will be printed on the HR-800 of the bedside monitor.

[Central]: Data will be printed on the central monitor printer.

4 Print Duration
(
"Manual Printing (Basic)" P9-1)

9-7
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

NOTE
 The delay time differs depending on the print duration.
 The HR-800 can be inserted to the internal slot, or connected using the U-LINK cable.
Select which HR-800 to use from [Built-in] or [U-LINK] under [Initial Settings > System >
Other].

Delay Time

Print Duration Neonate

Adult Child
Numeric Data Alarm Arrhythmia Alarm

12 sec. 12 sec. 8 sec. 12 sec.

12 sec.
8 sec. for the multigas unit alarm

24 sec. 16 sec. 16 sec. 16 sec. 16 sec.

5 Waveform
(
"Manual Printing (Basic)" P9-1)
[Alarm]: Prints the waveform of the alarm factor.

Automatic Printing (Periodic Printing)

The printing will be automatically performed with the selected interval.

NOTE
 If the periodic printing is interrupted due to paper out, etc., the latest periodic printing will be
performed when the printing is resumed.
 QRS classification symbol will not be printed for periodic printing.

1 3
2 4
5

1 Periodic Printing
[ON]: Printing will automatically start at fixed interval.
[OFF]: Turns OFF the periodic printing function.

2 Printer
[Bedside]: Data will be printed on the HR-800 of the bedside monitor.
[Central]: Data will be printed on the central monitor printer.

9-8
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

3 Timer/Interval for Periodic Printing

Display Example for "Timer" Display Example for "Interval"

[Timer]: Printing will automatically start at selected time.

[Interval]: Printing will automatically start at selected interval.

REFERENCE
 If [5 min.] is selected for [Interval], the time will be displayed in real time such as 10:00,
10:05, ...10:25. If [60 min.] is selected, it will be displayed as 10:00, 11:00, 12:00.

4 Print Duration
The printing will automatically stop after the selected duration.

5 Waveform
(
"Manual Printing (Basic)" P9-1)

Common Setup for Printing

The printing condition common for manual printing and automatic printing can be set.

1 2

4 3

Display Example for Automatic Printing

1 QRS Classification
[ON]: QRS classification symbol will be printed with the ECG waveform.

Symbol Description

N (Normal) Normal QRS beat

V (VPC) Ventricular extrasystole

S (SVPC) Supraventricular extrasystole

P (Pacing Beat) Pacing beat

F (Fusion Beat) Fusion beat of pacing and spontaneous beat

9-9
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

Symbol Description

? (Undetermined Beat) Learning arrhythmia, or unmatched beat

[OFF]: QRS classification symbol will not be printed.

NOTE
 The QRS symbol cannot be printed for manual printing if the "Delay Time" is set to
[None], and for periodic printing. To print the QRS symbol, set the "Delay Time" to [8
sec.] or [16 sec.] for manual printing.
 The "S" (QRS symbol) will be printed as "N" on the central printer.

2 Printing Speed
[25mm/s]: The printing speed will be set to 25mm/s.
[50mm/s]: The printing speed will be set to 50mm/s.

3 Print NIBP Data

[ON]: Oscillation graph and NIBP data will be printed after the waveform.
[OFF]: Oscillation graph and NIBP data will not be printed.

4 Print Calibration
[Top]: Calibration waveform will be printed at the beginning of the waveform.
[Each Page]: Calibration waveform will be printed in 18.75 cm interval.
[OFF]: Calibration waveform will not be printed.

Freeze Printing

The waveform trace can be suspended and printed from 12 seconds prior to the point the waveform trace was
stopped.
The waveform selected for manual printing will be printed. The print duration is 12 seconds.
To freeze the waveform display, the [Freeze] key needs to be assigned as user key.

( "To Configure the Display" P10-4)

1 Press the [Freeze] key on the user key.

The waveform trace will stop.

2 Press the [Print Start/Stop] key.

The displayed waveform will be printed.

Freeze printing will be output on the bedside monitor printer. The waveforms selected for manual printing
will be printed.

9-10
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

12-lead Waveform Printing

When the display layout is "12-Lead", pressing the [12-Lead Print] key will start 12-lead waveform printing.

1 Select "12-Lead" for the display layout.

(
"To Configure the Display" P10-4)

2 Press the [12-Lead Print] key.

Printing will start.

The printing duration of the waveforms for each format are as follows.

Printing Format Printing Duration Delay Time

When printed on the bedside monitor 3 waves x 4

6 sec. 6 sec.
printer: 2 waves x 6

3Wavesx4*1 2.5 sec.

6Wavesx2*1 5 sec.
When printed on the laser printer: 10 sec.
3 wavesx4+Rhythm*1 12.5 sec.

12 Waves*2 10 sec.

*1 [CONTINUOUS]: The waveform output will be in the time sequence of waveform block order.

*2 [COHERENT]: The waveform output will be in the same time phase for all waveforms.

9-11
Chapter 9 Printing Printing Setup

9-12
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Chapter 10 System Configuration

Display Configuration

This section describes about the display configuration type and the procedure to configure the display.
The waveform/numeric data display can be configured according to the monitoring purpose. Basic display layouts
are as follows.
Standard
12-lead
Numeric Data/Bottom

When ECG cascade or block cascade is selected, a full disclosure waveform can be displayed. The user keys can be
also assigned to the numeric data area.
If extended board (optional) is equipped, up to 2 extended displays can be used. (extended display function)

Display Example

Standard (Box Layout: Right) 12-Lead (Box Layout: Right)

Standard (Box Layout: Bottom 5 rows)

On this system, 9 main modes and 6 sub modes can be preprogrammed according to the monitoring purpose.
By registering the configuration to each mode, the display configuration setups at admittance of patient can be
simplified by just selecting one of the modes.

( "To Select the User Mode" P5-8)
It is recommended to program the display mode in rough classification such as patient’s condition, monitoring
purpose (ICU or surgery), and if necessary, perform unique setup for each patient.

10-1
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Numeric Data Selection

The numeric data to be displayed can be selected on the "Numeric Data Selection" window.
The parameters of the "Numeric Data Selection" window can be assigned to the numeric data box on the home
display.

( "Numeric Data Box Display (for each parameter)" P3-8)

Example: Page 1

The Numeric Data Box Size for Each Parameter

Size
*1
Numeric Data Width W1/2 W1 W2
Height*2 H1 H1 H2 H3 H1 H2 H3

HR/PR x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

HR x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
PR_SpO2 x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

PR_IBP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

VPC, PACE x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ST, VPC x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ST-A, ST-B, ST-C x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

BP1 to BP8 x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
NIBP x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

NIBP List x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

SpO2 x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

SpO2, PR x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

SpCO x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

SpMet x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

SpHb x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Sp* x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

RR_IMP, RR_CO2, RR_VENT, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

RR_SpO2

T1 to T8, Tb ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

T1/T2, T3/T4, T5/T6, T7/T8 x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

ΔTEMP-A, ΔTEMP-B, ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ΔTEMP-C, ΔTEMP-D

VENT x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

10-2
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

The Numeric Data Box Size for Each Parameter

Size
*1
Numeric Data Width W1/2 W1 W2

Height*2 H1 H1 H2 H3 H1 H2 H3

P-V, F-V x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

SvO2, CO x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

SvO2, CO, CI x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

CO, SV, SVV x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

BIS x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

AEP x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

INVOS x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

CO2 x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

O2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

N2O ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Agent x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

RR, CO2, Agent, O2, N2O x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

CO2, Agent, O2, N2O x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

RR, Agent, O2, N2O x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

Agent, O2, N2O x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

Agent, N2O x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

GAS, SPIRO x x ○ ○ x ○ ○
SPIRO x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

HEMO x x ○ ○ x ○ ○

HEMO-I x x ○ ○ x ○ ○
STOPWATCH x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

VENT-A x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

VENT-B x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hemo/etc-A x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Hemo/etc-B x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
*3
Extended Function-A x x ○ ○ x ○ ○*3

*1: For LC-8016TC, W1/2 is about 30 mm, W1 is about 60 mm, W2 is about 120 mm

For LC-8018TC, W1/2 is about 34mm, W1 is about 69mm, W2 is about 138mm

*2: For LC-8016TC: H1 is about 16 mm, H2 is about 32 mm, H3 is about 48 mm (H1 is the same length as waveform areax2)

For LC-8018TC: H1 is about 17mm, H2 is about 36mm, H3 is about 55mm (H1 is the same length as waveform areax2)

*3: For "Extended Function-A", H6 is the maximum height.

10-3
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

To Configure the Display

1 Press the [Menu], [Display Config.] ("Basic Setup") keys.

The display configuration menu will be displayed.

2
1 Layout
(
 "Changing the Layout" P10-4) 1
2 Numeric Data 3
(
"Changing the Displayed Numeric Data"
P10-5) 4
5
3 Waveform 6
(
"Changing the Displayed Waveform" P10-7)
7
4 Sweep Speed 8
(
"Sweep Speed" P10-9)

5 Short Trend
(
"Short Trend Display" P10-8)

6 Zoom Wave
(
"Enlarged Waveform Setup" P10-10)

7 User Key
(
"User Key Setup" P10-10)

8 Detail Setup
(
 "Detail Setup" P10-11)

Changing the Layout

The layout can be changed with the following
procedure.
3
1 2
Press [Change] for "Layout". 4
The "Layout" window will be displayed.

2 Select the layout to be displayed.

When Right & Bottom, "Left & Bottom" ,
"Bottom" is selected, select the number of rows.

3 Select the user key location from [Right], [Left], [Bottom], and select the number of columns.
When bottom 2 rows for "Right/Left & Bottom" is selected for display layout, "Bottom" cannot be selected.

4 Select the numeric data box location from [Right] or [Left].

5 The displayed parameters will be automatically located with the selected

layout. Check the home display.

If there are parameters which cannot be displayed due to display area,
"Delete Confirmation" window will be displayed.
(shown on right)
Pressing the [Set] key will set the layout with some parameters not
displayed.
Pressing the [Cancel] key will return to the "Layout" window.

10-4
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

6 If not changing the layout, press the [Cancel] key.

Adjusting the Layout Automatically

The display layout can be automatically adjusted. The automatic mode can be selected from the following two types.
Type-1 (All Auto Mode)
The measured parameters will be automatically located according to the priority. The display layout remains
the same. (The layout will change if there is not enough space to display all parameters.)

The display priority can be set on the "Auto Display Configuration" under "Initial Settings". ( Maintenance
Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)
Type-2 (Auto Mode depending on Parameter Quantity)
The parameters will be automatically located according to the parameter quantity using the current display
configuration. The display layout, numeric data location and user keys on the numeric data area remain the
same.

1 Select [Type-1] or [Type-2].

2 Select [Auto] for "Layout".

NOTE
 For both [Type-1] and [Type-2], the waveform layout is equivalent to that when the [Same
as Numeric] key is pressed.
 When [Auto] is selected for the display layout, the following changes are not possible.
Changing the Displayed Waveform
Changing the Displayed Numeric Data
Changing the short trend parameters

Changing the Displayed Numeric Data

The displayed numeric data can be changed with the following procedure.

CAUTION
 When performing the telemetry or wired network transmission, configure the display so
that the numeric data corresponding to the waveform is displayed. If not, the displayed
waveform or numeric data may not be transmitted.

NOTE
 For HR/PR data, an alarm will be generated only for the current parameter displayed in
the HR/ PR numeric data box. The Parameter alarm will not be generated unless the data
is displayed.
The parameter for the HR/PR numeric data box can be selected by pressing the key for
"HR/PR" on the ECG, BP, SpO2 parameter setup window/floating window or by pressing
the [HR/PR] user key.

10-5
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

1 Press the [Change] key for "Numeric Data".

The display will change to numeric data selection mode.

The "Numeric Data Selection" window will be displayed.

3 2
4

2 Press the numeric data display area to change the parameter.

By pressing the selected area again, the selection will be canceled.
To start again from the beginning, press the [Reselect Area] key.
Adjust the size of the selected area which is indicated by blue box.

3 Select the parameter on the "Numeric Data Selection" window.

Press the / and keys to switch the displayed parameters.
(
"Numeric Data Selection" P10-2)
4 Press [Continuous Setup] to switch to continuous setup mode.

On the continuous setup mode, the numeric data box area can be sequentially selected.

5 Press the [Setup] key.

The setup will be finalized.

NOTE
 The selected parameter may not be displayed depending on the combination of the
parameters and size.
In such case, "Size Error" will be displayed in numeric data area. Adjust the size.
(
"Numeric Data Selection" P10-2)

10-6
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Changing the Displayed Waveform

The displayed waveform can be changed with the following procedure.

CAUTION
 When performing the telemetry or wired network transmission, configure the display so
that the numeric data corresponding to the waveform is displayed. If not, the displayed
waveform or numeric data may not be transmitted.

1 Press [Change] for "Waveform".

The display will change to waveform selection mode.

The "Waveform Selection" window will be displayed.

3
4 2
5

2 Press the waveform display area to change the parameter.

By pressing the selected area again, the selection will be canceled.
To start again from the beginning, press the [Reselect Area] key.
Adjust the size of the selected area which is indicated by blue box.

3 Select the parameter on the "Waveform Selection" window.

Press the / and keys to switch the displayed parameters.
(
"Waveform Selection" P10-14)

4 Press [Continuous Setup] to switch to continuous setup mode.

On the continuous setup mode, the waveform display area can be sequentially selected.

5 Press the [Setup] key.

The setup will be finalized.

10-7
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Short Trend Display

The parameters and display duration for the short trend display can be set.

1
2
3

NOTE
 The short trend can be displayed when the numeric data layout is "Right"/"Right&Bottom"/
"Left"/"Left&Bottom"/"Bottom".
 When 12-lead layout is displayed, ST value of each lead can be displayed in short trend.

1 Press the [Change] key to set the 3 6 4 5 1 2 3

parameters for the short trend display.

1 The parameters for the current

waveform display area will be
displayed.

2 The selected short trend parameters will

be displayed.

3 Select the short trend area, and assign

the parameter for that area.

4 [Same as Numeric]: The same parameters for the currently displayed numeric data will be set as the short
trend parameters.

5 [Same as Waveform]: The same parameters for the currently displayed waveform will be set as the short
trend parameters.

6 Press [Continuous Setup] to switch to continuous setup mode. On the continuous setup mode, the short
trend display area can be sequentially selected.

NOTE
 The [Change] key will be displayed when [User Setup] is selected for "Short Trend"
(Display Config.>Detail Setup).
 [Same as Numeric], [Same as Waveform] will be applied for the displayed parameters at
the point when the key is pressed. The short trend parameters will not automatically
change when the displayed parameters are changed.

2 Select ON/OFF of short trend display.

[ON]: Short trend will be displayed on the home display.

[OFF]: Short trend will not be displayed on the home display.
[Overlap]: Short trend will be displayed overlapped with the waveform.

10-8
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

3 When [ON] or [Overlap] is selected, set the time span. The selectable duration differs depending on the short
trend data resolution and display width (7 levels).

Display Width (7 levels)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

5 sec. Display OFF 5 min. 10 min. 15 min. 20 min. 25 min. 30 min.

Data
10 sec. Display OFF 10 min. 20 min. 30 min. 40 min. 50 min. 60 min.
Resolution
30 sec. Display OFF 30 min. 60 min. 90 min. 120 min. 150 min. 180 min.

4 Select the display duration for the short trend.

1 Press the waveform display area on the home display.

2 The trend display time will change to the time of the pressed position.

NOTE
 When an alarm is generated for the recall alarm factor, recall screen will be displayed.
 When the cursor function is enabled, a cursor will be displayed. The display duration can
be changed under "Short Trend" (Menu > Display Config.)

Sweep Speed
The sweep speed can be set with the following procedure. The sweep speed can be set differently for the circulatory
system waveforms (ECG, BP) and respiratory system waveforms.

1 Select the circulatory sweep speed from [6.25]/[12.5]/[25]/[50] (mm/s).

2 Select the respiratory sweep speed from [6.25]/[12.5]/[25] (mm/s).

10-9
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Enlarged Waveform Setup

By selecting [ON] for "Zoom", the displayed waveform size and sweep speed will be doubled.

NOTE
 When the sweep speed is set to [50 mm/s], "Zoom" cannot be set to [ON].
 Scale will not be enlarged.

User Key Setup

The user key can be set with the following procedure.

1 Press the [Change] key for "User Key".

The display will change to user key selection mode.

The "User Key Selection" window will be displayed.

3 2

4
5

2 Select the area to change the user key.

By pressing the selected area again, the selection will be canceled.
To start again from the beginning, press the [Reselect Area] key.
Adjust the size of the selected area which is indicated by blue box.

3 Select the function to assign to the user key on the "User Key Selection" window.

NOTE
 The displayed user key can be switched between 2 displays using the [User Key Up] and
[User Key Down] keys.
 Press the
15)
/ keys to switch the user key selection. (
"User Key Selection" P10-

10-10
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

4 Press [Continuous Setup] to switch to continuous setup mode.

On the continuous setup mode, the user key display area can be sequentially selected.

5 Press the [Setup] key.

The setup will be finalized.

Detail Setup
1 Press the key for "Detail Setup".

The "Detail Setup" window will be displayed.

1
7 2
3
8 11
4 12

5 13
14
6
9 10

15 19
16
17
18

20 24
21 25
22 26
23 27

1 Alarm Limit Display

The alarm limit can be displayed inside the numeric data box.
[Graph]: Alarm limit will be displayed in bar graph.
[Numeric]: Alarm limit will be displayed in numeric format.
[OFF]: Alarm limit will not be displayed.

2 At Alarm Occurrence
The numeric data display format at alarm occurrence can be selected.
[Reversed]: The numeric data will be displayed in reversed color at alarm occurrence.
[3D]: The numeric data will be displayed in 3D at alarm occurrence.

3 Grid
The ECG waveform can be displayed on the grid.
[ON]: Grid will be displayed.
[Bold]: Grid will be displayed in bold format.
[OFF]: Grid will not be displayed.

REFERENCE
 Short trend and grid cannot be displayed overlapped.

10-11
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

4 Scale
The scale can be selected from [ON]/[Bold1]/[Bold2].

5 Thickness
The thickness of the displayed waveforms can be selected from [Thin] / [Regular] / [Thick].

6 Clip
Whether or not to clip the overlapped waveforms of the neighboring display area can be selected.

7 Fill CO2 Waveform

Whether or not to fill in the CO2 waveform from the baseline can be selected.

8 Fill O2 Waveform
Whether or not to fill in the O 2 waveform from the baseline can be selected.

9 Fill Agent Waveform

Whether or not to fill in the Agent waveform from the baseline can be selected.

10 BP Overlap
The overlapping BP waveforms can be set for each overlap group 1 to 3.

11 RR Overlap
The overlapping RR waveforms can be set.

12 12-Lead ST Wave
The ST waveform to be displayed for the 12-Lead layout can be set.
[Ref.]: The ST reference waveform will be displayed.
[Average]: The average waveform will be displayed.

13 12-Lead ST Short Trend

The display format for the ST short trend can be selected from [Plot]/[Fill]/[OFF].

14 ST/VPC/Arrhy. Alarm Display

Whether or not to display the ST value, VPC (integrated value of 1 minute), arrhythmia alarm message
inside the HR numeric data box can be selected.

15 Block Cascade
The waveform combination for block cascade display can be set.

16 Quantity of Displaying Waveforms

Displays when the LC-8018TC is used. Quantity of displaying waveform can be selected only when the
layout position is Right/ Left.
[Standard]: 22 waveforms can be selected.
[Extended]: 27 waveforms can be selected.

17 Extended Function
[Graphic/Tabular Trend]: Graphic trend and tabular trend will be displayed in the waveform display area.
[OCRG]: OCRG will be displayed in the waveform display area.

NOTE
When the extended function is selected, the waveform set to the same display area with
the graphic/tabular trend will not be displayed.

18 Extended Function Size

Select the display area size for graphic/tabular trend from [Big]/[Medium]/[Small].

NOTE
OCRG size for the extended function is fixed to [small].

10-12
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

19 OCRG Update Time

Set 1 second or 2 seconds as the update time for OCRG data in the extended function display.

20 Short Trend
The short trend parameters can be linked to the displayed numeric data or waveform.
[Link with Numeric]: The short trend layout will be linked to the displayed numeric data on the home display.
[Link with Waveform]: The short trend layout will be linked to the displayed waveform on the home display.
[User Setup]: User settings will be applied for the short trend layout.

21 Short Trend Scale

The short trend scale for the following parameters can be synchronized with the scale of trend or waveform.
BP / PEAK / TV2 / O2 / Agent

22 Display Parameter
Whether or not to display the parameter name of the displayed short trend can be set.
[ON]: Displays the parameter name with the corresponding color of the parameter.
[Gray]: Displays the parameter name in gray.
[OFF]: Parameter name will not be displayed.

23 Reference Line Function

Whether or not to display the reference lines can be set for the following parameters.
HR, ST, BP1 to 4, NIBP, EtCO2, SpO2, BIS
[Enable]: The reference line function will be enabled. On the "Short Trend Setup" window (displayed when
short trend scale area is pressed), ON/ OFF of reference line display and reference line position can be set
for each parameter.
[Disable]: The reference line function will be disabled.

NOTE
 The reference line function cannot be used for the overlapped short trend display.
 When [Enable] is selected, the function to highlight the alarm generated data cannot
be used.

24 Cursor Function
Whether or not to display a cursor can be selected. By displaying a cursor, the measured data and review
data (tabular trend/graphic trend/zoom wave) at the time of cursor position can be displayed.
[Enable]: The cursor function will be enabled. However, the function to enlarge/reduce the display duration
by pressing the short trend area will be disabled.
[Disable]: The cursor function will be disabled.

NOTE
 The cursor function cannot be used for the overlapped short trend display.
 When [Enable] is selected, the function to highlight the alarm generated data cannot
be used.
 The cursor will be displayed when the short trend area is pressed, and will be
automatically cleared after a short while.

25 Cursor Linkage
When [Enable] is selected for "Cursor Function", the review data to be displayed can be selected from
[Tabular Trend] / [Graphic Trend] / [Zoom Wave].
The zoom wave can be displayed only when the full disclosure waveform function is enabled.

26 Short Trend Overlap

Maximum of 4 parameters can be displayed overlapped in the
same short trend area.
However 2 blocks of waveform area are required for each
parameter. For example, to display 3 parameters in the same
short trend area, 6 blocks of waveform area are required.

10-13
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

27 Data Resolution, Display Duration

Select the data resolution from [5 sec.]/[10 sec.]/[30 sec.]. The display duration will differ depending on the
"Data Resolution" setting.
For [5sec.], maximum display duration is 30 minutes.
For [10sec.], maximum display duration is 1 hour.
For [30sec.], maximum display duration is 3 hours.

2 Press the [Home] key to check the configured display.

NOTE
 If the numeric data box is configured at the bottom of display, user keys cannot be
assigned to the numeric data box area.
 After configuring the display, make sure to verify the configured display by pressing the
[Home] key.
 To maintain the configured display even after the power is turned OFF or after the
discharge procedure, store the configuration to one of the user modes, or select [Backup]
for "Display Configuration" under Initial Settings>User I/F>At Power ON/At Discharge.
(
 "To Select the User Mode" P5-8)

Waveform Selection

The waveform to be displayed can be selected on the "Waveform Selection" window.

This section explains the details of the displayed waveforms.

1 2 2 3 4
Page 1 Page 2 Page 3

1 ECG1 to ECG12
The ECG waveform of the specified channel will be displayed. Minimum of 2 blocks are required to display the
ECG waveform.

2 ECG1 to ECG12 Cascade

The ECG waveforms of the specified channel will be displayed in cascade. Minimum of 2 blocks are required
to display in cascade.

3 BP Overlap 1 to 3
The BP waveform (BP1 to BP8) set on "BP Overlap Setup" will be displayed.
If the waveform display area is too small to display the assigned BP waveforms, it will be displayed in the
priority from smaller channel numbers.

4 RR Overlap 1 to 3
The RR waveform (CO2, O2, Agent) set on "RR Overlap Setup" will be displayed.
If the waveform display area is too small to display the assigned waveforms, it will be displayed in the priority

10-14
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

of CO2>O2>Agent.

5 Block Cascade
The waveforms (2 to 6) set on the "Block Cascade Setup" will be displayed in one block.

Other than the waveforms explained above, the selected waveform on the "Waveform Selection Window" will be
displayed.

User Key Selection

The user keys can be set on the "User Key Selection" window.
This section explains the function for each user key.

Example: Page 1

Page 1
OFF Blank key will be displayed.

Home The display will return to the home display. The [Home] key is also available as fixed key.

Menu The menu screen will be displayed. The [Menu] key is also available as fixed key.
Minimize Window Pressing this key will minimize the currently displayed window and will be stored to the user
key.

Restore Window The minimized window will be redisplayed.

User Key The first and second page of the user key area will switch.
This key will be located at the same position for both first and second page.

Alarm Silence Alarm sound will be suspended for fixed amount of time. The [Alarm Silence] key is also
available as fixed key. By pressing the key for more than 3 seconds while the alarm is not
generated, it will bring the system to "Alarm Sound Suspend" condition.

Alarm Suspend Alarm (sound and display) will be suspended for fixed amount of time.

NIBP Start/Stop NIBP measurement will start/stop.

NIBP Cont. NIBP continuous measurement will start/stop.

Print Start/Stop Manual printing will start/stop.

Monitor Suspend Confirmation window to suspend monitoring will be displayed.

Night Mode Night mode will turn ON/OFF.

Freeze Waveform trace will freeze for fixed amount of time. Pressing the [Print Start/Stop] key while
in freeze condition will print the frozen waveform. Holding down the key will start the
waveform trace again.

Key Lock Touch key operation will turn ON/OFF. It can be used when cleaning the display panel.

Mode Selection User mode selection screen will be displayed.

Oxygenator Mode The home display will switch to oxygenator mode.

10-15
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Admit/Discharge Admit/Discharge screen will be displayed.

Rapid Discharge Confirmation window to erase the data will be displayed.

HR/PR The HR/PR numeric data box will be switched between HR and PR.

Page 2

HR/PR Source The parameter for HR/PR Source will be automatically selected.

BP Zero Zero balance of BP1 to BP8 will be performed.

Leads List of lead groups will be displayed, and selecting a lead group will display the lead
selection window. It cannot be assigned to the numeric data area. 2 blocks are required to
assign this key.
ECG Size (All Leads) The waveform size for all ECG leads can be changed.

Scale The home display will change to scale selection mode.

Scale (Extended Display) The extended display waveform size/scale setup menu will be displayed. This setting can
be performed only when [OFF] is set for "Sync wave size/scale of extended display with
main unit".

SpO2-1 Display ON/OFF SpO2-1 display will turn ON/OFF.

SpO2-2 Display ON/OFF SpO2-2 display will turn ON/OFF.

CO2 Display ON/OFF CO2 display will turn ON/OFF.

GAS Display ON/OFF Multigas unit data display will turn ON/OFF.
Auto Display Config. The display will be automatically configured with the currently measured parameters.

Enlarged Display For the standard display layout, the numeric data box width will change.

Short Trend ON/OFF Short Trend display will turn ON/OFF.

Graphic/Tabular Trend ON/OFF The graphic/tabular trend display will turn ON/OFF.

Transparent Window ON/OFF Transparent window will turn ON/OFF.

Change Palette Palette selection window will be displayed.

Graphic Trend The graphic trend will be displayed.

Trend (Group) List of trend groups will be displayed, and selecting a trend group will display the graphic
trend.
Tabular Trend The tabular trend will be displayed.

Tabular Trend (Group) List of tabular trend groups will be displayed, and selecting a trend group will display the
tabular trend.

Page 3

NIBP List NIBP list will be displayed.

Recall Recall screen will be displayed.

Alarm History Alarm history will be displayed.

OCRG OCRG screen will be displayed.

ST ST screen will be displayed.

Cardiac Output CO measurement screen will be displayed.

Drug Calculation The drug calculation menu will be displayed.

PCWP PCWP measurement screen will be displayed.

If BP labeled as PAP is not measured, this screen will not be displayed.
Hemodynamics Hemodynamics screen will be displayed.

Lung Function Lung Function screen will be displayed.

Full Disclosure Waveform The full disclosure waveform will be displayed.

12-Lead Analysis 12-lead analysis screen will be displayed.

12-Lead Print The 12-lead record setup screen will be displayed.

Tone/Volume The "Tone/Volume" menu will be displayed.

10-16
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

NIBP Auto Mode NIBP Auto Mode window will be displayed.

Alarm Setup (All) Alarm settings for all parameters will be displayed.

Alarm Setup (Basic) Alarm settings for basic parameters will be displayed.

Manual Printing Manual printing setup screen will be displayed.

Display Configuration The display configuration window will be displayed.

Time/ Date The Time/Date setup window will be displayed.

Page 4

Other Bed Other bed screen will be displayed.

Stopwatch Stopwatch screen will be displayed.

Group 1 to 5 Selection list of key group 1 to 5 will be displayed.

Event Event selection list will be displayed.

The selected event will be saved as recall waveform.

Print (LBP) Cancel Printing on the laser printer will be canceled.

Oxygenator Mode The "Oxygenator Mode" menu will be displayed.

Main Mode 1(Initial) Main mode 1 (Initial) will be set as the monitoring mode.
Main Mode 2 (Hemo.) Main Mode 2 (Hemo.) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Main Mode 3 (Cardiac) Main Mode 3 (Cardiac) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Main Mode 4 (Local) Main mode 4 (Local) will be set as the monitoring mode.
Main Mode 5 (Full) Main mode 5 (Fulll) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Main Mode 6 (Heart) Main mode 6 (Heart) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Main Mode 7 (Neo.) Main mode 7 (Neo.) will be set as the monitoring mode.
Main Mode 8 (Recovery) Main mode 8 (Recovery) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Main Mode 9 (Cardiac) Main Mode 9 (Cardiac) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Sub Mode 1 (Induct.) Sub Mode 1 (Induct.) will be set as the monitoring mode.
Page 5

Sub Mode 2 (Surgery) Sub Mode 2 (Surgery) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Sub Mode 3 (Waking) Sub Mode 3 (Waking) will be set as the monitoring mode.
Sub Mode 4 (12-Lead) Sub Mode 4 (12-Lead) will be set as the monitoring mode.

Sub Mode 5 Sub Mode 5 will be set as the monitoring mode.

Sub Mode 6 Sub Mode 6 will be set as the monitoring mode.

* The default mode names are displayed inside the brackets. The mode names can be changed.

Maintenance Manual "To Program the User Mode" P5-31)

(

WARNING
 After changing the mode, make sure that the monitoring setting is appropriate.
When the mode is changed, patient classification, alarm settings, etc. will be changed.

NOTE
 If the [Minimize] key is not set to the user key area, pressing the (Minimize) key on
the window will function the same as the (Close) key.

10-17
Chapter 10 System Configuration Display Configuration

Changing the Display Layout from the Home Display

When using the LC-8016TC/LC-8018TC Display Unit, holding down the home display area will change the mode
to display layout change mode.

On the display layout change mode, the following layout change can be performed.
 Changing the displayed position of the waveform/numeric data
 Changing the size of the waveform/numeric data
 Adding the waveform/numeric data
 Deleting the waveform/numeric data

Changing the Displayed Position of the Waveform/Numeric Data

Drag the waveform/numeric data to a desired position.
The color of the dragged position will change to yellow.
By releasing the finger where the color has changed to yellow, the data will be located to a new position.
NOTE
 By pressing the [UNDO] key which is displayed after changing the position, the previous
operation can be canceled.

Changing the Size of the Waveform/Numeric Data

The size of the waveform/numeric data can be changed by pinch in/out operation.
NOTE
 To enlarge the size, there should be enough space on the display.
 The size can be enlarged downwards or rightwards.

Adding the Waveform/Numeric Data

The waveform/numeric data can be added by touching the free area, or by holding down the interspace of currently
displayed waveform/numeric data.

Deleting the Waveform/Numeric Data

The waveform/numeric data can be deleted by flicking the corresponding display area.

Ending the Display Layout Change Mode

The display layout change mode can be ended by pressing the [Setup completed] key on the upper right of the screen.

10-18
Chapter 10 System Configuration Tone/Volume

Tone/Volume

This section explains the tone/volume setup procedure for alarm sound, HR synchronized tone, key sound, and boot/
shutdown sound. The tone/volume setup screen also allows to turn OFF the ventilator alarm sound.
The volume of the sound which notifies the completion of BP zero balance and NIBP measurement can be adjusted
on "Other" setting.
NOTE
 The tone setup for the synchronized tone is effective only for HR and BP synchronized tone.
The tone for SpO2 synchronized sound will change according to the SpO2 value. The tone
will increase as the SpO2 value increases, and vice versa.
 When the DS-8400 is activated with the DS-8007 connected and soon enters into standby
mode, a shutdown sound may generate on the DS-8007.
 The start-up sound will always generate for the DS-8400 even when the "Boot/Shutdown"
sound is set to minimum level.

1 Press the [Menu], [Sound] ("Basic Setup") keys.

The "Tone/Volume" menu will be displayed.

2 Set the volume.

WARNING
 Changing the setting for "Alarm System" (Initial Settings > Alarm) will also change the
alarm volume and tone setting. Make sure to check the volume and tone when the setting
is changed.

CAUTION
 Pay attention not to set the alarm volume too low to avoid missing any important alarms.
The alarm sound for ECG, SpO2, CO2 will be different from the test sound. The set
volume will be applied but the set tone will not be applied to these parameters.
 When [Standard Tone] is set for the "Alarm System", the alarm volume and tone for the
ventilator alarm and device status alarm will be the same with that of the vital alarm.

REFERENCE
 The volume above the set minimum volume can be set.
(
 Maintenance Manual "Alarm Related Setup" P5-4)

1 Slide the up or down.

When the slider is released, / will be displayed.

10-19
Chapter 10 System Configuration Color

2 Press .
The volume will be adjusted.

REFERENCE
 The order of alarm priority is Urgent (H) > Caution (M) > Status (L).
The volume is also set according to the alarm priority.
The volume for high priority alarm cannot be set lower than the lower priority alarm,
and vice versa.

3 Select the tone level.

NOTE
 The tone selection is different for the synchronized tone, alarm sound, and key sound.
 For the "Sync. Tone", [Selected Tone] will generate the HR synchronized tone with the
selected tone. [Sync. With SpO2 Value] will generate the HR synchronized tone with the
same tone with the SpO2synchronized tone. If the SpO2 value is invalid, [Tone 2] will be
applied.

4 Press the [Test] key to check the set volume/tone.

5 Set [ON]/[OFF] for ventilator alarm sound.

Color

In this section, setup procedure for the color of background, numeric data, waveform is explained.
The colors of the background, numeric data, waveform, user key can be customized.
The colors can be customized according to the various monitoring scene such as recognizable colors from a far
distance or colors which will not strain your eyes by the long time monitoring.

1 Press the [Menu], [Color] ("Basic Setup") keys.

The "Color" selection window will be displayed.

2
3
3 4

10-20
Chapter 10 System Configuration Color

2 Press the key for "Background", and set the background color.

The background color for the numeric data area and

waveform area can be selected from three colors (black,
gray, light gray).

The background color can be also set by pressing the [Menu],

[Display Config.] ("Basic Setup"), "Background" keys.

The selected background color will be immediately reflected.

3 Set the color of the numeric data and waveforms

The color can be set for each parameter. 12 colors (+white) from each palette are selectable.

1 Pressing the [Palette] key will display the "Palette"

selection window. (shown on right)
2 Select the palette from [Light] / [Clear] / [Deep] / [Vivid],
and press the [Set] key.
The color of the numeric data and waveform will change
to the selected palette color.

3 Press / to switch the page.

4 Press the key for the parameter to change the color.
The "Color" selection window will be displayed.

5 Select a color.
The selected color for the parameter will be applied to the waveform, numeric data, graphic trend, and
tabular trend.

4 Set the color of the user key.

1 Press the key for "User Key".

The "User Key Color" selection window will be
displayed.

2 Press / to switch the page.

3 Select the user key to change the color.
Pressing the key again will cancel the selection.
4 Select the color displayed on the right.
The color of the user key will change.

10-21
Chapter 10 System Configuration Brightness

Brightness

In this section, brightness adjustment of the monitor display is explained.

CAUTION
 This device utilizes LED for the backlight. Since this LED deteriorates by the life cycle, the
display may become dark, scintillate, or may not light by the long term use. In such case,
contact your nearest service representative.

1 Press the [Menu], [Brightness] ("Basic Setup")

keys.

The "Brightness" menu will be displayed.

2 Slide the up or down.

When the slider is released, / will be

displayed.

3 Press the / keys.

The brightness will be adjusted.

Night Mode

This section explains about the night mode setup procedure.

The night mode is a function to preset the screen brightness and alarm volume when turning OFF the light of the
ward or when the patient is asleep, etc.
The night mode can be manually set to ON, or automatically set to ON by preprogramming the time to turn ON/OFF
the night mode.

Operation flow when the night mode is set to "Timer"

10-22
Chapter 10 System Configuration Night Mode

Operation flow when the night mode is set to [Darker] or [Dark]

1 To manually set the night mode, select [ON] for "Night Mode" or press the [Night Mode] key on the user key
area.

During the night mode, "Night Mode Active" message will be displayed.

NOTE
 When the timer is set, the night mode will automatically start at the set "Start Time".

2 Cancel the night mode.

(
Maintenance Manual "Display/Print Setup" P5-13)
NOTE
 The night mode can be manually turned ON from the menu, user key, or remote control
even when the night mode is set to automatically turn ON. The night mode will
automatically turn OFF at the set "End Time".
 The night mode cannot be set when the ventilator alarm is generated.
 The night mode cannot be set during the battery operation.

Night Mode

The time to start and end the night mode, and the night mode display can be set.

1 Press the [Menu], [Night Mode] ("Basic Setup") keys.

The "Night Mode" menu will be displayed.

3 6
4
5

10-23
Chapter 10 System Configuration Night Mode

2 Set the "Start Time" and "End Time" for the night mode.

[Manual]: The night mode can be turned ON or OFF manually using the user key.
[Timer]: The night mode will automatically turned ON or OFF at the preprogrammed time.
The night mode can be manually turned ON from the user key or from the remote control unit even when
the [Timer] is set.

When [Timer] is selected:

1 Press the key for "Start Time".
The "Start Time" window will be displayed.
(shown on right)

2 Use the numeric keys to enter the time.

3 Press the [Set] key.
4 Set the "End Time" with the same procedure
from Step 3 to 5.

3 Set the volume.

WARNING
 When selecting [Silence], pay attention not to miss any important alarm by
simultaneously monitoring the bed on other monitors such as central monitor.

[No Change]: Standard volume will be set.

[3]: Third level from the minimum volume will be set.
[1]: Minimum volume will be set.
[Silence]: Sound will be silenced.

4 Set the brightness.

WARNING
 When selecting [Time Only], pay attention not to miss any important alarm by
simultaneously monitoring the patient on other monitors such as central monitor.

[No Change]: Brightness will not change

[Dark]: 80% of the maximum brightness will be set.
[Darker]: 50% of the maximum brightness will be set.
[Time Only]: Only the time will be displayed. The message will disappear after 1 minute from starting the
night mode.

5 Set the alarm indicator operation.

[ON]: The alarm indicator will light even during the night mode.
[OFF]: The alarm indicator will not light during the night mode.

10-24
Chapter 10 System Configuration Night Mode

6 Set the external monitor operation.

[ON]: Displays the home display on the external monitor.

[OFF]: Turns OFF the external monitor display.
[OFF (Time Only)]:
If [Time Only] is selected for "Display": Displays the [Time Only] screen on the external monitor as well as
the main unit.
If [No Change], [Dark] or [Darker] is selected for "Display": Turns OFF the external monitor display.

10-25
Chapter 10 System Configuration Night Mode

10-26
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Message List

This section lists the alarm messages for each parameter.

For the vital alarm message, there are numeric data alarm and arrhythmia alarm, and the delay time are as follows.
 Numeric Data Alarm: Adult/Child: 5 sec., Neonate: none
However, for HR alarm, there is no delay time for adult/child if "HR Delay" is set to ON.
 Arrhythmia Alarm: Adult/Child/Neonate: none

Vital Alarm Message

CAUTION
 The arrhythmia alarm message other than Tachy, Brady, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady will continue
to be displayed for 30 seconds after the alarm is resolved.
 The alarm level shown below is the standard level set by Fukuda Denshi.
 The alarm level can be changed under "Initial Settings > Alarm Setup > Alarm Level" .

Top Priority Alarm (Alarm Level S)

This level can be selected only when [Fukuda Tone] is selected under [Menu> System Config.>Initial
Settings>Alarm System]. It cannot be selected when the "Alarm System" is [Melodic Tone] or [Standard Tone].

Life Threatening Alarm (Alarm Level H)

Measuring Parameters Message
Respiration <Apnea>
(Impedance, CO2, Ventilator)

SpO2* <Lower Ext SpO2* Alarm>

Arrhythmia <Asystole>

<VF>

<VT>

<Slow VT>

<Tachy>

<Brady>

<Ext Tachy>

<Ext Brady>

11-1
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Cautionary Alarm (Alarm Level M)

Measuring Parameters Message

Heart Rate <Lower HR Alarm>

<Upper HR Alarm>

Blood Pressure <Lower BP# Alarm> or <Lower (label) Alarm>*1

<Upper BP# Alarm> or <Upper (label) Alarm>*1

Pulse Rate <Lower PR Alarm>

(BP) <Upper PR Alarm>

SpO2* <Lower SpO2 # Alarm>*1

<Upper SpO2 # Alarm>*1

<Lower Ext SpO2* Alarm>

<Upper Ext SpO2# Alarm>

Pulse Rate (SpO2) <Lower PR Alarm>

<Upper PR Alarm>

Non-Invasive Blood Pressure <Lower NIBP Alarm>

<Upper NIBP Alarm>

Respiration <Lower RR Alarm>

(Impedance, CO2, GAS,
<Upper RR Alarm>
Ventilator, SpO2)

Gas*2 <Lower CO2-E Alarm>

<Upper CO2-E Alarm>

<Upper CO2-I Alarm>

<Lower O2-E Alarm>

<Upper O2-E Alarm>

<Lower O2-I Alarm>

<Upper O2-I Alarm>

<Lower N2O-E Alarm>

<Upper N2O-E Alarm>

<Lower N2O-I Alarm>

<Upper N2O-I Alarm>

<Lower (AGT label)-E Alarm>

<Upper (AGT label)-E Alarm>

<Lower (AGT label)-I Alarm>

<Upper (AGT label)-I Alarm>

*2
SPIRO <Lower MV Alarm>

<Upper MV Alarm>
BIS (When HBX-800 is used) <Lower BIS Alarm>

<Upper BIS Alarm>

Arrhythmia <Pause>
<Run>

*1: # indicates the label of BP, TEMP, SpO2.

For SpO2, N1/N2/M1/M2/HR/HL/FR/FL/OT will be displayed for #.
*2: When the numeric data acquired from FLOW-i, GE or Draeger is displayed, alarm will not generate. The alarm will not
generate on the central monitor either.

11-2
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Treatment Needed Alarm (Alarm Level L)

Measuring Parameters Message

ST1 to 12 <Lower ST(Lead Type) Alarm>

<Upper ST(Lead Type) Alarm>

SpCO* <Upper SpCO# Alarm>*1

SpMet# <Upper SpMet# Alarm>*1

SpHb <Lower SpHb# Alarm> *1

<Upper SpHb# Alarm> *1

TEMP (TEMP1 to 8) <Lower TEMP# Alarm> or <Lower (label) Alarm>*1

<Upper TEMP# Alarm> or <Upper (label) Alarm>*1

Blood Temperature <Upper Tb Alarm>

<Lower Tb Alarm>

Arrhythmia <Couplet>

<Bigeminy>
<Trigeminy>

<Frequent>

<Triplet>

<R on T>

<Multiform>

<Vent. Rhythm>
<SVT>

<Irregular RR>

<Prolonged RR>

<S Frequent>

<S Couplet>

<VPC>

<SVPC>

<Pacer not Capture>

<Pacer not Pacing>

*2
SPIRO <Upper PEAK Alarm>

<Lower PEAK Alarm>

<Upper PEEP Alarm>

<Lower PEEP Alarm>

*1: # indicates the channel number of BP, TEMP, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb.
For SpCO, SpMet and SpHb, N1/N2/M1/M2/HR/HL/FR/FL/OT will be displayed for #.
*2: When the numeric data acquired from FLOW-i, GE or Draeger is displayed, alarm will not generate. The alarm will not
generate on the central monitor either.

11-3
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Notification Alarm
Measuring Parameters Message

All Alarm <Alarm Suspend (xxx sec.)>

Alarm Sound Suspend <Alarm Silence (xxx min.)>

Arrhythmia <ECG Learn>

<ARRHY. OFF>

Oxygenator Mode <All Alarm OFF>

NOTE
 (xxx sec) of the <Alarm Suspend (xxx sec)> message indicates the remaining time of alarm
suspended duration.
 (xxx min.) of the <Alarm Silence (xxx min.)> message indicates the remaining time of alarm
sound suspended duration.
 The <ARRHY OFF> message will be displayed when the Asystole, VF, VT, Slow_VT,
TACHY, BRADY, EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY and HR alarm is OFF.


Vital Alarm Message (DS-LAN Standard Setup)

WARNING
 The SpO2 respiration measurement is not intended for use as an APNEA monitor.

CAUTION
 The arrhythmia alarm message other than Tachy, Brady, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady will continue
to be displayed for 30 seconds after the alarm is resolved.
 The alarm level shown below is the standard level set by Fukuda Denshi.

Top Priority Alarm (Alarm Level S)

This level can be selected only when [Fukuda Tone] is selected under [Menu> System Config.>Initial
Settings>Alarm System]. It cannot be selected when the "Alarm System" is [Melodic Tone] or [Standard Tone].

Life Threatening Alarm (Alarm Level H)

Measuring Parameters Message

Heart Rate <Lower HR Alarm>

<Upper HR Alarm>
Pulse Rate (SpO2) <Lower PR Alarm>

<Upper PR Alarm>

Pulse Rate (BP) <Lower PR Alarm>

<Upper PR Alarm>

SpO2* <Lower SpO2 # Alarm>*1

<Upper SpO2 # Alarm>*1

<Lower Ext SpO2 Alarm>

<Upper Ext SpO2# Alarm>

11-4
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Measuring Parameters Message

Blood Pressure <Lower BP1 Alarm>

<Upper BP1 Alarm>

<Lower ART Alarm>

<Upper ART Alarm>

Non-Invasive Blood Pressure <Lower NIBP Alarm>

<Upper NIBP Alarm>

Respiration <Lower RR Alarm>

(Impedance, CO2, GAS,
Ventilator, SpO2) <Upper RR Alarm>

<Apnea>
*1
Gas <Lower CO2-E Alarm>

<Upper CO2-E Alarm>

<Upper CO2-I Alarm>

<Lower O2-E Alarm>

<Upper O2-E Alarm>

<Lower O2-I Alarm>

<Upper O2-I Alarm>

<Lower N2O-E Alarm>

<Upper N2O-E Alarm>

<Lower N2O-I Alarm>

<Upper N2O-I Alarm>

<Lower (AGT label)-E Alarm>

<Upper (AGT label)-E Alarm>

<Lower (AGT label)-I Alarm>

<Upper (AGT label)-I Alarm>

Arrhythmia <Asystole>

<VF>
<VT>

<Slow VT>

<Tachy>

<Brady>

<Run>

<Ext Tachy>

<Ext Brady>

*1: For SpO2, N1/N2/M1/M2/HR/HL/FR/FL/OT will be displayed for #.

*2: When the numeric data acquired from FLOW-i, GE or Draeger is displayed, alarm will not generate. The alarm will not
generate on the central monitor either.

11-5
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Cautionary Alarm (Alarm Level M)

Measuring Parameters Message

Blood Pressure <Lower BP2 to 8 Alarm> or <Lower (label other than ART) Alarm>*1

<Upper BP2 to 8 Alarm> or <Upper (label other than ART) Alarm>*1

ST1 to 12 <Lower ST(Lead Type) Alarm>

<Upper ST(Lead Type) Alarm>

SpCO* <Upper SpCO# Alarm>*1

SpMet# <Upper SpMet# Alarm>*1

SpHb <Lower SpHb# Alarm> *1

<Upper SpHb# Alarm>*1

TEMP (TEMP1 to 8) <Upper TEMP# Alarm> or <Upper (label) Alarm>*1

<Lower TEMP# Alarm> or <Lower (label) Alarm>*1

Blood Temperature <Upper Tb Alarm>

<Lower Tb Alarm>

BIS <Upper BIS Alarm>

<Lower BIS Alarm>

*2
MV <Upper MV Alarm>
<Lower MV Alarm>
*2
PEAK <Upper PEAK Alarm>

<Lower PEAK Alarm>

*2
PEEP <Upper PEEP Alarm>

<Lower PEEP Alarm>

Arrhythmia <Pause>
<Couplet>

<Bigeminy>

<Trigeminy>
<Frequent>

<Triplet>

<R on T>
<Multiform>

<Vent. Rhythm>

<SVT>

<Irregular RR>

<Prolonged RR>

<S Frequent>

<S Couplet>

<VPC>

<SVPC>

<Pacer not Capture>

<Pacer not Pacing>

*1: # indicates the channel number of BP, TEMP, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb.
For SpCO, SpMet and SpHb, N1/N2/M1/M2/HR/HL/FR/FL/OT will be displayed for #.
*2: When the numeric data acquired from FLOW-i, GE or Draeger is displayed, alarm will not generate. The alarm will not
generate on the central monitor either.

11-6
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Notification Alarm
Measuring Parameters Message

All Alarm <Alarm Suspend (xxx sec.)>

Alarm Sound Suspend <Alarm Silence (xxx min.)>

Arrhythmia <ECG Learn>

<ARRHY. OFF>

Oxygenator Mode <All Alarm OFF>

NOTE
 (xxx sec) of the <Alarm Suspend (xxx sec)> message indicates the remaining time of alarm
suspended duration.
 (xxx min.) of the <Alarm Silence (xxx min.)> message indicates the remaining time of alarm
sound suspended duration.
 The <ARRHY OFF> message will be displayed when the Asystole, VF, VT, Slow_VT,
TACHY, BRADY, EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY and HR alarm is OFF.

Device Status Alarm Message

Top Priority Alarm (Alarm Level S)

Item Message Delay Time (sec.)

Ventilator <Vent. Alarm> 1

<VENT COMM> 1

Life Threatening Alarm (Alarm Level H)

Item Message Delay Time (sec.)
Main Unit <DSC-8400 Failure> 10

<DSC-8400 Speaker Failure> 10

<Charge the battery.> 10

Super Unit <Super Unit Failure> 3

<ECG Unit Error> 5

<Super Unit Multiamp. Failure> 3

<Super Unit Transducer Voltage Failure> 3

1
<NIBP Meas. Error (xxx-xxx)>* 10 or 3

<GAS Unit I/F Failure> 3

<Super Unit SpO2 Failure> 5 or 1

<Charge the battery.> 10

Blood Pressure <Transducer Voltage Failure> 3

<Check the ART catheter.> 1

GAS
<GAS Unit Failure> 1
(MGU-800/MGU-810)

SPIRO <SPIRO Unit Error> 1

BIS (When HBX-800 is used) <BISx Failure> 3

<BISx Incompatible> 3

*1: # indicates an error code.

11-7
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Cautionary Alarm (Alarm Level M)

Item Message Delay Time (sec.)

NIBP <NIBP meas. failed. (###-##)>*1 1

CO2 (HCP-810/HCP-820) <CO2 Check Sample Line> 1

<CO2 Check Exhaust Port> 1

<CO2 Unit Failure> 1

CO2 (HCP-810/HCP-820) <CO2 Cal. Required> 1

Capnostat 5 CO2 (Gas Unit I/

<CO2 Sensor Failure> 1
F and Mainstream Module)

GAS <GAS Check Water Trap Class> 1

(MGU-800)
<GAS Pump OFF> 1

<GAS Check Sample Line> 1

<GAS Zeroing Failed> 1

<GAS Replace Water Trap> 1

<GAS Check Water Trap Conn.> 1

<GAS Check Conn.> 1

SPIRO (MGU-810) <SPIRO Check FlowSensor Class> 1

BIS (When HBX-800 is used) <Check BIS Sensor, Perform Sensor Check> 3

Main Unit <DSC-8400 Check Short-Term Battery> 10

<DSC-8400 Check Long-Term Battery> 10

Super Unit <Super Unit Check Conn.> 3

<Super Unit Out of Operating Temp. Range> 3

<Super Unit Analog Unadjusted> 3

Input Box <IB-8000-# Check Conn.>*2 3

<IB-8000-# Failure>*2 3

Display Unit <Display Unit Failure> 3

Module <IB# Slot# Module Failure>*3 3

<IB# Slot# Analog Unadjusted>*3 3

Monitor Suspend <Monitor Suspend Time-Out> 1

Full Disclosure Waveform <Failed to write full disclosure to the CF card.> 1

*1: On "Initial Settings" menu, the alarm level can be selected from Level M, L, N (Notification). (Default: Level M)
If [Alarm Silence] key is pressed during Level M, L alarm generation, the alarm level will change to Level N
(notification).
# indicates an error code.
*2: # indicates the input box number.
*3: # indicates the input box number, and the slot number of input box.

11-8
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Treatment Needed Alarm (Alarm Level L)

Item Message Delay Time (sec.)

ECG <Check Electrodes (#, #, #)>*1 3

<ECG Check Electrodes Attachment.> 3

<Cannot Analyze> 1

<ECG Pacing Detection Error> 1

<ECG Artifact> 3

<ECG Only 5 electrodes are used.> 1

Impedance <RR meas. range is exceeded.> 3

<CVA detected> Adult, Child: 20,

Neonate: 10
SpO2 (Masimo Unit) <SpO2- # Check Sensor Attach.>*2 3

<SpO2- # Replace Sensor>*2 1

<SpO2- # Low Perfusion>*2, *3 1

<SpO2- # Pulse Search>*2 1

<SpO2- # Noise Interference>*2 1

<SpO2- # Check Sensor>*2 1

<SpO2- # Check Sensor Conn.>*2 1

<SpO2- # Replace Cable>*2 3

<SpO2- # Check Cable>*2 3

<SpO2- # Disconnected>*2 3

<SpO2- # only mode>*2 1

<SpO2- # Check Cable, Sensor>*2 1

SpO2 (Nellcor Unit) <SpO2- # Check Sensor Attach.>*2 3

<SpO2- # Replace Sensor>*2 1

<SpO2- # No Pulse Detected>*2 1

Blood Pressure <BP # Transducer OFF>*4*9 5

Temperature <T ## Unknown Sensor>*5 3

Non-Invasive Blood Pressure <Check NIBP cuff, hose>*6 3

<NIBP Check patient type, air hose> 3

Capnostat 5 CO2 (Gas Unit I/

<Check CO2 Airway Adapter> 1
F and Mainstream Module)

SPIRO (MGU-810) <SPIRO Check Flow Sensor> 1

BIS (When HBX-800 is used) <Replace BIS Sensor> 3

*2
<BIS Sensor Usage > 24hrs.> 3

<BIS Sensor Disconnected> 1

<BIS High Impedance, Check Sensor> 3

<BIS Lead Off, Check Sensor> 3

*2
<BIS SQI < 15%> 3
<BISx Disconnected> 3

Connector Off <ECG Disconnected> 3

*4
<BP # Disconnected> 3
<SpO2- # Disconnected>*2 3
*5
<T ## Disconnected> 3

11-9
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Item Message Delay Time (sec.)

<CO Disconnected> 3

<CO2 Disconnected> 3

Main Unit <DSC-8400 Check Unit> 10

<DSC-8400 Out of Operating Temp. Range> 10

<Charge the battery.> 10

<Reinstall the battery.> 5

<Fan Failure> 3

Super Unit <Super Unit Check SD Card> 3

<Super Unit Check DIP-SW> 3

<Super Unit TEMP Unit Failure> 3

<Super Unit data transfer failed.> 3

*7 3
Input Box <IB-8000-# Failure>
*7
<IB-8000-# Out of Operating Temp. Range> 3

Display Unit <Check Display Unit> 3

<Display Unit Out of Operating Temp. Range> 3

*8
Module <IB# Slot# Check Module> 3
*8
<IB# Slot# Out of Operating Temp. Range> 3
<IB# Slot# Module Failure>*8 3
*8
<IB# Slot# Module Disconnected> 3
*8
<IB# Slot# TEMP Unit Failure> 3
Built-in Slot <Built-in Slot Check Module> 3

<Built-in Slot Out of Operating Temp. Range> 3

<Built-in Slot Module Failure> 3

<Built-in Slot Module Disconnected> 3

<Built-in Slot TEMP Unit Failure> 3

Check Connection, Check <Check SvO2/CCO Monitor Conn.>

1
Reception, Interference

<Check BIS Conn.> 1

<Check aepEX Conn.> 1

<Check INVOS Conn.> 1

<Check FLOW-i Conn.>

<Check Printer Conn.> 3

<Chk DS-LAN Comm> 3

<Check HLX Conn.> 3

<Check Printer Comm> 1

<Check TCM Conn.> 1

Full Disclosure Waveform <Wrong CF card for full disclosure.> 1

<Failed to read full disclosure from the CF card.> 1

<Check CF card for full disclosure.> 1

*1: # indicates an electrode type.

*2: # indicates the label of SpO2.
*3: On "Initial Settings" menu, the alarm level can be selected from Level L/N. (Default: Level L)
*4: # indicates the label of BP.
*5: # indicates the label of TEMP.

11-10
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

*6: On "Initial Settings" menu, the alarm level can be selected from Level M/L/N. (Default: Level L)
If [Alarm Silence] key is pressed during Level M/L alarm generation, the alarm level will change to Level N
(notification).
*7: # indicates the input box number.
*8: # indicates the input box number, and the slot number of input box.
*9: On "Initial Settings" menu, the alarm level can be selected from Level M/L. (Default: Level L)
NOTE
 <NIBP meas. failed>, <Check NIBP cuff, hose>, <Connector Off>, <ECG Only 5 electrodes
are used.>, <Check xx Conn.>, <Check xx Comm.>, <SPIRO Check Flow Sensor> alarms
will be canceled when [Alarm Silence] key is pressed. Pay attention not to cancel the
important alarm.

Notification Alarm
Item Message Delay Time (sec.)
*1
Operation <Waveform Frozen (xxsec.)> 1
*1
<Key Locked (xxsec.)> 1

<Night Mode Active> 1

<Oxygenator Mode> 1

ECG <ECG Low Amplitude> 3

<ECG Artifact> 3

<ECG EMG Interference> 3

*7
<Check Electrodes> 3
Blood Pressure <BP # Zeroing Required>*2 1
*3
Temperature <T # Unknown Sensor> 1
*4
SpO2 (Masimo Unit) <SpO2- # Demo Mode> 1
*4
<SpO2- # Zeroing> 1
<SpO2 Check Sensor Attach.>*7 3

<SpO2 Cable Near Expiration> 3

<SpO2 Sensor Near Expiration> 3

SpO2 (Nellcor Unit) <SpO2- # Motion Artifact>*4 1
*7
<SpO2 Check Sensor Attach.> 3

Capnostat 5 CO2 (Gas Unit I/ <CO2 Warming Up> 1

F and Mainstream Module)
<Zero the CO2 Adapter> 1

<Unknown CO2 Sensor> 1

CO2 (HCP-810/HCP-820) <CO2 Suspended> 1

<CO2 Zeroing> 1

GAS (MGU-800/MGU-810) <GAS Warm Up> 1

<GAS Zeroing> 1

GAS (MGU-800/MGU-810) <GAS Pump Regulating> 1

*5 1
<GAS Mixed Agents>

<GAS Zero Cal. Required.> 1

<GAS Cal. Required.> 1

SPIRO (MGU-810) <SPIRO Warm Up> 1

<SPIRO Calibration Active> 1

<SPIRO Zeroing> 1

11-11
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Item Message Delay Time (sec.)

BIS (When HBX-800 is used) <BIS Sensor Expired>*5 3

<BIS Sensor Check in Progress> 3

<BIS Ground Check in Progress> 3

<BIS Noise> 3

<BIS Perform "Sensor Check"> 3

<BIS SQI < 50%> 3

<BIS Demo Sensor> 3

Non-Invasive Blood Pressure <Initializing NIBP> 3

*6 3
Recorder Unit <Check Printer>
*6
<Check Paper> 3
*6
<Printer Busy> 1

<Check Cassette>*6 3
*6
Central Printer <Check Paper (Central)> 3
*6
<Check Cassette> 3

<Printer Busy (Central)>*6 1

*6
<Check Central Printer> 3

Central Printer <Central Printer Check Connection> 1

(Laser Printer) <Central Printer Check Setting> 1

<Check Central ID> 1

<Chk DS-LAN Comm> 1

Main Unit <DSC-8400 Check Rotary SW> 1

<DSC-8400 Check DIPSW> 1

System Configuration <Check Equip. Config.> 1

<Some parameters are not displayed due to the display layout setting.> 3

Check Connection, Check <Check System Conn.>

3
Reception, Interference

Data Transfer <Uploading> 1

<Upload Standby> 1

*1: ## indicates the remaining time.

*2: # indicates the channel number of BP.
*3: # indicates the channel number of TEMP.
*4: # indicates the label of SpO2.
*5: On "Initial Settings" menu, the alarm level can be selected from Level M, L, N (Notification). (Default :
Notification)
*6: The alarm generation can be inhibited depending on the setting.
*7: Displayed when lead-off or sensor-off condition remains after the power is turned ON, monitoring is resumed,
or a patient is discharged.

11-12
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Numeric Data Box Message

HR
Message

<Unit Failure>

<Upper HR Alarm>

<Lower HR Alarm>
<Lower ST Alarm>

<Upper ST Alarm>

<Cannot Analyze>

<Check Electrodes>

<Check Electrodes Attachment.>

<Pacing Detection Error>

<Only 5 electrodes are used.>

<Out of Range>

<Low Amplitude>

<Noise Interference>
<Artifact>

ST
Message

<Lower ST Alarm>

<Upper ST Alarm>

BP1 to 8
Level H for BP1 and ART, Level M for other label
Message

<Lower BP Alarm>

<Upper BP Alarm>

<Zero Required>

<Check the catheter.>

<Out of Range>

Pulse Rate (BP Source)

Message

<Upper PR Alarm> (BP)

<Lower PR Alarm> (BP)

<Check the catheter.>

<Out of Range>

11-13
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

NIBP
If <NIBP Meas. Error> is displayed, the message can be canceled by pressing [Cancel Error] on the NIBP setup
screen, [NIBP Start/Stop] key (user key), or HS-8000/DS-8007 [NIBP START/STOP] key.
If the same message is repeatedly displayed, a failure of the device can be considered. Cease the measurement, and
contact your nearest service representative.

( "<NIBP Unit Error (E**-**)> is displayed." P11-39)
Message

<NIBP Meas. Error>

<Upper NIBP Alarm>

<Lower NIBP Alarm>

<Measurement Failed.>

<Check NIBP cuff, hose>

<Check patient type, air hose>

<Initializing>
<Out of Range>

SpO2 (Medtronic Model)

Message

<Unit Failure>

<Ext SpO2 Alarm>

<Lower SpO2 Alarm>

<Upper SpO2 Alarm>

<Replace Sensor>
<Check Sensor Attach.>

<No Pulse Detected>

<Motion Artifact>
<Pulse Search>

SpO2/SpCO/SpMet/SpHb (Masimo Model)

Message

<Ext SpO2 Alarm>

<Lower SpO2 Alarm>

<Upper SpO2 Alarm>

<Upper SpCO Alarm>

<Upper SpMet Alarm>

<Lower SpHb Alarm>

<Upper SpHb Alarm>

<Replace Sensor>

<Check Sensor Attach.>

<Low Confidence>

<Pulse Search>

<Noise Interference>
<Check Sensor>

<Replace Cable>

11-14
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Message

<Check Cable>

<Check Sensor Conn.>

<Zeroing>

<SpO2 only mode>

<Low Signal IQ>

<Low Confidence>

RR (SpO2: Medtronic Model)

Message

<Unit Failure>

<RR Interference>

<Unable to calculate>

<Calculating>
<Outside Range>

<Out of Range>

<Upper RR SpO2 Alarm>

<Lower RR SpO2 Alarm>

PR-SpO2
Message

<Upper PR Alarm> (SpO2)

<Lower PR Alarm> (SpO2)

<Out of Range>

TEMP1 to 8
Message

<Upper TEMP Alarm>

<Lower TEMP Alarm>

<TEMP Unit Failure>

<Unknown Sensor>

<Out of Range>

Tb
Message

<Lower Tb Alarm>

<Upper Tb Alarm>

<Out of Range>

RR (Impedance)
Message

<Apnea Alarm>

<Upper RR Alarm>

<Lower RR Alarm>

11-15
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Message

<CVA detected>

<RR meas. range is exceeded.>

<Out of Range>

<Suspended>

RR (Ventilator)
Message

<Apnea Alarm>

<Upper RR Alarm>

<Lower RR Alarm>

RR (Gas)
Message

<Apnea Alarm>

<Upper RR Alarm>

<Lower RR Alarm>
<Out of Range>

CO 2 (When Gas Unit I/F HPD-810/HPD-820 and Capnostat 5 is used)

Message

<Upper CO2-E Alarm>

<Lower CO2-E Alarm>

<Upper CO2-I Alarm>

<Check airway adapter.>

<Zeroing>
<Warming Up>

<Zero CO2 Adapter>

<Unknown Sensor>
<Out of Range>

CO2 (HCP-810/HCP-820)
Message

<Initializing>

<Check Sample Line>

<Zeroing>

<Check the Exhaust Port>

<Perform calibration.>

<GAS Unit I/F Failure>

<Out of Range>

<Upper CO2-E>

<Lower CO2-E>
<Upper CO2-I>

11-16
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

gas (When MGU-800/810 or is used)

Message

<Upper CO2-E Alarm>

<Lower CO2-E Alarm>

<Upper CO2-I Alarm>

<Upper O2-E Alarm>

<Lower O2-E Alarm>

<Upper O2-I Alarm>

<Lower O2-I Alarm>

<Upper N2O-E Alarm>

<Lower N2O-E Alarm>

<Upper N2O-I Alarm>

<Lower N2O-I Alarm>

<Upper AGT-E Alarm>*

<Lower AGT-E Alarm>*

<Upper AGT-I Alarm>*

<Lower AGT-I Alarm>*

<Upper MAC Alarm>

<Upper RR Alarm>

<Lower RR Alarm>
<Apnea Alarm>

<GAS Check Water Trap Class>

<GAS Check Water Trap Conn.>

<GAS Pump OFF>

<GAS Pump Regulating>

<GAS Check Sample Line>

<GAS Zeroing Failed>

<GAS Unit Failure>

<GAS Warm Up>

<GAS Zeroing>

<GAS Mixed Agents>

<GAS Zero Cal. Required.>

<GAS Cal. Required.>

<GAS Replace Water Trap>

<Out of Range (CO2)>

<Out of Range (RR_CO2)>

<Out of Range" (N2O)>

<Out of Range (O2)>

<Out of Range (Agent)>*

*: The selected or detected label will be displayed for the agent label.

11-17
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

SPIRO (When MGU-810 or is used)

Message

<SPIRO Warm Up>

<SPIRO Check FlowSensor Class>

<SPIRO Check Flow Sensor>

<SPIRO Calibration Active>

<SPIRO Zeroing>

<SPIRO Unit Error>

<Out of Range TV)>

<Out of Range (MV)>

<Out of Range (PRESS)>

<Upper RR>

<Lower RR>

<Apnea>

<Upper MV>

<Lower MV>

<Upper PEAK>

<Lower PEAK>

<Upper PEEP>

<Lower PEEP>

BIS (When HBX-800 is used)

Message

<Upper BIS Alarm>

<Lower BIS Alarm>

<Check Sensor>

<Expired Sensor>

<Invalid Sensor>

<Sensor Too Many Uses>

<Sensor Usage > 24hrs.>

<Check Sensor Conn.>

<Sensor Check in Progress>

<Ground Check in Progress>

<High Impedance>

<Artifact>

<Lead OFF>

<BIS Perform "Sensor Check">

<SQI < 15%>

<SQI < 50%>

<Artifacts>

<BISx Failure>

<BISx Incompatible>

11-18
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Ventilator Alarm Message

Top Priority Alarm (Alarm Level S)

Item Message

Ventilator <Vent. Alarm>

Ventilator <VENT COMM>

WARNING
 When the VELIA, ASTRAL, VS ULTRA ventilator is connected, and the ventilator power is
turned OFF, alarm will not generate on the DS-8400. If the connection cable is disconnected
from the ventilator, <Vent. Alarm> will generate, but <VENT_COMM> alarm will not
generate on the DS-8400.
 The ventilator alarm sound is set to OFF (factory default).
 The alarm sound can be turned ON on the "Tone/Volume" menu. (
19)
"Tone/Volume" P10-

Ventilator Alarm Factor

CAUTION
 For the ventilators other than Servo ventilators, ventilator alarm factor will not be notified to
the central monitor.
 Depending on the central monitor type and software version, ventilator alarm factor may not
be displayed. For details of the central monitor type and software version, refer to your
nearest service representative.
 The ventilator alarm factors are displayed only on the central monitor. These will not be
displayed on the bedside monitor.

Displayed Alarm Message Remarks

VENT AWP Airway Pressure Alarm

VENT MV Minute Ventilation Alarm

VENT APNEA Apnea Alarm

VENT CONT. HP Continuous High Pressure Alarm

Upper VENT_FiO2 FiO2 Upper Limit Alarm

Lower VENT_FiO2 FiO2 Lower Limit Alarm

Upper VENT_CO2 EtCO2 Upper Limit Alarm

Lower VENT_CO2 EtCO2 Lower Limit Alarm

Upper VENT_RR RR Upper Limit Alarm

Lower VENT_RR RR Lower Limit Alarm

VENT_PEEP PEEP Low Alarm

VENT_COMM Power OFF, cable disconnected, standby condition, etc.

VENT_URGENT Other high level alarm

Ventilator Other ventilator alarm

11-19
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Message List

Cardiac Output Message

Status Message
Message Details

WAIT Preparing for measurement.

It will be also displayed when catheter relay cable is not connected to the CO module,
or when thermodilution catheter is not connected.

READY Ready to start the measurement.

BUSY In process of measurement.

END Measurement is completed.

Result Status
The result status will be displayed for 30 seconds after completion of measurement.
Message Details

CO_OK CO is correctly measured.

UPPER_FAULT Measurement error

• After the injection, the blood temperature is out of the measurement range.

• The thermistor connector and relay cable are not securely connected.

• The sensor or relay cable is defective.

PEAK_FAULT Measurement error

• The peak of the thermodilution curve can not be detected.

• The thermistor connector and relay cable are not securely connected.

• The sensor or relay cable is defective.

LOWER_FAULT Measurement error

• The blood temperature has not returned to stable condition after the measurement.

• The thermistor connector and relay cable are not securely connected.
• The sensor or relay cable is defective.

SENSOR_ERROR Measurement error

• The thermistor connector and relay cable are not securely connected.

• The sensor or relay cable is defective.

OVER RANGE Measurement error

• The CO value is out of the calculation range.

11-20
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

This section explains the troubleshooting for each case.

ECG

<Check Electrodes> or <LEAD OFF> is displayed.

Cause 1
The electrode is detached, or is not making good electrical contact with the skin.
Solution
Check if the electrodes are properly attached.
Replace the electrodes.
Make sure that the lead cable or relay cable is not defective (wire break, etc.).
(
 "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)
(
 "Electrode Placement" P7-3)

Cause 2
Even though the "3-lead Override" (ECG Parameter Setup) is set to [ON], electrodes other than L, R, F are
connected.
Solution
Set the "3-lead Override" to [OFF].
Or, detach the electrodes other than L, R, F.

<ECG Low Amplitude> is displayed.

Cause 1
The ECG amplitude is 0.25 mV or below for the waveform size of x1, x1/2, x1/4, and 0.15 mV or below for the
waveform size of x2, x4.
Solution
Change the electrode site, or select a lead with higher QRS amplitude.

NOTE
 Using 4-electrode or 5-electrode instead of 3-electrode allows more accurate QRS
detection.

Cause 2
The electrode contact is poor.
Electrical blanket or other noise source is near the patient.
Solution
Attach the electrodes firmly. Or, replace the electrodes.
 If the lead cable or relay cable is defective (wire break, etc.), replace it.
 If any noise source is near the patient, move it away from the patient as far as possible.

Cause 3
Even though the "3-lead Override" (ECG Parameter Setup) is set to [ON], electrodes other than L, R, F are
connected.
Solution
Set the "3-lead Override" to [OFF].Or, detach the electrodes other than L, R, F.

11-21
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<ECG Artifact> is displayed.

Cause 1
The electrode contact is poor.
Electrical blanket or other noise source is near the patient.
Solution
Attach the electrodes firmly.
 If the lead cable or relay cable is defective (wire break, etc.), replace it.
 If any noise source is near the patient, move it away from the patient as far as possible.

Cause 2
EMG is interfering.
Solution
 Change the electrode site to a location where the myoelectricity will be less likely to interfere.
 Select ESIS for the filter mode.

CAUTION
 Selecting ESIS for the filter mode will decrease the QRS amplitude and may result in not
counting the heart rate.

Cause 3
Even though the "3-lead Override" (ECG Parameter Setup) is set to [ON], electrodes other than L, R, F are
connected.
Solution
Set the "3-lead Override" to [OFF].Or, detach the electrodes other than L, R, F.

The ECG waveform is in the baseline position.

The lead-off condition may have occurred by the following causes.

Cause 1
Electrode is detached.
Solution
Place the electrodes again.If the electrode contact is poor, replace the electrode.
(

"Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)
(

"Electrode Placement" P7-3)

Cause 2
The lead cable is disconnected from the electrode terminal.
Solution
Securely connect the lead cable.

REFERENCE
 If the error persists, wire break of the lead cable or relay cable can be considered. Contact
your nearest service representative.

11-22
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<Check Electrodes Attachment> is displayed.

Cause 1
The electrode contact with the skin is poor. There is substantial contact resistance between the electrodes.
Solution
Replace all the electrodes.Make sure to use the same type of electrodes .
(
 "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)
(
 "Electrode Placement" P7-3)

Cause 2
Even though the "3-lead Override" (ECG Parameter Setup) is set to [ON], electrodes other than L, R, F are
connected.
Solution
Set the "3-lead Override" to [OFF].Or, detach the electrodes other than L, R, F.

<ECG Unit Error> is displayed.

Cause
A communication error has occurred between the ECG measuring unit.
Solution
A failure of the ECG unit can be considered. Contact your nearest service representative.

The measurement data is displayed as "xxx".

Cause
The heart rate is outside the measurement range.
Solution
 Check if the electrodes are properly attached.

( "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)

( "Electrode Placement" P7-3)
 Replace the electrode, or check the lead cable and relay cable.

Heart rate is not counted. Heart rate is low.

Cause
The ECG waveform amplitude is below the QRS detection level (0.3 mV).
Solution 1
Change the electrode site, or select a lead with higher QRS amplitude.

CAUTION
 Using 4-electrode or 5-electrode instead of 3-electrode allows more accurate QRS
detection.
 Also, if large amount of noise is interfering, the noise may be erroneously detected as
QRS.Change the electrode site and increase the ECG amplitude.

Solution 2
Increase the displayed waveform size. By increasing the waveform size, small QRS wave will become detectable.
However, noise may be also detected.

11-23
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Heart rate is not counted, and <LEAD OFF> is displayed.

Cause 1
The electrode of the displayed lead type is detached, or is not making good electrical contact with the skin.
Solution
 Check if the electrodes are properly attached.

( "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)

( "Electrode Placement" P7-3)
 Replace the electrode, or check the lead cable and relay cable.

Cause 2
Even though the "3-lead Override" (ECG Parameter Setup) is set to [ON], electrodes other than L, R, F are
connected.
Solution
Set the "3-lead Override" to [OFF].Or, detach the electrodes other than L, R, F.

Artificial pacemaker pulse is not displayed.

Cause 1
[Not Used] is selected for "Pacemaker" on the "Admit/Discharge" menu.
Solution
Select [Used] for "Pacemaker".

Cause 2
"Pacemaker Pulse" is set to [OFF] (ECG Parameter Setup).
Solution
Select [ON] for "Pacemaker Pulse" .

Cause 3
The electrode attachment site is not appropriate.
Solution
Check the electrode attachment site.
(

"Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)
(

"Electrode Placement" P7-3)

<ECG Pacing detection error> is displayed.

Cause
The pacemaker pulse is detected 16 pulses or more per second.
Solution 1
 Check if the electrodes are properly attached.

( "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)

( "Electrode Placement" P7-3)
 Replace the electrode, or check the lead cable and relay cable.
 If any noise source is near the patient, move it away from the patient as far as possible.
Solution 2
If the patient is not using a pacemaker, select [Not Used] for "Pacemaker"("Admit/Discharge").

11-24
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<ECG Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
While monitoring the ECG, the relay cable was unplugged.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the ECG relay cable. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.

<Cannot analyze> is displayed.

Cause
"Suspend Arrhy, Analysis during Noise Interference" ("Initial Settings") is set to ON, and arrhythmia analysis is
suspended for more than 30 seconds due to continuous noise or EMG interference.
Solution
Check the electrode attachment, and remove the noise source.
 Check the electrode attachment, lead cable and relay cable.
 If the electrode, lead cable, or relay cable is defective, replace them.
 If any noise source is near the patient, move it away from the patient as far as possible.
If EMG is interfering, change the electrode site to a location where EMG will less likely to interfere.

Arrhythmia cannot be detected, or is judged as "?".

Cause 1
The amplitude of ECG1 or ECG2 is below the QRS detection level (250 μV and below).
Solution
Change the electrode site, or select a lead with higher QRS amplitude for both ECG1 and ECG2.When the
electrode site is changed, perform the arrhythmia learn process.
Cause 2
The shapes of normal heartbeat and arrhythmia are similar.
Solution
Change the electrode site or select a lead which shows a clear difference between a normal heartbeat and
arrhythmia. When the electrode site is changed, perform the arrhythmia learn process.
Cause 3
Noise is interfering with the ECG.
Solution
Check the electrode attachment, and remove the noise source.
 Check the electrode attachment, lead cable and relay cable.
 If the electrode, lead cable, or relay cable is defective, replace them.
 If any noise source is near the patient, move it away from the patient as far as possible.
If EMG is interfering, change the electrode site to a location where EMG will less likely to interfere.

11-25
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Respiration

<CVA detected> message is displayed.

Cause
Heartbeat is interfering and superimposed on the respiration waveform.
Solution
Place the electrode as shown below where the heartbeat will be less likely to interfere.
Or, select a lead where the heartbeat will be less likely to interfere.

Green

Red Yellow

<RR meas. range is exceeded.> message is displayed.

Cause 1
Electrode is detached.
Solution
Reattach the electrode. If the electrode contact is poor, replace the electrode.
(

"Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)
(

"Electrode Placement" P7-3)

Cause 2
The electrode contact impedance is high.
Solution 1
Reattach the electrode. If the electrode contact is poor, replace the electrode.
(

"Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)
(

"Electrode Placement" P7-3)
Solution 2
Change the lead for respiration measurement.

"0" is displayed for respiration rate, or apnea alarm is generated.

Cause
The amplitude of the respiration waveform is too low.
Solution 1
Change the electrode site, or select a lead with higher QRS amplitude.
Solution 2
Increase the displayed waveform size.

The respiration waveform and respiration rate is not displayed.

Cause 1
The electrosurgery-proof type ECG relay cable is used.
Solution
The impedance respiration can not be measured if the electrosurgery-proof type ECG relay cable is used. If not
using during electrosurgery, use the standard ECG relay cable.

11-26
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Cause 2
The impedance respiration measurement is ceased.
Solution
Select [ON] for "Impedance Measurement" on "Admit/Discharge" or "RESP" setup screen.

CAUTION
 If the pacemaker with the minute ventilation measuring function is used, turn OFF the
impedance respiration measurement. Otherwise, both the pacemaker and this monitor will
not be able to perform accurate measurement.

The measurement data is displayed as "xxx".

Cause
The respiration rate is outside the measurement range.
Solution
 Check if the electrodes are properly attached.

( "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)

( "Electrode Placement" P7-3)
 Replace the electrode, or check the lead cable.
 Change the lead for respiration measurement.

The lead for respiration measurement cannot be changed.

Cause
HLXis used.
Solution
 If HLXis set, the lead will be fixed to [II].
 If the respiration amplitude for lead II is small, check the electrode attachment.

( "Before Attaching the Electrodes" P7-2)

( "Electrode Placement" P7-3)

Invasive Blood Pressure

The PDP value is displayed as "---" .

Cause
The BP measured by the HM-800/HM-801 Multi Module is labeled as [IAP].
Solution
PDP will not be calculated if the BP measured by the HM-800/HM-801 is labeled as [IAP]. When using the HM-
800/HM-801, do not set the BP label to IAP. When monitoring PDP, set the BP label to [IAP?
].

<BP* Transducer OFF> is displayed.

Cause
The BP (1 to 8) transducer is not connected.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.

11-27
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Solution 2
Connect the transducer.
Solution 3
The BP relay cable or transducer may be defective. Replace the BP relay cable or transducer.

<BP* Zero Required> is displayed.

Cause
The BP zero balance has not been performed since the power is turned ON.
Solution
Open the three-way valve of the transducer to air and perform zero balance.

The measurement data is displayed as "---".

Cause
The BP zero balance has not been performed since the power is turned ON.
Solution
Open the three-way valve of the transducer to air and perform zero balance.

BP value and waveform are not displayed properly.

Cause
The BP zero-balance is unstable.
Solution 1
Open the three-way valve of the transducer to air and perform zero balance.
Solution 2
Disconnect the BP transducer from the BP relay cable, and check if there is any abnormality on the connector
terminal. Make sure that there is no distortion nor substance, such as blood or medicament, attached which may
cause contact failure.
If any abnormality is found, replace the BP transducer or BP relay cable.

The measurement data is displayed as "xxx".

Cause
The BP value is outside the measurement range.
Solution
Perform BP zero balance again.
Check if the measurement data is within the measurement range.
Check the BP relay cable and BP transducer.

<BP# Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
While monitoring the blood pressure, BP relay cable was disconnected from the 2ch BP conversion cable.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the BP interface cable or 2ch BP conversion cable. The message will disappear,
and the alarm will be silenced.

11-28
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The zero balance process fails.

Cause
The three-way valve may not be opened to air, or artifact is present due to movements, etc.
Solution
Check if the three-way valve is opened to air. Verify that <Zero ready> is displayed on the parameter setup screen,
or <READY> is displayed on the user key before starting the zero balance.

<Transducer Voltage Failure> is displayed.

Cause 1
The BP relay cable or transducer is defective.
Solution
Replace the BP relay cable or transducer.
Cause 2
A hardware failure has occurred.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<Check the ART catheter.> message is displayed.

Cause 1
During the measurement, ART catheter was disconnected.
Solution
Connect the ART catheter securely. Make sure that the ART catheter is not loose.
Cause 2
The BP relay cable or transducer is defective.
Solution
Replace the BP relay cable or transducer.

SpO2 Measurement (HS-8312N, DS-8007N, HG-820)

<SpO2 Check Sensor Attach.> is displayed.

Cause
The sensor is detached from the patient.
Solution 1
Check if the sensor is properly attached to the patient.
Solution 2
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

<SpO2 Pulse Search> is displayed.

Cause 1
The amplitude of the pulse waveform is too low, or the sensor is not positioned correctly.
Solution
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

11-29
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Cause 2
The sensor has not been attached long enough to obtain stable measurement.
Solution
After the sensor attachment, wait and see for about one minute until the waveform stabilizes.

<SpO2 No Pulse Detected> is displayed.

Cause
The amplitude of the pulse waveform is too low, or the sensor is not positioned correctly.
Solution
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.
Avoid the sensor from exposure to ambient light.

<SpO2 Motion Artifact> is displayed.

Cause
There is excessive body motion from the patient.
Solution
Relocate the sensor to which body motion will have less influence.

The pulse waveform is not displayed, or interrupted.

Situation: <SpO2 Check Sensor Attach.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The amplitude of the pulse waveform is too low, or the sensor is not positioned correctly.
Solution
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

Cause 2
The sensor is defective.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

Cause 3
SpO2 sensor is not firmly connected to the connector.
Solution
Make sure the SpO2 sensor is firmly connected.

Cause 4
Sensor is exposed to light.
Solution
Place a black or dark cloth over the sensor to avoid direct sunlight. When not using the sensor for measurement,
avoid placing the sensor in light or unplug the sensor from the connector.

SpO2 value is unstable.

Cause 1
There is excessive body motion from the patient which disables correct measurement.
Solution 1
Have the patient lie still.

11-30
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Solution 2
Relocate the sensor, or change the sensor to which the body motion will have less influence.

Cause 2
The probe size is not appropriate.
Solution
Select a probe size which is appropriate for the patient.

Cause 3
Sensor is exposed to light.
Solution
Place a black or dark cloth over the sensor to avoid direct sunlight.

<Super Unit SpO2 Failure> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sensor is defective.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

Cause 2
Communication error has occurred with the SpO2 unit.
Solution
A defective cable or SpO2 unit failure can be considered.
Contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 3
The system was started with the sensor and cable connected.
Solution
Disconnect the SpO2 cable and sensor from this device, and press the standby switch to enter into standby mode.
Then, press the standby switch again to cancel the standby mode, and when the monitoring screen is displayed,
connect the cable and sensor.

<SpO2 Replace Sensor> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sensor is not connected securely.
Solution
Connect the sensor securely.

Cause 2
The sensor is defective.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

Cause 3
A wrong sensor is used.
Solution
Replace the sensor.
For details of the usable sensors, refer to your nearest service representative.

11-31
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<SpO2 Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
The SpO2 relay cable is disconnected during SpO2 monitoring.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the SpO2 relay cable. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.

SpO2 Measurement (HS-8312M, DS-8007M, HG-810)

<SpO2 Replace Sensor> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sensor is not connected securely.
Solution
Connect the sensor securely.

Cause 2
The sensor is defective.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

Cause 3
A wrong sensor is used.
Solution
Replace the sensor.
(

"SpO2 Sensors for Masimo Manufacturer: Masimo Corporation" P13-8)

Cause 4
The sensor is used beyond its expected life.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

NOTE
 The X-Cal function automatically monitors the Active Monitoring Time (actual time of SpO2
monitoring) for each sensor and cable.
 Even if the sensor is used beyond its expected life, the measurement will not cease unless
the power is turned OFF, sensor is disconnected from the cable, cable is disconnected from
the monitor, or the sensor is reattached.
 When a measurement with a sensor that has reached its end of life is suspended for certain
amount of time, and resumed with the same sensor, a message to replace the sensor will
be displayed.
 Depending on the device, some sensors may not be recognized.

11-32
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<SpO2 Check Sensor Attach.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sensor is detached from the patient.
Solution 1
Check if the sensor is properly attached to the patient.
Solution 2
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

Cause 2
The sensor is exposed to too much ambient light. The detecting part of the sensor is not covered appropriately.
Solution 1
Turn down or turn off the light.
Solution 2
Avoid the sensor from exposure to ambient light.
Solution 3
Relocate the sensor position.

<SpO2 Low Perfusion> is displayed.

Cause
The amplitude of the pulse waveform is too low, or the sensor is not positioned correctly.
Solution
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

<Low Confidence> is displayed.

Cause
The amplitude of the pulse waveform is too low, or the sensor is not positioned correctly.
Solution
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

<SpO2 Pulse Search> is displayed.

Cause 1
The amplitude of the pulse waveform is too low, or the sensor is not positioned correctly.
Solution
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.

Cause 2
The sensor has not been attached long enough to obtain stable measurement.
Solution
After the sensor attachment, wait and see for about one minute until the waveform stabilizes.

<SpO2 Noise Interference> is displayed.

Cause
External signal or energy is interfering with the measurement.
Solution
Remove the external interference or apply ambient shielding.

11-33
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<SpO2 Check Sensor>, <SpO2 Replace Cable>, or <SpO2 Check Cable> is displayed.
Cause 1
Unrecognizable sensor is connected.
A wrong patient cable is used.
When attached to the patient, the sensor was exposed to high-intensity light which lead to false recognition.
Solution
Reattach the SpO2 sensor and patient cable.
Replace with a Fukuda Denshi specified patient cable and sensor.
(
"SpO2 Sensors for Masimo Manufacturer: Masimo Corporation" P13-8)
Cause 2
The cable is used beyond its expected life.
Solution
Replace the patient cable.

NOTE
 The X-Cal function automatically monitors the Active Monitoring Time (actual time of SpO2
monitoring) for each sensor and cable.
 Even if the cable is used beyond its expected life, the measurement will not cease unless
the power is turned OFF or the cable is reconnected.
 When a measurement with a cable that has reached its end of life is suspended for certain
amount of time, and resumed with the same cable, a message to replace the cable will be
displayed.
 Depending on the device, some cable may not be recognized.

<Super Unit SpO2 Failure> is displayed.

Cause
Communication error has occurred with the SpO2 unit.
Solution
A defective cable or SpO2 unit failure can be considered. Contact your nearest service representative.

<SpO2 Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
The SpO2 relay cable is disconnected during SpO2 monitoring.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the SpO2 relay cable. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.

<SpO2 only mode> is displayed.

Cause
When the Rainbow sensor is used, SpCO, SpMet or SpHb parameter cannot be measured.
Solution 1
Remove the sensor from the patient's finger, and then reattach it.

11-34
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Solution 2
Remove the sensor or patient cable from the HS-8000 or module, and then reconnect it to the SpO2 connector.

<Low Signal IQ> is displayed.

Cause
There is excessive body motion, or sensor attached position is not appropriate.
Solution 1
Check that the light emitting and receiving parts of the sensor LED are aligned.
Solution 2
Relocate the sensor to which body motion will have less influence.

PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC cannot be measured.

Cause 1
PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC measurements are optional functions.
Solution
It is necessary to add these as the measuring parameters.
For details, contact your nearest service representative.
Cause 2
The used sensor cannot measure the PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC.
Solution
Use the sensor which can measure the PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC.
For details, contact your nearest service representative.

Non-Invasive Blood Pressure

The cuff is not inflated although the pump is operating.

Cause 1
The air hose is not firmly connected, and the air is leaking.
Solution
Check if the air hose is properly connected.

Cause 2
The cuff size does not match the selected patient type.
Solution
Use the cuff with correct size for the selected patient type.

The pump is not operating.

Cause
The air hose is disconnected from the NIBP connector.
Solution
Check if the air hose is properly connected.

11-35
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The measurement data is displayed as "---" .

Cause 1
The measurement accuracy is not reliable due to body motion artifact.
Solution
During the measurement, have the patient stay still.

Cause 2
The pulse is too small to acquire reliable measurement accuracy.
Solution
Check if the cuff application is proper, and if the cuff size corresponds with the selected patient type.

Cause 3
The air hose is disconnected.
Solution
Check if the air hose is tightly connected, and then measure again. If the same message is displayed again, air
leakage inside the HS-8000/DS-8007 can be considered.
Contact your nearest service representative.

<Check NIBP cuff, hose> is displayed.

Cause 1
The connection between the cuff and air hose or the air hose and NIBP connector is loose or disconnected.
Solution
If the connection is loose or disconnected, securely connect it and perform the measurement again.
If the same message is displayed again, internal air leakage can be considered. Cease the measurement, and
contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 2
The cuff is compressed.
Solution
Make sure that the cuff is not subjected to compression, and measure with the patient arms extended as much as
possible.
If the same message is repeatedly displayed, air system may be clogged. Cease the measurement, and contact
your nearest service representative.

Cause 3
The cuff size is not suitable for the patient.
Solution
Check that the cuff size is appropriate for the patient, and that the cuff is properly attached, and measure again.

Cause 4
The cuff size and the patient classification setting do not match.
Solution
Make sure that the appropriate cuff size is used according to the patient classification setting.

11-36
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<NIBP measurement failed (Cxx-xx)> is displayed.

Error code condition (phenomenon, or situation) and its cause are indicated below.

C02-00 When "Quick Measurement" is [OFF], the data could not be measured.

Cause 1
The blood pressure may not be correctly measured due to the patient's condition.
Solution
Check the patient's condition, and measure again.

Cause 2
The cuff application has become loose.
Solution
Check that the cuff size is appropriate for the patient, and then measure again after attaching the cuff properly.

C02-01 When "Quick Measurement" is [ON], the data could not be measured.

Cause 1
The blood pressure may not be correctly measured due to the patient's condition.
Solution
Check the patient's condition, set "Quick Measurement" to OFF, and measure again.

Cause 2
The cuff application has become loose.
Solution
Check that the cuff size is appropriate for the patient, and then measure again after attaching the cuff properly.

C02-02 The air hose was disconnected from the NIBP connector during the measurement.

Cause
The air hose was disconnected from the NIBP connector during the measurement.
Solution
Connect the air hose to the NIBP connector, and then measure again.

C03-xx The exhaust ventilation has ceased, or the target deflation speed was not achieved.

Cause 1
During measurement, an artifact such as body motion may have interfered.
Solution
Keep the patient still as much as possible, and measure while the patient is not moving. When performing the
measurement during surgery, avoid artifact caused by the surgery.

Cause 2
During the measurement, air hose was bent or occluded by the compression.
Solution
Make sure that the air hose is not bent or compressed before the measurement.

11-37
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

If the error persists and C03-xx error is frequently displayed, contact your nearest service representative and notify
the error code.

C04-xx The cuff inflation was insufficient for the patient's blood pressure.

Cause
The blood pressure has significantly increased from the previous measurement.
Solution
Check the cuff application and size and perform the manual measurement.

C06-xx The pulse signal detected during the measurement was unstable.

Cause 1
During the measurement, the patient has trembled or moved.
Solution
Keep the patient still as much as possible, and measure while the patient is not trembling or moving.

Cause 2
Arrhythmia has frequently occurred during the measurement.
Solution
If arrhythmia occurs many times, correct measurement cannot be performed.Measure when arrhythmia is not
frequently occurring.

C07-00 The measurement time has exceeded the allowable time.

Cause
Measurement is automatically repeated due to body motion or insufficient inflation.
Solution
Check the cuff application and size, and measure while keeping the patient still as much as possible.

C08-00 The detected PR value was abnormal.

Cause
The patient has trembled or moved.
Solution
Keep the patient still as much as possible, and measure while the patient is not moving.

C09-00 The inflation value has exceeded the allowable maximum value.

Cause
The cuff was subjected to compression.
Solution
Make sure that the cuff is not subjected to compression, and measure with the patient arms extended as much as
possible.

11-38
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

C10-xx The detected pulse amplitude was abnormal.

Cause
The cuff size is not suitable for the patient.
Solution
Check that the cuff size is appropriate for the patient, and that the cuff is properly attached, and measure again.

The time of measurement disappears and the numeric data is displayed as " - - - ".
Cause
The preprogrammed time to clear the NIBP data has elapsed.
Solution
The "NIBP Erase Time" can be selected from [60 min.], [120 min.], and after the set duration, the NIBP data will
be displayed as "---".
Select the appropriate time which best fits the monitoring purpose.

The NIBP periodic measurement is ceased.

Cause
<NIBP Meas. Error (Exx-xx)> is displayed during the measurement.

Solution
When <NIBP Meas. Error (Exx-xx)> is displayed, the NIBP periodic measurement will be canceled. To resume the
measurement, press the [NIBP Start/Stop] key and check that the measurement is properly performed.

NOTE
 When the NIBP Start/Stop key is pressed or when the NIBP measurement interval is
changed, the standby mode will be canceled and the NIBP periodic measurement will start.

<NIBP Unit Error (E**-**)> is displayed.

Cause
An error has occurred on the NIBP unit.
E08-01: Communication Error (Sub CPU)
E08-02: WatchDog Timeout
E08-03: Pressure Offset Error
E08-04: Pressure Comparison Error
E08-05: Sub CPU Power Supply Failure
E08-06: Pressure Sensor 2 Power Supply Failure
E08-07: Pressure Sensor 1 A/D Reference Power Voltage Failure
E08-08: Rapid Exhaust Error
E08-09: Air Hose Identification Error
E09-A: Exceeded Maximum Cuff Pressure
E09-B: Inflation Timeout
E09-C: Quick Mode Timeout
E09-D: Measurement started during the long pause
E09-E: Measurement Timeout
E09-F: Main CPU Pressure Data Transmission Timeout
E09-G: Pressure Sensor 1 +5V Power Supply Failure
E09-H: Zero Calibration Timeout
E09-I: ROM Test Error
E09-J: RAM Test Error
E09-L: Clock Transmission Ceased
E09-M: Communication Failure at Power ON
E09-N: Pressure Comparison Error

11-39
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

E09-O: Maximum Inflation Timeout

E09-Q: Measurement was started before zero calibration
E09-R: Zeroing Error
E09-S: WatchDog Timeout
E09-T: +5V Digital Power Supply Failure
E09-U: Main CPU Power Supply Failure
E09-V: Pump Control Signal Failure
E09-W: Quick Exhaust Valve Control Signal Failure
E09-X: Sub CPU Constant Exhaust Valve Control Signal Failure
E09-Y: Main CPU Constant Exhaust Valve Control Signal Failure

Solution 1
These errors can be cleared by pressing the [Cancel Error] on the NIBP setup menu or [NIBP Start/Stop] key (fixed
key or user key).If the same message is repeatedly displayed, a failure of the device can be considered. Cease
the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.
Solution 2
When <NIBP Unit Error (Exx-xx)> is displayed, make sure that the congestion is not generated, and remove the
cuff if necessary.

Temperature

<T* Unknown Sensor> is displayed.

Cause 1
700 series temperature probe is used.
Solution
Use the 400 series temperature probe for measurement.

Cause 2
There is a contact failure of the temperature probe.
Solution
Check if the temperature probe is properly inserted.

The measurement data is displayed as "xxx".

Cause
The temperature measurement is outside the measurement range.
Solution
Check if the temperature probe is properly inserted.
Replace the temperature probe, or check the temperature probe.

<T* Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
While monitoring the temperature, the temperature probe was unplugged.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key.The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the temperature probe. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.

11-40
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<Super Unit TEMP Unit Failure> is displayed.

Cause
An error was detected on the temperature unit.
Solution
A unit failure can be considered.Cease the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.

Cardiac Output (CO)

When measured consecutively, the measurement value varies. (±10% or more)

Cause 1
The injection method is not appropriate.
Solution
Inject within 1 to 3 seconds.

Cause 2
Injection temperature is not appropriate.
Solution
If iced injectate is used, pay attention not to warm the injector with hands.

Cause 3
The thermistor location is not appropriate.
Solution
Reposition the thermistor.

Cause 4
Arrhythmia event has occurred during the measurement.
Solution
Wait until the patient has stable heart rhythm.

Cause 5
There was patient's body movement during the measurement.
Solution
Have the patient stay still during the measurement.

Cause 6
The patient's hemodynamics changed during the measurement.
Solution
Wait until the patient has stable hemodynamics.

Abnormal measurement value is displayed.

Cause
The catheter size, injectate volume, catheter constant (CC) is not correct.
Solution
Set the proper condition, CC value for the used catheter.

11-41
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The blood temperature (Tb), injectate temperature (Ti) is not displayed.

Cause
The catheter is not properly connected.
Solution
Securely connect the catheter.

The thermodilution curve is deformed.

Cause
The injection is not smooth, steady motion.
Solution
Inject promptly within 1 to 3 seconds.

The baseline of the thermodilution curve is displaced to the minus side. <LOWER FAULT> is
displayed.

Cause
The blood temperature has not returned to stable condition after the measurement.

The thermodilution curve did not return to the cut off point soon enough. The temperature must return to a point
that is 30% of the peak value within 30 seconds (or 60 seconds depending on the setup).
Solution
If performing continuous measurement, wait for 30 to 60 seconds and check that "Ready" is displayed before
performing the next measurement.

The thermodilution curve is low. <PEAK FAULT> is displayed.

Cause
The peak of the thermodilution curve can not be detected.

After the measurement is started, the peak of the thermodilution curve was not determined within 22 seconds
(when the time scale is "30 sec" ) or 45 seconds (when the time scale is "60 sec" ).
Solution
The thermistor may be contacting the pulmonary artery wall. Reposition the thermistor and measure again.

11-42
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<UPPER FAULT> message is displayed.

Cause
After the injection, the blood temperature is out of the measurement range.

1.8 F

After the measurement is started, the change in blood temperature is less than 0.1°C /1.8°F for more than 15
seconds (when the time scale is "30 sec" ) or 30 seconds (when the time scale is "60 sec" ).
Solution
Use the iced injectate, and measure again.

<OVER RANGE> is displayed.

Cause
The CO value is out of the calculation range.
Solution
The area of the thermodilution curve is too large to calculate. Start the measurement again.

The measurement is interrupted, and the error message, <UPPER_FAULT>, <PEAK_FAULT>,

<LOWER_FAULT> , <SENSOR_ERROR> is displayed.

Cause 1
The thermistor connector and relay cable is not securely connected.
Solution
Correct measurement cannot be performed unless the thermistor connector and relay cable is securely connected.
Check the connection and perform the measurement again.

Cause 2
The sensor or relay cable is defective.
Solution
If the sensor or cable is defective, measurement can not be performed. Replace the sensor or cable and perform
the measurement again.

<CO Disconnected> message is displayed.

Cause
The catheter relay cable was disconnected while monitoring the cardiac output.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the catheter relay cable. This will clear the message and silence the alarm.

11-43
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

CO2 Measurement (HCP-810/HCP-820)

<CO2 Check Sample Line> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sampling tube is clogged.
Solution
Replace the sampling tube.

Cause 2
The sampling line is bent or pinched.
Solution
Make sure that the sampling line is properly allocated.

<Initializing> displayed inside the numeric data box does not disappear.
Cause
An error has occurred during the initialization at power ON.
Solution
Reconnect the cable of HCP-810/HCP-820 and reboot.
If the message is still displayed, CO2 unit failure can be considered. Contact your nearest service representative.

<CO2 Unit Error> is displayed.

Cause
Communication error has occurred with the CO2 unit.
Solution
A cable disconnection or CO2 unit failure can be considered. Contact your nearest service representative.

There is substantial measurement error.

Cause 1
20 minutes have not yet elapsed since the power is turned ON.
Solution
For 20 minutes from turning ON the power, there will be a substantial measurement error.

Cause 2
The CO2 calibration value is not appropriate.
Solution
Perform the CO2 calibration again.

<CO2 Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
When the filter line is disconnected during CO2 monitoring, this message will be displayed.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key to clear the message and silence the alarm.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the filter line. This will clear the message and silence the alarm.

11-44
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Waveforms and measurement data are not displayed.

Cause
The gas module is used at the same time.
Solution
The HCP-810/HCP-820 and gas module cannot be used at the same time. If used, CO2 measurement by the gas
module will be prioritized.

CO2 Measurement (HPD-810/HPD-820)

<CO2 Sensor Failure> is displayed.

Cause 1
The CO2 sensor temperature has increased above 40°C/104°F.
Solution
Remove any heat generating source around the sensor.

Cause 2
The CO2 sensor is malfunctioning.
Solution 1
Replace the CO2 sensor.
Solution 2
If the error persists, the failure of HPD-810/HPD-820 can be considered. Stop using the unit and contact our
service representative.

<Zero the CO2 Adapter> is displayed.

Cause
The CO2 sensor is not zero balanced.
Solution
Perform the zero calibration of the sensor.
(
 "CO2 Concentration (Mainstream Method)" P7-74)

<Check CO2 Airway Adapter> is displayed.

Cause 1
The airway adapter is unclean.
Solution
A clean airway adapter must be used. If reusing an airway adapter, clean and air-dry it. Then, wipe the window
with swab, and sterilize (EOG, etc.) before use.

Cause 2
The airway adapter is disconnected from the sensor.
Solution 1
Securely connect the airway adapter to the sensor.
Solution 2
If error persists, perform the airway adapter calibration again.

11-45
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<Unknown CO2 Sensor> is displayed.

Cause
Unsupported CO2 sensor is connected.
Solution
Connect the specified CO2 sensor.

<CO2 Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause
When the cable is disconnected during CO2 monitoring, this message will be displayed.
Solution 1
To cease monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key to clear the message and silence the alarm.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the cable. This will clear the message and silence the alarm.

Recorder Unit (HR-800)

<Check Paper> is displayed, and printing cannot be performed.

The power supply LED on the HR-800 is lit in orange.
<PAPER OUT> is displayed inside the [Print Start/Stop] user key.

Cause
There is no paper in the printer.
Solution
Set the paper in the paper holder.

<Check Cassette> is displayed, and printing cannot be performed.

The power supply LED on the HR-800 is lit in orange.
<CASSETTE> is displayed inside the [Print Start/Stop] user key.

Cause
The paper holder is open.
Solution
Firmly close the paper holder.

Although the paper is fed, printing is not performed.

Cause
The paper is not correctly installed. The front and backside of the paper is set oppositely.
Solution
Set the paper in the paper holder so that the logo, FUKUDA DENSHI CO.,LTD appears on the upper surface.

The second and third waveforms are not printed for manual printing or alarm printing.
Cause
The second and third waveforms are not set on the printing setup screen.
Solution
Set the second and third waveform on the corresponding printing setup screen.

11-46
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The power supply LED on the HR-800 is lit in orange, and [Print Start/Stop] key does not function.
Cause 1
The U-LINK setting is incorrect.
Solution
Press the [Initial Settings]> [External Device]> [U-LINK] keys.
If HR-800 is connected via MGU-800, select [MGU-800].
If HR-800 is not connected via MGU-800, select [OFF].

Cause 2
The HR-800 setting is incorrect.
Solution
Press the [Menu]>[Initial Settings]>[System]>[Other]>[HR-800] keys.
If the HR-800 is installed to the internal slot, select [Built-in].
If connected to U-LINK, select [U-LINK].

<Check Printer> is displayed and printing cannot be performed.

The power supply LED on the HR-800 is lit in orange.
<CHECK?> is displayed inside the [Print Start/Stop] user key.

Cause 1
The paper is jammed.
Solution
Open the paper holder and properly set the paper.

Cause 2
The thermal head temperature has increased or other failure exists.
Solution
Damage to the thermal head or other failure can be considered. Contact your nearest service representative.

Network Printer

<Central Printer Check Connection> is displayed and printing cannot be performed.

Cause
The central monitor selected as the output destination is not connected to the printer.
Solution
Check the printer setting on the central monitor, and make sure the communication with the printer is established.

<Central Printer Check Setting> is displayed and printing cannot be performed.

Cause
The central monitor selected as the output destination does not support the network printing function.
Or, the printer setting is set to [OFF] on the central monitor selected as the output destination.
Solution
Use the DS-7700/DS-7700W system with the software version from V06, and set the printer setting to [ON].

11-47
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<Check Central ID> is displayed and printing cannot be performed.

Cause
The central monitor selected as the output destination does not support the network printing function.
Solution
Select the central monitor which supports the network printing function.

Wired Network (DS-LANII/ DS-LANIII)

The data is not displayed on the central monitor.

Cause 1
The DS-LAN setup is not correct.
Solution
Make sure that the DS-LAN Setup (DS-LAN II/III ) for all bedside monitors and central monitors in the same
network are the same. If the DS-LAN setting is changed, make sure to restart the system.If the DS-LAN setting is
changed, make sure to restart the system.

Cause 2
A central monitor which is not compatible is used.
Solution
The following central monitors can not be used on the DS-LAN III network.
 DS-5700
 DS-5800N/NX/NXMB
 DS-7600/7600W with software version V05 and prior
When using these central monitors, all monitors in the same network should be set to DS-LAN II.

Cause 3
Inappropriate HUB is used.
Solution
For the DS-LAN II network, use the specified repeater HUB.
For the DS-LAN III network, use the specified switching HUB.

Cause 4
The bed ID is duplicated in the same network.
Solution
If bedside monitors with the same bed ID exist in the same network, communication is not possible. Make sure to
set a unique bed ID for each bedside monitor.

Cause 5
A device not specified by Fukuda Denshi is connected to the network.
Solution
Do not connect PC, printer, or other unspecified device to the DS-LAN network.

Cause 6
The DS-LAN cable is not properly connected.
Solution
The DS-LAN connection will be performed by our service representative. Contact your nearest service
representative.

11-48
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The CO2 waveform is not displayed on the central monitor although the CO2 numeric data is
displayed.

Cause 1
[Impedance] is selected for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup menu.

Cause 2
[Ventilator] is selected for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup screen.
Solution
Select [CO2] for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup menu.
In this case, RR and apnea alarm will be generated based on CO2 measurement.

The impedance respiration waveform is not displayed on the central monitor although the RR
numeric data is displayed.

Cause 1
[CO2] is selected for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup menu.

Cause 2
[Ventilator] is selected for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup screen.
Solution
Select [Impedance] for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup menu.

NOTE
 The impedance waveform will not be displayed if [CO2] is set for "RR/APNEA Alarm
Source". AWF, AWP waveform will be displayed.
 The CO2 waveform will not be displayed if [Impedance] is set for "RR/APNEA Alarm
Source". AWF, AWP waveform will be displayed.
 The CO2 waveform and impedance waveform will not be displayed if [Vent.] is set for
"RR/APNEA Alarm Source" .

<Check DS-LAN Comm.> is displayed.

Cause
The LAN cable is loose, or contact failure has occurred. The power of the central monitor has been turned OFF.
Solution
Check the LAN connection on both the main unit and wall side. Disconnect and connect it again to make sure that
it is firmly connected.
Check the LAN connection on the central monitor. Disconnect and connect it again to make sure that it is firmly
connected.
Turn ON the power of the central monitor.

11-49
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Telemeter (HLX-801)

The data cannot be received at the telemetry center.

Cause 1
The channel ID or group ID is not corresponded with the telemetry receiver.
Solution
Set the correct channel ID and group ID.

Cause 2
The HLX connection setting is incorrect.
Solution
Press the [Menu]>[Initial Settings]>[System]>[Other]>[HLX Connection] keys.
If connected to internal port, select [Internal Port].
If connected to COM port, select [COM Port].
After the setting, make sure that the set channel is displayed as "CHxxxx" at the upper left of the screen.

The impedance respiration waveform cannot be received at the telemetry center.

Cause 1
[CO2] is selected for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup menu.

Cause 2
[Ventilator] is selected for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup screen.
Solution
Select [Impedance] for "RR/APNEA Alarm Source" on the RESP setup menu.

The BP waveform of 100 mmHg and above cannot be properly received.

Cause
The BP waveform and scale are not the same.
Solution
When the BP waveform is above 100 mmHg, set the BP scale above 100 mmHg.

<Check HLX Conn.> is displayed.

Cause
The connection with the HLX is interrupted.
Solution
Check the connection between the HLX and DSC-8410.
Check if [HLX] is set for the corresponding port under [Initial Settings] > [External Device] > [Main Unit HP-800].

<HLX Ver.> is displayed.

Cause
Installation has failed.
Solution
Check the software version of the HLX.
If "HLX-801 V99-99" is displayed, perform the installation again.
If the software version of "HLX-501 V01-09" or older is displayed, contact your nearest service representative.

11-50
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Remote Control

The remote control does not function.

Cause 1
The remote control bed ID is not correct.
Solution
Set the correct remote control ID.

Cause 2
The section number is not correct.
Solution
Set the correct section number.

The remote control does not properly function.

Cause
The remote control setting on the monitor does not correspond to the function key on the remote control unit.
Solution
Make sure the remote control setting on the monitor and the function key on the remote control unit is
corresponded.

General

Even though the numeric data displayed on the extended display unit or central monitor is
exceeding the alarm limit, alarm does not generate.

Cause
The parameters not displayed on the display unit (LC-8016TC/8018TC) are displayed on the central monitor/
extended display unit as [All Data] is selected for "Numeric Data External Output" under [Initial Settings] > [System]
> [Other].
Solution 1
For the parameters which requires alarm monitoring on the extended display unit/central monitor, make sure to
display those on the display unit (LC-8016TC/8018TC).
Solution 2
For the extended display unit/central monitor, if monitoring is necessary for only the parameters displayed on the
display unit (LX-8016TC/8018TC), select [Displayed Data] for "Numeric Data External Output" under [Initial
Settings] > [System] > [Other].

Nothing is displayed on the screen, and the power supply LED is not lit.
Cause 1
The display unit is not properly attached to the main unit.
Solution
Connect the apparatus correctly.
(
 Maintenance Manual "System Construction" P1-2)

Cause 2
The main unit or display unit is malfunctioning.

11-51
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

The power supply LED and charge LED lights alternately.

Cause 1
The display unit is not properly attached to the main unit.
Solution
Connect them correctly.
(

Maintenance Manual "System Construction" P1-2)

Cause 2
The main unit or display unit is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

The data is initialized each time the power is turned ON.

Cause 1
The internal switch setting is incorrect.
Solution
The internal switch setting needs to be changed. Contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 2
The battery for the backup memory is depleted.
Solution
The battery needs to be replaced. Contact your nearest service representative.

The display is dark, or cannot be seen clearly.

Cause 1
The night mode is set.
Solution
Cancel the night mode.

Cause 2
The service life of the LCD backlight has expired.
Solution
The LCD unit needs to be replaced. Contact your nearest service representative.

CAUTION
 The display unit utilizes LED for the backlight.
Since this LED deteriorates by the life cycle, the display may become dark, scintillate, or
may not light by the long term use. In such case, contact your nearest service
representative.

11-52
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The system does not start although the power supply cable is connected.
Cause 1
Incorrect CF card is inserted.
Solution
Remove the CF card, turn OFF the power, and turn ON the power again.

Cause 2
The main unit or display unit is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

The clock is often delayed.

Cause
The battery for the backup memory is depleted.
Solution
Check if the time is delayed when the power is turned OFF.
The battery needs to be replaced. Contact your nearest service representative.

The touch panel key does not function properly.

Cause 1
Due to change in installation environment, the detecting location is misaligned.
Solution
Calibration is required. Contact your nearest service representative.

CAUTION
 The calibration will be performed by our service representative.Users should not perform
this procedure as incorrect calibration may cause malfunction of the device.

Cause 2
The LCD unit is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<DSC-8410 Failure> or <DSC-8410 Check Unit> is displayed.

Cause
The hardware failure has occurred.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<DSC-8410 Out of Operating Temp. Range>, <Display Unit Out of Operating Temp. Range> is
displayed.

Cause
The main unit or display unit is used outside the specified environment condition.
Solution
Use the device in the specified environment condition (10°C to 40°C).

11-53
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<Display Unit Failure>, <Check Display Unit> is displayed.

Cause
The display unit failure has occurred.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<DSC-8410 Check Rotary SW> is displayed.

Cause
The rotary switch setting is incorrect.
Solution
If the rotary switch is not set to "0", the device will not function properly.
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<The settings have been changed. Reboot the unit.> is displayed when the power is turned ON.
Cause
Rebooting of the system is required.
Solution
Power cycle the system. If the same message is repeatedly displayed, turn OFF the power and contact your
nearest service representative.

<DSC-8410 Check Short-Term Battery>, <DSC-8410 Check Long-Term Battery> is displayed.

Cause
The battery is depleted or malfunctioning.
Solution
The battery needs to be replaced. Contact your nearest service representative.

<Some parameters are not displayed due to the display layout setting.> is displayed.
Cause 1
The measured parameter is not set to be displayed.
Solution
On the "Display Config." setting, select the measured parameter to be displayed.

Cause 2
During auto display configuration, the quantity of measured parameters exceeded the displayable parameters.
Solution
If there are parameters which measurements are not actually performed, please disconnect their probes/cables.

<Check Equip. Config.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The "Multiamplifier" setting does not correspond to the connected cable.
Solution
Check the "Multiamplifier" setting (Initial Settings>System>Unit Module>Multiamplifier), and make sure that the
setting corresponds to the connected cable.

11-54
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Cause 2
On the "External Device" setting, the set external device is duplicated.
Solution
Check the "External Device" setting, and make sure that the selected external device is not duplicated. The
external devices other than Vigilance, INVOS, BIS, AEP cannot be duplicated.
The combinations of FLOW-i/ GE/ Draeger and MGU-800/ MGU-810, FLOW-i/ GE/ Draeger and ventilator are not
possible.

<Check Module-LAN Comm> is displayed.

Cause
The connection of the module-LAN connector on the main unit or external device is not secured.
Solution
Securely connect the cable to the module-LAN connector.
Securely connect the cable to the external device.
If the error persists, contact your nearest service representative.

Super Unit

The system does not start although the power is turned ON.
The power supply LED on the Super Unit does not light in green.
<Super Unit Check Conn.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The power cable of the main unit is not connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power and connect the power cable.

Cause 2
The module connection cable is not properly connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power, and make sure that the module connection cable is securely connected. If the knob is loose,
tighten it securely.

Cause 3
The fuse inside the Super Unit has blown out.
Solution
Immediately turn off the power and stop using the device. Contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 4
The Super Unit is not properly connected to the adapter (HSA-80/HSA-81 or DSA-82).
Solution
Insert the Super Unit into the HSA-80/HSA-81 or DSA-82 until a click sound is heard.

<Super Unit Out of Operating Temp. Range> is displayed.

Cause
The temperature inside the Super Unit has exceeded the operating temperature range.
Solution
The operation cannot be guaranteed.Immediately turn off the power and stop using the device. Contact your

11-55
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

nearest service representative.

<Super Unit Analog Unadjusted> is displayed.

Cause
One of ECG, respiration, or BP is not adjusted.
Solution
Parameter cannot be measured properly in this situation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<Super Unit Check DIP-SW> is displayed.

Cause
The DIP switch setting has been changed.
Solution
Contact your nearest service representative.

<Super Unit Check SD Card> is displayed.

Cause
The SD Card is defective or the Super Unit is malfunctioning.
Solution
Contact your nearest service representative.

Data Transfer Function

The patient name is flashing.

Cause
This is a normal operation which indicates the data updating process.

An error occurs during the data update process.

Cause
The HS-8000 is disconnected during the data update process.
Solution 1
Do not disconnect the HS-8000 during the data update process. If the same error persists, refer to your nearest
service representative.
Solution 2
If the error occurs during the write process on the DS-8400 System, start again from the read process on the
original patient monitor. If the same error persists, refer to your nearest service representative.

Cause 2
The module connection cable is not properly connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power, and make sure that the module connection cable is securely connected. Reconnect the cable
if necessary. If the knob is loose, tighten it securely.

When the HS-8000/DS-8007 is connected, the alarm sound is suspended.

Cause

11-56
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

This is a normal operation. To not suspend the alarm sound, set the alarm sound suspend function OFF.

The recall data cannot be transferred.

Cause 1
The SD card is not inserted to the Super Unit.
Solution
Insert the SD card to the Super Unit, and format it.

Cause 2
The SD card is not formatted.
Solution
Format the SD card.

The upload process does not start.

Cause 1
[Transport] is not selected for "Data Transfer" under [Initial Settings > System > Other].
Solution
Check if [Transport] is selected for "Data Transfer" under [Initial Settings > System > Other]. If not, select
[Transport].

Cause 2
On the central monitor, "Data Transfer" function is set to [OFF].
Solution
Check the setting on the central monitor.

NOTE
 For the software version and model type of the central monitor compatible to data transfer
function, refer to your nearest service representative.

The data cannot be transferred from the DS-8007 to DS-8400.

Cause
CFast card is not inserted to the DS-8400.
Solution
Use the CFast card to save the full disclosure waveform data.

Alarm settings, parameter settings are not transferred from the transport monitor.
The confirmation window to apply the alarm settings, parameter settings of the transport monitor
is not displayed.

Cause
The "Data for Transfer" setting is set to [OFF].
Solution
Check if the "Data for Transfer" setting is set to [ON]. If not, set it to [ON].

11-57
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

IB-8004 Input Box

The system does not start although the power of the DS-8400 is turned ON.
<IB-8000-* Check Conn.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The power cable of the main unit is not connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power and connect the power cable.

Cause 2
The module connection cable is not properly connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power, and make sure that the module connection cable is securely connected.

<IB*Slot* Module Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause 1
Infrared communication port is unclean.
Solution
Remove the expansion module, clean the infrared communication port, and insert the expansion module again.

Cause 2
The slot used in the IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Insert the expansion module into another slot. If it operates properly, the IB-8004 needs to be repaired.
Cease the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 3
IB-8004 or expansion module is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

The LAN-ID indicator keeps flashing.

Cause 1
The LAN ID setting is not correct.
Solution
Check the LAN-ID setting ID and make sure to set the correct LAN-ID.

Cause 2
The IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

11-58
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Power is not supplied to the expansion module.

Cause 1
The expansion module is not properly connected.
Solution
Remove and reinsert the expansion module.

Cause 2
The slot used in the IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Insert the expansion module into another slot. If it operates properly, the IB-8004 needs to be repaired.
Cease the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 3
IB-8004 or expansion module is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<IB-8000-* Check Unit>, <IB-8000-* Out of Operating Temp. Range> is displayed.

Cause
The IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<IB-8000-* Failure> is displayed.

Cause
This message may be occasionally displayed when the expansion module is removed/inserted.
Solution
If the message automatically disappears, there is no problem on the device. If the message is repeatedly
displayed, immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation as the failure of the IB-8004 can be
considered.

11-59
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Expansion Module

The system does not start although the power of the DS-8400 is turned ON.
Cause 1
The power cable of the main unit is not connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power, and make sure that the module connection cable is securely connected.

Cause 2
The module connection cable is not properly connected.
Solution
Turn OFF the power, and make sure that the module connection cable is securely connected.

Cause 3
The standby switch of the display unit is set to OFF.
Solution
Turn ON the standby switch on the display unit.

<Check Conn.> is displayed.

Cause 1
Infrared communication port is unclean.
Solution
Remove the expansion module, clean the infrared communication port, and insert the expansion module again.

Cause 2
The slot used in the IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Insert the expansion module into another slot. If it operates properly, the IB-8004 needs to be repaired.
Cease the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 3
IB-8004 or expansion module is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

Power is not supplied to the expansion module.

Cause 1
The expansion module is not properly connected.
Solution
Disconnect and connect the expansion module.

Cause 2
The slot used in the IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Insert the expansion module into another slot. If it operates properly, the IB-8004 needs to be repaired.
Cease the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.

11-60
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Cause 3
IB-8004 or expansion module is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

The following error messages related to the expansion module are displayed on the monitor.
<IB* Slot* Module Failure>, <IB* Slot* Analog Unadjusted>,
<IB* Slot* Check Module>, <IB* Slot* Out of Operating Temp. Range>

Cause
The module connected to the IB-8004 slot is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

<IB* Slot* Module Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause 1
The expansion module is not properly connected.
Solution
Disconnect and connect the expansion module.

Cause 2
The slot used in the IB-8004 is malfunctioning.
Solution
Insert the expansion module into another slot. If it operates properly, the IB-8004 needs to be repaired.
Cease the measurement, and contact your nearest service representative.

Cause 3
IB-8004 or expansion module is malfunctioning.
Solution
Immediately turn OFF the power and cease the operation. Contact your nearest service representative.

Extended Display Unit

Nothing is displayed on the extended display unit. The same display with the main unit is
displayed.

Cause
The video cable of the extended display unit is connected to the external monitor connector of the main unit.
Solution
Connect the cable to the extended display unit connector on the main unit.

The touch panel does not function on the extended display unit.
Cause
The serial communication cable is not connected.
Solution
Connect the serial communication cable of the extended display unit to the extended serial connector (COM A,
COM B) of the main unit.

11-61
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Ventilator

<Vent. Alarm> is displayed.

Cause
The following alarm has generated on the ventilator.
 Parameter alarm such as AWP, MV, FiO2
 Technical alarm such as battery replacement of the ventilator
Solution
Check the alarm cause of the ventilator, and take appropriate action.

<Vent. Offline> is displayed.

<VENT COMM> is displayed on the monitor and the ventilator.

Cause 1
The cable between the DS-8400 System and the ventilator is disconnected or not securely connected.
Solution
Make sure the cable is properly connected.

Cause 2
The power of the ventilator is turned OFF.
Solution
Turn ON the power of the ventilator.

Cause 3
The ventilator is in standby mode.
Solution
Start the ventilation on the ventilator.

Cause 4
The network setting of the monitor does not match with the ventilator.
Solution
Make sure that the network setting of the connecting devices are as follows.
SV-300/SERVO-i/SERVO-s
 No network setting.

SERVO-U/n/air
 No network setting.

VELIA, ASTRAL, VS ULTRA

 No network setting.

PB-740/760/840
 Baud Rate: 9600 bps
 Parity Bit: None
 Stop Bit: 1
 Data Bit: 8

11-62
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Evita4/2dura/XL
 Communication Protocol: Medibus
 Baud Rate: 19200 bps
 Parity Bit: Even
 Stop Bit: 1

Multigas Unit

<GAS Unit Failure> is displayed.

Cause
A hardware failure was detected on the gas unit.
Solution
Contact your nearest service representative.

<GAS Check Sample Line> is displayed.

Cause
The sampling line or water trap is completely occluded.
The moisture inside the sampling line is drawn towards the water trap to be removed.
Solution 1
Check if the sampling line is occluded. Remove the occlusion if found.
Solution 2
Replace the sampling line, water trap.

<GAS Check Water Trap> is displayed.

Cause 1
The water trap of the gas unit is not inserted, or not properly attached.
Solution
Insert the water trap.
Make sure the water trap is properly connected.
Cause 2
Water trap is partly clogged or damaged.
Solution
Replace the water trap.

<GAS Check Water Trap Class> is displayed.

Cause
The patient classification is not corresponded to the used water trap and the sampling tube.
Solution
Make sure the patient classification is corresponded to the used water trap and the sampling tube.
When the patient classification is "Adult" or "Child", make sure to use the water trap and sampling line intended
for adult/pediatric.
When the patient classification is neonate, make sure to use the water trap and sampling line intended for neonate.

11-63
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<GAS Mixed Agents Detection> is displayed.

Cause
More than one halogenated anesthetic gas exists.
Solution 1
Make sure that multiple anesthetic gases are not used.
Make sure that the anesthetic gas carburetor setting is correct.
Solution 2
If the problem persists, contact our service representative.

<GAS Zeroing Failed> is displayed.

Cause
The zero calibration process has not been properly completed.
Solution
Perform the manual zero calibration again.

<SPIRO Unit Failure> is displayed.

Cause
The hardware failure of the SPIRO unit was detected.
Solution
Contact your nearest service representative.

<SPIRO Check FlowSensor Class> is displayed.

Cause 1
The flow sensor is disconnected or not securely connected.
Solution
Make sure that the flow sensor is securely connected.
Cause 2
The flow sensor is damaged.
Solution
Replace the flow sensor.
Cause 3
The used flow sensor does not correspond to the patient classification setting on the monitor.
Solution
Make sure that the used flow sensor corresponds to the patient classification setting.
When the patient classification is adult, use the flow sensor intended for adult.
When the patient classification is "Child" or "Neonate", use the flow sensor intended for pediatric.

<SPIRO Check Flow Sensor> is displayed.

Cause
If the flow sensor is disconnected during multigas monitoring, the message will be displayed.
Solution 1
To cease multigas monitoring, press the [Alarm Silence] key. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be
silenced.
Solution 2
To continue monitoring, plug in the flow sensor. The message will disappear, and the alarm will be silenced.

11-64
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

SvO2/CCO Monitor

The numeric data is not displayed.

Cause 1
The cable is not properly connected.
Solution
Connect the following cable securely.

Connection Cable
SvO2/CCO Monitor
For Status II Connector For Serial Connector

Vigilance CJ-406RI-70Vigi (x1) CJO-04RS4

Vigilance CEDV CJ-406RI-70Vigi (x1) CJO-04RS4

Vigilance II CJ-402RI-70SVi (x1) CJ-502

Vigileo CJ-402RI-70SVi (x1) CJ-502

HemoSphere CJ-402RI-70SVi (x1) CJ-502

EV1000 CJ-406RI-70Vigi (x1) CJO-04RS4

PiCCO2 CJO-19RS5 (x1) CJO-18RS5

PulsioFlex - CJ-725*1

*1: To connect the PulsioFlex PC4000, USB to RS-232C connector cable (UC-232A, ATEN) specified by PULSION
Medical Systems is required.

Cause 2
The "External Device" setting is not correct.
Solution
Select [Vigilance/Vigileo], [PiCCO] or [PulsioFlex] for the port function on the "External Device" setup screen.

Cause 3
The measurement data is not displayed on the corresponding external device.
Solution
The measurement data of SvO2, CO, etc. will not be displayed on the monitor unless the data is displayed on the
used external device.Check if the data is displayed on the used external device.

Cause 4
The CCO is not measured.
Solution
The CCO/CCI data will be displayed on this device only when CCO is measured on each external device.

Cause 5
The network setting of the monitor does not match with each external device.
Solution
The network setting of the monitor is fixed to the default setting of each external device and cannot be changed.
Make sure that the network setting of the connecting device is in default setting.

In Case of Vigilance/Vigileo:
Make sure that the network is set as follows.
For procedure to check the Vigilance/Vigileo network setting, refer to the operation manual for the Vigilance/
Vigileo.

11-65
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

 Device: IFM Out

 Baud Rate: 19200 bps
 Parity Bit: None
 Stop Bit: 1
 Data Bit: 8
 Flow Control: 2 sec.
In Case of HemoSphere
Make sure that the network is set as follows.
For procedure to check the HemoSphere network setting, refer to the operation manual for the HemoSphere.
 Device: IFM Out
 Baud Rate: 19200 bps
 Parity Bit: None
 Compatibility: None
 Stop Bit: 1
 Data Bit: 8
 Flow Control: 2 seconds.
In Case of PiCCO
Make sure that the network is set as follows.
For procedure to check the PiCCO network setting, refer to the operation manual for the PiCCO2.
 RS-232C Protocol: PiCCO2 V3.0
In Case of PulsioFlex:
Check if the network is set as follows.
For procedure to check the PulsioFlex network setting, refer to the operation manual for the PulsioFlex.
 RS232C protocol: PulsioFlex V1.0

Cause 6
The software version of Vigilance does not correspond.
Solution
If the Vigilance without the STAT function is connected, the STAT data will not be displayed. Check the software
version of the Vigilance.

Cause 7
The software version of PiCCO does not correspond.
Solution
The compatible version of PiCCO2 is from V3.0. Check the version of the PiCCO2.

Cause 8
The software version of PulsioFlex does not correspond.
Solution
Check the software version of PulsioFlex. The compatible version is PulsioFlex V1.0.

11-66
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

BIS Monitor (A-2000/A-3000)

The numeric data is not displayed.

Cause 1
If the SQI value is lower than 15, BIS data and SR data will not be displayed.
Solution
Refer to the BIS monitor operation manual and set the SQI value above 15.

Cause 2
The communication setting of the BIS monitor is incorrect.
Solution
ASCII should be set to communicate with this system.
Make sure that ASCII is set on the BIS monitor communication setting.
Refer to the BIS monitor operation manual for procedures.

<Check BIS Conn.> is displayed.

Cause
The cable is not properly connected. The connection cable is disconnected.
Solution
Securely connect the connection cable to the serial or status connector of the main unit or the Status II connector
of the HP-800.

BIS (When HBX-800 is used)

<BISx Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause 1
The BISx is disconnected.
Solution
Verify all cable connections and connect the BISx correctly.

Cause 2
The BISx cable is defective.
Solution
Check the cable including the connector part, and replace the cable if necessary.

Cause 3
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

<BIS High Impedance, Check Sensor> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sensor is not fully in contact with patient's skin.
Solution
Attach the electrode firmly to patient's skin.

11-67
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Cause 2
The sensor application is incorrect.
Solution
Read instructions on sensor package to ensure correct sensor placement.

Cause 3
The patient interface cable (PIC cable) is defective.
Solution
Replace the patient interface cable (PIC cable).

Cause 4
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

<BIS Sensor Disconnected> is displayed.

Cause 1
The sensor is disconnected.
Solution
Connect the sensor.

Cause 2
Poor or contaminated connection between the sensor and patient interface cable (PIC cable).
Solution
Clean the connection part, and connect them properly.

Cause 3
The patient interface cable (PIC cable) is disconnected.
Solution
Connect the patient interface cable (PIC cable) correctly.

Cause 4
The patient interface cable (PIC cable) is defective.
Solution
Replace the patient interface cable (PIC cable).

Cause 5
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

11-68
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

<BIS Perform "Sensor Check"> is displayed.

Cause 1
At least one element of sensor has too high impedance, and "Sensor Check" window is closed before sensor
check completes.
Solution
Press the "Sensor Check" key to start the sensor check process and ensure that <PASS> is displayed.

Cause 2
The sensor application is incorrect.
Solution
Read instructions on sensor package to ensure correct sensor placement.

Cause 3
The sensor is not properly connected.
Solution
Verify that the sensor is properly connected.

Cause 4
The patient interface cable (PIC cable) is defective.
Solution
Replace the patient interface cable (PIC cable).

Cause 5
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

<Artifacts> is displayed.
Situation The signal quality is less than half of the level desirable for optimal monitoring conditions.
NOTE
 This message may occur as the results of artifact (non-EEG signal) such as those generated
from motion (patient movement or eye blinks) or the presence of electrocautery, warming
blankets, or other devices.

Cause 1
Artifact, such as those generated by motion or eyeblinks, is causing loss of EEG recognition.
Solution
If <Artifacts> appears on the display, attempt to identify and eliminate artifact source.

Cause 2
EMG bar indicates electrical activity that may be interfering with EEG recognition.
Solution
If EMG bar is illuminated, attempt to determine and eliminate cause.

Cause 3
The patient interface cable (PIC cable) is defective.
Solution
Make sure that sensor check passes. If not, replace the patient interface cable (PIC cable).

11-69
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Cause 4
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

<BIS SQI < 15%> is displayed.

Situation The signal quality is too low to accurately calculate a BIS value.
The BIS value and other trend variables that are adversely affected by artifact are not displayed.
NOTE
 This message may occur as the results of artifact (non-EEG signal) such as those generated
from motion (patient movement or eye blinks) or the presence of electrocautery, warming
blankets, or other devices.

Cause 1
Artifact, such as those generated by motion or eyeblinks, is causing loss of EEG recognition.
Solution
If <BIS SQI < 15%> appears on the display, attempt to identify and eliminate artifact source.

Cause 2
EMG bar indicates electrical activity that may be interfering with EEG recognition.
Solution
If EMG bar is illuminated, attempt to determine and eliminate cause.

Cause 3
The patient interface cable (PIC cable) is defective.
Solution
Make sure that sensor check passes. If not, replace the patient interface cable (PIC cable).

Cause 4
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

<BISx Incompatible> is displayed.

Cause
The sensor is not compatible with the monitor configuration.
Solution
Replace the BISx.

<Check BIS Sensor, Perform Sensor Check> is displayed.

Cause
Problem is detected relating to sensor ground element, or sensor is using too much current.
Solution 1
Disconnect and examine sensor connection, clean any contamination, then perform "Sensor Check".
Solution 2
Replace the sensor if necessary, then perform "Sensor Check".
Solution 3

11-70
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Replace the patient interface cable (PIC cable), then perform "Sensor Check".
Solution 4
Replace the BISx, then perform "Sensor Check".

<Replace BIS Sensor, Too Many Uses>, <Replace BIS Sensor, Invalid Sensor> is displayed.

Cause 1
Sensor has been connected and disconnected too many times.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

Cause 2
The sensor is invalid.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

<Sensor Usage > 24hrs.> is displayed.

Cause
The sensor was attached to the system for more than 24 hours.
Solution
Replace the sensor.

<BISx Failure> is displayed.

Cause
The BISx is defective.
Solution
Replace the BISx, then perform "Sensor Check".

The power indicator on the HBX-800 is lit in red.

Cause
The HBX-800 is defective.
Solution
Cease using the device and contact your nearest service representative to repair the device.

AEP Monitor

The numeric data is not displayed.<Check aepEX conn.> is displayed.

Cause
The cable is not properly connected. The connection cable is disconnected.
Solution
Securely connect the cable to the serial or status connector of the Main Unit or the Status II connector of the HP-
800 and the AEP connector.

11-71
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

INVOS

The numeric data is not displayed.<Check INVOS Conn.> is displayed.

Cause
The cable is not properly connected. The connection cable is disconnected.
Solution
Securely connect the connection cable to the serial or status connector of the main unit or the Status II connector
of the HP-800.

FLOW-i

The numeric data is not displayed. <Check FLOW-i Conn.> is displayed.

Cause1
The cable is not properly connected. The connection cable is disconnected.
Solution
Securely connect the connection cable to the serial or status connector of the main unit or the Status II connector
of the HP-800.
Cause2
The FLOW-i is in standby mode.
Solution
The numeric data will be displayed when the measurement is started on the FLOW-i.
Cause3
The software version of the FLOW-i is not compatible with the DS-8400.
Solution
The compatible software version of DS-8400 is from 01- 01.
The compatible software version of FLOW-i is system software version 02 and 03 (FCI Protocol version 0004 and
0005 respectively).

Anesthesia Delivery System (GE)

The numeric data is not displayed. <Check Anes. Comm> is displayed.

Cause 1
The cable is not properly connected. The connection cable is disconnected.
Solution
Securely connect the connection cable to the serial connector on the main unit and the connector on the GE
anesthesia delivery system.

Cause 2
The GE anesthesia delivery system is in standby mode.
Solution
The numeric data will be displayed when the measurement is started on the GE anesthesia delivery system.

Cause 3

11-72
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

The software version of the GE anesthesia delivery system is not compatible with the DS-8400.
Solution
The compatible software version of DS-8400 is from 07-01.
The GE anesthesia delivery systems compatible with DATEX-OHMEDA COM1.2 SERIAL PROTOCOL protocol
can be connected.
Cause 4
The anesthesia delivery system is not a connectable model type to the DS-8400.
Solution
The connectable model types are as follows.
 Avance
 Aysis

Anesthesia Delivery System (Draeger)

The numeric data is not displayed. <Check Anes. Comm> is displayed.

Cause 1
The cable is not properly connected. The connection cable is disconnected.
Solution
Securely connect the connection cable to the serial connector on the main unit and the connector on the Draeger
anesthesia delivery system.

Cause 2
The Draeger anesthesia delivery system is in standby mode.
Solution
The numeric data will be displayed when the measurement is started on the Draeger anesthesia delivery system.

Cause 3
The software version of the Draeger anesthesia delivery system is not compatible with the DS-8400.
Solution
The compatible software version of DS-8400 is from 07-01.
The Draeger anesthesia delivery systems compatible with Medibus.X protocol can be connected to the DS-8400
system. Set the transmission speed of the anesthesia delivery system to 9600bps for Apollo or 38400 bps for other
devices.
Cause 4
The anesthesia delivery system is not a connectable model type to the DS-8400.
Solution
The connectable model types are as follows.
 Fabius
 Perseus
 Atlan
 Apollo

11-73
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

PC Communication

<Check System Conn.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The cable is disconnected or not properly connected. The power is not supplied to the communication port.
Solution
Connect the cable securely. Check if the power is supplied to the communication port by checking the
communication indicator.

Cause 2
Communication with the PC is not performed. The communication is ceased.
Solution
Resume the communication with the PC. The communication time out period is about 1 minute.

TCM4/TCM5 FLEX

The numeric data is not displayed.

Cause 1
The cable is not properly connected.
Solution
Connect the following cable securely.

Transcutaneous Blood Gas Connection Cable

Monitor For Status II Connector For Serial Connector

TCM4 - CJ-726 (straight) *1

TCM5 FLEX - CJ-725 (cross) *2

*1: To connect the TCM4, the cable specified by Radiometer Medical ApS is required.The communication
will be enabled by connecting the CJ-726 and the cable specified by Radiometer Medical ApS.
*2: To connect the TCM5 FLEX and CJ-725, D-sub 9-pin male to male gender changer (inch screw) is
required.

Cause 2
The "External Device" setting is not correct.
Solution
Select [TCM4/TCM5] for the port function on the "External Device" setup screen.

Cause 3
The measurement data is not displayed on the corresponding external device.
Solution
The measurement data of tcpO2, tcpCO2 will not be displayed on the monitor unless the data is displayed on the
used external device. Check if the data is displayed on the used external device.

Cause 4
The network setting of the monitor does not match with each external device.
Solution
The network setting of the monitor cannot be changed. Make sure that the network setting of the connecting device

11-74
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

is as follows.For details of the network setting on the TCM4 and TCM5 FLEX, refer to Radiometer Medical ApS.
In case of TCM4:
 RS-232C Protocol: Monlink
In case of TCM5 FLEX:
 RS-232C Protocol: Monlink2.0

Cause 5
The software version of TCM4 or TCM5 FLEX does not correspond.
Solution
Check the software version of TCM4 or TCM5 FLEX.
For details of the network setting on the TCM4 and TCM5 FLEX, refer to Radiometer Medical ApS.
TCM4: Version 3.04
TCM5 FLEX: Version 1.18

<Check TCM Conn.> is displayed.

Cause 1
The cable is disconnected, or not securely connected.
Solution
Connect the cable correctly.

Cause 2
The power of the external device has been turned OFF.
Solution
Turn ON the power of the external device.

Cause 3
The TCM series device other than TCM4, TCM5 FLEX is connected.
Solution
Only TCM4, TCM5 FLEX can be connected. Check the model type of the external device.

Magnetic Card Reader/Barcode Reader

The magnetic card reader or barcode reader does not function.

Cause
The conversion cable (CJ-756) is not connected.
Solution
If the magnetic card reader or barcode reader is connected directly to the serial port on this device without the
conversion cable, it will not function. Make sure to use the conversion cable.

External Media

<CF/CFast Card Slot: There is no card in the slot.> is displayed.

Cause
CF/CFast card is not inserted or not correctly set in the CF/CFast card slot.

11-75
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Solution
Set the CF/CFast card into the CF/CFast card slot.

<Data Read Error. Model type or software version is not compatible. Do you want to read only the
common data?> is displayed.

Cause 1
There is no data on the CF card.
Solution
Check if the CF card is readable. Or, check if the data is present on the CF card. Pressing "Yes" will not start
reading the compatible data.<Card access error.> will be displayed.

Cause 2
Error is detected during the read process.
Solution
The data may not be correctly written on the CF card. Format the card again on the used device and try the write/
read process again. Pressing "Yes" will not start reading the compatible data.

<Card access error.> is displayed.

Cause 1
There is not enough capacity on the CF card to write the data.
Solution
Check the remaining card capacity.
Format the card again on the used device and try the write/read process again.

Cause 2
Error is detected during the write process.
Solution
Make sure that the CF card is properly inserted and try the write process again.
Format the card again on the used device and try the write/read process again.

Cause 3
Unspecified CF card is used.
Solution
Use the specified CF card.

No data on the CF card.

Cause
There is no data on the CF card.
Solution
Check if the CF card is readable. Or, check if the data is present on the CF card.

<Wrong CF card for full disclosure.>, <Failed to read full disclosure from the CF card.>
Cause
Specified memory card is not used.
The card is not formatted.
The data stored in the card is damaged. The card has been already used on another device.

11-76
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Solution 1
Use the recommended memory card.
Disconnect and connect the full disclosure waveform card again to make sure that it is properly inserted.
Format the card on the used device. (All previous data will be deleted.)
Solution 2
If the error persists, contact your nearest service representative.

11-77
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

11-78
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Patient Admit / Discharge

Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value

This section lists selection, default setting, and backup status for each setup item.
The following indicates the selection, default setting and backup status for each setup item.

Patient Admit / Discharge

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Main Mode 1 to 9, Sub Mode 1 to 6, Depends on the "Main Mode"

Extended Display1 1 to 3, Extended setting under [Initial
Mode Selection Main Mode 1 Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Display2 1 to 3 Discharge].

ID Numeric, Alphabet, Symbol (20 characters) Blank Backup Initialize

Patient Name Numeric, Alphabet, Symbol (16 characters) Blank Backup Initialize

Depends on the "Patient

Classification" setting under
Patient Classification Adult, Child, Neonate Adult
[Initial Settings>User I/
F>Power ON/Discharge].

Sex Male, Female No selection Backup Initialize

Team Red, Orange, Yellow, Yellow-green,

Red Backup Initialize
Green, Light Blue, Blue, Purple

Birth Date Birth Date Blank Backup Initialize

Age 0 year to 150 years or 0 day to 999 days 0 year Backup Initialize

Height 0.0 cm to 300.0 cm 0.0 cm Backup Initialize

Weight 0.0 kg to 350.0 kg 0.0 kg Backup Initialize

BSA 0.00 m2 to 9.99 m2 0.00 m2 Backup Initialize

Blood Type A, B, O, AB
Blank Backup Initialize
Rh +/-
Depends on the setting under
Pacemaker Used, Not used Not Used [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

Depends on the setting under

Impedance Measurement ON, OFF ON [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

Admit Date Year, Month, Day Blank Backup Initialize

Alarm

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

System Alarm Suspend, ON Suspend - -

12-1
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Alarm

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

HR*3 ON, OFF

ON
20 bpm to 300 bpm
40 bpm to to 120 bpm
5 bpm increments

PR_IBP*3 ON, OFF

OFF
PR_SpO2*3 20 bpm to 300 bpm
OFF to OFF
5 bpm increments

Asystole*1 ON, OFF 3 sec to 10 sec. ON 5 sec.

1 sec. increments

VF*1 ON, OFF ON

*1
VT ON, OFF ON

Slow_VT ON, OFF ON

RUN ON, OFF 2 beats to 8 beats ON 3 beats

1 beat increments

Couplet ON, OFF OFF

PAUSE ON, OFF 1.5 sec. to 5 sec. OFF 3.0 sec.
0.5 sec. increments

Bigeminy ON, OFF OFF

Trigeminy ON, OFF OFF

Frequent ON, OFF 1 beats to 50 beats/ OFF, 10 bpm

min.
1 beat increments

TACHY ON, OFF ON

Depends on the "Main Mode"
BRADY ON, OFF ON
setting under [Initial
Ext Tachy*3 ON, OFF 22 beats to 300 beats/ OFF, 150 bpm Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
min. Discharge].
5 beat increments If "Main Mode" setting is
[Backup]; Depends on the
Ext Brady*3 ON, OFF 20 beats to 295 beats/ OFF, 30 bpm
"Alarm" setting under [Power
min.
ON/Discharge].
5 beat increments
Triplet ON, OFF OFF

R on T ON, OFF 200 ms to 600 ms OFF 320ms

8 ms increments
Multiform ON, OFF OFF

Vent Rhythm ON, OFF OFF

SVT ON, OFF 2 beats to 10 beats OFF, 6 beats

1 beat increments

Irregular RR ON, OFF 10% to 20% OFF 10%

5% increments

Prolonged RR ON, OFF OFF

S Frequent ON, OFF 1 beats to 50 beats/ OFF, 10 bpm

min.
1 beat increments

S Couplet ON, OFF OFF

VPC ON, OFF OFF

SVPC ON, OFF OFF

Pacer not Capture ON, OFF 80 ms to 480 ms OFF 320ms

8 ms increments

Pacer not Pacing ON, OFF 20 beats to 200 beats/ OFF, 50 bpm
min.
5 beat increments

12-2
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Alarm

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

HR Lower Limit for VT 120, 140 bpm 120 Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
0 beats to 100 beats beats/min Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
HR Lower Limit for Run *4 40 bpm
10 beat /min. increments
Discharge].
If "Main Mode" setting is
100 beats to 250 beats/min [Backup]; Depends on the
HR Lower Limit for SVT 150 bpm
10 beat /min. increments "Alarm" setting under [Power
ON/Discharge].
ST All Alarm ON, OFF ST All Alarm OFF
*2 Individual Alarm ON, OFF Individual Alarm OFF
ST1 to ST12(mm)
±20 mm OFF to OFF
1 mm increments

ST All Alarm ON, OFF ST All Alarm OFF

Individual Alarm ON, OFF Individual Alarm OFF
ST1 to ST12(mV)*2
±2.00mV OFF to OFF
0.1mV increments

ON
ON, OFF
*5 SYS: 80 to 180
BP1 (mmHg) 0 mmHg to 300 mmHg
DIA: OFF to OFF
8 mmHg increments
MEAN: OFF to OFF
ON Depends on the "Main Mode"
ON, OFF
SYS: 10.0 to 24.0 setting under [Initial
BP1 (kPa) *5 0 kPa to 40.0 kPa
DIA: OFF to OFF Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
0.5 kPa increments
MEAN: OFF to OFF Discharge].
OFF If "Main Mode" setting is
ON, OFF [Backup]; Depends on the
*5 SYS: OFF to OFF
BP2 to BP8 (mmHg) 0 mmHg to 300 mmHg "Alarm" setting under [Power
DIA: OFF to OFF
8 mmHg increments ON/Discharge].
MEAN: OFF to OFF

OFF
ON, OFF
SYS: OFF to OFF
BP2 to BP8 (kPa) *5 0 kPa to 40.0 kPa
DIA: OFF to OFF
0.5 kPa increments
MEAN: OFF to OFF
*1: Select [ON/OFF] for "Asystole, VF, VT Alarm" under [Menu<Initial Settings<Alarm] in advance.

*2: The same setting applies for "mm" and "mV".

*3: For HR, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady, 60 bpm or lower can be set in 1 bpm increments. For PR_SpO2, 25 bpm or lower can be set in
1 bpm increments.

*4: "HR Lower Limit for Run" can be set in 5 bpm increments for 50 bpm and above.

*5: For BP, 50 mmHg/7.0 kPa or lower can be set in 2 mmHg/0.2 kPa increments.

12-3
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Alarm

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

ON, OFF OFF

0 mmHg to 300 mmHg SYS: OFF to OFF
CVP (mmHg) (kPa) *1 5 mmHg increments DIA: OFF to OFF
0 kPa to 40 kPa MEAN: OFF to OFF
0.5 kPa increments
OFF
ON, OFF
SYS: OFF to OFF
CVP (cmH2O) 0 cmH2O to 40 cmH2O
DIA: OFF to OFF
1 cmH2O increments
MEAN: OFF to OFF

RR_IMP*2 ON, OFF 5 Bpm to 150 Bpm

RR_VENT*2 5 Bpm increments
ON 5 bpm to 30 bpm
RR_CO2*2 5 Bpm to 150 Bpm (Neonate)
2 Bpm increments

ON, OFF 10 sec. to 60 sec.

APNEA ON 15 sec.
1 sec. increments

ON, OFF 50%SpO2 to

ON
SpO2 100%SpO2 Depends on the "Main Mode"
90%SpO2 to OFF
1%SpO2 increments setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
ON, OFF 50%SpO2 to 90%SpO2
EXT SpO2 ON 80%SpO2 Discharge].
1%SpO2 increments
If "Main Mode" setting is
ON, OFF 1%SpCO to 40%SpCO [Backup]; Depends on the
SpCO OFF
1%SpCO increments "Alarm" setting under [Power
ON/Discharge].
ON, OFF 1%SpMet to 15%SpMet
SpMet OFF
1%SpMet increments

ON, OFF 1.0 g/dL to 24.5 g/dL

SpHb OFF
0.1 g/dL increments

ON
ON, OFF
SYS: 80 to 180
NIBP (mmHg) 10 mmHg to 300 mmHg
DIA: OFF to OFF
5 mmHg increments
MEAN: OFF to OFF

ON
ON, OFF
SYS: 10.0 to 24.0
NIBP (kPa) 1.5 kPa to 40.0 kPa
DIA: OFF to OFF
0.5 kPa increments
MEAN: OFF to OFF

TEMP1 to TEMP8 (°C) ON, OFF 30-45°C OFF, OFF to OFF

0.5°C increments

Tb (°C) ON, OFF 30-45°C OFF, OFF to OFF

0.5°C increments

12-4
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Alarm

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

CO2-E (mmHg) *3 ON, OFF OFF

1 mmHg to 100 mmHg
1 mmHg increments

CO2-E (kPa) *3 ON, OFF OFF

0.1 kPa to 13.3 kPa
0.1 kPa increments

CO2-E (%) *3 ON, OFF 0.1 to 13.3% OFF

0.1% increments
Depends on the "Main Mode"
CO2- I (mmHg) *3 ON, OFF OFF setting under [Initial
1 mmHg to 4 mmHg Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
1 mmHg increments Discharge].
If "Main Mode" setting is
CO2- I (kPa) *3 ON, OFF OFF [Backup]; Depends on the
0.1 kPa to 0.4 kPa "Alarm" setting under [Power
0.1 kPa increments ON/Discharge].
CO2-I (%) *3 ON, OFF 0.1 to 0.4% OFF
0.1% increments

O 2-E (%) *3 ON, OFF 18 to 100% OFF

O 2-I (%) *3 ON, OFF 18 to 100% OFF

*3
N2O-E (%) ON, OFF 0 to 100% OFF
*3
N2O-I (%) ON, OFF 0% to 100% OFF
ISO-E (%), HAL-E (%), ENF-E (%) *3
ON, OFF 0.5 to 6.0% OFF

ISO-I (%), HAL-I (%), ENF-I (%) *3

ON, OFF 0.5 to 6.0% OFF Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
SEV-E (%) *3 ON, OFF 0.5 to 8.0% OFF Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
*3 Discharge].
SEV-I (%) ON, OFF 0.5 to 8.0% OFF
If "Main Mode" setting is
*3 [Backup]; Depends on the
DES-E (%) ON, OFF 0.5 to 18.0% OFF
*3
"Alarm" setting under [Power
DES-I (%) ON, OFF 0.5 to 18.0% OFF ON/Discharge].
MAC*3 ON, OFF 0.1 to 9.9 OFF
*3
PEAK ON, OFF 8cmH2O to 100cmH2O OFF
*3
Depends on the "Main Mode"
PEEP ON, OFF 2 cmH2O to 50cmH2O OFF setting under [Initial
Adult: Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
ON, OFF 0.5 L/min to 20L/min Discharge].
MV-E *3 OFF If "Main Mode" setting is
Child, Neonate:
ON, OFF 0.5 L/min to 5 L/min [Backup]; Depends on the
"Alarm" setting under [Power
BIS (When HBX-800 is used) ON, OFF 1 to 99 ON 40 to OFF ON/Discharge].
increments of 1

Alarm Settings Alarm Suspend 1 min., 2 min. 2 min. Depends on the "Main Mode"
(Setup) Time setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Alarm Silence 1 min., 2 min. 2 min.
Discharge].
Time

Alarm Sound ON, OFF ON

Suspend

Alarm Sound [1min.]/[2min.]/[5min.]/[10min.]/ 60 min.

Suspend Time [30min.]/[60min.]/[90min.]/
[20min.]/[240min.]/[360min.]

Status Alarm Link to alarm silence time, Link to Link to each new
Control each new occurrence occurrence

Alarm Limit Graph, Numeric, OFF Graph

Display

12-5
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

*1: For CVP, 50 mmHg/7.0 kPa or lower can be set in 2 mmHg/0.2 kPa increments.

*2: For RR, 1 Bpm increments may be applied depending on the "RR Alarm Increment" settings. (
I/F" P5-13)

Maintenance Manual "User

*3: When the numeric data acquired from FLOW-i, GE or Draeger anesthesia delivery system is displayed, the following alarms
cannot be set. Also, these alarms will not generate.

NOTE
By selecting [Backup] for "Power ON" and "Discharge" under [Initial Settings>User I/F >Power
ON/Discharge], the settings will be retained at "Power ON" and "Discharge" respectively. If
[Initialize] is selected, the settings will be initialized at "Power ON" and "Discharge".

Parameter

ECG

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, ECG1: II
V6 ECG2: aVR
ECG3: I
ECG4: III
ECG5: aVL
ECG6: avF
*1
ECG7: V1
ECG8: V2
ECG9: V3
ECG10: V4
ECG11: V5
ECG12: V6

ECG1 to ECG12
Size Auto, x1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, x4 *1
x1
Filter Mode Monitor, Diagnosis, ESIS Monitor Backup Backup

Synchronized Mark/Tone ECG, SpO2-1, SpO2-2, BP, Auto, OFF Auto Backup Backup

Pacemaker *Same with "Patient Admit/Discharge"

section.

Pacemaker Pulse ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup

Pace Pulse Mask Time Auto, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, OFF Auto Depends on
the "Main
Mode" setting
under [Initial
Initialize
Settings>Use
r I/F>Power
ON/
Discharge].

HR Average Instant, Average Average Backup Backup

HR Delay ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup

Drift Filter ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup

AC Filter ON, OFF ON Backup Backup

Auto Lead ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup

3-lead Override ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup

ST/VPC/Arrhy. Alarm
ON, OFF ON Backup Backup
Display

ECG Analog Output Disp. Lead, Selected Lead Disp. Lead Backup Backup

12-6
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

ECG

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

ECG Waveform Display

ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup
during Lead-OFF

Noise Detection ON, OFF OFF Backup Backup

Chest Lead-OFF Enable, Disable Enable Backup Backup

*1: Depends on the "Main Mode" setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup] ; Depends on the "ECG1, ECG2 Size" setting under [Setup>Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

RESP

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Waveform Size x1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, x4 x1 Depends on

the "Main
Mode" setting
under [Initial
Initialize
Settings>Use
r I/F>Power
ON/
Discharge].

RR Synchronized Mark ON, OFF ON Backup Backup

RR/APNEA Alarm Source Auto, Impedance, Vent., CO2/GAS Auto Backup Backup
CVA Detect ON, OFF OFF *1

Impedance Measurement *Same with "Patient Admit/Discharge"

section.
Impedance Detection I, II II Depends on the setting under
Lead [Initial Settings>User I/
F>Power ON/Discharge].

Impedance Detection Fixed, Auto Fixed

Backup Backup
Level

*1: Depends on the "Main Mode" setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "CVA Detect" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].

SpO2 (General)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Waveform Size x1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, x4 x1 Depends on
the "Main
Mode" setting
under [Initial
Initialize
Settings>Use
r I/F>Power
ON/
Discharge].

Synchronized Mark/Tone *Same with ECG setting.

Alarm during NIBP ON, OFF ON Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Label None/Auto/RH/LH/RF/LF/OT None
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

12-7
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

SpO2 (Medtronic)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Second Alarm OFF, 10, 25, 50, 100 OFF Depends on

the "Main
Mode" setting
under [Initial
Backup
Settings>Use
r I/F>Power
ON/
Discharge].

SpO2 Averaging Normal, Fast Fast Depends on

the "Main
Mode" setting
under [Initial
Backup
Settings>Use
r I/F>Power
ON/
Discharge].

SpO2 (Masimo Unit)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

SpO2 Averaging 2-4 sec, 4-6 sec, 8 sec, 10 sec, 12 sec, 14 8 sec.
*1
sec, 16 sec

Pulse Sensitivity Normal, High Normal

FAST SAT ON, OFF OFF Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Perfusion Index ON, OFF ON
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Signal IQ Wave ON, OFF OFF Discharge].

SpHb Averaging Short, Medium, Long Medium

*1: Depends on the "Main Mode" setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup] ; Depends on the "SpO2 Averaging" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].

NIBP

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Patient Classification *Same with "Patient Admit/Discharge"

section.

Quick Measurement ON, OFF ON Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

NIBP Auto Mode Cont., 1min, 2min, 2.5min, 5min, 10min, 15 OFF
min, 20min, 30min, 60min, 120min, Lumbar *1
Mode, OFF

Dyna Alert ON, OFF ON Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

Sight Inflation ON, OFF OFF

Oscillograph ON, OFF ON

Mean ON, OFF ON

PR Display ON, OFF OFF

End Tone ON, OFF ON

NIBP Erase Time 60 min, 120 min 120 min.

User Interval Lumbar Mode Lumbar Mode

12-8
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

NIBP

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Measure at Alarm ON, OFF OFF

Asystole, VF, VT, Ext Tachy, Ext Brady, No Selection

Slow VT, Run, Bigeminy, Trigeminy,
Pause, Couplet, Tachy, Brady, Frequent,
Triplet, R on T, Multiform, Vent Rhtm, SVT,
Ireg RR, Prolong RR, S Frequent, S
Couplet, VPC, SVPC, Not Capt, Not Pacing
HR, ST, RR, APNEA, SpO2, BP1, BP2, No Selection
BP3, BP4, BP5, BP6, BP7, BP8, T1, T2,
T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, Tb, CO2, O2, N2O,
AGENT, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, MV, PEEP,
PEAK

Auto Mode with Start/ ON, OFF ON

Backup Backup
Stop key

Time Display Elapsed, Meas. Elapsed Time Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Periodic Measurement Time, Meas. Time Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Starting Time
Discharge].

Target Inflation Value Adult: 100 mmHg to 290 mmHg Adult: 180 mmHg
Child: 100 mmHg to 200 mmHg Child: 140 mmHg
Backup Initialize
Neonate: 100 mmHg to 140 mmHg Neonate: 110
mmHg

*1: Depends on the "Main Mode" setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup] ; Depends on the "NIBP Auto Mode" setting under [Setup>Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

BP1 to 8

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

*
Scale 20, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300 mmHg 200 mmHg
50 mmHg (BP2)
*2
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 32, 40 kPa 24 kPa
8 kPa (BP2)
Label BP*, ART, PAP, CVP, ICP, IAP, LVP, US1 BP* (BP1 to BP8) Depends on the "Main Mode"
to US5 setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

Synchronized Mark/Tone *Same with ECG setting.

Display Type S/M/D, S/D, M S/M/D

Wave Filter 6, 8, 12, 40 Hz 12Hz

Mean Wave ON, OFF OFF

Depends on the "Main Mode"
Respiration Filter ON, OFF OFF
setting under [Initial
IBP Analog Output MPA1-1, MPA1-2, MPA2-1, MPA2-2, MPA1-1, MPA1-2 Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
MPA3-1, MPA3-2 Discharge].

ART Catheter Check ON, OFF OFF

Message
Alarm during NIBP ON, OFF ON

*1: The scale selection will differ depending on the label.

*2: Depends on the Main Mode setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "BP Scale" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].

12-9
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

TEMP1 to TEMP8

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Label T*, Tsk, Tre, Tes, Tco, User 1 to User 7 T* (T1 to T8) Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

ΔTEMP-A to TEMP-D

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

ΔTemp-A (T1-T8) to (T1-T8) T1-T2

Depends on the "Main Mode"
ΔTemp-B (T1-T8) to (T1-T8) T3-T4 setting under [Initial
ΔTemp-C (T1-T8) to (T1-T8) T5-T6 Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].
ΔTemp-D (T1-T8) to (T1-T8) T7-T8

CO2 (Capnostat 5//HPD-810/HPD-820)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Scale 0-50, 0-100 mmHg 0- 50

0- 4, 0- 8, 0- 10 kPa 0- 4 *1

0-4, 0-8, 0-10% 0- 4

EtCO2 Peak Duration 10 sec, 20 sec, OFF 10 sec. *2

CO2 Source Priority MGU-800, HS-8000 MGU-800

O2 Compensation 0-100% 21% Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
N2O Compensation ON, OFF OFF
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Anesthetic Compensation 0.0-20.0% 0.0% Discharge].

Atmospheric Pressure 400-850mmHg 760mmHg

*1: Depends on the Main Mode setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "CO2 Scale" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].
*2: Depends on the "Main Mode" setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "EtCO2 Peak Duration" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].

CO2 (Medtronic/HCP-810/HCP-820)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Scale 0-50, 0-100 mmHg 0- 50

0- 4, 0- 8, 0- 10 kPa 0- 4 *1

0-4, 0-8, 0-10% 0- 4

EtCO2 Peak Duration 10 sec, 20 sec, OFF 10 sec. *2

CO2 Source Priority MGU-800, HS-8000 MGU-800 Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

*1: Depends on the Main Mode setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "CO2 Scale" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].
*2: Depends on the "Main Mode" setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "EtCO2 Peak Duration" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].

12-10
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

SPIRO, Ventilator, FLOW-i, GE, Draeger

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

AWP Scale 10, 20, 30, 50, 120 cmH2O 50 cmH2O

AWF Scale 5, 10, 20, 50, 180 L/min 50 L/min Depends on the "Main Mode"
AWV Scale 50, 250, 500, 1000, 3000 mL 500 mL setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Pressure: 0, 20, 30, 50, 120 Pressure: 30 Discharge].
P-V, F-V Scale Volume: 250, 500, 750, 1000 Volume: 500
Flow: ±20, ±50, ±180 Flow: ±50

Cardiac Output (CO)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Auto Start ON, OFF ON Backup Backup

Time Scale 30 sec., 60 sec. 30 sec. Backup Backup

Multigas Concentration, Anesthesia Delivery System

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

GAS_CO2 Scale*1 0-50, 0-100mmHg 0-50mmHg

0- 4, 0- 8, 0- 10 kPa 0-4kPa *2

0-4, 0-8, 0-10% 0-4%

GAS_O2 Scale*1 18-30, 18-60, 18-100, 0-30, 0-60, 0-100% 18-30%

Agent Selection ISO, HAL, ENF, SEV, DES, Auto Auto

*1
Agent Scale 0-4, 0-8, 0-16% 0-4%
Flow Rate (When adult/
120, 150, 200ml/min 200 ml/min Depends on the "Main Mode"
child water trap is used.)
setting under [Initial
Flow Rate (When Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
neonate water trap is 70, 100, 120 ml/min 120ml/min Discharge].
used.)

Wave Clip*1 ON, OFF ON

CO2 Source Priority MGU-800, HS-8000 MGU-800
*1
Anesthesia, HS-8000 Anesthesia

*1: This setting is enabled when FLOW-i, GE or Draeger anesthesia delivery system is connected.
*2: Depends on the Main Mode setting under [Initial Settings>User I/F>Power ON/Discharge]. If "Main Mode"
setting is [Backup]; Depends on the "CO2 Scale" setting under [Power ON/Discharge].

BIS (A-2000/A-3000)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Short Trend 2nd SR Depends on the "Main Mode"

Parameter setting under [Initial
SR, EMG, SQI, OFF
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

BIS (When HBX-800 is

used)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Scale (EEG1, EEG2) ± 25, ± 50, ± 100, ± 250 ±50μV Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Short Trend 2nd SR
SR, EMG, SQI, OFF Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Parameter Discharge].

Continuous Impedance ON, OFF ON

Initialize Initialize
Check

12-11
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Parameter

BIS (When HBX-800 is

used)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Smoothing Rate 10, 15, 30 sec. 15 sec. Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
EEG Filter ON, OFF ON
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

EEG (HA-800)

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Scale (EEG1 to EEG8) ± 25, ± 50, ± 100, ± 250 ±50μV Backup Backup

Time Constant 0.1 sec., 0.3 sec. 0.3 sec. Backup Backup

Filter 30Hz, 50Hz 30Hz Backup Backup

AC Filter ON, OFF ON Backup Backup

Continuous Impedance ON, OFF OFF

Backup Backup
Check

Print Calibration ON, OFF OFF OFF OFF

Stopwatch

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Label 1 TIMER1 Backup Backup
9 alphanumeric characters
Label 2 TIMER2 Backup Backup

SvO2/CCO
Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

STAT Mode ON, OFF OFF Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Index Display ON, OFF OFF
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Short Trend Selection CO+SVV, CO, SVV CO+SVV Discharge].

INVOS

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Lt-rSO2 ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 ch1
Depends on the "Main Mode"
Rt-rSO2 ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 ch2 setting under [Initial
S1-rSO2 ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 ch3 Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].
S2-rSO2 ch1, ch2, ch3, ch4 ch4

12-12
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Data Review

Data Review

Graphic Trend

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Trend A HR, ST (I to V6), SpO2, PR_ SpO2, VPC, NIBP, Upper Row:
BP1 to 8, PR_IBP, PDP, CPP, HR, NIBP
TEMP1 to 8, Tb, ΔTEMP-A to D, RR_IMP, Lower Row:
APNEA, EtCO 2, InspCO2, RR_ GAS, ExpN2O, SpO2, TEMP1, RR_IMP
InspN2O, O2, ExpAGT, InspAGT, MAC, BIS,
Trend B Upper Row:
SR, EMG, SQI, AEP, SvO2, ScvO2, CCO, CCI,
BT, RR_VENT, RR_SpO2, ExpO2, Insp O2, PI, HR, BP1, TEMP1, NIBP
Lower Row:
PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC, PEAK,
SpO2, EtCO2, ST (II) , Depends on the "Main Mode"
PEEP, ExpMV
RR_GAS setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power
Trend C Upper Row:
ON/Discharge].
HR, TEMP1, BP1, NIBP
Lower Row:
SpO2, InspO 2, EtCO2,
InspAGT

Trend D N/A

Trend E Upper Row: EMG, SQI

Lower Row: BIS, SR

Time 10min, 1h, 2h, 4h, 8h, 12h, 16h, 24h 4 hours Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

Display , , , , , ,
Selection
, , , ,

, , ,

Background White, Black, Gray Black

Color

Mark Small, Big Small Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

Scale, Display HR, 100, 200, 300 bpm 200bpm

Selection PR_SpO2,
PR_IBP Depends on the "Main Mode"
ST (I to V6) ± 0.2, ± 0.5,± 1.0, ± 2.0mV ± 0.5mV± 5.0mm setting under [Initial
±2.0, ± 5.0, ± 10.0, ± 20.0mm Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].
VPC 20, 50, 100 beats 20 beats

BP1 to BP8 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 200 mmHg 24 kPa
mmHg
4, 8, 16, 20, 24, 40 kPa
Depends on the "Main Mode"
PDP, CPP 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 200 mmHg 24 kPa
setting under [Initial
mmHg Settings>User I/F>Power
4, 8, 16, 20, 24, 40 kPa
ON/Discharge].
NIBP 100, 150, 200, 300 mmHg 200 mmHg 24 kPa
16, 20, 24, 40 kPa

TEMP1 to 20.0- 45.0, 30.0- 40.0°C 30.0- 40.0°C

Depends on the "Main Mode"
TEMP8,
setting under [Initial
Tb 20.0- 45.0, 30.0- 40.0°C 20.0-45.0°C Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

12-13
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Data Review

Graphic Trend

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

SpO2 0- 100, 50-100, 80- 100%SpO2

80- 100%SpO2
Depends on the "Main Mode"
SpCO 0-20, 0-40, 0-100%SpCO 0- 20%SpCO
setting under [Initial
SpMet 0-10, 0-15, 0-100%SpCO 0- 10%SpCO Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].
SpHb 10- 20, 0-25g/dL 10-20 g/dL

SpOC 10- 26, 0- 36mL/dL 10- 26 mL/dL

RR_IMP, 50, 100, 150 Bpm 50 Bpm

RR_VENT,
RR_GAS,
RR_SpO2

APNEA 15 sec., 30 sec. 15 sec.

CO2 50, 100 mmHg 50 mmHg

4.0, 8.0, 10.0 kpa 4.0 kPa
Depends on the "Main Mode"
4.0, 8.0, 10.0% 4.0%
setting under [Initial
O2 50, 100% 100% Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

ΔO2 3.0, 6.0, 9.0% 3%

N 2O 50, 100% 100%

Agent 4.0, 8.0, 10.0% 8%

12-14
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Data Review

Graphic Trend

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

PI 0- 10, 0- 20% 0- 10%

PVI 0-30, 0- 60, 0- 100% 0- 30%

PEAK 0- 10, 0- 20, 0- 50, 0- 20 cmH2O

0- 100 cmH2O
PEEP 0- 10, 0- 20, 0- 50, 0- 20 cmH2O
0- 100 cmH2O

MV 0.0-6.0, 0.0-12.0, 0.0- 12.0L/min

0.0-20.0L/min

SvO2, ScvO2 0- 100, 50- 100, 0- 100%

80- 100%

CCO 6, 12, 20L/min 6 L/min

CCI 6.0, 12.0, 20.0L/min/m2 6L/min/m2

Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
BT 20.0- 45.0, 30.0- 40.0°C 20.0-45.0°C Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

BIS 25, 50, 75, 100 100

SR 25, 50, 75, 100% 100%

SQI 0- 100% 100%

EMG 30- 80 dB 30- 80 dB

AEP 0- 100, 50- 100, 80- 100 0- 100

Lt-rSO2 20- 100 20- 100

Rt-rSO2 20- 100 20- 100

S1-rSO2 20- 100 20- 100

S2-rSO2 20- 100 20- 100

Tabular Trend

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Time 10sec., 30sec., 1min., 2min., 2.5min., 5min., 5 min.

10min., 15min., 30min., 60min., NIBP Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Group A to F A
Settings>User I/F>Power
Fixed 0 to 6 param. 0 param. ON/Discharge].
Parameters

12-15
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Data Review

Tabular Trend

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Parameter [H Module]
Selection OFF, HR, VPC, ST (I to V6), SpO2,
PR_ SpO2, NIBP-S/D/M, BP1 to 8- S/D/M,
PR_IBP, PDP, PCWP, CPP, TEMP1 to 8, Tb,
CO, EtCO2, InspCO2, RR_GAS, RR_IMP,
RR_VENT, APNEA, MAC, O2-E, O2-I, N2O-E,
N2O-I, AGT-E, AGT-I, AGT2-E, AGT2-I,
PI, PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC,
E-VT, I-VT, E-MV, I-MV, P-PEAK, P-PAUSE,
PEEO, P-MEAN, RES, COMP,
VT1sec, I/E RATIO

[SvO2 / CCO]SvO2, ScvO2, SaO2, O2EI, B-

Temp, CCO, CCO-STAT, CCI, CCI-STAT,
DO2,
RVEF, RVEF-STAT, VO2, SV, SV-STAT, SVI,
SVI-STAT, SVR, SVRI, SVV, EDV, EDV-STAT,
EDVI, EDVI-STAT, MAP, ESV, ESVI, dPmx,
CO CAL, OFF

[Ventilator]
E-VT, I-VT, MV, SMV, P-PEAK, P-PAUSE,
PEEP, P-MEAN, E-RES, I-RES, COMP, FiO2,
P-MIN, S-COMP, D-COMP, S-RR, I/E RATIO,
RES

[Other]
BIS, SQI, EMG, SR, SEF, TOTPOW, IMP,
AEP, Lt-rSO2, Rt-rSO2, S1-rSO2, S2-rSO2,
tcpO2, tcpCO2

Group A HR, VPC, ST (I) , ST (II) ,

NIBP-S, NIBP-D, SpO2,
PR_SpO2, BP1-S,BP1-D,
BP1-M, BP2-S, BP2-D, BP2-
M, EtCO2, RR_GAS,
RR_IMP, APNEA, TEMP1,
TEMP2
Group B HR, VPC, ST (I) to ST (V6)

Group C HR, RR_IMP, RR_GAS,

RR_VENT, SpO2, P-PEAK, P- Depends on the "Main Mode"
PAUSE, P-MEAN, PEEP, E- setting under [Initial
VT, I-VT, MV, E-RES, I-RES, Settings>User I/F>Power
COMP, O2-I, EtCO2, APNEA ON/Discharge].
Group D SvO2, CCO, EDV, B-Temp,
RVEF, SV, CCI, EDVI, ESV,
SVR, SaO2, SVI, ESVI, SVRI,
CCO_STAT, EDV_STAT

Group E BIS, SQI, EMG, SR

Group F HR, SpO2, NIBP-S, NIBP-D,

NIBP-M, BP1-S, BP1-D, BP1-
M, RR_GAS, EtCO2, O2-I,
AGT-I

Filtering
(Sampling 10sec., All All Initialize Initialize
Interval)

12-16
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Data Review

OCRG

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Display 4, 8, 16 min. 8 min.

Duration

SpO2 2ch ON, OFF OFF

Respiration Impedance, CO2 Impedance Depends on the "Main Mode"

Waveform setting under [Initial
Respiration ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4 ×1 Settings>User I/F>Power
Waveform ON/Discharge].
Size

HR Scale [0 to 200], [0 to 300] [0 to 300]

SpO2 Scale [0 to 100], [50 to 100] [0 to 100]

Recall

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

ECG1, ECG2, BP1 to 8, SpO2, RESP, CO2,

Waveform ECG1, ECG2 Backup Backup
GAS_CO2, EEG1 to 8

Asystole, VF, VT, Slow VT, Run, Bigeminy,

Trigeminy, Pause, Couplet, Tachy, Brady,
Frequent, ExtTachy, ExtBrady, RR IREG,
Prolong RR , R ON T, TRIPLET, MLTIFORM ,
Recall VENT RHYTHM, NOT CAPT , NOT PACING, S
All ON Backup Backup
Factor COUPLET, VPC, SVT, SVPC, S FREQUENT,
HR, ST, NIBP, RR, APNEA, SpO2, PR,
BP1 to 8, TEMP1 to 8, Tb, CO2, O2, N2O,
AGENT, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, PEAK, PEEP,
MV

List 14 waves 14 waves Backup Backup

Asystole, VF, VT, Slow VT, Run, Bigeminy,
Trigeminy, Pause, Couplet, Tachy, Brady,
Frequent, ExtTachy, ExtBrady, RR IREG,
Prolong RR , R ON T, TRIPLET, MLTIFORM ,
Recall
VENT RHYTHM, NOT CAPT , NOT PACING, S
Display All ON Backup Backup
COUPLET, VPC, SVT, SVPC, S FREQUENT,
Selection
HR, ST, NIBP, RR, APNEA, SpO2, PR,
BP1 to 8, TEMP1 to 8, Tb, CO2, O2, N2O,
AGENT, Event 1 to 8,
SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, PEAK, PEEP, MV

ST Measurement

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Measurement 0 ms to 560 ms 120 ms Depends on

the "Main Initialize
Point
Mode" setting
Reference 0 ms to -240 ms -80 ms under [Initial
Settings>User
Point I/F>Power ON/ Initialize
Discharge].

ST Waveform x1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, x4 x1 Depends on the "Main Mode"

Size setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Slide Show Discharge].
1, 5, 10, 20, 30 sec. 5 sec.
Interval

ST Waveform
10 sec., 1 min., 5 min., 10 min. 10 sec.
Interval

12-17
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

NOTE
 The graphic trend, tabular trend, alarm history will be saved even after the power is turned
OFF.
 The recall, ST, OCRG data will be saved even after about one hour of standby mode (AC
power or battery operation).

12-lead Display

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

ECG Analysis Real Time, Review Real Time Depends on Initialize

the "Main
Limb Lead Size x1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, x4 x1 Mode" setting
under [Initial
Chest Lead Size x1/4, x1/2, x1, x2, x4 x1 Settings>User
I/F>Power ON/
Filter AC Filter ON, OFF OFF Discharge].

EMG Filter OFF, Strong (25Hz), Weak OFF

(35Hz)

Drift Filter OFF, Strong (0.50Hz), Weak Strong (0.50 Hz)

(0.25Hz)

Background Color White, Black Black Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

Basic Setup

Tone/Volume
Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Vital Urgent Volume: 11 levels 4 Depends on the "Main Mode"

Alarm Sound setting under [Setup>Initial
*
Tone: 5 types 1 Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].
Caution Volume: 11 levels 4
*
Tone: 5 types 1

Status Volume: 11 levels 4

*
Tone: 4 types 1

Ventilator ON/OFF OFF

Alarm Sound
Volume: 11 levels 4
Tone: 1 type 1

Status Alarm Urgent Volume: 11 levels 4

Control *
Alarm Sound Tone: 1 type 1

Caution Volume: 11 levels 4

*
Tone: 1 type 1

Status Volume: 11 levels 4

*
Tone: 1 type 1

Sync. Tone Volume: 11 levels 2

Tone: 5 types 1

Sync. Tone: Selected Tone, Sync. with SpO2 Selected Tone

Value

Key Sound Volume: 11 levels 4

Tone: 3 types 1

12-18
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

Tone/Volume

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Other Bed Alarm Volume: 11 levels 4

Tone: 1 type 1

Boot/Shutdown Volume: 11 levels 2

Sound
Tone: 3 types 1
Other Volume: 11 levels 4

Tone: 1 type 1

* When [Fukuda Tone] is selected for "Alarm System", the tone can be selected from 8 levels.

Display
Configuration

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Layout Right (1 column), Right (1 column) + Bottom, Bottom (5 rows)

Right (2 columns), Right (2 columns) + Bottom,
Depends on the setting under
Left (1 column), Left (1 column) + Bottom, Left
[Initial Settings>User I/
(2 columns), Left (2 columns) + Bottom, Bottom
F>Power ON/Discharge].
(2 rows to 6 rows), Right/ Left and Bottom lower
rows (1, 2)

Auto Display Type-1, Type-2 Type-1 Depends on the setting under

Config. [Initial Settings>User I/
F>Power ON/Discharge].

Background Refer to the Color Setup.

Color

Palette Refer to the Color Setup.

Numeric Data OFF, HR/PR, HR, PR_IBP, VPC/PACE, ST/ HR, SpO2-1, NIBP, BP1,
VPC, ST-A to C, BP1 to 8, NIBP, NIBP LIST, RR_IMP, CO2
SpO2-1, SpO 2-1/PR_SpO2-1, PR_SpO2-1,
RR_IMP, RR_CO2, RR_VENT, RR_SpO2,
TEMP1 to 8, TEMP1/2, TEMP3/4, TEMP5/6,
TEMP7/8, SpO2-2, SpO2-2/PR_SpO2-2,
Depends on the setting under
PR_SpO2-2 ΔTEMP-A to D, VENT, P-V F-V,
[Initial Settings>User I/
SvO2/CO, BIS, AEP, CO2, O2, N2O, Agent, RR/
F>Power ON/Discharge].
CO2/Agent/O2/N2O, CO2/Agent/O2/N2O, RR/
Agent/O2/N2O, Agent/O2/N2O, Agent/N2O,
HEMO, HEMO-I, STOPWATCH, SpCO,
SpMet, SpHb, GAS/SPIRO, SPIRO, VENT-A,
VENT-B, Hemo/etc-A, Hemo/etc-B, Extended
Function-A
Waveform FF, ECG1 to ECG12, ECG1 Cascade to ECG1, SpO2-1, BP1, RESP,
ECG12 Cascade, BP1 to BP8, BP Overlap 1 to CO2
BP Overlap 3, SpO2-1, SpO2-2, RESP, AWF, Depends on the setting under
AWP, AWV, CO2, O2, Agent, Block Cascade, [Initial Settings>User I/
RR Overlap 1 to 3, EEG1 to 8 F>Power ON/Discharge].
Enlarged ON, OFF OFF
Waveform

Sweep Speed Circ.: 6.25, 12.5, 25, 50 Circ.: 25 Depends on the setting under
Vent: 6.25, 12.5, 25 Vent: 6.25 [Initial Settings>User I/
F>Power ON/Discharge].
Short Short Trend Selection OFF Depends on the setting under
Graphic Trend ON, OFF, Overlap 15 min. [Initial Settings>User I/
Display Length: 0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 min. F>Power ON/Discharge].

12-19
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

Display
Configuration

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

User Key OFF, Home, Menu, Minimize, User Key, Main 1 Home, Menu, Alarm Silence,
to 9, Extended Display 1 Mode 1 to 3, Extended Admit/Disch., BP Zero, NIBP
Display 2 Mode 1 to 3, Sub Mode 1 to 6, BP1 to Start/Stop, NIBP Auto Mode,
6 Scale, Initialize Scale, Alarm Silence, Alarm Alarm Setup (All)
Suspend, NIBP Start/Stop, NIBP Cont., Print NIBP Cont., Alarm History,
Start/Stop, Monitor Suspend, Night Mode, NIBP List, Recall, Graphic/
Freeze, Key Lock, Mode Select., Oxygenator Tabular Trend, Print Start/
Mode, Admit/Discharge, Rapid Discharge, Stop, Key Lock, Night Mode
NIBP Start/Stop, HR/PR, HR/PR Source, NIBP
Cont., BP Zero, Lead, ECG Size (All Leads),
Monitor Suspend, Scale, Scale (Extended
Display), SpO2 Display ON/OFF, CO2 Display Depends on the setting under
ON/OFF, GAS Display ON/OFF, Suspend CO2, [Initial Settings>User I/
Auto Display Config., Enlarged Display, Short F>Power ON/Discharge].
Trend ON/OFF, Transparent Window ON/OFF,
Change Palette, Graphic Trend, Trend (Group),
Tabular Trend, Tabular Trend (Group), NIBP
List, Recall, OCRG, ST, Cardiac Output,
PCWP, Hemodynamics, Lung Function, Full
Disc. Wave, 12-Lead Analysis, Tone/Volume,
NIBP Auto Mode, Alarm Setup (Basic, All),
Manual Printing, Display Config., Time/Date,
Stopwatch, Group 1, Group 2,
Group 3, Group 4, Group 5, Event, Print (LBP)
Cancel, Oxygenator Mode

Detail Setup Alarm Limit Display Graph, Numeric, OFF Graph

(Numeric Depends on the setting under
Data) [Initial Settings>User I/
F>Power ON/Discharge].
At Alarm Occurrence Reversed, 3D Reversed

Detail Setup Grid ON, OFF, Bold Normal

(Waveform)
Scale ON, Bold1, Bold2 Normal

Thickness Thin, Regular, Thick Normal

Clip ON, OFF ON

CO2 Wave Fill ON, OFF ON

O2 Wave Fill ON, OFF OFF

Depends on the setting under
Agent Wave Fill ON, OFF OFF
[Initial Settings>User I/
BP Overlap 1 BP1 to 8 BP1 to 4 F>Power ON/Discharge].

BP Overlap 2, 3 N/A

RR Overlap 1 CO2, O2, Agent CO2, O2, Agent

BP Overlap 2, 3 N/A

12-Lead ST Wave Ref., Average Ref.

12-Lead ST Short OFF, Fill, Plot Fill

Trend

ST/VPC/Arrhy. Alarm ON, OFF ON

Backup Backup
Display

Block Cascade Waveform Quantity: 2 Waveform Quantity: 2

to 6 Displayed Waveforms:
Displayed Waveform: ECG1, ECG2 Depends on the setting under
OFF, ECG1 to 12, BP1 [Initial Settings>User I/
to 8, SpO2, RESP, F>Power ON/Discharge].
AWF, AWP, CO2, O2,
Agent
Quantity of Displaying Standard, Extended Normal
Waveforms

12-20
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

Display
Configuration

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Extended Function OFF, Graphic Trend, OFF
Graphic/Tabular
Trend, OCRG

Extended Function Big, Medium, Small, Small

Size OCRG

Detail Setup Short Trend Link with Numeric, Link with Numeric
(Short Trend) Link with Waveform,
User Setup

Short Trend Scale Trend, Waveform Graphic Trend

Display Parameter ON, Gray, OFF OFF

Reference Line Enable, Disable Disable

Function Depends on the setting under
[Initial Settings>User I/
Cursor Function Enable, Disable Disable F>Power ON/Discharge].
Cursor Linkage Tabular Trend, Tabular Trend
Graphic Trend, Zoom
Wave

Short Trend Overlap OFF, OFF, OFF, OFF

1, 2, 3
Data Resolution 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec 5 sec.

NOTE
 By selecting [Backup] for "Power ON" and "Discharge" under [Initial Settings>User I/F
>Power ON/Discharge], the display configuration settings will be retained at "Power ON"
and "Discharge" respectively. If [Initialize] is selected, the settings will be initialized at
"Power ON" and "Discharge".

Manual Printing

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Basic Printer Bedside, Central Bedside

Waveform ECG1, ECG2, ECG3, BP1 to 8, SpO2, ECG1 Depends on the "Main Mode"
RESP, CO2, O2, Agent, AWF, AWP, setting under [Initial
EEG1 to 8 Settings>User I/F>Power
Print Duration 24 sec., Cont. 24 sec. ON/Discharge].

Delay Time None, 8 sec., 16 sec. 8 sec.

12-lead 12-Lead 3 wavesx4, 2 wavesx6 3 Waves x 4
Waveform Format
(Bedside)

12-Lead 3 wavesx4, 3 wavesx4+Rhy., 6 3 Waves x 4

Waveform Format wavesx2, 12 waves
(Laser)

12-Lead Analysis 3 Waves x 4 3 waves x 4 (fixed)

Format (Bedside) Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
12-Lead Analysis 6 wavesx2 (2 pages), 6 wavesx2 (1 6 wavesx2 (2 pages) Settings>User I/F>Power
Format (Laser) page), 3 wavesx4+Rhythm ON/Discharge].
Position Center, Proportional, OFF Proportional

Wave Format Regular, Reverse Normal

Printer Auto Scale ON, OFF ON

Print Calibration ON, OFF ON

Lead Boundary ON, OFF ON

12-21
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

Manual Printing

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Other Graphic Trend Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside

Setup:
Tabular Trend Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside
Graphic
Printing OCRG Bedside, Laser Bedside

Zoom Wave
Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside
(Recall, Full Disc.)

ST Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside

12-Lead Bedside, Laser Bedside Depends on the "Main Mode"

Waveform setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power
12-Lead Analysis Bedside, Laser Bedside
ON/Discharge].
Result

Full Disc. Bedside, Laser Bedside

Compressed
Wave

Hemodynamics Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside

Lung Function Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside

CO Bedside, Central, Laser Bedside

Other Setup: Recall Printing Graphic Printing, Manual Printing Graphic Printing Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].

Auto Printing

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Alarm Printing ON, OFF OFF

Printing
Factor Alarm for each arrhythmia, parameter All
Depends on the "Main Mode"
Printer Bedside, Central Bedside
setting under [Initial
Waveform ECG1, ECG2, ECG3, BP1 to 8, SpO2, ECG1, Alarm Factor Settings>User I/F>Power
RESP, CO2, O2, Agent, AWF, AWP, ON/Discharge].
Alarm

Print Duration 12 sec., 24 sec. 12 sec.

Periodic Periodic Printing ON, OFF OFF

Printing
Printer Bedside, Central Bedside

Waveform ECG1, ECG2, ECG3, BP1 to 8, SpO2, ECG1

RESP, CO2, O2, Agent, AWF, AWP Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Periodic Interval Interval, Timer Timer Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].
Interval 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120 min. 120 min.

Timer 0:00 to 23:00 (1:00 interval) None

Print Duration 6, 12, 24 sec. 12 sec.

Common Setup for Printing

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

QRS Classification ON, OFF ON

Depends on the "Main Mode"
Speed 50 mm/S, 25 mm/S 25 mm/S setting under [Initial
Print Calibration Top, Each Page, OFF OFF Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].
Print NIBP Data ON, OFF OFF

12-22
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

Other Setup

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

Night Mode Manual, Timer Manual Depends on the "Main Mode"

Mode setting under [Initial
Start Time 00:00 to 23:59 Start Time: 21:00 Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].
End Time 00:00 to 23:59 End Time: 07:00

Volume No Change, 3, 1, 0 1

Display No Change, Dark, Darker, Time Only Darker

Alarm Indicator ON, OFF OFF

External Monitor ON, OFF, OFF (Time Only) ON

Display during
Night Mode

Color Background Color Black, Gray, Light Gray Numeric Data: Black Depends on the "Main Mode"
(Meas.) Waveform: Black setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Background Color Discharge].
(Wave)

Color Palette Light, Clear, Deep, Vivid Vivid Depends on the "Main Mode"
setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power
ON/Discharge].
HR 12 colors + White 6

ST 6

VPC White

PACE White

NIBP 8

SpO2(Ch1, Ch2) 4
SpCO (Ch1, Ch2) 4

SpMet (Ch1, Ch2) 4

SpHb (Ch1, Ch2) 4

CO2 8

RESP White

BP1, ART 1

PAP 4

CVP 8

ICP 7
IAP 12

LVP 2

US1 to US5 (BP) White

BP2 8
BP3 4

BP4 6

BP5 2

BP6 12

BP7 9

BP8 7

TEMP1 to 8, Tb 2

Tsk, Tre, Tes, Tco, 2

US1 to US7

12-23
Chapter 12 Setup Item/Default Value Basic Setup

Other Setup

Item Description Default At Power ON At Discharge

AWF 6

AWP 4

AWV 8

VENT White
BIS 2

AEP White

INVOS White

MAC White

SvO2+CO White

Stopwatch White

Brightness Brightness 7 levels Top Depends on the "Main Mode"

setting under [Initial
Settings>User I/F>Power ON/
Discharge].

Stopwatch 1 9 alphanumeric characters TIMER1 Backup Backup

Label
2 TIMER2 Backup Backup

12-24
Chapter 13 System Components Medical Device

Chapter 13 System Components

Medical Device

Lineup of Main Unit

Model Type External Monitor Output Extended Display Unit
LAN (TCP/IP)
Output

DSC-8410 Yes No No

DSC-8410 (with CC-84) Yes 2ch 1ch

Lineup of Display Unit

Model Type Display Size

LC-8016TC 15.6 inch

LC-8018TC 18.5 inch

Accessories

The following products are available as accessories for the DS-8400 System.
Purchase them as necessary.

CAUTION
Use only the spare parts specified for this device. If unspecified products are used, proper
function cannot be executed.
 For quality improvement purposes, specifications may be subjected to change without prior
notice.

Accessory

Model Type Description Note

HS-8312M Super Unit SpO2 Unit: Masimo

HS-8312N Super Unit SpO2 Unit: Nellcor

HM-800 Multi Module

HM-801 Multi Module

HG-810 SpO2 Module Masimo

HG-820 SpO2 Module Nellcor

HP-800 Multiport Module

HSA-80 HS Adapter

HSA-81 HS Adapter
IB-8004 Input Box

HCP-810 CO2 Gas Unit

HPD-810 GAS Unit I/F

13-1
Chapter 13 System Components Accessories

Model Type Description Note

HBX-800 BISx I/F Unit

HR-800 Recorder Unit

MGU-801P Multigas Unit I/F

MGU-802 Multigas Unit I/F

MGU-811P Multigas Unit I/F

MGU-812 Multigas Unit I/F

CC-84 Expansion Board

BTO-005 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack

OTO-13 Lower Trolley Unit for Monitor

OAO-70A GCX Attachment for Monitor

OAO-8400 Upper Trolley Unit for Monitor

OAO-45A Cover Panel

OAO-46A HS Attachment Spacer For attaching the HSA-80 to IB-8004

OAO-48A HS Rail Clamp For attaching the HSA-80 to a medical rail

OAO-49A HS Suspended Base For suspending the HSA-80, HR-800, IB-8004

OAO-50A HS Pole Clamp For attaching the HSA-80 to a pole

OAO-51A IB Clamp Base For attaching the IB-8004 to the pole

OAO-52A HS Fixing Base HS Fixing BaseFor fixing the HSA-80, HR-800, IB-8004

OAO-91A Storage Box for Trolley

OAO-100A Mounting Bracket for Gas Unit/External For attaching the gas unit/external output box to the HSA-
Output Box 81

OP050-02TDR Recording paper 10 per box

CF-820 IR Remote Control Unit

CJO-C01Q-SJ0.3 External Output Box For HS-8000 series

HLX-801 TM XMTR Module HLX-801

CJO-09SS0.3 Unit Connection Cable U-Link Cable 0.3m

CJO-09SS1.5 Unit Connection Cable U-Link Cable 1.5m

CJO-09SS5 Unit Connection Cable U-Link Cable 5.0m

FCF-128 CF Card 128MB, For data transfer (for DS-8400)

FCF-1000 CF Card 1GB, For data transfer (for DS-8400)

SD-1G SD Card 1GB, For data transfer (for HS-8000)

SD-8G SD Card 8GB, For data transfer (for HS-8000)

SD-16G SD Card 16GB, For full disclosure waveform (for DS-8007)

FSD-8GA SD Card 8GB, For full disclosure waveform (for DS-8007)

FCS-64G CFast Card 64GB, For full disclosure waveform

CJO-08SS0.3 Module Connection Cable module-LAN Cable 0.3m

CJO-08SS1.5 Module Connection Cable module-LAN Cable 1.5m

CJO-08SS3.5 Module Connection Cable module-LAN Cable 3.5m

CJO-08SS5 Module Connection Cable module-LAN Cable 5.0 m

CJO-08SS10 Module Connection Cable module-LAN Cable 10m

CJO-15RR0.65 AUX Connection Cable Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800

Connects to the HS-8000
CJO-15RR1.5 AUX Connection Cable Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800
Connects to the HS-8000

13-2
Chapter 13 System Components Accessories

Model Type Description Note

CJO-15RR3 AUX Connection Cable Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800
Connects to the HS-8000

CJO-26JJ0.5 3ch Analog Output Cable

CJO-26JJ2.7 3ch Analog Output Cable

CJO-25TR0.36 AUX Connection Cable LEM Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800Connects to

the DS-8007/HM-801

CJO-25TR0.65 AUX Connection Cable LEM Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800Connects to

the DS-8007/HM-801
CJO-25TR1.5 AUX Connection Cable LEM Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800Connects to
the DS-8007/HM-801

CJO-25TR2.7 AUX Connection Cable LEM Relay cable for HCP-810/HPD-810/HBX-800Connects to

the DS-8007/HM-801

CE-01A Earth wire

CE-12 Earth wire

CJ-522A Ethernet Branch Cable Length 1m (For DS-LAN)

CJ-522B Ethernet Branch Cable Length 2m (For DS-LAN)

CJ-522C Ethernet Branch Cable Length 4m (For DS-LAN)

CJ-522D Ethernet Branch Cable Length 10m (For DS-LAN)

CJ-522E Ethernet Branch Cable Length 20 m (For DS-LAN)

CJ-731B Display Unit Connection Cable 2.5m

CJ-731C Display Unit Connection Cable 6m

CJ-731D Display Unit Connection Cable 10m

CJO-03RS4 BIS Monitor interface cable For Serial Connector

CJ-502 Relay Cable

CJ-725 RS-232C Cross cable Cross Cable with Core

CJ-726 Relay Cable(Straight)

CJ-727 Relay Cable(Straight) Cross Cable with Core

CJ-401RI-70SV3 SV-300 interface cable For Status II Connector

CJ-402RI-70SVi Relay Cable For Status II ConnectorServo-i/s/U/n/air interface

cableEvita4/XL/ 2dura interface cable

CJ-403RI-70PB PB700/800 serial interface cable For Status II Connector

CJO-04RS4 Vigilance connection cable

CJ-406RI-70Vigi Vigilance connection cable

CJ-407RI-70BIS BIS Monitor interface cable For Status II Connector

CJO-18RS5 PiCCO Connection Cable (Serial)

CJO-19RS5 PiCCO Connection Cable (Status II)

CJ-756 Serial Converter Cable For Serial Connector

CS-18 Power Cable

CS-33 Power Cable

CS-55-ST Power Cable

CS-55-RA Power Cable

CS-56-ST Power Cable

CS-57-ST Power Cable

CS-57-RA Power Cable

CS-58-ST Power Cable

13-3
Chapter 13 System Components Accessories

Model Type Description Note

CS-59-ST Power Cable

OTO-16L Trolley(L)

OAO-1006A Mounting Bracket for MGU-800

OAO-1011A Balancer for Trolley

CJO-31RS5 Anesthesia GE (Avance,Aysis) For serial connector

CJO-04RS4 Anesthesia Draeger (Perseus, Atlan, For serial connector

Apollo, Zeus)

CJO-03RS4 Anesthesia Draeger (Fabius) For serial connector

ECG Accessory

Model Type Description Note

CIO-05CTP-3NU ECG Relay Cable 3-electrode (standard type)

CIO-05CTP-4NU ECG Relay Cable 4-electrode (standard type)

CIO-05CTP-5NU ECG Relay Cable 5-electrode (standard type)

CIO-05CTP-10NU ECG Relay Cable 10-electrode (standard type)

CIO-08CTP-3EU ECG Relay Cable 3-electrode (electrosurgery-proof type)

CIO-08CTP-5EU ECG Relay Cable 5-electrode (electrosurgery-proof type)

CIZ-173DIN-3-U Patient Cable Adapter 3-electrode

CIZ-173DIN-5-U Patient Cable Adapter 5-electrode

CIZ-173DIN-C-U Patient Cable Adapter Chest

CAUTION
 When using the electrosurgery-proof type ECG relay cable, the impedance respiration
cannot be measured, and its numeric data and waveform will not be displayed. When
measuring in an environment where electrosurgery is not performed, make sure to use the
standard ECG relay cable.

13-4
Chapter 13 System Components Accessories

Blood Pressure Accessory

Model Type Item Note

CJO-P01B-SB3.6 BP Relay cable 1 channel, 3.6m

For use with Argon Medical Devices DTX Plus
Disposable Pressure Transducers

CJO-P01B-DB0.8 2ch BP Relay cable 2 channels, 0.8m

For use with Argon Medical Devices DTX Plus
Disposable Pressure Transducers

CJO-P01B-DB4.3 2ch BP Relay cable 2 channels, 4.3m

For use with Argon Medical Devices DTX Plus
Disposable Pressure Transducers

CJO-P01B-DJ0.5 2ch BP Conversion Cable 2 channel-1 channel Conversion Relay Cable

Temperature Accessory

Model Type Description Note

CJO-P01T-DA0.5 2ch Temperature Relay Cable 0.5m

Use with YSI400 compatible probe

CJO-P01T-DA4.0 2ch Temperature Relay Cable 4m

Use with YSI400 compatible probe

NOTE
 700 series temperature probe cannot be used.

CO Accessory

Model Type Description Note

CJO-P01C-C2.4 Catheter Relay Cable

CJO-P01C-F2.4 Flow-Through Sensor Relay Cable

CJO-P01C-L2.4 In-Line Sensor Relay Cable

CJO-P01C-T2.4 Injectate Probe Relay Cable

NIBP Accessory

Model Type Description Note

OA-80APS1.5-S Air Hose adult / child

For Rectus Connector Type
OA-80APS3.5-S Air Hose adult / child
For Rectus Connector Type

OA-80NE1.5-S Air Hose Neonate

For SunTech Medical Neonatal Soft Disposable BP Cuff

OA-80NE3.5-S Air Hose Neonate

For SunTech Medical Neonatal Soft Disposable BP Cuff

13-5
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Medical Devices

The Other Medical Devices

DS-8007 System

Model Type Description Note

DS-8007M DYNASCOPE 8000 Series DS-8007 System SpO2 Unit : Masimo

DS-8007N DYNASCOPE 8000 Series DS-8007 System SpO2 Unit : Nellcor

DSA-82 DS-8007 Adapter

HCP-820 CO2 Gas Unit

HPD-820 Gas Unit I/F

Central Monitor / Central Telemetry Receiver

Item Model Type Note

DS-1800 System DS-1812 Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 12 beds)
DS-1812R Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN
Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 12 beds)
Built-in Recorder
DS-1812RE Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN
Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 12 beds)
Built-in Recorder
Connectable to extended display

DS-1800L Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

DS-1800LR Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in Recorder

DS-1800LRE Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in Recorder
Connectable to extended display

DS-1700 system DS-1708 Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)

DS-1708E Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)
Connectable to extended display

DS-1708R Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)
Built-in Recorder

DS-1708RE Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)
Built-in Recorder
Connectable to extended display

DS-1700L Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

DS-1700LE Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Connectable to extended display

DS-1700LR Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in Recorder

DS-1700LRE Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

Built-in Recorder
Connectable to extended display

13-6
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Medical Devices

Item Model Type Note

DS-7700 System DS-7780 15 inch display
Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN
Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)

DS-7780W 19 inch display

Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN
Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)

DS-7700L 15 inch display

Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

DS-7700WL 19 inch display

Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

LW-7080 Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)

DS-8900 System DS-8900 26 inch display

Connection is possible via wired DS-LAN

LW-1000 LW-1080 Built-in telemetry receiver (max. 8 beds)

ECG Sensors

Model Type Description Note

CMF-700-3 ECG Clip Type Lead Cable 3-electrode 3-electrode (clip type)

CMF-700-4 ECG Clip Type Lead Cable 4-electrode 4-electrode (clip type)

CMF-700-5 ECG Clip Type Lead Cable 5-electrode 5-electrode (clip type)

CMF-700-5C ECG Clip Type Lead Cable 5-electrode 10-electrode (clip type, for chest-5lead 90cm)
CMF-702-5 Limb-5lead For 10 electrode ECG 10-electrode (clip type, for limb-5lead 90/150cm)

CMF-703-5 Limb-5lead For 10 lead ECG 10-electrode (clip type, for limb-5lead 150/220cm)

CMF-704-5C Chest-Lead For 10 lead ECG 10-electrode (clip type, for chest-5lead 150cm)
CMC-700-3 3 electrode ECG 3-electrode (clip type)

CMC-700-4 4 electrode ECG 4-electrode (clip type)

CMC-700-5 5 electrode ECG 5-electrode (clip type)

CMC-702-5 10 electrode ECG Limb-5lead 10-electrode (clip type, for limb-5lead 90/150cm)

CMC-703-5 10 electrode ECG Limb-5lead 10-electrode (clip type, for limb-5lead 150/220cm)

CMC-704-5C 10 electrode ECG Chest-5lead 10-electrode (clip type, for chest-5lead 150cm)
CMC-700-5C 10 electrode ECG for Chest lead 10-electrode (clip type, for chest-5lead 150cm)

NIBP Cuffs

Model Type Description Note

CUF-8503 Adult cuff (small) Width 17 cm to 25 cm

CUF-8504 Adult cuff (medium) Width 23 cm to 33 cm

CUF-8505 Adult cuff (large) Width 31 cm to 40 cm

CUF-8506 Adult cuff (thigh) Width 38 cm to 50 cm

NOTE
 Use only the specified cuff for the inflation measurement.

13-7
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Medical Devices

SpO2 Sensors for Nellcor Manufacturer: Medtronic

Product Name/Description Model Type Remarks

Durasensor™ DS-100A Reusable

For adult finger (weight of 40kg and over)
OxiMAX MAX-A Single-Patient-Use
For adult finger (weight of 30kg and over)

OxiMAX MAX-P Single-Patient-Use

For pediatric finger (weight of 10 to 50kg)

OxiMAX MAX-I Single-Patient-Use

For infant toe (weight of 3 to 20kg)
OxiMAX MAX-N Single-Patient-Use
For neonate foot/adult finger
(Neonate: weight of less than 3kg, Adult: weight of 40kg and over)

OxiMAX MAX-R Single-Patient-Use

For adult nose (weight of 50kg and over)

OxiMAX MAX-FAST Single-Patient-Use

For adult/pediatric forehead (weight of 10kg and over)

SpO2 relay cable DOC-10 3.0 m

Nellcor Respiratory Sensor 10068119 For adult weighing 30 kg and above, usable only with DS-8007N

NOTE
 There are various types of sensors available. For details, refer to your nearest service
representative.

SpO2 Sensors for Masimo Manufacturer: Masimo Corporation

Product Name / Description Model Remarks

®
Masimo SET Sensor LNCS DCI Reusable Sensor for Adult
®
Masimo SET Sensor LNCS Adtx Adhesive Sensor for Adult
®
Masimo SET Sensor LNCS Pdtx Adhesive Sensor for Pediatric
®
Masimo SET Sensor LNCS Inf-L Adhesive Sensor (L-Shape) for Infant
®
Masimo SET Sensor LNCS Neo-L Adhesive Sensor (L-Shape) for Neonate
®
Masimo SET Sensor LNCS NeoPt-L Adhesive Sensor (L-Shape) for Premature
Neonate

Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow® DCI-dc3 Reusable Direct Connect Sensor for Adult (0.9 m)
®
Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow DCI-dc8 Reusable Direct Connect Sensor for Adult (2.4 m)
®
Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow DCI-dc12 Reusable Direct Connect Sensor for Adult (3.6 m)
®
Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow R25 Adhesive Sensor for Adult
®
Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow R25-L Adhesive Sensor (L-Shape) for Adult/Neonate
®
Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow R20 Adhesive Sensor for Pediatric
®
Masimo Rainbow Sensor Rainbow R20-L Adhesive Sensor (L-Shape) for Pediatric/Infant

Masimo Rainbow ReSposable Sensor Rainbow ReSposable R2-25 ReSposable Sensor Cable (For Adult) x1
ReSposable Sensor (Adhesive Tape for Adult)
x10

13-8
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Medical Devices

Product Name / Description Model Remarks

Masimo Rainbow ReSposable Sensor Rainbow ReSposable R2-20 ReSposable Sensor Cable (For Child) x1
ReSposable Sensor (Adhesive Tape for Child)
x10

Masimo Rainbow ReSposable Sensor Rainbow ReSposable R2-25a To be used with ReSposable sensor (adhesive
tape for adult), ReSposable sensor cable (for
adult), 25 per box

Masimo Rainbow ReSposable Sensor Rainbow ReSposable R2-20a To be used with ReSposable sensor (adhesive
tape for child), ReSposable sensor cable (for
child), 25 per box

Masimo Rainbow ReSposable Sensor Rainbow ReSposable R2-25r To be used with ReSposable sensor tape (for
adult), 5 per box

Masimo Rainbow ReSposable Sensor Rainbow ReSposable R2-20r To be used with ReSposable sensor tape (for
child), 5 per box

Masimo RD SET Sensor RD SET DCI Reusable Sensor for Adult

Masimo RD SET Sensor RD SET Adt Adhesive Sensor for Adult

Masimo RD SET Sensor RD SET Pdt Adhesive Sensor for Pediatric

Masimo RD SET Sensor RD SET Inf Adhesive Sensor for Infant

Masimo RD SET Sensor RD SET Neo Adhesive Sensor for Neonate

Masimo RD SET Sensor RD SET NeoPt Adhesive Sensor for Premature Neonate

RD Patient Cable RD SET MD20-1.5 For RD SET sensor, 0.5 m

RD Patient Cable RD SET MD20-05 For RD SET sensor, 1.5 m

RD Patient Cable RD SET MD20-12 For RD SET sensor, 3.7 m

LNCS Red Patient Cable Red LNC-04 For LNCS sensor, 1.2 m
LNCS Red Patient Cable Red LNC-10 For LNCS sensor, 3.0 m

LNCS Red Patient Cable Red LNC-14 For LNCS sensor, 4.2 m

Masimo Rainbow Patient Cable Rainbow RC-1 For Rainbow Sensor, 0.3 m
Masimo Rainbow Patient Cable Rainbow RC-4 For Rainbow Sensor, 1.2 m

Masimo Rainbow Patient Cable Rainbow RC-12 For Rainbow Sensor, 3.6 m

RD Rainbow Patient Cable RD Rainbow SET MD20-1.5 For RD SET sensor, 0.5 m
RD Rainbow Patient Cable RD Rainbow SET MD20-05 For RD SET sensor, 1.5 m

RD Rainbow Patient Cable RD Rainbow SET MD20-12 For RD SET sensor, 3.7 m

NOTE
 SpCO and SpHb cannot be measured at the same time for all the sensors.

NOTE
 There are various types of sensors available.For details, contact your nearest service
representative.

13-9
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Medical Devices

CO2 Sensors for HCP-810 HCP-820 Manufacturer: Medtronic

Product Name / Description Model Remarks

Smart CapnoLine Plus (Adult / Intermediate) 009818 For oral nasal, short term use

Smart CapnoLine Plus (Adult / Intermediate 009822 For oral nasal, short term use
O 2)

Smart CapnoLine (Pediatric) 007266 For oral nasal, short term use

Smart CapnoLine H Plus (Adult / Intermediate 010433 For oral nasal, long term use
O 2)

Smart CapnoLine H (Pediatric) 010581 For oral nasal, long term use

Smart CapnoLine H (Pediatric O2) 010582 For oral nasal, long term use

CapnoLine H (Adult O2) 008180 For nasal, long term use

CapnoLine H (Pediatric O2) 008181 For nasal, long term use

CapnoLine H (Adult) 008177 For nasal, long term use

CapnoLine H (Pediatric) 008178 For nasal, long term use

CapnoLine H (Infant / Neonate) 008179 For nasal, long term use

Microstream VitaLine H set (Adult / Pediatric) 010787 For long term use

Microstream VitaLine H set (Infant / Neonate) 010807 For long term use
FilterLine H Set (Adult / Pediatric) XS04624 For long term use

FilterLine H Set (Infant / Neonate) 006324 For long term use

CO2 Sensors for HPD-810 HPD-820 Manufacturer: Philips Respironics

Product Name / Description Model Remarks

®
CAPNOSTAT 5 CO2 Sensor 1015928
Airway adapter (adult) 6063-00 Disposable
Single patient use, for ET tube sizes > 4.0 mm (10 per box)

Airway adapter (neonate) 6312-00 Disposable

Single patient use, for ET tube sizes = < 4.0 mm (10 per
box)

Airway adapter (adult) 7007-00, 7007-01 Reusable, for ET tube sizes > 4.0 mm
(7007-00: 10 per box, 7007-01: 1 per box)

Airway adapter (neonate) 7053-00, 7053-01 Reusable, for ET tube sizes = < 4.0 mm
(7053-00: 10 per box, 7053-01: 1 per box)

NOTE
 There are various types of sensors available. For details, refer to your nearest service
representative.

13-10
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Medical Devices

BIS Sensors for HBX-800 Manufacturer: Medtronic

Product Name / Description Model Remarks

BISx Module 186-0195-SF SW 1.13

Patient Interface Cable 186-0107 Interface Cable

BIS Extended Use Sensor 186-0160 Disposable

BIS Pediatric Sensor 186-0200 Disposable

BIS Quatro Sensor 186-0106 Disposable

CAUTION
 Avoid liquid ingress to the patient interface cable (PIC). Contact of fluids with the PIC sensor
connector can interfere with PIC performance.
 To minimize the risk of patient strangulation, the patient interface cable (PIC) must be
carefully placed and secured.
 When installing the BISx, it should not be closely attached to the patient. Secure it on the
bedside rail or pole using a clip.
 BIS sensor is disposable. Do not reuse it.
 Do not reuse the BIS sensor to other patients. It may cause cross-infection.
 The duration for one usage should be within 24 hours.

AG Sensors for MGU-800/MGU-810 Manufacturer: Mindray

Product Name / Description Model Remarks

DRYLINE Water Trap, Adult 60-13100-00 Reusable

DRYLINE Water Trap, Neonate 60-13200-00 Reusable

DRYLINE Airway Adapter, Straight 60-14100-00 disposable

DRYLINE Airway Adapter, Elbow 60-14200-00 disposable

DRYLINE Sampling Line, Adult 60-15200-00 2.5m, disposable

DRYLINE Sampling Line, Neonate 60-15300-00 2.5m, disposable

SPIRIT Flow sensor, Adult 60-16100-00 For MGU-810 series, single-use only

SPIRIT Flow sensor, Pediatric 60-16200-00 For MGU-810 series, single-use only

13-11
Chapter 13 System Components The Other Products

The Other Products

The other non-medical products to be used in combination with this device as a system are shown below.
Product Name / Description Model Remarks

With USB 2.0 interface (Type A)

Mouse No model specified. Compliant with IEC 62368-1, CISPR 32, CISPR 35
or equivalent standard

With USB 2.0 interface (Type A)

Keyboard No model specified. Compliant with IEC 62368-1, CISPR 32, CISPR 35
or equivalent standard

Barcode Reader LS2208 CE marked by Symbol Technologies, Inc.

Slave Monitor No model specified. With VGA interface

Compliant with IEC 62368-1, CISPR 32, CISPR 35
or equivalent standard
Resolution: WXGA (1366 dot ×768 dot)
Horizontal Frequency: 48.36kHz
Vertical Frequency: 60 Hz

Laser Printer No model specified. With TCP/IP interface

Compliant with IEC 62368-1, CISPR 32, CISPR 35
or equivalent standard

13-12
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Chapter 14 Specification
Specification

This section states the specification of this device.

NOTE
 The DS-8400 system comforms to waterproof/dustproof rating of IPX1 with the following
system configuration.
 Main Unit: DSC-8410
 Display Unit: LC-8018TC/LC-8016TC
 Super Unit: HS-8312N/HS-8312M
 HS Adapter: HSA-81
 Multi Module: HM-801
 Recorder Unit: HR-800
 Input Box: IB-8004
 Multi Module: HM-800
 Multiport Module: HP-800
 SpO2 Module: HG-810
 SpO2 Module: HG-820
 Gas Unit I/F: HPD-810 and CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-810
 Multigas Unit: MGU-811P

Main Unit: DSC-8400 Series

Size

360(W) x 310(H) x 255(D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight
7.5 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C

Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

However, for the CF-820 IR Remote Control Unit, the following condition applies.
10% to 90% (38°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

14-1
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)

EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)

Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)

electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)
Protection against Ignition of Not provided
Flammable Gas

Power Supply
Voltage 100-240 V AC

Frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz

Power Consumption 120 VA

Battery for Operating the

Equipment

Rated Voltage 14.4V

Rated Capacity 4100 mAh

Operation Time 1.5 hours or more (at 25°C, DSC-8410, LC-8018TC, power saving mode, DS-8007 standard
measurement, continuous NIBP measurement of 15 min.)

Charging Time 2.5 hours (rapid charge-standby), 5 hours (normal charge-operation)

Usable Life
6 years According to self-certification
(
 Maintenance Manual "Periodic Replacement" P7-1)

Transport Monitor: DS-8007 and DSA-82

Size

DS-8007 200 (W) mm x 108 (D) mm x 185 (H) mm (not including the protrusion)

DSA-82 224(W) x 76(D) x 185(H) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

DS-8007 2.4 kg (not including the accessory)

DSA-82 0.7 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C/50°F to 104°F

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C/14°F to 140°F

Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C/104°F, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

14-2
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)

EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)

Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)

electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)
Degree of protection against ECG/RESP, SpO2,SpCO*,SpMet*,SpHb*,TEMP,BP,CO: Type CF Applied Part
electric shock NIBP, CO2 Concentration: Type BF Applied Part
*DS-8007M only

Operation Mode Continuous Operating Equipment

Waterproof/Dustproof DS-8007 Main Unit: IP32

Only when temperature connector cover, USB memory slot cover, CO2 I/F connector cover, button
cover, battery cover are attached.

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Power Supply

Voltage AC 100-240 V (When DSA-81 is used)

DSA-82: DC18V (Supplied from DSC-8410 main unit)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification.

(
 Maintenance Manual "Periodic Replacement" P7-1)

Display Unit: LC-8018TC/LC-8016TC

Size

LC-8018TC 475 (W) mm x 307 (H) mm x 62.5 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

LC-8016TC 410 (W) mm x 265 (H) mm x 62.5 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

LC-8018TC 4.5 kg (not including the accessory)

LC-8016TC 3.5 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C

Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)

14-3
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)

Degree of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)

electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Power Supply

Voltage DC 18 V (Supplied from DSC-8410 main unit)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

Super Unit: HS-8312N/8312M and HSA-80/HSA-81

Size
HS-8312N/8312M 85 (W) mm x 100 (H) mm x 200 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

HSA-80 85(W) mm x 68(H) mm x 188(D) mm (not including the protrusion)

HSA-81 108(W) mm x 85(H) mm x 216(D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

HS-8312N/8312M 1.2 kg (not including the accessory)

HSA-80 0.2 kg (not including the accessory)

HSA-81 0.25 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure
Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C
Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Pressure

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)
EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)
Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)
electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)

Degree of protection against ECG /RESP (Impedance), SpO2, SpCO*, SpMet*, SpHb*, TEMP, BP, CO: Type CF Applied Part
electric shock NIBP: Type BF Applied Part
*: For HS-8312M only

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

14-4
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Power Supply

Voltage HSA-80: DC 18 V (Supplied from DSC-8410 Main Unit)

HSA-81: DC 18 V (Supplied from DSC-8410 Main Unit)
HS-8000 Series: DC 12 V (Supplied from DSC-8410 Main Unit via HSA-80 or HSA-81)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

(
 Maintenance Manual "Periodic Replacement" P7-1)

Expansion Unit: MGU-800/810 Series and HR-800

Size

MGU-801P 125 (W) mm x 110 (H) mm x 200 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

MGU-811P 125 (W) mm x 108.5 (H) mm x 200 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

HR-800 87 (W) mm x 108.5 (H) mm x 100 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

AGO2 Gas Unit MGU-801P 1.8 kg (not including the accessory)

MGU-811P 1.8 kg (not including the accessory)

HR-800 0.44 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature MGU Series 10°C to 35°C

HR Series 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure
Transport/Storage -10 °C to 60°C
Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety
General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)
EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)
Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)
electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)

Degree of protection against Respiration Gas (MGU-800/810): Type BF Applied Part

electric shock

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Voltage MGU-800/810 Series: DC 18 V (Supplied from DSC-8410 Main Unit)

HR-800: DC 18 V (Supplied via DSC-8410 Main Unit or MGU-800/810 series)

14-5
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

Expansion Module: HM-800/801, HP-800, HG-810/820

Size

40 (W) mm x 100 (H) mm x 130 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight
HM-800/HM-801 0.5 kg (not including the accessory)

HP-800 0.5 kg (not including the accessory)

HG-810/HG-820 0.5 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C

Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)

EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)

Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)

electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)

Degree of protection against TEMP, BP, CO (HM-800/HM-801): Type CF Applied Part

electric shock BIS: Type BF Applied Part (When connected to BISx)

SpO2, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb (HG-810): Type CF Applied Part

SpO2 (HG-820) : Type CF Applied Part

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Power Supply

Voltage DC 12 V (Supplied from the DSC-8410 Main Unit via IB-8004 Input Box)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

14-6
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Gas Unit I/F: HPD-810 and CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-810

Size

HPD-810/HCP-810 36(W) mm x 91(H) mm x 87(D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

HPD-810 0.18 kg (not including the accessory)

HCP-810 0.22 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C

Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety
General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)
EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)
Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)
electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)

Degree of protection against CO2 : Type BF Applied Part

electric shock

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Power Supply

Voltage HCP-810: DC12V

HPD-810: DC5V/12V
(Supplied from the DSC-8410 Main Unit via AUX connector on the HS-8000 series or HM-801)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

(
 Maintenance Manual "Periodic Replacement" P7-1)

14-7
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Gas Unit I/F: HPD-820 and CO2 Gas Unit: HCP-820

Size

HCP-820/HPD-820 120 (W) mm x 53 (D) mm x 80 (H) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

HCP-820 0.3 kg (not including the accessory)

HPD-820 0.2 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C/50°F to 104°F

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C/14°F to 140°F

Temperature

Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C/104°F, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety
General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)
EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015
(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests
Type of protection against Class I Equipment (DS-8007 System)/Internally Powered Equipment (DS-8007 System)
electric shock

Degree of protection against CO2 : Type BF Applied Part

electric shock

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Waterproof/Dustproof IPX0

Power Supply

Voltage HCP-820: DC 12 V
HPD-820: DC 12 V / 5 V
(Via DS-8007 Main Unit)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification.

(
 Maintenance Manual "Periodic Replacement" P7-1)

14-8
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

Input Box: IB-8004

Size

IB-8004 180 (W) mm x 137.5 (H) mm x 160 (D) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

IB-8004 1.3 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C

Temperature
Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)

EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)

Type of protection against Class I Equipment (During AC power operation)

electric shock Internally Powered Equipment (During battery operation)

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Power Supply

Voltage DC 18 V (Supplied from DSC-8410 Main Unit)

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

14-9
Chapter 14 Specification Specification

BISx I/F Unit: HBX-800

Size

36 (W) mm x 87 (D) mm x 91 (H) mm (not including the protrusion)

Weight

0.2 kg (not including the accessory)

Environmental Conditions

Operating Temperature 10°C to 40°C/50°F to 104°F

Operating Humidity 30% to 85% (non-condensing)

Operating Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Pressure

Transport/Storage -10°C to 60°C/14°F to 140°F

Temperature
Transport/Storage Humidity 10% to 95% (40°C/104°F, non-condensing)

Storage Atmospheric 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Pressure

Safety

General Standard EN 60601-1:2006+A1:2013

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance)

EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2: 2015

(Medical electrical equipment - Part 1-2: General requirements for basic safety and essential
performance - Collateral standard: Electromagnetic disturbances - Requirements and tests)

Type of protection against Class I equipment (DS-8400 System )/Internally Powered Equipment (DS-8400 System )
electric shock

Degree of protection against BIS: Type BF Applied Part (When connected to BISx)
electric shock

Protection against Ignition of Not provided

Flammable Gas

Waterproof/Dustproof IPX0

Voltage DC 12 V / 5 V

Usable Life

6 years According to self-certification

14-10
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

Performance

This section states the performance of the DS-8400 system. The EMC essential performance is indicated with .
Display Panel

Display Device 18.5 inch TFT Color LCD (LC-8018TC)

15.6 inch TFT Color LCD (LC-8016TC)

Resolution 18.5 inch: 1366 pixel × 768 pixel, refresh frequency 60 Hz

15.6 inch: 1366 pixel × 768 pixel, refresh frequency 60 Hz

Function Control Touch Screen Method

Waveform Trace Stationary Trace

Sweep Speed ECG/SpO2/BP/EEG (6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s)

RESP/ CO2/O2/AG (6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s)

Operation
Touch Panel Capacitive Touch Panel

Fixed Keys 3 keys (NIBP Start/Stop, NIBP Auto Mode, Alarm Silence)

Sound Pressure

Alarm Sound (Standard Tone) Maximum: 75.0 dB, Minimum: 45.0 dB

HR Synchronized Tone Maximum: 86.0 dB, Minimum: 36.0 dB

SpO2 Synchronized Tone Maximum: 83.0 dB, Minimum: 39.0 dB

Clock Accuracy

±2 min. per year (25°C)

Alarm

Alarm Function For each alarm level, the respective alarm sound generates, and the alarm indicator flashes.

Alarm Indicator Visual check is possible from 4m distance.

Alarm Display Visual check is possible from 1 m distance.

ECG

Lead Type Wired 3, 4, 5, 10-electrode

Frequency Characteristic 150Hz/40Hz/15Hz (3, 4, 5, 10-electrode)

(HS-8000)

Input impedance 2.5 MΩ or above

Maximum Input Voltage 10 mVp-p

Polarization Voltage ±825 mV or above

Common Mode Rejection 90 dB or above
Ratio

HR Measurement Range Adult: 0, 12 bpm to 300 bpm

Neonate: 0, 30 bpm to 300 bpm

HR Measurement Accuracy ±3 bpm

HR Display Response Time Adult/Child: 6 sec., Neonate: 3 sec.

Instant HR Calculated each second based on the latest RR interval.

Waveform Size Selection 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4

Accuracy of Input Signal Overall system error and frequency response is set using method A, B, C, and D.
Reproduction

14-11
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

Defibrillation Proof Provided:

Lead-off Detection Current 100nA and below

Heart rate meter accuracy 80 bpm Ventricular Bigeminy : 80 bpm

and response to irregular
rhythm

60 bpm Ventricular Bigeminy : 60 bpm

120 bpm Ventricular Bigeminy : 120 bpm

90 bpm Bidirectional Systoles : 90 bpm

Response time of heart rate HR change from 80 bpm to 120 bpm:

meter to change in heart rate Range 4.7 sec. to 5.1 sec., Average 4.8 sec.

HR change from 80 bpm to 40 bpm:

Range 5.0 sec. to 5.5 sec., Average 5.3 sec.

Time to ALARM for Ventricular Tachycardia 1 mVpp, 206 bpm:

tachycardia Range 7.3 sec. to 8.1 sec., Average 7.6 sec.

Ventricular Tachycardia 2 mVpp, 206 bpm:

Range 7.4 sec. to 8.2 sec., Average 7.7 sec.

Ventricular Tachycardia 0.5 mVpp, 206 bpm:

Range 8.5 sec. to 9.4 sec., Average 8.9 sec.

Ventricular Tachycardia 2 mVpp, 195 bpm:

Range 5.0 sec. to 5.4 sec., Average 5.2 sec.

Ventricular Tachycardia 4 mVpp, 195 bpm:

Range 4.1 sec. to 5.8 sec., Average 5.0 sec.
Ventricular Tachycardia 1 mVpp, 195 bpm:
Range 6.3 sec. to 8.0 sec., Average 7.0 sec.

Active Noise Suppression RL Drive Maximum 10.8 mV

Tall T-wave Rejection 1.2 mV T-wave can be removed when tested according to IEC 60601-2-27.
Capability

Transient Characteristic 3.2 sec, 0.3 sec, 0.1 sec (time constant can be changed)

Rejection of Pacemaker a) Pacemaker Pulse without Over/Undershoot

Pulse Capable to reject pulses of pulse width 0.1 ms to 2 ms, amplitude ±2 mV to ±700 mV

b) Pacemaker Pulse with Over/Undershoot

Rejection is not possible.

c) Pacer Pulse Detector Rejection of Fast ECG Signals

Slew Rate 3.2V/S

Sampling Rate Analog Front End: 8000 samples/s/channel

Digital Signal Processing: 500 samples/s/channel and above (without skew)

Resolution 5 μV/LSB and below

Skew 100 μs and below

14-12
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

Respiration (HS-8000)

Method Impedance Method

Frequency Characteristic 1.5 Hz (adult, child) / 2.5 Hz (neonate)

Current 100 μA and below (at 66.65 kHz±5%)

Measurement Range 0, 4 Bpm to 150 Bpm

Measurement Accuracy ±3 Bpm

Respiration (DS-8007)

Method Impedance Method

Frequency Characteristic 1.5 Hz (adult, child) / 2.5 Hz (neonate)

Current 100 μA and below (at 33.3 kHz±5%)

Measurement Range 0, 4 Bpm to 150 Bpm

Measurement Accuracy ±3 Bpm

Temperature

Measurement Method Thermistor Method

Probe 400 only

Measurement Range 0°C to 45°C

Measurement Accuracy ±0.2°C at 25°C to 45°C

Outside above range ±0.4°C

No. of Channels Maximum 8 channels

Temperature Delay Time 10 sec. or less

(From temperature probe to (Not including the time constant of temperature probe.)
monitor display)

Operating Mode Direct Mode

SpO2(Arterial Oxygen Saturation)

Measurement Value Update 1 sec.

Rate

Medtronic Unit

Measurement Method 2 Wavelength Pulse Wave Method

Wavelength: Approx. 660nm (Red light)
890nm (Infrared light)
Output: 15 mW and below

Measurement Range 1%SpO2 to 100%SpO2

Resolution SpO2 to 99%SpO2

Measurement Accuracy Adult: ±3%SpO2 when 70%SpO2 to 100%SpO2 (When DS-100A is used)
Neonate: ±2%SpO2 when 70%SpO2 to 100%SpO2
PR Measurement Range 20 bpm to 250 bpm

PR Accuracy ±3 bpm when 20 bpm to 250 bpm

Measurement Response Time 6 sec. to 7 sec.

Respiration Rate (Pulse Wave

Analysis)

Display Range 4 Bpm to 40 Bpm

RR Measurement Accuracy Mean Error: Within ±1 Bpm

Mean Square Deviation: Below 3 Bpm

14-13
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

NOTE
 Respiration Rate (Pulse Wave Analysis)is an optional function of theDS-8007.

Masimo Unit

Measurement Method 2 Wavelength Pulse Wave Method

MASIMO LNOP/LNCS Sensor
Wavelength: Approx. 660nm (Red light)
905nm (Infrared light)
Output: 15 mW and below
MASHIMO Rainbow Sensor
Wavelength: 12 different wavelengths are used within the range of 620 nm to 1270 nm
Output: 25mW and below

SpO2
Measurement Range 1%SpO2 to 100%SpO2

Resolution SpO2 to 99%SpO2

Measurement Accuracy Adult: ±2%SpO2 when 70%SpO2 to 100%SpO2 (When DS-100A is used)
Neonate: ±3%SpO2 when 70%SpO2 to 100%SpO2

SpCO

Measurement Range 0%SpCO to 99%SpCO

Resolution 1%SpCO
Measurement Accuracy ±3%SpCO (SpCO: 1%SpCO to 40%SpCO)

SpMet

Measurement Range 0%SpMet to 99.9%SpMet

Resolution 0.1%SpMet

Measurement Accuracy ±1%SpMet (SpMet: 1%SpMet to 15%SpMet)

SpHb
Measurement Range 0 g/dL to 25.0g/dL

Resolution 0.1g/dL

Measurement Accuracy ±1 g/dL (SpHb: 8 g/dL to 17 g/dL)

PI (Perfusion Index)

Measurement Range 0.02% to 20.0% (when disposable sensor is used) / 0.05% to 20.0% (when reusable sensor is
used)

Minimum Display Unit 0.01%

PVI (Pleth Variability Index)

Measurement Range 0% to 100%

Calculation Time 15 sec.

SpOC

Measurement Range 0 ml/dL to 35.0ml/dL

Minimum Display Unit 0.1ml/dL

Pulse Rate

Measurement Range 26 bpm to 239 bpm

Measurement Accuracy ±3 bpm when 26 bpm to 239 bpm (without body motion)

Measurement Response 7 levels: 2 to 4 sec., 4 to 6 sec., 8 sec., 10 sec., 12 sec., 14 sec., 16 sec. (averaging duration)
Time

14-14
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

NOTE
 The SpO2 measurement accuracy is determined based on the values of the root-mean-
square (rms) difference between SpO2 readings of the pulse oximeter device and values of
SaO2 determined with a CO oximeter, by healthy adult volunteers. The pulse oximeter
device measurements are statistically distributed; ±2% measurement accuracy means that
only about two-thirds of pulse oximeter device measurements can be expected to fall within
±2% of the value measured by a CO-oximeter.
 PVI, SpCO, SpMet, SpHb, SpOC measurements are optional functions.

Blood Pressure

Transducer Sensitivity 5μV / V / mmHg

Measurement Range -50 mmHg to 300 mmHg

Frequency Characteristic DC 6Hz / 8Hz / 12Hz / 40Hz

Measurement Accuracy Within ±2% or ±1mmHg of full scale, whichever is greater

Zero Balance Range Within ±150 mmHg

PR Measurement Range Adult: 12 bpm to 300 bpm

Neonate: 30 bpm to 300 bpm

PR Accuracy Within ± 3% or ± 1bpm, whichever is greater

Channels Maximum 8 channels

NIBP (non-invasive blood pressure)

(AAMI SP10: 2002+A1:2003+A2:2006 +(R)2008 Manual, electronic or automated sphygmomanometers) (ISO81060-2:2013
Non-invasive sphygmomanometers -- Part 2: Clinical investigation of automated measurement type)

Measurement Method Oscillometric Method

Pressure Measurement Range 0 mmHg to 300 mmHg

Resolution 1 mmHg

Pressure accuracy ±3 mmHg

BP Measurement Error according to the Clinical Performance Test

Mean Error Within ±5 mmHg

Standard Deviation of Error 8 mmHg and below

Error of Cuff Pressure Display Within ±3 mmHg

Measurement Error (including ±10mmHg

simulator)

PR Measurement Range 40 bpm to 240 bpm

PR Accuracy ±5%

Deflation Speed 5±1 mmHg/sec. (Quick Measurement OFF)

10±2 mmHg/sec. (Quick Measurement ON)

Safety Mechanism Adult: 300 mmHg and below

Pediatric: 210 mmHg and below
Neonate: 150 mmHg and below

CO2 (Carbon Dioxide Concentration)

Philips Capnostat 5 (Gas Unit I/F and Mainstream Module)

Measurement Method Infra-Red Solid-State Method, Mainstream Method

Measurement Range 0 mmHg to 150 mmHg

14-15
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

Measurement Accuracy 0 mmHg to 40 mmHg: ±2 mmHg

41 mmHg to 70 mmHg: ±5%
71 mmHg to 100 mmHg: ±8%
101 mmHg to 150 mmHg: ±10%

CO2 value error compensation when interference gas is present

0 mmHg to 40 mmHg: Additional error of ±1 mmHg

41 mmHg to 70 mmHg: Additional error of ±2.5%
71 mmHg to 100 mmHg: Additional error of ±4%
101 mmHg to 150 mmHg: Additional error of ±5%
These are maximum error only if compensation of atmospheric pressure, O2, N2O, anesthetic
agent are properly perfomed.

RR Measurement Range 0 Bpm to 150 Bpm

RR Measurement Accuracy ±1 Bpm

Rise Time 60 ms and below

Covidien Unit

Measurement Method Infra-Red Solid-State Method, SidestreamMethod

Measurement Range 0 mmHg to 99 mmHg

Measurement Accuracy 0 mmHg to 38 mmHg: ±2 mmHg

39 mmHg to 99 mmHg: ± { 0.05 x displayed value +0.08x (displayed value - 39 mmHg)}
: (RR: 80 Bpm and below): ±4mmHg or ±12% whichever is greater
: (RR: over 80 Bpm)
Variation of Measurement ±2 mmHg (Within 6 hours after power ON)
Accuracy

CO2 measurement accuracy when interference gas is present

0 mmHg to 38 mmHg: ± (2 mmHg + 0.04 x displayed value)
39 mmHg to 99 mmHg: ± { 0.09 x displayed value + 0.08 x (displayed value - 39 mmHg)}

RR Measurement Range 0 Bpm to 150 Bpm

RR Measurement Accuracy 0Bpm to 70Bpm: ±1Bpm
71Bpm to 120Bpm: ±2Bpm
121Bpm to 150Bpm: ±3Bpm

Flow Rate 50mL/min +15, -7.5mL/min

System Response Time 4.2 sec.

Delay Time 4.0 sec.

Rise Time 0.2 sec.

CO

Measurement Method Thermodilution Method

Measurement Range 0.1 L/min to 20 L/min

Measurement Range and

Accuracy

Blood Temperature ±0.3°C at 17°C to 45°C/±0.5°F at 63°F to 113°F

Injectate Temperature ±0.5°C at -1°C to 35°C/±0.9°F at 30°F to 86°F

BIS

BISx (Medtronic)

Bispectral Index (BIS)

Measurement Range 0% to 100%

Resolution 1%

Signal Quality Index (SQI)

Measurement Range 0% to 100%

Resolution 0.1%

14-16
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

EMG

Measurement Range 25 dB to 100 dB

Bar Graph Display Range 30 dB to 55 dB

Graphic Trend Display 30 dB to 80 dB

Range

Resolution 1 dB

Suppression Ratio (SR)

Measurement Range 0% to 100%

Spectral Edge Frequency

Measurement Range 0.5 Hz to 30Hz

Total Power (TOTPOW)

Measurement Range 40 dB to 100 dB

Waveform Display Scale ±25μV, ±50μV, ±100μV, ±250μV ±10%

Frequency Characteristic

Filter ON 2.0 Hz to 70 Hz, AC Filter ON (50 Hz or 60 Hz)

Filter OFF 0.25 Hz to 100 Hz, AC Filter OFF

Anesthetic Agent MGU-800/MGU-810

Concentration

Sidestream Method
Measure CO2, N2O, Volatile Anesthetic: Infra-Red Solid-State Method
ment O2: Paramagnetic Method
Method
Warm-Up Time Multi Gas Module
ISO Accuracy: 45 sec.
Full Accuracy: 10 min.
Auto Zeroing Multi Gas Module
ISO Accuracy: 30 sec.
Full Accuracy: 4 hours
Measure CO2: 0vol% to 10.0vol% (0mmHg to 76mmHg, 0kPa to 10kPa)
ment
Range
N2O: 0vol% to 100vol%

O 2: 0vol% to 100vol%

AG Halothane: 0vol% to 5vol%

AG Enflurane: 0vol% to 5vol%

AG Isoflurane: 0vol% to 5vol%

AG Sevoflurane: 0vol% to 8vol%

AG Desflurane: 0vol% to 18vol%

RR: 0, 2 Bpm to 100 Bpm

Measure CO2: 0 to 1 [vol%]: ±0.1 [vol%]

ment 1 to 5 [vol%]: ±0.2 [vol%]
Accuracy 5 to 7 [vol%]: ±0.3 [vol%]
7 to 10 [vol%]: ±0.5 [vol%]

N2O: 0 to 20[vol%]:±2[vol%]
20 to 100[vol%]:±3[vol%]

O 2: MGU-801P/MGU-811P0 to 25[vol%]:±1[vol%]
25 to 80[vol%]:±2[vol%]
80 to 100[vol%]:±3[vol%]

14-17
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

Volatile Halothane, enflurane, and isoflurane

Anesthetic

0 to 1[vol%]:±0.15[vol%]
1 to 5[vol%]:±0.2[vol%]

Sevoflurane
0 to 1[vol%]:±0.15[vol%]
1 to 5[vol%]:±0.2[vol%]
5 to 8[vol%]:±0.4[vol%]

Desflurane
0 to 1[vol%]:±0.15[vol%]
1 to 5[vol%]:±0.2[vol%]
5 to 10[vol%]:±0.4[vol%]
10 to 15[vol%]:±0.6[vol%]
15 to 18[vol%]:±1.0[vol%]

Respiration Rate ±1 bpm when below 60 bpm

Respirati Changes with CO2 level in 1[vol%].

on
Detection

Interference from other gases

Interference to Measurement Data [vol%]

Interference Gas or Vapor CO2 N2O O2 Volatile
Anesthetic

CO2*1*2 - 0.1 0.2 0

N 2O *1*2
0.1 - 0.2 0.1
*1*2
O2 0.1 0.1 - 0.1
*1*2
Volatile Anesthetic 0.1 0.1 1.0 Secondary
0.1 (Average))

<100% Xenon 0.1 0 0.5 0

<50% Helium 0.1 0 0.5 0

Metered dose inhaler propellants Not specified. Not specified. 0.5 Not specified.

<0.1% Ethanol 0 0 0.5 0

Saturated Isopropanol Vapor 0.1 0 0.5 0

<1% Acetone 0.1 0.1 0.5 0

<1% Methane 0.1 0.1 0.5 0

*1: This is the maximum influence within the gas level of specified measurement accuracy. The total influence will not
exceed 5% of the gas level.

*2: For CO2, N2O, O2, the influence from mixed agent is the same as that from single agent.

Threshol Volatile Primary 0.15[vol%] (Full Accuracy)

d Anesthetic 0.4[vol%] (during warm-up)
For halothane, add 0.1[vol%] to above value.
Secondary 0.3[vol%] (Full Accuracy)
0.5[vol%] (during warm-up)
If primary agent is larger than 10[vol%], 5% of primary gas level.
(10% for isoflurane)
For halothane, add 0.1[vol%] to above value.

Flow 70 mL/min to 200 mL/min

Rate ±10 mL/min or ±10%, whichever is greater

Delay 4s (When genuine accessory is used)

Time

Rise Time (When genuine accessory is used)

CO2 250 ms (Fall Time 200 ms)

14-18
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

N2O 250ms

O2 At flow rate of 200 mL/min: 500 ms (15% to 21%) , 700 ms (21% to 60%)

At flow rate of 120 mL/min: 600 ms (15% to 21%) , 800 ms (21% to 60%)

Halothane, Isoflurane, Sevoflurane, Desflurane, Enflurane 300 ms

Enflurane 350ms

DRYLINE Water Trap Emptying interval (half full, worst case)

Adult/Child: 17 hours @ 200 mL/min, 37°C, 100% RH
Neonate: 20 hours @ 120 mL/min, 37°C, 100% RH

Spirometry Function MGU-810

Assessment

AWP [cmH2O]

Measurement Range: -20 cm to 100 cmH2O (Adult, Child*)

Accuracy: ±1 cmH2O (Adult, Child*)

AWF (both direct.) [L/min]

Measurement Range: 1.5 L/min to 100 L/min (Adult) , 0.25 L/m to 25 L/min (Child*)

Tidal Volume (insp. and exp.) [ml]

Measurement Range: 150 m to 2000 m (Adult) , 15 m to 300 m (Child*)

Accuracy: ±6% or 30 mL, whichever is greater (Adult),

±6% or 4 mL, whichever is greater (Child*)
Minute Ventilation Volume (insp. and exp.) [L/min]

Measurement Range: 2 L/min to 20 L/min (Adult) , 0.5 L/min to 5 L/min (Child*)

Compliance [mL/cmH2O]
Measurement Range: 4 m/cmH2O to 100 m/cmH2O (Adult) , 1 m/cmH2O to 100 m/cmH2O (Child*)

Airway Resistance [cmH2O/l/s]

Measurement Range: 0 cmH2O to 40 cmH2O/L/s (Adult, Child*)

Airway Pressure [cmH2O]

Peak Measurement Range: -20 cm to 100 cmH2O (Adult, Child*)

Plateau
PEEP
Mean

I:E Ratio

Measurement Range: 1:4.5 to 2:1

Conditions of Use for Stated

Accuracy
Measurement Range (RR): 4 bpm to 35 bpm (Adult), 4 bpm to 50 bpm (Child*)

Measurement Range (I:E Ratio): 1:4.5 to 2:1

Measurement Range (Tube 5.5 mm to 10 mm (Adult), 3 mm to 6 mm (Child*)

Length):
*Including neonates

Recording (Recorder Unit)

Printing Speed 50 mm/s, 25 mm/s (Error: within ±5%)

Resolution Head Direction: 8 dots/mm

Feed Direction: 40 lines/mm (at printing speed of 25mm/s)

Printing Waveforms 3 waveforms

Printing Type Waveform, List, Graphic

14-19
Chapter 14 Specification Performance

Detection Paper out, printhead temperature

Protective Circuit Provided

Input Box (IB-8004)

Connectable Units Maximum 1 unit

Number of Slots Maximum 4 slots

Analog Waveform Output

Output Voltage ECG Output 1 V/mV (fixed), BP Output 1 V/100 mmHg (fixed)

Output Voltage Accuracy within ±10% (Both ECG and BP output)

Analog Output Frequency ECG Output: 0.5 Hz to 40 Hz

Range

BP Output: DC to 40 Hz

Delay Time 35 ms and below (ECG waveform)

35 ms and below (BP waveform: when 40 Hz is set for waveform filter)

Output Impedance 100Ω±10%

Load Impedance 1kΩ to ∞

Pacemaker Pulse No

QRS Synchronization Output

Output Waveform Square Wave (Positive/negative logic can be selected.)

Output Voltage +4.3 V to +5.0 V (High Level)

+0.3 V and below (Low Level)
Synchronized Signal Width 100 ms/ 60 ms / 20 ms (Selectable)

Delay Time 35 ms and below (when the "Filter" setting is [Monitor] or [Diag.])

Output Impedance Open Collector Output (with +5 V 500Ω pull-up resistor)

NOTE
 The delay time of analog waveform output and QRS synchronization output depends on the
filter setting and the input waveform type. For details, refer to your nearest service
representative.
 The QRS synchronized signal is not intended to be used as synchronized signal for
defibrillator. When using the QRS synchronized signal, refer to your nearest service
representative.

14-20
Chapter 14 Specification Measurement Unit for Each Parameter

Measurement Unit for Each Parameter

The measurement units of the displayed numeric data for this device are as follows.
Description Parameter Display Unit Default Unit

HR/PR Value ECG HR bpm (beats per minute)

Blood Pressure PR_IBP bpm

SpO2 PR_SpO2 bpm

ST Level ECG ST mm, mv mm

VPC ECG VPC beat/minute

PACE beat/minute

Respiration Rate Impedance RR_IMP Bpm (breaths per minute)

Ventilator RR_VENT Bpm

CO2 RR_GAS Bpm

SpO2 RR_SpO2 Bpm

Apnea Duration Impedance APNEA s (second)

CO2 Apnea s (second)

Ventilator APNEA s (second)

Blood Pressure mmHg, kPa mmHg

Blood Pressure BP
cmH 2O (CVP only)
Non-Invasive Blood Non-Invasive Blood Pressure NIBP mmHg, kPa mmHg
Pressure

Arterial Oxygen SpO2 SpO2 %

Saturation

Perfusion Index Perfusion Index PI %

Pleth Variability Index PVI %

Carboxyhemoglobin SpCO SpCO %

Concentration

Methemoglobin SpMet SpMet %

Concentration

Total Hemoglobin SpHb SpHb g/dL

Arterial Oxygen Content SpOC SpOC mL/dL

Temperature Temperature TEMP Celcius

End Tidal CO2 CO2 EtCO2 mmHg, kPa, % mmHg

Concentration

Inspiratory CO2 CO2 InspCO2 mmHg, kPa, % mmHg

Concentration

CO CO CO L/minute
Blood Temperature Blood Temperature Tb Celcius

Injectate Temperature Injectate Temperature Ti Celcius

Airway Flow Airway Flow AWF L/minute

Airway Pressure Airway Pressure AWP cmH2O

Ventilatory Volume Ventilatory Volume AWV mL

Tidal Volume Expiratory Tidal Volume E-TV mL

Inspiratory Tidal Volume I-TV mL

Ventilatory Volume per TV/1Sec %

second

14-21
Chapter 14 Specification Measurement Unit for Each Parameter

Description Parameter Display Unit Default Unit

Minute Ventilation Minute Ventilation Volume MV L/minute

Volume
Spontaneous Minute Volume SMV L/minute

Compliance Compliance COMP mL/cmH2O

Airway Resistance Expiratory Resistance E-RES cmH2O/L/sec

Inspiratory Resistance I-RES cmH2O/L/sec

Airway Pressure Mean Airway Pressure MEAN cmH2O

Peak Airway Pressure PEAK cmH2O

Pause Airway Pressure PAUSE cmH2O

Plateau Pressure PLATEAU cmH2O

Peak End Expiratory Peak End Expiratory PEEP cmH2O

Pressure Pressure
Fraction of Inspiratory Fraction of Inspiratory FIO2 %
Oxygen Oxygen

14-22
Chapter 14 Specification Measurement Unit for Each Parameter

Description Parameter Display Unit Default

Mixed Venous Oxygen Saturation SvO2 %

Central Venous Oxygen Saturation ScvO2 %

Arterial Oxygen Saturation SaO2 %

Oxygen Uptake Index O2EI %

Oxygen Transport DO2 mL/minute

Oxygen Consumption VO2 mL/minute

Stroke Volume SV mL/beat

Stroke Volume (STAT Mode) SV_STAT mL

Stroke Volume Index SVI mL/m2

Stroke Volume Index (STAT Mode) SVI_STAT mL/m2

HR HR bpm (beats per minute)

Mean Arterial Pressure MAP mmHg

Central Venous Pressure CVP mmHg

Vigilance Data Continuous Cardiac Output CCO L/minute
Vigilance
Vigilance CEDV Continuous Cardiac Output (STAT Mode) CCO_STAT L/minute
Vigilance II
Vigileo Continuous Cardiac Index CCI L/minute/m2
Continuous Cardiac Index (STAT Mode) CCI_STAT L/minute/m2

Systemic Vascular Resistance SVR dyn-sec-cm-5

Systemic Vascular Resistance Index SVRI (dyn-sec-cm-5-m2)

Blood Temperature BT °C, °F °C

Ejection Fraction RVEF %

Ejection Fraction (STAT Mode) RVEF_STAT %

End-Diastolic Volume EDV mL

End-Diastolic Volume (STAT Mode) EDV_STAT mL

End-Diastolic Volume Index EDVI mL/m2

End-Diastolic Volume Index (STAT Mode) EDVI_STAT mL/m2

End-Systolic Volume ESV mL

End-Systolic Volume Index ESVI mL/m2

Stroke Volume Variance SVV %

Description Parameter Display Unit Default

Multigas Unit End-tidal Carbon Dioxide CO2-E mmHg, kPa, % mmHg

Inspired Carbon Dioxide CO2-I mmHg, kPa, % mmHg

End Tidal Oxygen O2-E %

Fraction of Inspiratory Oxygen O2-I %

Expired Nitrous Oxide N2O-E %

Inspired Nitrous Oxide N2O-I %

End Tidal Anesthetic Gas AGT-E %

Inspired Anesthetic Gas AGT-I %

14-23
Chapter 14 Specification Measurement Unit for Each Parameter

Description Parameter Display Unit Default

BIS Data Bispectral Index BIS (no unit)

Signal Quality Index SQI %

Electromyograph EMG dB

Suppression Ratio SR %

Spectral Edge Frequency SEF Hz

Total Power TOTPOW dB

Impedance IMP Kohms

AEP Monitor Data AEP Index AEP (no unit)

INVOS 5100C Regional Cerebral Oxygen Saturation Lt-rSO2 %

Monitor Data (Left)
Regional Cerebral Oxygen Saturation Rt-rSO2 %
(Right)

Description Parameter Display Unit Default

Pulse Contour Cardiac Output CCO L/min

Pulse Contour Cardiac Output Index CCI L/min/m2

Stroke Volume SV mL
Stroke Volume Index SVI mL/m2

Stroke Volume Index SVV %

PiCCO Data
Systemic Vascular Resistance SVR dyn x s x cm-5
Systemic Vascular Resistance Index SVRI dyn x s x cm-5 x m2

Central Venous Oxygen Saturation ScvO2 %

Oxygen Delivery DO2 ml/min

Oxygen Consumption VO2 ml/min

Description Parameter Display Unit Default

Pulse Contour Cardiac

CCO L/minute
Output

Pulse Contour Cardiac

CCI L/minute/m2
Output Index

Stroke Volume SV mL/beat

Stroke Volume Index SVI mL/m2

Stroke Volume Variation SVV %

Systemic Vascular
SVR dyn x sec x cm-5
Resistance

Systemic Vascular
SVRI dyn x sec x cm-5 x m2
Resistance Index

Central Venous Oxygen

ScvO2 %
Saturation

PulsioFlex Data Oxygen Delivery DO2 mL/minute

Oxygen Consumption VO2 mL/minute

index of Left Ventricular

dPmx mmHg/sec
Contractility

Calibrated Cardiac Output CO CAL L/min

14-24
Chapter 14 Specification Alarm Limit Range for Each Parameter

Heart Rate HR bpm (beats per minute)

Mean Arterial Pressure MAP mmHg

Global End-Diastolic Volume GEDV mL

Global End-Diastolic Volume

GEDI mL/m2
Index

Extravascular Lung Water EVLW mL

Extravascular Lung Water

ELWI mL/kg
Index

Pulmonary Vascular
PVPI ---
Permeability Index

Global Ejection Fraction GEF %

Cardiac Function Index CFI 1/min

Blood Temperature BT °C, °F °C

Oxygen Delivery Index DO2I mL O2/min/m2

Oxygen Consumption Index VO2I mL O2/min/m2

Description Parameter Display Unit Default

Transcutaneous Oxygen
tcpO2 mmHg, kPa *
TCM4, TCM5 FLEX Partial Pressure
Data Transcutaneous Carbon
tcpCO2 mmHg, kPa *
Dioxide Partial Pressure

*: The measurement unit of tcpO2, tcpCO2 can be set on the TCM4 or TCM5 FLEX. When the measurement unit is
changed, the tabular trend data of tcpO2 and tcpCO2 on the bedside monitor will be deleted.

Alarm Limit Range for Each Parameter

The alarm can be set in the following range.

Adjustable Range

Item Lower Limit Upper Limit [Auto] Setting *

Adjustable Increments

HR 20 bpm to 295 bpm 22 bpm to 300 bpm

Upper: current value +40 bpm
25 bpm and below: 1 bpm increments Lower: current value -40 bpm
25 bpm and above: 5 bpm increments

ST -2.0 mV to +1.8 mV -1.8 mV to +2.0 mV

12-Lead ST
0.1 mV increments Upper: current value +0.2 mV (+2 mm)
-20 mm to +18 mm -18 mm to +20 mm Lower: current value -0.2 mV (-2 mm)

1 mm increments

Ext Tachy - 22 bpm to 300 bpm

50 bpm and below: 1 bpm increments HR Lower Limit +10 bpm

50 bpm and above: 5 bpm increments
Ext Brady 20 bpm to 295 bpm -

50 bpm and below: 1 bpm increments HR Lower Limit -10 bpm

50 bpm and above: 5 bpm increments

RR (Adult) 5 Bpm to 145 Bpm 10 Bpm to 150 Bpm

5 Bpm increments Upper: current value +20 Bpm

RR (Child/Neonate) 0 Bpm to 148 Bpm 4 Bpm to 150 Bpm Lower: current value –20 Bpm

2 Bpm increments

14-25
Chapter 14 Specification Alarm Limit Range for Each Parameter

Adjustable Range

Item Lower Limit Upper Limit [Auto] Setting *

Adjustable Increments
RR_SpO2 (Adult) 5 Bpm to 30 Bpm 10 Bpm to 35 Bpm

5 Bpm increments
N/A
RR_SpO2 (Child) 6 Bpm to 32 Bpm 8 Bpm to 34 Bpm

2 Bpm increments

Apnea - 10 sec. to 60 sec.

15 sec.
1 second increments
BP1 to 8 0 mmHg to 295 mmHg 2 mmHg to 300 mmHg

0 mmHg to 50 mmHg: 2 mmHg increments

When BP label is BP1/ART:
50 mmHg and above: 5 mmHg increments Upper: current value +40 mmHg (+5.0
0.0 kPa to 39.5 kPa 0.2 kPa to 40.0 kPa kPa)
Lower: current value -20 mmHg (-3.0 kPa)
0 kPa to 7.0 kPa: 0.2 kPa increments When BP label is other than BP1/ART:
7.0 kPa and above: 0.5 kPa increments Upper: current value +20%
CVP 0.0 cmH2O to 38 cmH2O 2 cmH2O to 40 cmH2O Lower: current value -20%

1 cmH2O increments

NIBP 10 mmHg to 295 mmHg 15 mmHg to 300 mmHg

5 mmHg increments Upper: current value +40 mmHg (+5.0
kPa)
1.5 kPa to 39.5 kPa 2.0 kPa to 40.0 kPa Lower: current value -20 mmHg (-3.0 kPa)
0.5 kPa increments

SpO2 50%SpO2 to 99%SpO2 51%SpO2 to 100%SpO2 Upper: OFF

1%SpO2 increments Lower: 90%SpO2

Ext SpO2 50%SpO2 to 98%SpO2 - Upper: OFF

1%SpO2 increments Lower: 90%SpO2

EtCO2 1 mmHg to 98 mmHg 3 mmHg to 100 mmHg

1 mmHg increments
Upper: current value +10 mmHg (+1.3 kPa
0.1 kPa to 13.1 kPa 0.3 kPa to 15.0 kPa / +1.3%)
0.1 kPa increments Lower: current value -10 mmHg (-1.3 kPa
/ -1.3%)
0.1% to 13.1% 0.3% to 15.0%
0.1% increments

InspCO2 - 1 mmHg to 4 mmHg

1 mmHg increments

- 0.1 kPa to 3.0 kPa

3 mmHg (0.3 kPa / 0.3%)
0.1 kPa increments

- 0.1% to 3.0%

0.1% increments

TEMP 30.0°C to 44.0°C 31.0°C to 45.0°C

0.5°C increments Upper: current value +2.0°C (+4.0°F)

86.0°F to 111.0°F 88.0°F to 113.0°F Lower: current value -2.0°C (-4.0°F)

1.0°F increments

SpCO - 1%SpCO to 40%SpCO

N/A
1%SpCO increments
SpMet - 1%SpMet to 15%SpMet
N/A
1%SpMet increments

14-26
Chapter 14 Specification About the SpO2 Clinical Test

Adjustable Range

Item Lower Limit Upper Limit [Auto] Setting *

Adjustable Increments
SpHb 1.0 g/dL to 24.0 g/dL 2.0 g/dL to 24.5g/dL
N/A
0.1 g/dL increments

BIS 1 to 98 2 to 99
N/A
increments of 1

*: If the value exceeds the adjustable range, the limit within the range will be set.

The automatic setup will not be performed for the turned OFF limit.

About the SpO2 Clinical Test

Medtronic Unit
The SpO2 and pulse rate measurement accuracy have been validated for each range by testing on healthy adult male
and female volunteers against a laboratory CO-Oximeter.
The SpO2 accuracy has been validated for the range from 70% to 100% by testing on healthy adult male and female
volunteers (age: 19 to 48 years old) with light to dark skin pigmentation. The standard deviation is ±2% which
encompasses 68% of the population.
The pulse rate accuracy has been validated for the range from 70% to 100% by testing on healthy adult male and
female volunteers (age: 19 to 48 years old) with light to dark skin pigmentation The standard deviation is ±3 bpm
which encompasses 68% of the population.
These clinical test data are disclosed based on the data provided from Medtronic.

Masimo Unit
The SpO2, SpCO, SpMet, and pulse rate measurement accuracy have been validated for each range by testing on
healthy adult male and female volunteers against a laboratory CO-Oximeter.
SpO2 and SpMet accuracy have been validated by testing on 16 neonatal NICU patients ranging in age from 7 days
to 135 days old and weighing between 0.5 kg to 4.25 kg. Seventy-nine (79) data samples were collected over a range
of 70% to 100% SpO2 and 0.5% to 2.5% HbMet with a resultant accuracy of 2.9% SpO2 and 0.9% SpMet.
The SpO2 accuracy has been validated for the range from 70% to 100% by testing on healthy adult male and female
volunteers (age: 21 to 36 years old) with light to dark skin pigmentation. Without body motion, the standard
deviation is ±2% which encompasses 68% of the population. With body motion, the standard deviation is ±3% which
encompasses 68% of the population. For the validation, frictional or contact motion of 1 cm to 2 cm, and random
vibration of 1 Hz to 5 Hz were tested.
The pulse rate accuracy has been validated for the range from 70% to 100% by testing on healthy adult male and
female volunteers (age: 24 to 37 years old) with light to dark skin pigmentation The standard deviation is ±3 bpm
which encompasses 68% of the population.
The SpCO accuracy has been validated for the range from 0% to 40% by testing on healthy adult male and female
volunteers with light to dark skin pigmentation. The standard deviation is ±3% which encompasses 68% of the
population.
The SpMet accuracy has been validated for the range from 0% to 15% by testing on healthy adult male and female
volunteers with light to dark skin pigmentation. The standard deviation is ±1% which encompasses 68% of the
population.
The SpHb accuracy has been validated for the range from 8 g/dL to 17 g/dL by testing on healthy adult male and
female volunteers with light to dark skin pigmentation. The standard deviation is ±1 g/dL which encompasses 68%
of the population.
These clinical test data are disclosed based on the data provided from Masimo.

14-27
Chapter 14 Specification About the SpO2 Clinical Test

14-28
 : SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Microstream, FilterLine and CapnoLine are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oridion Medical 1987 Ltd.
X-Cal is a trademark of Masimo Corporation.
Other company and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective companies.
3-39-4 Hongo, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo 113-8483 Japan
Tel: +81-3-5684-1455 Fax: +81-3-3814-1222
https://fukuda.com/

Printed in Japan 4L011487I 202311